BOUGHT WITH THE INCOME FROM THE SAGE ENDOWMENT FUND THE GIFT OF Henrg W. Sage X891 AJiLffS:. , ,^gmr PJ 4567.K35''" """"''"^ '"""•^^ ^limllSlViiiiimi'iS;iiW'''=a' Hebrew : 3 1924 026 836 118 Cornell University Library The original of this bool< is in the Cornell University Library. There are no known copyright restrictions in the United States on the use of the text. http://www.archive.org/details/cu31 9240268361 1 8 -INTEODUCTION BIBLICAL^HEBREW. EDINBURGH I ROBERT R. SUTHERLAND, PRINTEll, HADDINGTON PLACE WORKS. INTRODUCTION himm M I / I; V BIBLICAL HEBREW J'llI'.SKNTlNd GRADUATED INSTRUCTION LANGUAGE OF THE OLD TESTAMENT. BY JAMES KENNEDY, B.D., ACTING LIBKAKIAN IN THE NHW COLI.iiOE, AND ONli OI' THE -ADDITIONAL EXAMINERS IN DIVINITY AT THE I'NIVlill.SITY, EDINBUIKiH. WILLIAMS AND NOKGATE, 14 Henrietta Street, Covent Oahden, London ; AND 20 South Frederick Street, Edisi!urgh 18 89, 4 A-(nt1 PREFACE. Wliile the author held the office of Hebrew Tutor in the New College, it was his practice to dictate to the students, from day to day, a few paragraphs presenting in progressive order the general principles of the language. After each of these had been fully ex- plained and illustrated by a variety of examples, there was prescribed a written exercise bearing on the subjects treated, and requiring the application of the rules already given. As the results of this plan proved very satisfactory, the writer's esteemed Professor, Dr. A B. Davidson, and others, strongly urged the publication of these notes with the accompanying exercises. Accordingly, an endeavour was made to transmit to writing the detailed explanations and illustra- tions which had previously been given in verbal form, and as far as possible to perfect the whole by numbering the leading paragraphs and introducing references throughout, so as to avoid unnecessary repetition. But lack of requisite leisure prevented the speedy accom- plishment of the task, wliile other literary engagements — including the translation of Ewald's Syntax ^ — subsequently occasioned further delay. In compliance, however, with renewed requests, the work now appears, in the hope that it may serve to promote the earnest and loving study of the language through which God spake in time past unto the fathers by the prophets. 1 Edinburgh : T. and T. Clark. TABLE OP CONTENTS. PRELIMINARY MATTER. The Shemitic Languages in General The Hebrew Alphabet The Consonants : — (1) Powers of the Consonants (2) Classification of the Consonants : — a. The Mutables 6. The Aspirates c. The Vowel-Letters, or Quiescents The Masoretio System in general (1) Dagesh (2) Mappiq (3) Raphd (4) The Vowel-Signs : — a. Names and Powers of the Vowels h. Vowels as Changeable or Unchangeable c. Sh«wa . (5) The Syllable (6) The Accents ; the Tone ; Metheg . (7) Maqqeph . (8) Pause (9) Qeri and KHhib Inflectional Vowel-Changes Consonantal Changes Page 1 3 6 7 9 10 11 12 12 14 16 17 19 21 23 23 24- 25 2& INTRODUCTORY EXERCISES. Order of Words in a Sentence 30 Nature of the Hebrew Language 32 Word-Accretion 33 Sufiixes, Afformatives, and Affixes 34 Conjugations of Verbs 35 Hebrew Boots 37 TABLE OF CONTENTS. PAET FIEST. Gender, and the Feminine Singular Numbers, — the Plural and the Dual: The Conjunction 'Waw' The Article : Attributive and Predicative Formulse . States of Nouns, — the Absolute and the Construct , Demonstratives .... Interrogative Pronouns Personal Pronouns (separate fonus) Suffixes to Nouns .... Prepositions : — a. Simple Prepositions 6. Inseparable Prepositions c. The Prepositions ns and Dr : the Prefix flN d. The Preposition IP : Compound Prepositions The Regular Verb : — (1) The Perfect (2) The Imperfect (3) The Imperative, the Cohortative, and the Jussive (4) The Infinitives . . , (5) The Participles Nouns : — (1) First Declension (2) Second Declension (Segolates) Segolate Nouns with Aspirate Roots (3) Third Declension The Dual and Plural Numbers (additional remarks) Irregular Nouns Numerals : a. The Cardinal Numbers The Cardinal Numbers (continued) I. The Ordinal Numbers, the Distributives, &c. Degrees of Comparison Waw joined with the Perfect, — Conversive Waw joined with the Imperfect : (a) Copulative, (i) Conversive Modifications (or ' Conjugations ') of the Verb : — (1) The yiphal (2) Piel and Pual (3) Hiphil and Hophal (4) Hithpael, and the rarer Conjugations Affixes to Verbs Affixes to Verbs (continued) ■ 38 40 42 45 49 52 54 56 60 02 65 67 70 74 78 81 85 88 90 94 96 100 103 106 108 111 113 117 120 123 127 131 134 133 139 PAET SECOND. The Irregular Verbs : — (1) 'Pe Aspirate' Verbs 145 TABLE OF COKTENTS. IX (2) ' "Ayin Aspirate ' Verbs . . .148 (3) ' Lamed Aspirate ' Verbs . • . 150 (41 ' Pe 'Aleph ' Verbs .... 152 (5) ' Pe Yod ' Verbs : Verbs properly 'Pe Waw' . . 154 ' Pe Yod ' Verbs (continued) : constractions indicating progress &c. 157 True • Pe Yod ' Verbs . . .160 (6) ' "Ayin Waw ' and ' "Ayin Yod ' Verbs : special constractions 161 (7) ' Lamed 'Alepli ' Verbs : abbreviated construction , 166 (8) ' Lamed He ' Verbs : formulae for oaths and asseverations : special constractions of the verb njri . . . 168 ' Lamed He ' Verbs (continued) : verb-constructions conveying ad- verbial meanings .... 173 (9) ' Pe Nun ' Verbs : expressions indicating desire or wish , 177 (10) ' Pe Yod' Verbs inflected like Verbs ' Pe Nun ' . 181 (U) 'Double "Ayin' Verbs . ... 184 The Construct State, — additional remarks . . 189 Uses of the Accusative .... 191 Old Case-endings ..... 194 Segolate Nouns, — additional remarks . . . 197 Pronominal and other Constructions . . . 200 Adverbs and Interjections .... 205 Interrogative Particles . . . 208 Conjunctions ..... 210 Conditional Sentences .... 214 The Relative :— a. Complete Construction . . ■ 218 6. Omission of the Relative Sign or its Complement . 222 c. The Relative with a General Antecedent understood 226 Circumstantial Clauses . . ' ■ • 230 APPENDIX Paradigms of Verbs, Nouns, Numerals, and Inseparable Prepositions Hebrew-English Vocabulary English-Hebrew Vocabulaiy NOTE. After careful perusal of pages 1 — 20, the student may at once proceed to the Introductory Exercises (pages 30 — 36), and then re- sume consideration of the Preliminary Matter, from page 24 to 29. The Accents (38 ff.) need not be much regarded until considerable progress has been made in reading. THE SHBMITIC LANGUAGES. 1. The Hebrew language forms one branch of the Shemitic^ family, which is chiefly spread over south-western Asia. The different members of .the group may be thus arranged:^ I. NoBTH Shemitio, Or Abamaio. Western or Palestinian Aramean, Eastern Aramean, or Syriac, Samaritan. rPhenieian (Punic). II. MiDDiiB Shemitio (Canaanitio) < L Hebrew. III. SotriH Shemitio Ethiopic. Arabic. IV. Eastern Shemitio, or Assyrian. I. The two branches of Aramaic — which is the_simplest and rudest among., this group of lEmguage^— though written with dif- ferart^characters, are really very ^milar, (a.) Of Western Ar- amean — often incorrectly called 'Chaldee' — we have specimens in some parts of the Old Testament (Dan. 2:4 to 7:28; Ezra 4:8 to 6:18, and 7:12-26; Jer. 10:11; and two words in Gen. 31:47) and more fully in the 'Targums' or paraphrastic translations of 1 This designation is far from correct ; for the Phenicians, whose language is included, were descended from Ham, while there are many nations descended from Shem whose language is radically diflferent from those of the Shemitio group. But no more fitting name has,yet found general acceptance, though •' Syro- Arabic ' and ' Western Asiatic ' have both been proposed, and certainly are somewhat more appropriate. A 2 THE SHEMITIC LANGUAGES. the Hebrew Scriptures, the ' Gemara ' or more explanatory and supplementary portion of the Talmud of Jerusalem, &c. This lit- erature is obviously Jewish in its essence and spirit, (b.) Of Syriac literature, the earliest remaining specimen is the Peshito version of the Scriptures, dating from the second century after Christ. The language — the literary medium of the Syrian Christ- ians — enjoyed a flourishing period, extending from the beginning of the fourth to the tenth century, durhig which valuable works were composed. This sub-dialect has an alphabet of its own, and even this in two forms, the Peshito and the Estrangelo. (c.) The Samaritan is represented by a version of the Pentateuch, liturgies, and other remains : this also has a peculiar alphabet, il. (a.) The classic Hebrew is contained in the Old Testament Scriptures ; but there is a very large amount of later literature, fo' .■''.zi. on the ancient model. (6.) Of the Phenician, which is very closely allied to the Hebrew, there are few remains beyond inscriptions on pub- lic monuments and on coins. UI. (a.) The Arabic, with an alpha-~ bet different from those of the dialects already mentioned, is the most polished and most fully developed, while its literature is perhaps the richest, of all the Shemitic languages : it is also the most widely spoken, having spread far beyond its original seat. (b.) The Ethiopic, or Geez, which is written in yet another and veiy peculiar character, is stiU used in Abyssinia, but merely for ecclesiastical purposes, the classical standard being the translation of the Bible : modern dialects are the Ti, ; i and the Amharic. IV. The Assyrian is found in the cuneiform inscriptions now being deciphered, which show still another form of writing. The Hebrew, like most of the Shemitic group, is written from left to right — only the Ethiopic and the Assyrian, like our western languages, being written from left to right. The forms of the let- ters now employed (the 'square' characters) probably came into general use about the 5th century B. C. The alphabet (22 letters) consists only of consonants, some of which, however, were used as 'vowel-letters' (13). The vowel-signs (24), which form a later ad- dition (16), are mostly placed under the consonants. THE CONSONANTS. 2. THE HEBREW ALPHABET. Order. 1 2 3 5- 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 T^rtmnq Hebrew English Meaning of X' ui iiiiSi Name. Sound. the name. Finali ^^^« H-lip^ Ox 1 n^n hm House :i hm giy-m^l Camel 1 rhi da.-Ut Door n U^ ■ Window? 1 XI waw Hook or peg T r'l za-yin Weapon n n*D hm Fence t3 ri^t? tm Snake 1 t nv yod Hand 3 1 f]5 kap Hand (curved) '? np^ la-mdc? Ox-goad Jb D D» mem Water ^ 1 I?^ nftn Fish D •^^!? B%-TQ.6h Prop y ry "a-yin Eye S ft] K3 pe'' Mouth ^ y nv za-fZe^ p tlb q6p 1 K^n re^s Head {ya? fB> r??^ siyn, siyn Tooth n ij? taw Sign or cross Numeriel value. 1 , A 3 4 5 S I 8- 9' Itt 20 30 40 : 50 60 70 80 , 90 i 100 200 300 400 li I 1 Final forms are those u,sed only at the end of words : compare our obsolete form of writing and printing fenfes. 2 When the tone does not fall upon the final syllable (42), one of the accents (38—41), or some other sign wiU generally mark the penult tone. s For Roman notation mostly used in this work to represent the Hebrew, see 3 for the consonants, 24 and 27 for the vowels. On syllabification, see 33-37. 6 3 f 1} t POWERS OF THE CONSONAHTS. 1 . Observe the simflarity in form of 3, 3 ; J, J ; 1, ^, T ; n,- n, n ; », 1 ; 1, r, J ; D, a ; D, D ; V, J/, y. 2 . Words must not be divided at the termitiation of a line. But certain letters may be so expanded as to occupy more space ; these form the words "•P? 'C? *^ *^* °f Tamar, and are dilated thus— a n -1 S n h« The skill, and judgment shown by modern compositors, however, especially in spacing, render dilatation almost unnecessary. 3 . From lack of special signs, numbers in Hebrew (as in Greek and other languages) are marked by letters of the alphabet. The units are expressed by the letters K to 13 , the tens by » to V, while 100 to 400 are expressed by p to n. To indicate the other hundreds after this, either the final forms of the letters may be used (1 = 500, D = 600, | = 700, Pl = 800, |'=900); or n ( = 400) may be combmed with other hundreds (thus ID = 600). When numbers are conjomed, the greater is put first ; e. g. 245 is marked by HDI. Thous- ands are marked by unit-signs with double dots above ; e. g. x =1000. Exc. Fifteen and sixteen are expressed by ID (9 + 6) and tD(9 + 7),— not iT and r, because these combinations coincide with the initial portion of the sacred name nin*. POWERS OP THE CONSONANTS. Hebrew letters. Transh- teration. Powers. 3 3 J 1 1 I d h h h w 1. At the beginning of syllables, an almost inaudible h (as in hour), e. g. !^! taz, then. 2. At the end of syllables, si- lent h (as in ah!), e. g. N|l ba^ he came. Cf. T\, H, below. 1. Hard 5 (as in bat), e, g. )3 ben, «om.i 2. Aspirated b (Gsel. bh), likew inmra ; as 33^ le-JaJ, heart. 1. Hard g, as in g^o ; e. g. 3A gej, baoh.'i- 2. Soft g, or gh (cf. 3, 1), as at the end of ii roof. 1. Hard d, as in did ; e. g. 3^ d.S.g,fish.i 2. Soft d, like th in thee (cf. D) ; e. g. 13 had, apart. 1. At the beginning of syllables, it is sounded as in Aa* ; e. g. 13 har, mountain. 2. At the end of syllables, silent h (cf. H), as nj. zeh, this. On both these cases, cf. H^p hS,-bU, give! and" our hah! 3. But at the end of a word, it takes the hard sound, if written with Mappiq (20), as .13 bah, in her. 1. Its consonantal sound is really that oiw in. we, e. g. the name of the letter itself, 1} waw, though some pronounce it V, as in Pijn* Yeho-vaA (24, 7, Obs. 2). 2. When join- ed with homogeneous vowels (13, Obs. 1), it quiesces in them, e. g. 12 b6, in him, .I-) 1ft, if. Our 0, as in "It zed, proud. Cf. S below. 1 Regarding the double sound of the ' mutables,' see 7 and 18. OLASSiriCATION OF THE CONSONANTS. Hebrew Transli- letters. teration. Powers. n h t y 3 k 3 k b 1 » m 3 n D s V c; SI p a p "i z P q 1 r B> s E* 8 n t n t A very strong A, resembling cA In ZocA, as Jp hag', a feast. A very shai-p t (cf. fl below), as in D*D tlyt, clay. 1. Consonantal, like y in you, whether (a) at the beginning of a syllable, as in DJ yam, sea ; or (J) at its close, after a heterogeneous vowel (13, Obs. 1), as in ''O hay, (27) living. 2. VocaUc, quiesoing in a homogeneous vowel preceding, as in *3 biy, in me. 1. Our k, or hard c, as in can, e. g. 113 koA, thits. Cf. p. 2. The same sound aspirated, verguig to that of PI. Both are exemplified in 3313 k6-ka.b, star. Our I; e. g. ?;? la-yil, night. Our m, as in D-1D mum, blemish. Our ?i, as in {*3 niyn, progeny. Soft «, e. g. D-1D sfts, horse. Cf. B' below, i The pronunciation of this letter is somewhat difficult to acquire. Its sound is produced by a slight closing of the throat, and resembles an indistinct g, as in go, or a soft guttural r : at the end of a syllable, it is softer than at the beginnmg ; cf. 1?1 da", know, with 75? "al, upon. Our p, as JS p^n, lest. Our ph or /, as in 5)53 kh-pap, he bowed down. Hard is or tz, as I'^V zls"?. flower. Cf. t, above. A very hard k, or ^, but uttered more in the throat than in the mouth, e. g. \i?. qSn, nest. A stroiig guttural r, as pT raq, ow?2/. 1. Hard s, as I'ti' sar, prince. } 2. Our sA, as in she, e. g. DE' «em, name. 1. Hard !!, as in tin, e. g. I'm t6r, turtle-dove. 2. Soft t, like i!A in iAira (cf. t), e. g. ns pa«, morsel. CLASSIFICATION OF THE CONSONANTS. 4, A. The following arrangement is exact, but not of much im- portance for the purposes of Hebrew grammar : the consonants, for the most part, are classed and named in accordance with the or- gans employed in sounding them :— 1 D was apparently softer than B'. That these two letters were at first dis- tinct and different in sound, is evident from the existence of the characters themselves, and from the fact that words like VsE' he was wise, ^^PJj^ /S nsp he shut up. W f^ ^i^^' lo'^g '^^^"^ ^^'""'^ ^""^ '^'''°* £ sSW. sound, and sense.' But, on the other hand, their sound was very sMar, and after;ards became identical ; for (1) they were of ^ .^t^^^^^Sf^ L later books, hence we find ^3? for ^W, Ezra 4 : 15, and T\>hW instead 6 THE MUTABLES. 1. Aspirates i (8), forming the mnemonic word ^^n^^l ta-hSha", and ^. 2. Palatals, p3*a gty-faq. 3. Linguals, n.JTtJT dat-lg-n^*. 4. Dentals and. Sibilants, B'Spt zas-zas. 5. Labials, flO-B bu-ma^. 5. B. Again, viewing the consonants as used in forming words, they are (a) radicals or {b) serviles : each class contains eleven. a. The radicals form ' roots ' (62) of words. 6. Serviles are mostly (1) prefixed or (2) affixed, though sometimes insert- ed in the root, for purposes of derivation and inflection. Occasionally,, they are used as radicals, though radicals are never used as serviles. The latter form the words, — i?.31. n^D jri*^ Ethan, Moses, and Caleb. Note 1. The letters forming jr)*S (not to speak of other uses) are em- ployed as prefixes in forming the 'imperfect' of the Verb (see Lesson 19) : the other serviles are prefixed, as particles, to nouns (see Lesson 3). Note 2. Nouns are derived from verbs, by adding to the 'root' one or more of the letters forming the mnemonic word VJ^JDSH ; hence 'h^-Hman- tiy w ' nouns = verbal nouns. 6. C. Of greatest practical importance is the following arrange- ment of the consonants : — 1. Mutables 2 (7), 3,3,l,3,S,n,— mnemonised... nSI^JIl h^gad-kepa-t. 2. Asph-ates (see 4, 1). 3. Vowel-letters (13), or Quiescents (14) '')nH t^-hSwiy. 4 Labials (see 4, 5). It win be seen that the same consonant sometimes appears in more than one of these groups, and that this classification wholly excludes severaLlet- ters of the alphabet. THE MUTABLES (6, 1). 7. The mntables take either of two kindred sounds (see 3). (a) The hard, sharp sound, marked by Dagesh (18), appears in them either (1) when they are doubled by that point, or (2) in a single mutable ai the beginning of a syllable, — ^provided nothing like a of rfO'20 folly, Ecol. 6 : 17 ; (2) the Syriac represents the two by one character ; (3) Western Aramaic sometimes puts D for B'. Begarding B> and K', see more- over 24, 7, Obs. 1. 1 These consonants have commonly been designated ' gutturals.' With Ewald, the name is here discarded for one more suitable, though this has hitherto been used to indicate another class (the mutables). 2 These letters have been hitherto named ' aspirates,' but not quite suitably, for only sometimes do they take the aspirated sound (7, V). The designation given here, is fitly used in Gselic to denote a corresponding class. THE ASPIRATES. T vowel-sound ^ immediately ^ precedes. (b) The so/i or aspirated sound is only found in single mutables, immediately ^ preceded by a vowel-sound. Examples of a, 1, -where ' doubling dagesh' is employed, are n^^ tab-bah, executioner, y^^ map-pez, hammer, njj)8 i^at-taA, thou. Illustrations of case h are 3T13 K7 W^ ki\,-t&h, he did not write, and nb *!? mly p^h, who is here ? Further, japB pa?-ba(7, dainties, and the mnemonic woni DSB'lJa itself, ex- emplify at once a 2 and b. THE ASPIRATES. 8. Tlie Aspirates seem to have had two shades of sound, — a stronger, when they stood at the beginning of a syllable, and a softer, at its close. *< is the weakest of these consonants ; n has a fuller, clearer sound ; n is stronger and sharper still ; i; is the most forcible and strongly guttural of all. (See remarks on each in 3). 9. Laws affectiitg aspirates. ^ I. Aspirates cannot be doubled (18, B.), like harder consonants. But a short vowel, preceding an aspirate that should be doubled, mostly changes to its cognate long' (see 24, Table), and then remains unchangeable. Thus, we must write 3Nn for 3-^n the father, 11^2 for ■JJ'iia he was bless- ed, &c. Obs. Strong aspii'ates like n or n mostly preserve the voivel short ; in such a case, the old grammarians were wont to say that Dagesh was ' im- plicit' in the aspirate ; e. g. DTW brethren, iriD hasten. 10. II. An aspirate [1] never accepts simple vocal sli«wa (28, b), [2] dislikes silent sh-^wa (28, a), but [3] readily accepts a com- posite sh^wa (29). Thus, (to exemplify the first and third part^ of the law), nouns of the form n| a kid, beginning with vocal sh^wa, refuse to take a simple vocal sh^wa when the first letter is an aspirate ; hence we must write '18 _ a lion, also 'h^. a pestle, "hri,, sickness. So, too, infinitives formed like lbK> to keep (123), demand a composite sh^wa under their first root-letter, when this is an aspu-ate, as in ytV to forsake, 73^ to eat. Again, (to illustrate the latter two divisions of the rule), Hebrew avoi'ds such forms as "ibn; he will desire, 1 This term applies to half-vowels (' vocal shewas,' 29, Obs. 1) as well as the vowels properly so called (24). s That is, when no distinctive accent (38) intervenes. 3 These laws, because of their importance, must be studied carefully. But inasmuch as what is here laid down may not be fully understood at first, the student must repeatedly revert to what is given above. 8 LAWS REGULATING ASPIRATES. "IJW 1 girded, in which — r- is silent (ends a syllable ; see a?, a) ; it prefers forms like ibl?* he will stand, 3t.J?5. deserted. 11. III. ^he Aspirates, in general, have vowel-sounds kindred to those of prefixed consonants. a. When it is otherwise indifferent what kind of sound the prefix takes, the aspirate gives it a vowel like its own ; e. g. *1N a lion, with _? like, pre- fixed (see 102), becomes ''JS3 like a lion ; 1 and, joined with thx becomes inNJamti seize. b. But when the prefix may assume only a certain kind of sound, the aspirate succeeding it mostly receives a vowel like that of the prefix. Tlius, in the Hiphil of the verb (164, 5, and 171), the vowel of the prefix, in the perfect, must be e or i, in other parts an a, while the Hophal (164, 6) takes short ; hence we must write TDJ!^ he caused to stand = set up, ipi?n set up (imperative), lOV;? ho-''oma(^, fie was set up (182, II. h). c. Yet forms like n^l?'n (for n?rp) occur; see Josh. 7:7. And frequently we find the 'hard' pronunciation of the aspirate. 12. IV. An aspirate, especially when final, likes A sounds. Hence, it prefers Pa^ah to S^g61, Qamez hatftph, or even H61em (24), provided these are not unchangeable (26) ; as nnt sacrifice, and ^^ skoe,~ior nar, hvi (136), "ip»l for "iD^l and he removed, and even for 1D|1 (wa^-ya-sor) aiid he departed (191, 8), nsf; /j^ will sacrifice (for n2t» 116, 3). 1. Strong aspirates like n do not always demand the a ; hence 3']n sword, Dn? bread, but DriT womb. 2. When the vowel before a final aspirate is long, and cannot be exchanged for an a sound, the aspirate takes Paiah in addition to that vowel-sound, zoith which, however, it forms but one syllable. This so-called ' Fatah fur- tive ' is pronounced before the final aspirate ; e. g. n3t (zo-6eah) sacrificing, 0*K'D (ma-rfyah) anointed, Messiah, D-l"l (r-dah) wind, spirit. But when any addition is made to the word, this Paiah disappears, as *0-11 (ru-hly) my spirit. 3. n and (still more) X, when they end a word, being quiescents (14) more than true aspirates, do not so much require the a ; hence X^g a wild ast, riDS weeping. 1 These words instance the ' hard ' pronunciation of the aspirates. VOWEL-LETTERS, OR QTJIESCENTS. THE VOWEL-LETTERS, or QUIESCENTS (»inN). 13. A. Vowel-Letters. Before the introduction of the vowel- signs (16), the three main vowel-sounds, A, I (together with its cognate, E) and (with U, see 23), were represented by the con- sonants K, n, 1, ' which thus were called ' Vowel-letters.' 1. The A sound, as occurring very frequently, was mostly lefb unmarked, especially (a) when in the middle of a word ; if marked at all in such a case, *« was used, as ^^p qam lie wrose. (b) When long and filial, it was mostly marked by n, as in n^J ga-laA he re- vealed, — seldom by '<, as in ^ for m^ they are swift, FiriJ for fijinj tlwuj hast given (202 Ohs. .3). 2. Dagesh characteristic is inserted in distinctive forms of verbs, as the Piel, Pual, Hithpael (164), or nouns like 3^3 thief, li3| a hero, or adjectives like |-1JD compassionate. 3. Dagesh conservative is introduced to keep a vowfel short, by closing up the syllable in which it stands. Thus, were short a in 30! not ^jreserved by altering the form to 3B!, it would lengthen into a, — 35J. 4. Dagesh conjunctive may be placed, in the initial consonant of a word preceded by another which ends with an [a] open (36), [&] unaccented syllable ; thus, 02* nS^X let me dwell there, n:T"no what\& this? Obs. Words thus united are sometimes conti-acted into one, as n-JD for HITID^ 1 Since these two kinds of Dagesh do not differ so much in their power to harden consonants as in the mimber of the functions they perform, the terms lene and /arte are not qtiite appropriate ; 'simple' and 'doubling' are perhaps more suitable. ]2 MAPPIQ AND EAPHE. 5. Dagesh separative (dirimens) is placed within tiie final consonant of syllables whose vowel, already short, is intended to be shai-pened, while sh^wa (28) is made more audible ; thus '333? grapes of, for *35S?. 6. Dagesh emphatic is employed (mostly in Pause, 45) in penult syllables which have the tone (42), to give more force and fulness to the word ; as •unj they give, for -13 fj^- Note a. In cases 1 and 2, the Dagesh is ' essential,' or necessarily used ; in all the other instances, it is employed merely for euphony. Note b. Sometimes, instead of doubling a consonant after short — r-, the Dagesh is omitted, and compensation made by lengthenmg the vowel, » being inserted, as nip^f jfieri/ darts, Isa. 50 : 11, for D)pX. This usage is common in Aramaic. 20. Mappiq (P^SO producing, uttering, viz. the harder sound), like Dagesh, is a point which claims the hard sound for the con- sonants to which it is applied. Only the vowel-letters (13) take Mappiq : even of these (except in MSS.), it is but n, in general, that takes this sign. Mappiq shows that the letter takes the consonantal sound, i. e. does not quiesce (14) ; thus rh (lah, not laA) to her. Contrast ny")K her land, with ny"]N to the earth. 1. Yod takes Mappiq, not in, but under it ; thus ''\i, nation. 2. Mappiq resembles Dagesh in [a] form, [b] position in the consonant, and [c] power of hardening. And when we further [d] find that Raphe (22) i^ the negative of both, we cannot fail to see that they are really identical ; the point, at first, must have had but one name, although it now has two. 21. Distinction between Mappiq, Shureq, Simple Dagesh, and Doubling Dagesh (all which are points in consonants) : — 1. Mappiq occurs, in printed books, only in final n ; see 20. 2. The combination -1 is Shureq (24, 9) when no vowel-sign im- mediately precedes, as in -lO-IP arise ye. 3. Doubling Dagesh comes after vowels, mostly short, as in n-js (ziw-waA) he ordered, P*1VD the righteous one. 4. Simple Dagesh only occurs in mutables, when no vowel im- mediately precedes, as in ^3|)13 it will be heavy, '"'P'? ye will de- ceive. 22. Raphe (n^T i. e. weak, soft), the negative of Dagesh and Mappiq, is a light horizontal stroke drawn over consonants, ex- pressly to remove all doubt regarding the absence of a point within. But it is seldom used except in MSS. Thus, used with ^»yp3 Is. 59 : 17, it signifies that Dagesh is not omitted through inadvertence ; the same is certified regarding Mappiq, in n J Num. 32:42, n-X3 Is. 18:5. THE VOWEL SIGNS. 13 1. When Raphe and a point are both connected with one and the same consonant, the latter may be uttered according to the reader's choice ; thus, 3 jjj? N7 Ex. 20 : 15, thou shall not steal, '^Timp N^ tkou shalt not make for thyself, Ex. 20 ; 4. ' ' 2. Exact transcribers mark all mutables, throughout their MSS., either with Raphe or with simple Dagesh, as ijoa shoulder. THE VOWEL SIGNS. 23. General Observations. The Table given in 24 exhibits [a] in the perpendicular, three great classes of sounds : (I.) A sounds, (II.) the kindred sounds of E and /, and (III.) those of and U. [i] Viewing the same across, the top line shows the long vowels, the second line presents their corresponding short sounds ; the fourth line exhibits a series of light ' half-vowel ' sounds (24, 12, 13, 14). [c] The sign -:- (Simple ShVa), common to all the three classes of vowel-sounds, is placed beneath a consonant from which the vowel, of whatever kind, has disappeared. (See 28, and illus- trations under 47). Obs. 1. The three ' hali-vowels ' of the lowest line are formed by a com- bination of Shewa with the short vowels of the second line : hence they are often called 'composite Sh^was' (29). Obs. 2. When contrast Is intended, (a) the A sounds mark the active sense, (6) the JS sounds, the intransitive, or they may indicate what is pro- gressing, and hence incomplete ; (c) the and U sounds mark what is passive and complete. Thus, (looking to the closing vowel-sounds), we find that "IDE' means he kept, "l&E' keeping (pres. part.), and l-IDE' kept (past part.) : ?t!3 means growing great, but Vni great. Such distmctions, however, have in many instances been lost. 14 A'OWELS : THEIR NAMES AND SIGNS. VOWEL-SIGNS : THEIR NAMES AND POWERS. 24. The vowels may be tabulated tlius : — I. II. III. A Sounds JE Sounds / Sounds Sounds U Sounds (1) Long Vowels ■r(a)i&v* -^ *- or- 6 ior- '^ -lor-r " (2) Short, fiiin vowels -2 - i -r^ ^(0)8 r- 10 (3)Shewa -r-11 (4) Half -Vowels ^12 -is -u 1. Qamgz (J'piJ contraction of the mouth) is the long sound of a, as ia far, e.g. Dl blood, IDD mi?i. But it must have often had a deeper, broader sound, approaching (as m all, war) ; cf. 8 below. 2. Paiah (nns opening of the mouth) is short a, asm hat; e. g. ^13 d&w, WP' pit. 3. Zerey (nv bursting of the mouth) is long e, as in were ; e. g. [3 «o?i, 73PI world, 4. Segrdl ?Up (a JmjicA 0/ grapes) is far more often, in reality, an e than an a sound ; in either case, however, the pronunciation is the same,— like em ere, or a in way. Only a knowledge of its origin will show which is the fundamental sound. In jnij horn, and '!\^p king, the first S^gtX is really an a : see 132. "" 5. 6. Hiyr^q {pyn gnashing) which has the sound of i, is either long, as in routine, or short, as found in tin. When short, it does not take the letter » ; thus JO out of. The long vowel for the most part does take *, and is then 'fully' written, as in p» a species, T'B' a song; but sometimes the ' is dropped, and the word is then said to be written 'defectively,' as in Dn^NI mighty ones, Ez. 32 : 18, for Dn."!^. Only a knowledge of grammatical forms can aid us in detennming whether -r- without * is long or short. 7. HoMm (D7in fulness) is long 0, as in go: thus "I'lFl a twtle-dove. Ex- cept at the conclusion of a word, it may be written without 1 (' defectively ') ; thus, we must always write H) his hand, but may write Ti}p for ni^ip voices. Obs. 1. The diacritic point of E' may also represent an o preceding it, as in aE'» yo-«e5 sitting. So, too, the diacritic point on \i> may also mark an 5 succeeding it, as in K^b so-nei» hating, an enemy. And tJ>_jnay either re- present the combination so, as in iptJ' keeping, or os, as in pt?'S3 opening. Obs. 2. (a) -=— with 1 right under it, is simply 6, as in iVip his voice. (6) When 1 is placed a little to the left, the combination will be ow (or ov), as in njp waiting, njn» Jehovah, (c) But when the point is to the left of 1, the combination is pronounced as wo (or vo) ; thus |il? iniquity. QAMEZ AND QAMEZ-HATUPII. 15 8. Qam^z Hatuph (Sl-1t2n j'pjj i. e. short Qamfe) has the short sound of o m iwt, as in -^3 (43) all, 'Vppl hw sickness. But this is like the sound of a in fall. Accordingly, long a and this short o have received a name in common as Tvell as a common sign (t); i.e. close similarity in sound has caused iden- tity of sign and name : cf. 1. above. See also 25 for marks of difterence be- tween these sounds. 9. /Sur^q (pnW hisdng) is a full-sounded u, as it occurs in true ; thus, "I-IV rock. Sometimes this vowel is written defectively, but only in the middle of a word, as x ; thus -IDI? for -ID-lp arise ye. Cf. what follows. 10. Qibbftz O'Sp corUractimi of the mouth) is the same sound as the pre- ceding, but quite short and closed, as it occurs in put. This short u is never represented by >[ : cf. 5 and 6 for a parallel. Examples are ]rf>V) table, tho ladder. ' ' 11. Regarding the sign -;- (Simple Shewa), see 28. On the origin and use of 'composite sh^was' (the next three signs) see 29. 12. Hateph Pa^ah is a quickly uttered 5, as in arise ; e. g. di^n a dream. 13. Hateph S^gtl is g, pronounced as rapidly as possible ; !?is to eat. 14. Hateph Qam^z (cf. 8) is 6, shortened to the utmost ; »^q sickness. 25. On the Distinction between Qamez and Qamez-Hatuph. — (1). The simplest, surest, and indeed sometimes the only means of Imowing whether -r- is an a or short o, is to possess an accurate acquaintance with the forms and derivations of Hebrew words and vowel-sounds. If -r- arose from o, it must be o ; if not, it must be a. Tlius, ''b'W is goc^-lj5, since it comes from Tlj goodness (132). (2). Instead of such a comprehensive rule, beginners may observe the following, as guides in showing what the vowel is which -^ re- presents : — A. ^ in a shut syllable. Wlien -^r- stands in a shut (36) and toneless (42) syllabk, it represents sJm-t o. The special marks of such closed syllables are these -.-^ 1. Silent Shi'wa (28, a) succeeding - ; as ||in5 offeririg (' Corhan,' Mk. 7:11), nn9^ sulphur.i- 2. Maqqeph (44) succeeding t-, as "^3 all. 3. Doubling Dagesh (18, B) after -r , ''i^Hn pUy me. i. Retraction of the Accent, as DjJ^ way-ya'-qom, and he arose (191, 8), but (in pause, 45) DpJI way-ya-qom'. B. -T-also represents o, though in an open syllable: — 1 A Metheg (43) or some other accent, on the penult of such words, not only gives to it a secondary tone, but also for the most part shows that the syllable is 'open ' and hence that — is a, and the Sh^wa 'vocal' ; as in npsri ha-^^maA she is wise, but riDSn hpA-maA wisdom. See also 43, Obs. 2. 16 VOWELS, WITH ENGLISH EQUIVALENTS. 1. If Ti follows it, as in HOJIH A« was placed. But sometimes, too, the ■7- may be a, as in n^i.f^n the ship. 2. When it is followed by a second 0, as Q5?yi? your deed. 3. In two abnormal forms where — is used for ?r, which should be merely -r (29,6), viz. D''^\> qo-da,-slym sanctuaries, and D^B'pg' so-iik-sism roots. CHANGEABLE AND UNOHANGEABLE VOWELS. 26. Some vowels may be changed — the long to short, the short to long — while others are unchangeable : these can be fully and ex- actly known only through familiarity with types and forms of words. a. Vowels which owe their length merely to rhythm — to tone (see 42), or to the nature of their syllable — ^may change, and even disappear ; regarding this, see 47. h. Other vowels are essentially — hence rm- alterably — long, while others still are essentially short. 1. Essentially short is every vowel found in a shut syllable (36) succeeded by another which is also closed ; e. g. "l^l^ wilderness, fV3?< poor, n^P an executioner. 2. Vowels essentially long are marked by consonants as well as vowel-points (13, 14). But (a) a is seldom marked by N-r . (6) Sometimes, however, long e, and more frequently long i, are marked by ''— and 't , as in 75'D temple, D''i?''*1V righteous ones, but occasionally (defectively) by -r- , as in DDi^N to them ; while (c) 6 and n statute. Short 7- 0, .....•• npl|5 crojwofhead. '-ShortestT 8, ''y^.laham. U Sounds : Long -1 ft, as in -ll-ID depart ye! 2 *-1 fty, as in *-l7| revealed. Short V 1, U'<^fii statutes. Indefinite, very short -;- «, as in ^3? my son. s SH^WA. 28. The sign — p , Simple ShVa,* is in itself somewhat ambiguous ; its nature is exactly known only when its position and its office in the syllable are ascertained, a. 'Simple Sh^a Silent' (Quiescent Sh®wa) stands at the end of a shut syllable (36). b. ' Simple Sh^wa Vocal' (or Movable) is found under the former of two consonants at the BEGINNING of a compound syllable (33, 34). a. Silent Sh^wa is seen in 'J^K*?!?!! / have sanctified, ^K'p (qo«t, 24, 7, Ohs. 1) truth, DFI3B' ye retwned: see also the example in foot-note*. It marks the total absence of all sound, — a pause at the conclusion of a syllable. 6. Simple Sh^wa vocal marks an exceedingly short sound, like that of the first vowel in equip, or inert; e. g. T^l''! d«5a-refe thy word, D'nsiDS b^mo- p^tt^m^ with wonders ; see 29, Ohs. 2. 1 The sound of *-=- and of the broader V is that met with in my, or lie. 2 On the fuU and the defective modes of writing these vowels, see 24, 6, 7, 9. 3 But see also 28, a. 4 This sign (NICJ* or N^tS') most probably means emptiness. It always in- dicates that the omission of a vowel from the place where it occurs has not been due to any inadvertence ; thus Pl7^5i7 hig'-dalt, thou (f.) hast made great : were this word sunply written Pl^^IJiti, it might be a question whether some vowel-points had not been marked. A sign like this we deem superfluous, but all Shemitic languages possess it, or its analogue. 18 SHEWA. 29. The Composite Sh-'was, viz. -^ , ^^ ,-^ (24, 12, 13, 14) are formed by combining the short vowels ^ , -?- , —ir {o, see 24, 8) with simple sh^wa (28, b), in place of which they are employed chiefly {a) under the aspirates (10), but sometimes also (b) under ordinary consonants, either (1) when the same letter is at once re- peated, or (2) after long vowels. Examples of case a are "liDQ ass, Si'DX gather, ii« a fleet (for liDO &o.) The second case is instanced by '''yyi mine enemies (for ni.'V), -Ippri praise ye (for >hSry) ■ tlie last by nng'-l and lead captive (for n3B'>). ' Ohs. 1. 'VocaJ Sh^wa' includes, both Simple vocal sh^wa (28, 5) and all the Composites. Ohs. 2. In what has now been laid down, it is implied that Vocal Sh^wa, whether simple or composite, is not a full and true vowel ;, hence, with its eon- sonant, it does not form a whole, but merely a haK-syllable; and as this cannot stand alone, it must be combined with a full 'simple' syllable succeeding it, so as to form one 'compound' syllable. See examples in 28, i, and 34. 30. When two vocal sh^was would be consecutive, the former be- comes a slwrt vowel, in a syllable which (a) is sometimes shut — the latter sh%a thus becoming silent — but {b) sometimes left half-open, so that the remaining sh^wa continues partly vocal. (See further 32). HJr^q is the vowel commonly employed in such a case, but sometimes Pafah or Seg'61 ; as Tfop keep ye, -npr stand ye, ''SB'p strip! *3Dn mercies of,— for ■Mipp, -npi?, ' 25. Y&ah rqj 26. T«lly«a^ qetannaA NE'«^fl n|tt|p I 22 LAWS EEGAEDING ACGENTS. 40. General kemares on the accents. (1) Of the accents, fourteen are written over, and eleven under the words to which they belong : P^si^q is written after its word. (2) The accents are mostly attached to the consonant immediately preceding ths tone-vowel, except the ' prepositives ' Y^Wh and T^li^sS,'' g«J61aA, which are always found with the first letter of a word, and the four ' postpositives ', S« me. But sometimes, too, words of considerable length are thus conjoined ; as' Di^l?"ng'?K' three witnesses. Obs. 2. The accent being lost before Maqqeph, long vowels in shut syllables are mostly changed into their corresponding short ones ; thus '^"!?3T5'.i arose from ih ^3 »'.♦. ; see 24, Table. " ' 45. Pause is the place of special accent at the end of sentences, or parts of sentences, where Great Distinctive Accents stand (39). Where Pause occurs, changes are often made : — a. The tone returns to its original position in the word : see the 1 As will be seen from the examples given, the half -syllables (29, Obs. 2.) are included as distinct factors in this reckoning. 2 Metheg has been very fully discussed by Baer in Merx's Archiv ; see also Lowe's Commentary on Zechariah, Excursus II. 24 QERI AND KETHIB. examples in d, below. b. When possible, the accent on the penult is preferred. Thus *3hN for *3ilN /: see also c and d. ■ AT ^ IT c. Short vowels are prolonged. »58 /, '^b? i;m«Z, <)in_«i(;&iess, become *3X, ''ba, 'Vri; cf. 6. So IpB' Ae Aep^, becomes "10^ ; "IBJJ conspiracy in pause becomes "ig^D ; see Isa. 8 : 12. t?. Lost vowels are restored, and frequently prolonged. Thus nana she gave, from ]p3, and •npia' keepye, from "ibp, become in pause nan;, ■nbe'. e. Strong consonants are sometimes doubled : see 19, 6. 46. Qbri and Kbthib. The later Jewish critics who revised and fixed the present Hebrew Text, though careful to preserve the whole exactly as it had till then been commonly received, yet sometimes thought another reading ought to be preferred. But this they did not venture to substitute for the other ; they merely (a) attached its vowel-signs to the word actually in the text, together with (b) a small circle or asterisk referring to the margin, where (c) they placed the letters of the word or words which they preferred. The letters found within the body of the text were thus called the ^'ini (an Aramaic passive participle, signifying written), those in the margin being the '"li? (what is, or is to be read). Thus in Ps. 102 : 24, *03 my strength is the Q^rl for the KHisb inD, which may have been mistaken by some scribe who thought that the word should be in'3 his strength, or who, more probably, mistook 1 for a badly written \ In Ps. 100 : 3, the KHisb is ih\ and not, while i^) and to him is the Q»ri ; but «ither reading gives good sense. Obs. 1. When (a) a word is to be left unread, no vowel-signs are ^ven to at, and in the margin there is placed the note *1p N7l 3*03 vmtten but not iread ; see Bzek. 48 : 16 ; 2 Kings 5:18. (6) When, on the other hand, a word ■.must be supphed, its vowels are inserted in the text, but its consonants in the margin with the note ^Tia N7l '"Ip read but not written,, as in Jer. 31 : 38 ; 2 Sam. 8 : 3. Obs. 1. A few words whose Q^ri differs from the "KHtsb are so well known that their marginal reading is never given ; these are Sin, used in the Penta- teuch for S'n (see Gen. 38 :25 &c.), l^tS'B'; Issachar for 15^'?, n^my, Jeru- salem, for DvB'-'n*., and the name of God as the Eternal One. The Jews do not pronounce this name, though they continue to write it in their Scripture text, (a) When it occurs alone, they read it as if ^il^ Lord were found in- stead, and place on it the vowels of the latter word, thus making njn*. (see 24, 7, Obs. 2). But(i) when the word *^"IK is conjoined with it, mn* receives the vowels of D*r6§! God, and is read as if this word were actually written there ; thus T\\r\), <;h8 Gen. 15 : 2 &c. VOWEL-CHANGES. 25 Note. The true sound of the sacred tetragrammaton has long been lost ; but as It is no doubt derived from the Imperfect (115) of the verb njri or njfl to be (see Ex. 3 : 14), we may infer that it should be pronounced niH' (Yah-weA) or INFLECTIONAL VOWEL-CHANGES, i 47. It has already been remarked (44, Obs. 2) that certain vowels change when change is made (1) as to the place of accent in a word, or (2) in Ihe nature of the syllable : we now proceed to give some illustrations of this most important truth. I. Changes on vowels of the First Class,— ^ Sounds. 1. Notjns. In "la'i word, and I3?rj wise, the vowels, though all long, are change- able (26) : the foi-mer of the two in each word stands in an open syl- lable (36), and is permitted to be long, since it immediately precedes the tone ; the final syllable is shut, but has the tone, and thus may take a long vowel (37). a. When 'light' additions (96) are made to the word — as V a suffix meaning my, or D V the ending of the plural masculine (67) — the forms are changed to '1?'^ my word, I3^P?q wise ones. For, in each case, (1) the tone is shifted to the end ; in consequence of this, i and n lose the ' pretone,' and hence also (2) their vowel ; accordingly, Sh«wa is placed beneath (23, c) — a r=T under n as being an aspirate (10). Further (3) the syllables are changed in character ; for, whereas "i? and D? were shut, now, n and D are needed to begin the new concluding syllables '"!, Q'l? (33, Rule). Thus 9 and ? are opened, and T and ^ are joined with them to form the compound syllables 37, 30 (33, 34). b. Again, each of the ' heavy ' suffixes (96, a) forms, of itself, a syllable ; they do not therefore need, as the ' light ' suffixes, to take the final consonant of words to which they may be joined, so as to be pronounced (cf. a, 3, above). When such words, therefore, end with a shut syllable, the heavy suffix (1) keeps these shut, as well as (2) takes the tone from them. Thus, in 13T and 03 , not only is (a) the former vowel lost through loss of the pretone (see 1, above), but (6) the remaining one must be made short (37, Rule), 0?13"1 your word, ^JPSD your wise man. 1 As the principles here set forth are fundamental, it is essential that this chapter should be carefully studied. t 26 VOWEL-CHANGES. c. The tone may be removed still furtlier off, as in the construct plural (81) ''ri?^ ivords of, *»?i:i loise ones of, (for *^51 , *P?q : see 30) and the plural forms derived from it, which take the heavy suf- fixes, as D.?\"?51 your words, DO'O^n their wise ones. In such cases, the former vowels of the words are wholly lost. 2. Verbs. The verbs "iP?* he kept, ^V^ he made, become TP^, 7l'S in pause (45, c). a. But when wtt'g^afformatives (^v, 'I, ''— ) are added to the root, these (1) take the tone, and (2) next assume at least the last root-consonant to form a syllable (33). (3) The last root-syllable is thereby changed, — opened (36), and left without the tone ; hence, its short vowel must be drojDped (23, c). The sec- ond radical, thus left without a vowel-sound, is joined to the suc- ceeding simple syllable, to form with it a compound syllable (34) : the first root-syllable remains unchanged. Hence '^TO^ sa-m'^aA, slie Icept, ■l'?.^^ pa-"alfi. they made. (4) In pause (45, d), the former vowel and the tone are both restored, while the short vowel is made long ; hence nnpB', -l^rs. b. When the afformative (1) is consonantal, and an open syllable, it may not take the tone, or change the syllables or vowels of the root ; thus, •IJ'JP^ "we have kept, W?^^i thou hast made. But (2) when such an afformative is a shut syllable, it always takes the tone, drawing this from the root. The former of the roo^-syllables thus drops its vowel, while its consonant is added to the next, to form a compound syllable ; as ^WVf y^ kept, DR?yi ye made. (Of. the effect of heavy suffixes to nouns, 1, b, above). 48. II. E Sounds. 1. Nouns. In 15 a son, ^P a name, V^ an enemy, ngio miracle, "ItP altar, (12, 2), the final vowel, though in a closed syllable, is long because it has the tone (37). But when the place of tone is changed, or alteration made in this as well as in the nature of the syllable, the -r almost always suffers change ; more specifically — a. When nothing more than loss of tone occurs (i. e. when an addition to the word is made, commencing with a consonant, and thus preserving the preceding portion closed — the tone being re- moved to the appended part), tt mostly becomes v , but sometimes -T or - . Hence D??«'!? (44) son of man, \^i'U son of Nun, DgriBiD your wonder, DSPS' your name, "^Vf^ thine enemy, and "TtiatP thine altar. _ . phs. This shortening occurs sometimes when there is only partial loss of tone, and no addition to the syllables, as in the constract state (79) of nouns VOWEL-CHANGES. 27- and adjectives ; hence 7^^ staff of, (from ^[pD) Hi J I? altar of: see 131 for other examples. b. When the addition made commences with a vowel, then the consonant which closed the word must be assumed to form the first' part of the new concluding syllable (33). Hence, what was formerly the final syllable — closed and accented — is now (1) opened and (2) loses the tone \ in consequence, -^ is mostly lost (i. e. becomes sh^wa, 23, c) — the consonant which stood before it being joined to that which followed it, to form a compound syllable : sometimes, however, -rr is retained. Hence op?' their name, in5tp Ms altar, Qpps priests (from tn'3 priest) ; but tt remains in niBg" nar.ies, ^''VW children of tlie third generation, &c. 2. - Vekbs. Like principles are found to regulate changes of vowels in the verbs ; hence "I31 speak thou, '<^~i3'i! speak, pray, •1"i|'!! speak ye, — ^but •1']3'!! in pause. So KS'? he delighted, i^V^P slie delighted (in pause ny^SP), flJJVPP thou didst delight. 49. Sounds are subject to the same laws which regulate other sounds. 1. In the nouns X^X threshing-floor, and ^"V} month, the former syllable is open, and receives the tone ; the latter syllable is closed. But in *^1| (gor-nl^), my threshing-floor, IB'IO (hod-st) his month, the last two radicals have changed their places in the syl- lable. The former syllable in each has now been closed, and has moreover lost the tone ; hence -r (p) is put instead of — . The plural forms riin| (gera-n6^), D''5f'^,i;i Q}6ds.-sPTsi) show further change made on the o through changes in the form of syllable and place of tone. 2. Again, the verb-forms 13T remember, "I'of ■! he will keep, shorten the ' tone-long ' vowel o to o, when there is (a) merely loss of tone — the form of syllable remaining as it was, still closed ; hence ^3"i?f remember, pray, *^""i»?'? he will keep for me. But when, besides, (b) the nature of the syllable is changed, the o is wholly lost, as in •1"i?J remember ye, -nOf ! they will keep ; in both of these last in- stances, the final syllable becomes compound. In pause, the tone reverts to its original position in the root, the syllable is opened, and long o returns ; hence nbf, 'i'tof\. 28 CHANGES AMONG THE CONSONANTS. CONSONANTAL CHANGES. 50. The Consonants of Hebrew words may suffer change by (1) assimilation, (2) transposition, (3) rejection, (4) insertion, (5) ad- dition, (6) substitution. 1. Assimilation mostly takes place when the former of two consonants is (o) vowel-less and (J) cognate, or will readily combine with the second, which then assumes Dagesh Compensative (19, 1), unless it ends a syllable ; as ^O for JJpp thou hast died, N33ri for t<33rin he prophesied, but S|S nose, for «13K.' Of Liquids, 3 most often disappears— seldom before an aspirate— more rarely \>, and seldom "1 ; as ]ry. he will give, for tfl?'. ; n.jp /»-oro this, for nri», but ^m\ he willpossess ; so T\^\ he will take, for n|5?* ; r?f which (belongs) (o him, for i? "IK'K. . 2. Transposition is resorted to for the sake of euphony : the sibilants (4, 4) are mostly thus transposed, and occasionally also the labials (4, 5). Hence -\mfn to heep onis self, for ISB'nn (173, 3), B>33 and 3.B>3 lamh, TOW and nppE* garment. 3. Ejection, a. At the beginning of a word, a feeble consonant with shewa is often dropped ; as -linJ for -13038 we, DB' for yff\ sit thou, \B for jn? give thou. b. A vowel-letter in the middle of a compound syllable is sometimes di'opped, together with sh^wa ; thus there is formed a simple syllable, as '1? for »11! ruins, -l^a for -VpJ they revealed (195, II. h). The same is nearly always true regarding n , the article (103, 5), as 013 with the blood, for Din? ■ of. also 171, 3. c. The final J in some verb-forms is regularly dropped, and only used for emplusis, or in archaic forms, and even then mostly in pause ; as J-15J1J they knew, Deut. 8 : 16, for the more common WljJ ; t'''?'^.P *^^ shalt do, Ruth 3 : 4, for ^B'rp. In the plural or the dual construct state (81, a), a noun or adjective rejects the final D ; as D'l'SS' songs, *'1*B' songs of. 4. Insertion. For strengthening, 3 may be introduced before the affix in some verb-forms (see 180), as •ln3"13J'! they will pass over it, Jer. 5:22. Cf an for a in English. 5. Addition. Sometimes an X with a short sound is prefixed for easing the pronunciation of a word which, but for this expedient, would have the harsh beginning of a compound syllable; as 7iD15 or VlOriK yesterday, {Jinj oi l?l'^t^it arm. Cf. squire, esquire. 6. The substitution of a letter for another kindred one may be the con- sequence of (a) some slight difference in sense, as 3Si5 he cut off, TiT} he hewed stone, DDtJ he hewed wood ; (6) a difierence in style, as IVJ he kept, — ^in poetry "IBJ ; (c) a difference as to the age or period in which the form was used ; thus pljy he laughed, and puy he cried out, are found in the CHANGES AMONG THE CONSONANTS, 29 Pentateuch, but pl3?^ and prj in later books ; (d) a difference of dialect, — the Hebrew i^v rock being inta in Aramean, Heb. aij^ gold Aram. 2!J1, Heb. I'JJijI earth, Aram. STlS : {«) mere euphony, as in D''{j:5y gazelles, for D^;:jv (210). INTRODUCTORY EXERCISES. On the Obder of Words in Sentences. 51. In simple, imimpassioned narrative, the verb regularly stands first : see sentence 10 in exercise. Only in poetry, and seldom even there, we find the verb at the end of a sen- tence ; as Ps. 6 : 10, Jehovah my prayer will receive. This order is the rule in Aramean, as in Latin, Sanskrit, &c. - 52. The predicate, if an adjective or noun, {a) stands usually first ; see "sentences 4, 5, in the Exercise. Q>) But, of two adjectives employed as predicates, the second may stand last ; as, Gracious is tlie Lord, and merciful, (c) Seldom are both placed close together in the front ; as. Good and upright is the Lord. 53. Attributives succeed the words which they modify ; negatives mostly precede. Hence, adjectives, used as attributives, succeed their nouns (see 6 and 7, in exercise), adverbs succeed their verbs or adjectives (see no. 6 in exercise). Note 1. The (definite) article, however, i&pr^xed : see 58, c and 70. Note 2. Hebrew has no indefinite pronoun or article ; but, to supply the want, the numeral inx (f. nnX) one is sometimes placed after the noun ; as in^ N''33 a (certain) ^ropAei ; see also no. 7 in exercise. 54. The interrogatives stand almost always first ; see 8, 9, in the exercise, but on the other hand 87, 1, b. 55. A word or member of a sentence, other than the verb, mostly gains in emphasis by being placed at the beginning. Thus, the nominative is placed first (a) in contrasts as Gen, 13 : 12, ' Abram dwelt in the land of Canaan, but Lot dwelt in the cities of the Jordan valley ;' see also vs. 13, H ; (6) when a new subject is introduced, especially in pro- positions describing a subordinate but contemporaneous circumstance (129, Ohs. 2), as Gen. 19 : 1, ' And the two angels came to Sodom, while Lot was sit- ting at the gate.' (c) The greatest emphasis is given to a word which heads 30 ORDER OF WORDS IN A SENTEKCE; h tlie sentence absolutely, and is afterwards referred to ; thus, in Ps. 18 : 31 '[As for] God, perfect is his way.' ---_ 56. As in Latin, Greek, and many other languages, the verb to be, used as the copula, is frequently left unexpressed ; cf. 4, 5, 6, 8, in exercise. Or, the third pers. pronoun, ixin m., ^'D £ (90) is em- ployed as copula, as in Gen. 2 :I4 ' The fourth river is Euphrates.' Note. This use of the pronoun, however, mostly emphasises the subject (87, Obs. ; 91, III. c), which then comes first (55). The nominative may even be of another person than the third, as njn) Xin njjljt 'Thou' art Jehovah.' Exercise 1. M iih yh^ J tj"!;; '^sn Sxnb'^ ^ . nns irns nin^^ ^ rnkb DDh ^'n mive jnnx nsys j^ix tdh* :nny3 " T ; ■ ' -T I" T - T T .. .. . TV - T • V; - T I ■• T - T V VV Transliteration and Translation. 1, Y^'ho-wa/* (24, 7, OJs. 2) ka-raif h^rPt, Jehovah made (lit. cut) [a] emena/nt; see 53, iVbfe 2. 2. Yis-ra-'^el ha^ak "o-iip, Israel turned [the] «ecA (back). 3. Lez lo'^ sa-ma" g="a-raA, [A] scorner hears not rebuke. 4. Ha-slycZ ^iiA^, Gracious [am] I ; see 52, 56. 5. "a-^ar ''at-taA, i)e«# [art] thou. 6. Y6-na-;fan ''i^s ha-Aam vsF^bd Jonathan [was a] man wise very (a very wise man ; 53). 7. Y6m H-h.dd, Day one, i. e. one (or a) day ; see 53, Note 2. 8. MF ^e\-\€h, Who [are] these ? 9. ''a-naA ''at-taA h6-leA, Whither [art] ifAoM g-o- ing ? 10. Za-nah Yis-ra-'^el ibb. Rejected Israel good (Israel hath rejected good). 11. L^-h^m l6^ ''a-W, Bread not he ate Qx&dA^Q ate not) ; see 55. 12. ^'&-Mn sa-ma" '■glo-hiym, Swely heard God (surely God has heard). 13. KoA •'a-mar Y%6-waA, Thus said (or saith) Jehovah. 14. Lo'' ya-c^a" kl^ ha-laA Y6-na-^an, he hiew not that went Jonathan (that Jonathan had gone). 15. Gam dam na- qi^ sarpzik M^nas-s^A, Also blood innocent shed Manasseh (Manasseh also shed innocent blood). Questions fob Examination. 1. Name the various (a) letters and (5) vowel- pomts occurring in the foregoing s'entences (3, 24). 2. What determmes the pronunciation of the 'mutables?'(7). 3. What are the different kmds of syl- lables? (34, 36). 4. What are the laws which regulate the syllable? (33, 35, 37) 32 SYNTHETIC CHARACTER OF HEBREW. 5. What points are met with in the Hebrew consonants J, (18 — 21). 6. What are the species of Sh^wa ? (28, 29). Nature of the Hebrew Language, 57. The Hebrew language shows a strong desire for synthesis and brevity, i. e. it seeks to form but one word or expression out of many elements, which, in a language like our own, of analytic tendency, would rather be preserved distinct and separate. Attempts at syn- thesis appear in combinations formed by means of Maqqeph (44). Some prepositions and like particles are always joined, by this sign, to the word succeeding them ; others are sometimes found without Maqqeph. Such are '1^ or '7^ on, upon, over ; ''^ to, towards ; njj or "fiS , a frequent sign of the direct and definite accusative (105) ; 73 or '73 (25, A, 2) all, every, &o. Exercise 2. t TT V |-T t; t;- V ~T t; T T T V w I - ■■ T : • - I V vv ■ -: Transliteration and Translation. 1. Y^ho-waA ''a-mar ''^1 ''a6-ram, JeJwvah said to Ahram. 2. Y^o-waA pa-qac? ^it Sa-raA, Jehovah visited Sarah. 3. MaA ''el- Uh, What [are] these ? 4. ""aniy ''el sad-da^, /[am] God Almighty. 5. H^s ^6 Hs-sa,h, [A] man or [a] woman. 6. Lo'' za-Aar Ht Yt-sep, Not he remembered (he remembered not) Joseph. 7. ''S.niy jsAAiik "al Yis-ra-^'el, / [am, was] Mng over Israel. 8. ^&k hi-bil kol ''a- fZam, Surely vanity [is] every man (every man is vanity ; see 52). Questions. 1. What effect has Maqqeph on (a) the tone and (b) the vowels of the word preceding it? (44). 2. Distinguish between Qam^z, and Qamfe- Hatuph (24, 1 and 8 ; 25). 3. What changes may take place on words in Patisel (45). FUSION OP WORDS. 33 WORD-AOORETION. 58. The smaller words or particles, prefixed to other words, through time become completely fused with them, so that some now are never found alone, but only in connection with another word. Such particles are the following : (a) the Conjunction 1 and (or, hut, he.), sometimes pointed -1 , } , 1 &c. ; see 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 12, in exercise ; (b) the 'in- separable prepositions' 3 in, among, &c., 7 to,for,&c. ^ as, like, &c.; these are also pointed 3 , 3 , ^ > &c. , see 6, 7, 12, in exercise ; (c) the article (definite : see 53, Note 1), which is mostly pointed .0 (with Pa&h under n , and doubling Dagesh in the letter following), but sometimes simply n , n &c. ; see 8, 9, 10, 11, in exercise. 59. Moreover, two or even three of these particles may be pre- fixed together to another word. Thus (a) the conjunction and a preposition may be found together, as in sen- tence 12, below ; (b) the conjunction and the article ; (o) a preposition and the article, as in sentence 11 j (d) conjunction, preposition and article. Obs. These inseparable prepositions (not the conjunction 1) mostly extrude the n and take the vowel of the article which follows them ; thus |33 is short- ened from |3n3 in the garden ; see 11. Exercise 3. I ,- I -i-T I T T •■ - - : T T I -: I- : v wrhii 7 J d'?'!!?'? nb nn« e . ^^m nB>*i p^'nv 5 t p^'nsi mn* v: r : 1 •• t - tt:|»- |'-:t; r T • T I " T V -; 1 - - V - J T ^ T T - : * . 3>aw«K;«raer (lit. to eternity). 7. ''filo-hiym ha-_pak. yam l^ab-ba-saA, God turn- 34 APPENDED PARTICLES. ed, sea to dry land. 8. Qa-ra6 ^A ham-ma-haneA, lie approached to the camp. 9. ''a-A.-en hazier ha-"ain, Surely, grass [is] the people — i. e. (52) Surely the people is grass. 10. Lo'' sa-ma" ham-m^-ld^ *^1 ha-"am, Not hearkened the king i\h.e king did not hearken) to tlie people. 11. Hak-k«na-''aniy Hi ba-''a-rdz (for Kl??? : 59, Obs.) The Canaanite [was] then in the land. 12. Ra- 6az k^ar-yeA ft-(or \fti-)l^\a,-bP (59, a), lie crouched like a lion, and like an old lion. Questions. 1. What are the laws regarding aspirates ? (9—12). 2. When is the simple Dagesh not found in a mutable ? (7). 3. What are the small, upright lines under the words in sentence 11 1 (41, 1, and 43). Suffixes, Afformatives, &o. 60. Besides employing prefixes, the Hebrew makes large use of ' suffixes,' ' afformatives,' and ' affixes,' which are but fragments of the personal pronouns : see 89, 90. (1) Suffixes, which are added to iMuns, represent our ' possessive pronouns ; ' (2) afformatives to verbs represent the subject, while (3) affixes may be appended to the verb, to indicate the object, when this is marked by a personal pro- noun. Thus, (1) *7ip my voice (lit. voice mine, or voice of me) is formed of the \io\ cs. "lo*"! '^P' wit'i the suffix V , a fragment of the personal pronoun *JN or '5!lX /; so -li.pip means our voice, Djip their voice, &c. (2) By adding to the fundamental verb-form IDK' certain afformatives, we make such words as these: PinCB' thou hast hept, 'J?l'ipE> I have kept, .U'lDB' weMvekept, &c.; see 112 ff. (3) These forms again may take an affix, as in 'JlJIOfc' thou hast kept me, ^'p'^tt^Si / have kept thee, Q.li^lOE' we have kepi them! Observe that, through additions such as these, (a) the place of tone and fre- quently also (6) the vowels of a word may suffer change ; see 47 ff. The common forms of such appended pronoun-fragments are the following : — Singular Plural Suffixes fem, Affiirmatives fem. •'-rmy 'J? I 1 thyM P) thou B ... 1 his 7\rrher n— she t •13 our ■1J we DD your t? ... . D;ri ye 15 ... D their \ - •1 they Affixes fem. 'J me T thee '• ^ ... 1, -in him n her .•13 us D5 you 1? - D them T-> CEAKGES IN TEKBS. 35 Exercise 4. TiS *nn'?^ nuns jnW-nx ^'^-n':'^ ^^38 xm ^maB' Transliteration and Translation. 1. ''a-Jiy ^at-ta/*, My father [art] if^ow; see 52. 2. Zo'=i! bM^- tP, This [is] my covenant. 3. Ra6 t1i-6°Aa, G'rea* [is] thy goodness. 4. Hin-neA ha-lam-tl^f hal^m, Behold, I dreamed [a] dream. 5. /Sa- ma"-ntl ''^* (16-I6, TTe feared A/s wzce. 6. Sa-ma"-ta qo-liy, TAom didst hear my voice. 7. *d# qb-Wa sa-ma"-tly bag-gan, Thy voice I heard in the garden. 8. Ml^ ya-lac? li^ Ht ""el-l^A, Who begat to me these (these to me) ? 9. Hin-neA sa-lah-tiy Wa so-ha(^, Beholdy I sent to thee [&] present. 10. Se-^^r na-ton ll^ bak-ko-ben, [A] hoolc gave to me the priest, — the priest gave me a book (see 55). Conjugations of Veebs. 61. The main idea of a Hebrew verb is often modified by changes, made upon the ' root ' or ground-form (62). Thus, from the simplest form 7^1? he killed, we may make 1. PDpJ he Idlled himself (reflexive form), "or, he was hilled (passive ; see no. 1 in the exercise) ; 2. 7t3D he hilled many, massacred (frequentative), hut sometimes too, he caus- ed to hill (causative : see 3, 4, 5 in exercise) ; 3. 7!Sp he was massacred (pass- ive of the preceding : see 2 in exercise) ; 4. ipitipri he caused to fe'W (factitive or causative : see 6 — 10 in exercise) ; 5. 7^\>T\ he was caused to kill (passive of the preceding), &c. All these derived forms may again receive afformatives, as already exhibited (60) ; see 1, 4, 5, 10 in exercise. Exercise 5. ... . ... ■• T T V T T I- v. •:!-;• "^~ ~ \ Iv (consonants). The various possible modifications of the general idea it represents are produced (a) by changes within the root itself, (b) by prefixing, (c) by aifixing, or by two or more of these methods together, as has been shown in Exercises 3 — 5. (1) The letters chiefly used in fonning roots have been termed 'radicals' (5). (2) A weak root-letter however, may quite disappear, and make the root seem simpler than it really is : thus, DID has become DiJ ?ie arose, through the absorption of the 1. (3) Thus, QS^ jvdffek the root oi d*t3^B'8?5 with judgments : DV is the termination of mascuhne nouns in the plural (67), 3 is a preposition signifying with (102), and D is a noun-prefix. W Only a few quadrihterals and quinqueUteraJs occur ; and even these are mostly formed by adding a fourth letter to what was a triliteral root, as ?P13 orchard, from D^| vineyard ; or they are formed by combining elements of different roots, as 'f(?^V a bat, from 701? dark, and f\S Jlying. Note 1. Strictly, the root must be regarded as vowel-less, as belonging to no one part of speech more than another, and as containing only the most general idea of the thought afiixed to it. Thus, out of the root "^70, which contains the general idea of reigning, we find growing the two simplest 'stems' of (a) the noun and (6) the verb ; and these two stems are defined in meaning by the vowel-points affixed to them. Thus, ^?D he reigned 1)7^ king ' Verb-stem -, Noun-stem ' Root 17D reign According to this view, "iQli and TQp are co-ordinate, and both derived. And although we often find a simple verb-stem without a cognate noun (as 7i5p he stoned), and sometimes simple nouns without a cognate verb (as )'Tgi earth), we may suppose that the language once possessed the missing forms, which indeed are often met with in the cognate dialects. But practically, it is found convenient to view the simplest form of the verb as the root (though really it is a stem) ; hence it is generally said that "sQip is the root of '^70 and of all other cognate words. When, on the other hand, a verb is evidently formed from a simple noun, it is 'denominative ;' as 1170 he salted, from 1170 salt : see also 170, Obs. 2. Since roots are generally presented in the Lexicons as verbs, the student must acquire skill in detecting these, — ^rejecting all additions made to them ; experience and careful observation give the greatest help in this. S8 GENDER : FEMININE SINGULAK. Note 2. The roots of the Shemitio languages are distinguished from those of the Indo-European tongues by being (a) trihteral and (6) formed only of consonants. The Indo-European roots are (a) monosyllabic and (6) always have a vowel ; (A. fug in fugio, fugo, confugere &c. Yet it seems possible to trace^jnany triliteral Hebrew roots to still simpler biliterals; thus, It is a biliteral element with the idea of scattering, and common to the triliterals yij to sow (i. e. scatter seed) ^^J scatter rays of light, ITIT scatter generally, PDJ scatter dust &c. See Prof. Mac Curdy on Aryo-Semitic Speech. On Gendee, and the Feminine Singular. 63. Of Genders, Hebrew recogaises only the masculine and the feminine. Hence, names of things, called ' neuter ' in English and in other languages, are, in Hebrew, masculine or feminine. Ohs. The feminine is often used in a wide or comprehensive sense ; as riKT this (84, a. 2) ; of. also the plurals in Ps. 106 : 22, and Jer. 31 : 22, a new thing. 64. Of feminines, besides those which may be at once distinguish- ed by their meaning (as 0?< mother), or their form (66), the following may be noted : — a. Countries and cities, as D.pVtt Egypt, in*')'; Jericlw. (But names of nations, mountains, and rivers are masculine ; hence DJIV^ is construed as such when it refers to the ^copZe). b. The members of the body (especially those which are found in pairs), as n; hand, y;^ eye. c. Some names of instruments, as l.^n sword, 013 cup. d. Some common nouns of place, as TV city, 1^3 well. e. Powers of nature, as ^^'S light. 65. Some nouns have common gender : the following occur most frequently : — a. Indifferently m. or f. h. Mostly masc. c. Mostly f em. niS sign ari^ bread "lis light ll? heart rhjj door P")^ ark, chest I'lBy north l^j^ garment DT,3 vineyard j'Tgl earth, land Tni wall najij bow n?ja house liatP altar )3^(l stone \l garden E'DB' sun ^Ja^g temple DlplJ place {^'D^ soul IJ/Jway irB'gate 1U| glory Dy people oh spirit, wind 66. Rule. All adjectives, and the majority of nouns, take in the singular a final n_ or n to designate the feminine. ^ 1 The termination X\-r must be removed from masculines before additions can be made. GENDER : FEMININE gINGULAE. 39 Ohs. 1. n is preferred to fl-r by (a) participles and (V) words which end with vowel-sounds ; see the examples given. Ols. 2. r\-r fern, receives the tone ; in this it differs from Ht- local (209, c). Obs. 3. This H^ usually (a) changes the place of accent in a word, and (J) frequency its vowels and syllables, as seen above, i Of. 47 ff. Ols. 4. Though n-r is now more common, as a feminme ending, than n, it was itself originally n-=- . Obs, 5. In some adjectives, the second radical is shown to be really double, by assuming Dagesh when additions are made ; see 3!) above, and 18, Obs. i. Cf. also 67, Obs. 3. Obs. 6. The fenunine of adjectives is often used instead of (a) abstract or (b) collective nouns ; as riin evil, n?i the ^oor people. Exercise 6. 13 son t^*^ man, husband n»3| hill nxp Egyptian Dg' name nB>N woman, wife H^rv cry bn high NB? throne n^KJ damsel Oi blood B'^p new 1*^ song Hjiji? roll 310 good KniJ terrible i^ilf arm (12, 2) n^j? slave ^^^!! another TV city nnSB' handmaid iTja^ service n^|5 hard, harsh IND very A. Transcribe and translate TT-: T* ttI" t;|tt: t T T T-;i- V T • T T -: - T T V |t ■ viv - T - : •• - ■• : *i*y 19 : nniftt nnsB' is j n^^a n^y 17 j ne'p nnby le B. Write in Hebrew 1. A new heart. 2. A terrible land. 3. A high hill. 4. A good woman. 5. A large stone. 6. A pretty handmaid. 7. A very beautiful woman. 8, Another damsel. 9. An Egyptian roll. 10. A tall (great) man. 11. A Moabitish handmaid. 12. An out- stretched hand. 13. A very great city. 1 Pull treatment of such internal inflection is deferred for the present. 40 NUMBER : THE CONJUNCTION WA W. Thb Plural, The Dual : WA w Copulative. 67. The Plural. In most notina, and all adjectives, the common ending of the plural masculine is O'-r ; that of the feminine is ni .'• E. G. 3n3 a chenh, pi. Q'S-nS ; n^^ oath, pi. T\'h^ ; 3^13, fem. naiD, good, pi. D»3iD, nbiD; r\^\, nb; beautiful, pi. D*?;, nisj; rop^^istie, pi. n■n|^>^ Ols. 1. Nouns masculine sometimes assume the ending T^— , as 3X father, pi. nn^. Conversely, feminines sometimes assume the ending D'— , as iTJU? 6e«, pi. Dnh^. OJs. 2. These plural endings are not always fully written ; see 24, 5, 6, 7. 06«. 3. Those nouns whose final consonant is really a double one, assume Dagesh in it, it possible, before the plural termination ; as GO people, pi. D^BJ? (for D»I?pi?, which is actually found in Neh. 9 ; 22). Cf. 66, Obs. 5. 68. The Dual, which is hut a kind of plural, is found only in a few familiar nouns. Its sign is D.V , which is added to the singular ; but feminines which end in H— change this to n— , while masculines reject the termination '"•— , before assuming it. B. G. pitJ' leg, DJijiB' two legs; HSX cubit, D?p)38 two cubits : np mill- stone, O^p'!) hand-mill, i. e. the upper and the nether millstones. Obs. 1. The dual is not found in verbs, pronouns, or adjectives. According- ly, an adjective coimected with a dual noun can only take the plural form, as niST D.'IJ feeble hands. So too, a verb whose subject is a dual noim takes the plural. Obs. 2. The words D.\0 water, DJttE' heaven, p^B'-n) Jerusalem (46, Obs. 2) are commonly considered plurals. For a further account of the Dual and Plural, see 140 ff. 69. Waw Copulative. When the conjunction Waw is merely used as a connective particle {and, hut, or, &c.), it is called ' Waw Copulative.' ^ The vowels it assumes are various : — 1. In general, it takes simple sh^wa, as in X-ini and he. 2. Before a composite sh^wa (29), it takes the corresponding short vowel, as 'JS1 and I, 7bj Its form remains unchanged W by gender or number. 0) The old opinion was that n is but a fragment of the pronoun XI H, which is sometimes employed as a demonstrative (84, c); cf. xn,, xn behold! Later granmiarians suppose that the article was primarily 7n, as in Arabic. (2) The article is not to be confounded with H interrogative (217), with which indeed it is sometimes identical in punctuation as well as in form. (3) The article is joined, not with nouns merely, but with adjectives (includ- ing participles and demonstratives ; see 73, 4, and 76). C*) Our English definite article likewise remains unchangeable. Contrast Fr. le, la, les, Ger. der, die, das, &c. 71. Rules for tlie pointing of the Article, I. 1. Before an ordin- ary vowelled consonant, the n takes ^ , while a doubling Dagesh is inserted in the consonant ; e. g. 'ipO the voice. 2. If a sh^wa be found under the consonant, Dagesh is sometimes dropped, as in "ix)lI the Nile, but never when the letter is a mutable (7), hence we must write lis?? the firstborn. II. If the first letter of the word be an aspirate (4, 1), then (a) Dagesh is rejected (9), and (b) the n mostly assumes some longer vowel than Pa^ah. More particularly, — 1. Before x and •\, the n always takes Qam& ; as 3^n t?ie father, p.Jin the foot. 1 2. Before ri (ha) and n, the n always takes 8^g6\ ; as D3rip the wise man, ipnn the disease. 3. Before n and V (both with a), the H, if it immediately precede the tone, also takes a ; e. g. inn the mountain, DUH the people. But if the accent does not follow immediately, the n assumes S^gd\; as D*^!?^ the mountains, Jiun (h^-"a-won) the iniquity. 4. Before n or n with some other vowel than a or 8 (t or t; ), the article is mostly written n, as tf^ynn the month, X-inn that. Exceptions are Dnn those, 'nn the living one. 5. Before J? with a vowel other than those just named, the n mostly takes Qamez ; as 13^vn the servant, "l^Vri the city, DH^.Vp the servants. Note. The nouns "in mountain, DJJ people, yj^ earth, when they assume the article, become inn, Di;n, T^xn. 1 The student may at first rest satisfied with mastering the rules down to this point. ATTRIBUTIVE FORMULA. 43 72. The article is frequently used as follows : — 1. It may change a common to a proper noun j e. g. \'d^ adversary t^B'n the Adversary, Satan ; D^^!! man (homo), but D^^O -^t^awi (the man : of. 'the Book '= the Bible). This is especially the case with nouns of place, as *{?ri Ai {the heap of ruins), \T)l'n Jordan (the descending), &c. 2. It may make the singular express a generic or collective idea, as p'^-VD thejiistm&n, 'iWan the Canaanite. 73. Observe these special uses of the article : — 1. As a sign of the vocative ; thus 'n^ffin king 1 Sam. 17 : 55 &c. But it may be omitted, as in Is. 1 : 2, Hear 6 heavens (D'OB'; and give ear earth, (YD,^);see7i,0hs. 2. As a demonstrative, especially with nouns of time ; e. g. DVn to-day, this day, n^fij this year, Is. 37 : 30. 3. With well-known objects, as E'Ssn (the) fire. 4. With participles : such a combination may most suitably be rendered by the relative, together with a finite verb, as "lOB'ri he who keeps. 74. The article is not usually prefixed to nouns sufficiently defin- ite already, as— 1. Proper names,— David, Israel, Jerusalem &c. But see 72, 1 ; 80, 3, b. 2. Nouns having suffixes (92) ; such cases as nS'^D Mic^ : 12 &c. are ir- regular. The irregularity is most common with participles ; s^Deut. 13 : 6, 12. 3. Nouns in the construct state (80 ; but see further 80, 3, e). Obs. The Article is much less frequently used in poetry than m prose ; com- pare the Psalms with the historical books. 75. Rule. The Article should be prefixed to each member of a series of co-ordinate nouns or adjectives. Thus "IB«ni. aitsn what is good and right, lit. the good and the right. 76. Rule. When nouns are defmite, so should be their attribu- tives, i. e. the article should be prefixed to these. Hence the follow- ing formulse :^ !■ I.'I'J 'n?^3 ^ing David, David the 7dng. 2. Pn^n ij^BH t/ie great king, lit. the king, the great one ; cf. 53. 3. p'nan *03 my great strength. (See an irregularity in Is. 65 : 7, their former work). 4. Nnijni. h'tisn njn; Di» the great and dreadful day of Jehovah. 5. a. njri ^^sn this Idng (lit. theUng, the this ; see 70, 3, and 86). h. njn 7n|n '^^tsn this great king. Exertions. 1. The Attributive sometimes does not assume the article, especially [a) if it be a demonstrative, as N^n |>n|S!n (for K'nn fpNn) that land Jer. 45 : 4 ; cf. Bx. 10 : 1, Deut. 11 : 18, 1 Kings 8 : 59 ; 10 ; 8,— or (6) if it be a numeral, 1 Sam, 13 : 17, 18. 44 PKBDICATIVE FORMULiE. 2. The noun itsdf may want the article, especially (a) when the attributive happens to be a numeral, as in 'lJ*3B'n D'V the seventh day, Gen. 2 : 3, cf. Zech. 14 : 10 ; and even (b) when the attributive chances to be an ordinary ad- jective, as n^E'^D 1JJB' the old gate Neh. 3:6; see also Ps. 104 : 18. 77. Rule. The Predicate does not ordinarily assume the article, even though its subject be definite (cf. 76). Hence the formulse: — /• a. •qlj^an ^na, » \ T/ie kiiig [is] great ) ft. "piSi ^i^^n f °^^ 52 t ggg gg Exercise 8. n'jy trouble 2ri famine |V^.r upper ♦» who? jiDn multitude Tr cityi>Z. Dny JpT old fl^n, ID behold! ^VC court, village 133 heavy, severe tl? strong (44) "??, 73 all, every n5!!i3 pool 1335 glorious 13^ has perished A. Transcribe and translate T'T "T T- T •TT';- • 'T ton 9 : nivSyn naian s j |i^'?yn nsnn 7 ♦ nnnxn » T V T : V T T " ; - I : V T "TV VIV - T rnxni ' D'-jrinn D^ttB'n n : B'lnn nyErn 10 : ' ^inn I V>T T ; ■ T It- V* T - T T V V - - T T T- TT|'-- -TT 'TIV TT-:i- '• T : - T l|"T : T TIT ■■ T VIV - Dnyni Dyn ts? 19 5 oann b'^nh *ti is : nj ...and the bad [ones axe] ... . B. Write in Hebrew 1. The righteous judgments. 2. The great and dreadful God, 3. The good deeds. 4. The good land (earth). 5. The new heart. 6. The new songs. 7. This " wise son. 8. The wise ' woman. 9. The lofty fig-tree. 10. The Egyptian slave. 11. The hard service. 12. STATES— ABSOLUTE AND CONSTRUCT. 45 The first day. 13. Jehovah " [is] the righteous [one]. 14. The king [was] old. 15. The man [is] very great. 16. The woman [is] very beautiful. 17. The thunders [are] dreadful. 18. The fig-trees [are] tall 19. Who has taken the honey ? « See 76, 5, b. ' See examples in 66. " See 46, Note. The Absolute and the Construct States. 78. Case-endings are scarcely used in Hebrew ; only a few archaic forms remain, and these mostly in poetry see (209). Hence, case- relations are either quite unmarked on nouns, or shown by pre- positions. Using the terms and ideas associated with such languages as Latin, Greek, &c. TQig Jdng might be nominative, genitive, accusative, or vocative, a. What we would call the nominative has no special sign in Hebrew, h. But the ac- cusative, if both direct and definite, is very often marked by flS (TIS!) prefixed see 105. c. Dweotion to a place is sometimes shown by an appended n_. (209) d. 5 prefixed marks the instrument, rest in a place &c.,— ? or "7Sj! the dative case. As to the genitive, see what succeeds. 79. A near approach to ' case,' especially to that of the genitive, is found in difference of ' state ' in Hebrew nouns and adjectives. Of these states, there are two, the 'absolute' and the 'construct.' A noun or adjective, immediately depending on another following, is in the construct state ; one not dependent in this way is in the absolute. ('' In Hebrew, not the latter, but the former word suffers a change. <^^ There may be several immediately successive nouns or adjectives placed in the construct state, provided each is subordinate to the succeeding word j i. e. no two of them can be co-ordinate ; ^^^ nor, generally, does one construct word depend on several co-ordinate words succeeding it.^*) (1) To illustrate the statement given above, take such a simple sentence as yV. y^? tJ'*'* o, man planted a tree, and mark how it is possible to modify the nouns nvm, tree, which, as they stand at present, are both in the state called absolute, 'fhey may receive attributives, or nouns in apposition ; or some other nouns may be connected with them by an intervening particle, — ^without aflfect- ing their 'state.' Thus, one might possibly write U3 H^J J'J? J)C; |n3 K'^N a man [who is] a priest planted a fine tree in a garden. Here, 'priest' and ' fine ' succeed the words on which they rest, and which they qualify (53) ; while 'garden,' by assuming 3, prevents the word before from directly leaning on it, and thus becoming construct (see however 207, 1). But we might also write '^$ yS ytt^ flDPlpD E''^J a man (of) war [i, e. a soldier] planted a tree (of) 46 CONSTRUCT STATE. fruit [fruit-tree] ; or the last part might perhaps be written "INI^ '''i^ HS* y^. a tree beautiful i^ith) fruit {ol)form, i. e. goodly fruit. By such additions, B'*8i! has changed its previous 'absolute' state for the 'construct,' since it now directly leans upon the word fflOIJ^P succeeding it ; and of the two words ^'l? ^■IS, the first is regarded as immediately dependent on the second, with which, accordingly, it stands in ' construction.' So also, of the words ' a tree beauti- ful ' &c., yv remains in the absolute state, but it is qualified by an adjective that becomes construct before *"1B, which in its turn is construct before ns^. See the construct adjectives in Job 14 : 1,—' Man that is born of woman is short of days and full of trouble.' (2) This usage must at first seem strange to those who have previously been famfliar only with Latin, Greek, or kindred languages. Word, peace, when undeclined and uncombined are L. verbum, pax ; in Hebrew the corresponding words, in their ' absolute ' state, are "131, Di'pB'. But when we join the two in English by the preposition of, and thus make word of peace, the Latin will be verbum pads. In this latter instance, it is the second word which suffers change. Itisasif the o/' inclined towards the end: thus, word of'peace. In Hebrew, however, it is the first word that is changed, when possible, and this by shortening instead of lengthening ; hence it is hurried over in pronunciation as If it were subordinate, that so the emphasis may rather rest upon the final woird, on which the other leans : thus, DiPB' "13'?,— as if we wrote verbi pax, word'^ of peace. (3) Thus word^o/ peace-of Israel is ^X^b". Di^?!' IS'? ; cf. Gen. 47 : 9 the days of the years of the life of my fathers. Such an expression as a crovm, and sceptre of gold, where crown and sceptre are co-ordinate, but both svi- ordinate to gold, we must in Hebrew render by a crovm, of gold and a se^tre of gold, viz. 3nj ^llf^ 3riJ It,?., not 3nj D3B'1. nTJ. (*) Thus, vessels of gold and silver must be rendered in Hebrew, vessels of gold and vessels of silver; but on the other hand, we write, in Hebrew as iu English, a day of darkness and gloom, Joel 2:2. So again, the God of ' Abraham, Isaac and Jacob is often rendered the God of Abraham,, the God of Isaac, and the God of Jacob, as in Ex. 3:6; but see also v. 16 of the same chapter. Other excellent examples occur in 2 Kings 2:11 and 7 : 6. 80. The construct does not take the article, 'Nri IW in general means (a) the man's ox (i. e. the ox of the man), it might mean — what we would expect— (h) an ox of the man; or even— what seems strange at first— (c) the ox of a man. All am- biguity may be removed by using such circumlocutions as the following ; the meaning a. is clearly given by the expression tJ^'X? "IB'K ^IB'n the ox which [belongs] to the man ; the meaning h. by B'''f{? "I^N "lies', the meaning c. by C^'K^ -p^ liB'n. 81. To form the construct from the absolute, changes are made (1) within the word itself, when possible, i. e. among its vowels ;^ (2) some terminations also suffer change, (a) The dual ending D*— and the plural ending ^V both change to '-rr, but ni- remains the same. (&) Of singulars, the feminine in n— is changed to ri^ ; <^-r mascu- line to n- ; and *-=■ to V . Thus, dual DJpID, and plural Q*p-1D, horses, have a common form 'DID for their construct state : the fern. pi. n'lDID may be either absolute or con- struct. In the- singular, flspD qiteen becomes naPD in the construct state; nj?'"l shepherd hecomes nj^^'and 'n ii/e becomes ''n. 82. Rule. An adjective agrees with its noun in gender and in number, — not necessarily in state. B. G. n''D"in h^'p\ nn the lofty mountains of Israel; H^jn 3.5,511 ns^D the beautiful queen of the south. An irregularity occurs in Prov. 11 : 23. Obs. Such an expression as ?il|n "sjjsn || must remain ambiguous till it be ascertained whether the adjective belongs to the first or to the second word ; the accents may determine tMs (38 ff.). If a conjunctive accent join the last two words (thus, h'tl^n "iQl^n \i), the whole will signify the garden of the great Mng; but if a disjunctive be placed under the 'second word, to keep it from being closely connected, with what follows (thus, 7n|n ^./^^H \k), the meaning will become the large garden of the king. 83. 1. In order (a) to make up for an extreme deficiency of adject- 1 These inflections will be explained in 130 ff. 48 CONSTEUCT STATE. ives of quality, especially of those which indicate material, as well as (6) to obtain variety in the expression, Hebrew frequently employs the construct state. Thus, a wooden, vessel = a vessel of wood, ys '03 ; everlasting reproach = r^roach of eternity, D^W nSlp. This method is employed even when the cognate adjective exists ; as B'.pi'D "1'^? the city of holiness, i. e. the haly city. 2. Two nouns are found in apposition when we might rather ex- pect the first one to be in the construct state : this mostly happens when the second indicates the composition or material of the pre- ceding noun. B. Gr. nK^i^lsn "lijin the oxen, the brass = the brazen oxen, 2 Kings 16 : 17; n?b"nNp a measure [otljinejlow, 2 Kings 7:1; n7}?"!Fl [J* wine\of\reding, wine which intoxicates, Ps. 60 : 5 ; see also Zeoh. 4 ; 7, 10. (Of. the syntax of the numeral, 146, 3). But this construction should not be imitated. Exercise 9. nyj wickedness, D?ijJ eternity piy righteousness tl^lj fear evil, 66, 6. n^D Moses B'Kl hesA,pl. D'g'Kn DID horse di?ri dream m.j^^.ni DJ sea r''B'KT beginning 25^3 chariot nniri law i n*ri'^.t intelligence kind Dn, Hl^ri they nj?'D erring '^?'?^ appearance *n? jawbone *{{, ^»^! where? A. Transcribe and translate '?ip 4 X yf « nitoi'?ri 3 : a'piy » nnibb 2 : ny v &v 1 • Dwx {j'^Nio :<«nB>» n^iin njB'aa tpxn-ny'^a" V* v: • V - ■■ : ■ P V IT T - T n^sj 13 : nyn!i nj&Dn nil 12 ♦ n^jb npTn n^-nn n : enip ■ T» t:t- ;(tt-;t- |t " • T IV •* T - I- T : ■ I V iV - : nyiis ih ^ ni3 is : ^irt'> "aSa n»K 17 j nin* nxn* ^ hmh »yn Dy2i j b^k *didi * E'N-ii") nun 20 jnterr'B'i&i naw 1 This is a * plural of dignity' (143, 2, d) : it often takes the article. THE DEMONSTRATIVES. 49 24 ti^ms nsHN nSin 23 $ d-inh nun ^ nan 22 ♦ on ^ laS ■ IT T -: r - • T T II - T T - •• r •■ *ns*i Sab'-naiis r\mn^^ tiN» nN^» n^iD n'nyun - • VV - T • T , : V : - - T -; I- - « See 83, 1. ' See 80, Note. ' ^3 is really a nouu signifying totality, whole,— here (as often elsewhere) used in the construct state. <« See 80, 3. «See82, 0J«. / See 53, iVo^e ^. '-? See 52 a, and 56. » See 79, 3. »See 45, c. i See 69, 4. , \L B. Write in Hebrew 1. A throne of glory. 2. The glorious name of God. 3. The name of Jehovah [is] glorious. 4. The holy hill (hill of holiness). 5. The woman's cow and the old man's ass. 6. The Spirit of truth. 7. Everlasting mountains (mountains of eternity). 8. The top (head) of the first hill. 9. The top of a mountain. 10. A man's arm : the man's arm. 11. The love of God. 12. The mountains of Israel and (the mountains of) Judah. 13. Pharaoh [is] the king of Egypt. 14. The woman [is] of good appearance (good of appearance). 15. The woman'-s appearance [is] good. 16. Thou [art] a man of God. 17. Who is the holy man of God ? 18. Thou art very bitter of soul. 19. The day of Jehovah is great and very tenible. 20. Where [is] the God of judgment ? 21. Thus saith Jehovah, I [am] the God of heaven and (the God of) earth. 22. The tall fig-trees of the king's garden. 23. The fig-trees of the king's garden [are] very tall. 24. Thou errest in heart (art erring of heart). The Demonstratr'es. 84. 1. The usual demonstrative," for objects near at hand, is — Sing. Plur. ' Masc. nt ) , , [ this. Com. nvia d (7S) these. Fern. DN't * (HT, IT) j The forms within parentheses are rare. « The proper demonstrative element is the d sound, sometimes changed in- to s. Thus, Aramaic NT ; Arab, da, du, &c. ; Ger. der, die, das ; Bng. the, this, thai, &o. The Hebrew nt stands intermediate between these and the Sanskrit sa. D 50 THE DEMONSTRATIVES. * The feminine is often used where we would take a neuter form. (63, Obs.) c The plural forms, which have another root than that found in the singular, show close connection with the Arabic. d The final D of this form is demonstrative. e This form Is found eight times in the Pentateuch (always with the article ; see 86, 2), and elsewhere only in 1 Chr. 20 : 8. 2. -1' is a rarer form of the near demonstrative, mostly used in poetry ; but — as is sometimes true of '"IJ. (see Job 19 : 19 ; Prov. 23 : 22) — it is more frequently a relative. (Of. the use of Eng. that). It is unchangeable, and thus may represent any gender or number. 3. For the remote demonstrative (that, those), the forms of the third personal pronoun ^in, N'n &c. 90) are used. 85. i^I, -I', with. ? and the article prefixed, produce, the. following rare forms, used only in the singular, in the wide sense of this or that (i/on), and as attributives (see 86, 2). Thus, Ma.3. o-rr^^ri Fem. '-it^n- Com. «t)'ri a Only occurs twice, Gen. 24 : 65 ; 37 : 19. ^ Only found in Ezek. 36 : 36. « Six times as masculine, in Jud. 6 : 20, 1 Sam. 14 : 1 ; 17 : 26 &c., and once feminine, 2 Kings 4 : 25. 86. Demonstratives may be employed (1) as #»*Me f>roK02*Ms; they must then take an independent place in sentences. (2) Employed as adjectives, they are. attributives, assume the. article, (but. see 76, Bxc. 1, a), and regularly take their place behind their nouns, after all other adjectives. Hence the following formidse :— a.^^ii nt or nj S^'K this is a man. c. n?Sn TiVO^i^ these names. b. riE'Nri nxT this is the woman. d. N-lfln DIH inn that high mountain e. riijri 'iV'X (97) this my friend,— this friend of mine. Bern. 1. The article is sometimes wanting m demonstratives used as at- tributives after (a) a suffixed noun (92), as n?SI *ri'ni< these my signs,. Ex. 10 : 1 ; and even (6) a common noun which itself has the article, as -IT "liiri this generation, Ps. 12:8. Bern. 2. Demonstratives used as attributives are even found before their nouns, and without the article; as TP nj. this Sinai, Ps. 68 :9 ; see also Ps. 34 : 7 ; 48 : 15. Bern. 3. flj is occasionally employed to give a lively turn, or emphasis, as ,"I.JT1F1!? now! aap N^ njTljin lo\ here comes a chariot; see further 87, Obs. 4. Observe these phrases : — (a) D'JE? nj these years : here the demonstrative is indeclinable. (6) ng'D nj this [fellow] Moses : cf. the use of Lat. isie. THE DEMONSTRATIVES. 51 Exercise 10. >13? boundary, 73jj vanity ?2p mourning 7^2 he lias done, or territory "I^T word ; *ijl nation^/. D;'lJ made I'n generation thing, matter laifi desert, njnO camp^Z*. D*, ni nix sign c. njvp commandment -wilderness nijjipl chastisement, nn3 covenant/. )DE' oil, ointment Dj; time f. rebuke 1^^ way, road c. '^S flask, bottle niHl? wrath 'ajiB' Shunammite iib not ii?) nor (and not) A. Translate and transcribe i n-trr y^in nnn ^ : yn "it nt 3 ? Di»n nr 2 t ntn Di»n 1 V - T T - T V - V V - i^yn 8 5 nnsri nix nsi 7 5 nix nxr e j ht nto-trx & i^njn jibB'n "^313 j mn ni'^n lita-N'? 12 jD.w'nitta' nxTis j'N!inn x-iiri) '^nan lanmis !pNn ^m nji* Di»ri'7n3i8 rnxrVi '?ys nin; 17 : crbsfsm nissn •.•^xn t]nyn2i •. any nW-'?^ 20 tx^nn nyrria ;wnri { Dnn D^ian 24 ♦ nSna/ny^"! Sin nr 23 • nW nin^ oy 22 .. T • - T : T T : vvv V v - t : - nniini n^^y Di* 27 . nj nia '?ix 26 • narin nijnan 25 30 •nt'pn 2j'*xn29 :x;inn Di»n^nniy dv28 5rmm»n« ■J, - • T - - T : V V - 5 r'pn r\'jpmr\ nan 31 ? ^rrn yi^n o What are the various possihl© renderings of this expression 1 CI. 82, Obs. i See 76, 4 and 5 J. « See 84 b. * See 66 06s. 6. " See 52 a, and 56. B. H^ri^e in Hebrew 1. This man aud that woman. 2. This is a good land. 3. This good land. 4. This is the good land. 5. This is the man of God. 6. These cows and those asses. 7. This is a land of oil and honey. 8. Who is that wise woman ? 9. This [fellow is] a Shunamite. 10. This king's garden. 11. This is the king's garden. 12. This people err in heart (are erring of heart). 13. This is a fine-looking woman (This woman is beautiful of appearance). 14 This is the king's com- mandment. 15. These are the queen's commandments. 16. That 52 INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. glorious and dreadful name. 17. This is not (Not this is) the dam- sel's name. 18. That is not the Bethlehemite's slave (See 80, 1). 19. This is a dreadful place. 20. This is very hard bondage. 21. These are songs of joy. 22. This (fellow) has taken the woman's cow. 23. Who is yon Egyptian ? The Interrogative Pronouns. 87. The Interrogative Pronouns are (1) '*? who ? what ? applied to persons, and (2) no iphat ? what kind of? what like ? applied to things. 1. (a) 'P may even be applied to things, when these plainly relate to per- sons, as ^DB> 'P wfiat is thy name? It is used for all numbers ; but in Ex, 10 : 8, to indicate plurality, we find the double interrogative 'DJ 'D lit. who and who? It is also the indefinite pronoun = ii;Aower, Jud. 7 : 3. (6) Whose? is expressed by putting the possessed noun in the construct state before the interrogative, as in *p "l3'7 whose word? or, in another case, by prefixing the preposition 7 Zo (102) ; thus 'D? to whom, whose? (c) H^Aom .^ is expressed by »p-n^il (i05. Note, 6). 2. np is also used (a) for ns^ or Hp^ why? See Ex. 14 : 15. (6) In ex- clamations, as 3it3"np how good! (c) As an indefinite pronoun, whatever, anything, Job 13 : 13. (d) As a relative pronoun, Jud. 9 : 48. Ohs. An interrogative may be intensified by adding nt, nxT, or t<-ln, N*n : see 10- 14 in Exercise 11. 88. The rules for pointing no are similar to those for the article (71). Thus:— 1. Before strong consonants, it (a) assumes Paiah and is succeeded by (J) a Maqqeph and (c) by Dagesh conjunctive in the consonant, as n;t" np what is this? But sometimes n and Maqqeph disappear, and then the' rest combine to form one word ; thus, njp. 2. Before strong aspirates, it (a) mostly takes Paiah,— Maqqeph still follow- ing, as K-irrnp what is it? Dagesh is then 'implicit' in the aspirate (9, Ohs). But when the aspirate itself has Pa- tIt V- Ti" T oTausal forms. ^ Vocative (73,1). Observe the absence of the article 'feom thenoun (76,'Bxc.'-2). « The repfeiation- of the pronoun gives' emphasis : 'tlma.'h'i' i'.or, '/(eTfen.oryea) Jamhe.' See2I3, IV. "'Tbe-poation-dfiihe prauQun,rat:the head of the.sraitence, renders it emphatic (55) : 'Be is the king' &c. J contrast -the . other sentences in the exrarcise. « 'Jt (tbe:£d<7 : see iEzek. ai :.3) is the:caldron,' &c., 55, a. f See 73, 2. ? Cf. ■83,-a. -'* See thK«x- affiplesJn 66. Write in Hebrew 1. I 'jam ajgreat king. 2. I am Jeliovali, :the God dOsiael. . 3. Thou art the man. 4. Thou art .the daughter of :the .Egyptian. 66 SUFFIXKS. 5. Thou (f.) errest in heavt. 6. Thou ' arb a wise woman. 7. Who art thou, old man ? (73, 1). 8; Thou art he, king. 9. Wlio is this ? It ' is the Bethlehemite (80, 1). 10. They ' are flesh. 11. We are dust. 12. He -is man, and not God. 13. We (m. and f.) are sick of love. 14, What are ye? 15. Thou art the handmaid of Pharaoh. 16. Ye (m. and f.) are sad (bitter) of soul. 17. It ' is the shout of a great multitude. 18. It Ms false (falsehood : of. 83, a). 19. It ' is the law of the land. 20. They ' (m. and' f.) are righteous. 21. We ' are poor. ' Put the pronoun last ; cf. 2, 4, 7, 10, 11, &c. above. Suffixes to Nouns. 92. ' Possessive Pronouns,' in our sense and use of these — i. e. as forms distinct and separate from the words they modify — Hebrew does not employ. ^ Instead of these, fragments of personal pronouns are joined as ' suffixes ' (60) to nouns, whose form and place of tone are thereby often changed. A ' union-vowel ' is in general prefixed to suffixes beginning with a consonant. Thus, our word would be expressed in Hebrew by -U,!??^! 'which is formed by the addition of U— , a fragment of the first pars. pron. plur., to laT word, by means of the union-vowel -rr . The changes in the noun are made according to the principles exempliiied in 47—49. Obs. A suffixed noun is, properly, construct before the pronoun-fragment joined to it ; thus 'B'KI my head, is really head of me. This is most plainly seen in nouns with 'heavy' suffixes (96). 93. The termination of a word is sometimes changed before a suf- fix is assumed. Thus (1) the Dual ^V and the Plural DV assume the construct ending V , though this is often modified again by the additions made to it." (2) The plural feminine in ni- remains un- changed, but mostly takes, besides, the ending '-r-.* (3) "rr- sing, masc. is wholly dropped." (4) n_ feminine is changed to n_, — be- fore 'grave' suffixes (96), to n_.» (5) A final letter that is really a double consonant receives Dagesh, if possible, while the preceding vowel-sound is often also modified. "* 1 There is but one instance of a noun in the construct state before the se- parate form of the personal pronoun, viz. in Nah. 2 : 9. SUFFIXES. 57 " For aiustrations, see table in 97. '' When ' .r is not assumed, the suffixes attached to fli are often those com- bined with nouns in the singular (94, line a) ; thus we find Dn»ri3K but also (more frequently) Dn"n>? iheir fathers, irhS my testimonies, Ps. 132 ; 12, for ''lyii}. The superaddition of the maso. ending » r to the fem. ni is really both inaccurate and superfluous. ' Thus, from n'JB* Jleld, we form nb*, )r\^b (95, 3rd. sing, b), riiVf, my, his, her field. ''E. G. from Dl? is formed ')?r my people; Djit gives iSK his mother; ^3 all, D?3 all of them, they all (see 18, Ohs. 1, and for a fuller treatment of this class of nouns, 212). But in becomes '"in my mountain (instead of '"^n .- see 9). 94. The common forms of suffixes are these : — Singular ai pronoun Plural of pronoun 1st. 2nd. 3rd. 1st. 2nd. 3rd. ^ c. m. f. m. f. c. m. f. m. f. or. Singular of noun '- 1- 'Hr 1- n_ -U— D3— P— D— 1 — 6.DuaI&PIur, ... <_ T|»_ ^»_ V- n*_ -IV- D3*_ 13»_ Dn»_ tn»_ 95. Rarer fm-ms of suffixes. — 2nd. Pers. Sing, a. Instead of 1 — there is sometimes found the fuller n^ — as nan; thy hand, Ex. 13 : 16. 6. Instead of ^ TT we find '3 ■r- or 'Jj^'r- . 3rd. Pers. Sing. a. The ordinary termination i, for masc, comes from an older ending n" (as nn*B> his song, Ps, 42 : 9) ; and this again, no doubt, from the fuller form -in—. 6. mpr is mostly found with nouns ending in n^- (see93, c); and c. simple 1 after the union- vowel *— , as in, VDK his father. d. The form for feminine is sometimes n — . Plurals.— The heavy forms Dn, jri are rarely coupled with nouns smgular, as DDnUB' their captivity. On the other hand, plural nouns often take the shorter forms usually employed with the singular ; thus, DphlK their signs (93, V). Ohs. 1, Before the plural suffixes, ' is sometimes dropped ; thus 03^*. your hands, for D3*n». Ohs. 2. Of plural suffixes, masculine forms are sometimes used for femmine ; thus, D3'3X yoMJ-Zai^, is employed by Jacob in addressing Rachel and Leah, Gen. 8l':9. ' Ohs. 3. The suffix io — is used only in poetry : it stands for the 3rd. plural, as in Deut. 32 : 37, 38 ; or for the 3rd. singular employed in a collective sense (Ms for thdr) Job 27 : 23. 96. Suffixes are either 'grave' or 'light.' (a) The gram (or 'heavy') suffixes are those which of themselves form a closed syllable DD, ID, D?, 15: they are appended to the cows^retc^ forms, and always have the tone, (fi) All other suffixes are 'light,' and are appended, in the plural, to the ground-form of the absolute. 68 SUFFIXES. 97. Tables ^ of nouns witli suffixes: — NOUN MASCULINE NOUN FEMININE Sing, of Noun Plur. of Noun " Sing, of Noun Plwr. of Noun Abs. 0-lD horse CD-ID horses TIptD mare niDID mares dons. D-ID horse-of *p-1D horses-.of np-1D mare-of n'lDlD mares-o£ 1. com. *p-10 my horse » ^D-ID my horses *rip-1D my mare 6 'niD-IDinymares 2. m. 6 t|D-1D thy horse T',p-1D thy horses '^riD-ID thy mare 1*jr|iDilD thy mares ... / HQID '^'iis-ID W?-1° i-'JI'niD-ID 3. TO. iD-ID his horse "^ Vp-1D his horses i Dp-ID his mare "VJji D-ID his mares ... /. np-ID her horse I7\p-1D her horses anp-ID her mare ri*piD-lD her mares 1. c. -lap-ID our horse -IVp-lD our horses -UtlDID our mare -U^pVO-re ourmares 2. TO. DJD-IDyour ... DJ^D-ID your ... DDriD-lDyour ... D^'O'lD-ID your ... .../. t5D-1D ti^P-ID ]3nQ10 13*DiD-1D a.m. Dp-ID their ... Dlj^pID their ... Dnp-1D their ... DnVlD-1D their ... .../. ip-iD in-D-iD trip-iD in»^iD-lD " The suflBxes to Dual nouns are the same as those attached to plurals. ' In pause, these forms become 'p-5D, ^I^JID, I^p-ID, *piD-1D, ^npID, •sirriiDiD. ' Regarding tlie pronunciation of this ending, see 14, 1, 0b3. 98. It has already been stated (79, 3) that no two construct words can be dependent, as co-ordinates, upon another word. "But three other modes of construction are aTailable, especially for expressing the idea of possession. Thus : — Sk-The chariot of Israel and his horsmmH Kiags 2 : 12....VB'p5-1 ^S^V". ^5^ 'h.Thechariot.of Israel and the horsemen of Israel.... hif'p] V'7^'i ^S'^bv^ij c. The chariot and the horsemen, [which) {belongl to /sra«J =D*B>"iari^ •^?i50 '^^if'b OJS'S) : the relative is often omitted. Exercise 13. •ppia lot, portion ^*S'calamity, TlVs!?' petition ' D'1>-1B'gK' deHght (Lat. 3-lD goodness destruction nn-13Jl might, delicice) 1^,2. ri3 strength 12, 2 n^')li^? faithfuhiess mighty'deed TS ^mall, con- n-1V rocl£ nE>i|a request D*?D Kfe 143, 2 fined, narrow npI^O refuge nxjp zeal, envy nilJII? pasture "Ij strange t^*<:Mguity riKlSD sin/. Tl'ji; tes:timoiiy -SJ'pray! .1 The student:must commit these i)aradigms to memory, — the place: of tone being carefully observed. They should be written out at length ; but, for variety, the suffixes may be appended to 1*B' m., nTB* f. a song. SUFFIXES. 59 Dm 12 i DTK Dv nhp 11 t d"!^!? D^nSx ^ : ^JNX jm 9 : '•prtb nin; nriN 15 i^^y'-i 'nin^u : nisn Dnny 13 jny t 'into 'IT 18 . nxj5 J^'^i|J ^iinsTtj 17 $ ^B'Ki-'^y ^^p'l le :*nKi3nnto2i j m *j*>ya dn wa 20 niW^TiT-^nb'ffibia UNT 25 J ns"i ''^ny^ 24 . ^r\mii nai 23 • n;bs "Tinnin 22 T - I : IT T ;iv T v; T - V v: I : it J '^nB'jpa-nto!) « TinS^f -n& 27 . na'i a^nyn 26 . «^ny-i "Nj-n^N 30 : uyrh^ *:« 29 : -?j*mi3Ji *'?jri«jp '-n»N 28 'Nin3s 5«n "*to!i *:)j« \i:32 • ia^ri'^N ^n 31 •Dn^ri'?*? 35 J ^yt»>y^ ^»nny 34 . n^^ j^^f ^ in^yia -oy mm wri'?Nt / ■■ - ' : V v:iT I" ■.. V ■■ -IT T - I jv T •• .-.I- :||'2T w^Nsg jjii^x'in ♦B'^x38 i^rhii ^^hn), 'm « See 88, 1. '>See%, 2nd Sing.a : this is also a pausalform (.15, c). c See 93, 3. <« See p. 15, foot-note. « See 95, 3rd Sing. 6. /See 81, 2 b. 9 The particle XJ (Lat. tandem) is attached to wordsTrbich- indicate reqiiest or jentreaty ; see .also 121, Ofo. '' See 87, 1 a. * See 55 a. *.SeeJ8. 'See 69, 6. Write in Hebrew 1. .This is my.law. 3. It is thy Yoice. 3. This is his^good hand [76,3). A Whe3Bis,tliy,gEeat strength? (76, 3,.aad 10,1)' 5. What is her lot? £. This numerous people.is thy flock. 7. Oieat isiJieir .faithfuiiress. .8. It. is our abomination. 9. These are' h^ testimonies. 110. ■5Be,.aremy:sheph!erds(93,3). 11. lam Jehovahijhy Gt)d(p.^l8). '.1'2. He is their God. 13. Thou att my God. 14. Jeborah our.God is holy (52). 15. We are thy people, arid the flock of th)'' pasture. 16. Truth and judgment are the works of his hands. .17. All his commandments are truth. 18. Jehovahris the re'fiige and.rack of :tke.iighteous (98). 19. . AU.the work jof .o.ur.hands is eyil. 20. jThis is the time of your destruction. 21. We are thy -witnesses. 22. ,\Fhe commandments and testimonies .of God (98) are her delight. 23. All your works are evil. 24. How strange arehis deeds ! 60 PREPOSITIONS. Simple Prepositions. 99. In Hebrew, as in many other languages, most prepositions were originally nouns, chiefly denoting place ; and some are still em- ployed as such. These forms are often plurals, and always coiistruct. Thus, 7S,S near, means literally (a< the) dde-of ; 1.33 before, means properly front-of. Of. Eng. beside, Lat. gratia, causa, 6er. statt. For plural construct forms see 101, 2. Obs. Prepositions are usually repeated before each of a series of objects, see 24 in exercise. 100. Accordingly, whenever prepositions are succeeded by per- sonal pronouns, the latter take the form of suffixes ; and these are plural if the word itself be really a plural form. Thus, from n?1t besides, eixept — ^properly the construct of an unused noun n>1t removal — we form *n7-1t, ^inj-IT, except me, thee, &c. Behind them is expressed by Dn*inN (lit. the after parts of them), which comes from a noun of plural form D'■^^^?■ Obs. The vowel-changes in these preposition-nouns, in consequence of their assumption of the suffixes, take place according to the laws which regulate each kind of noun : see 131 ff. 101. The simple prepositions are the following : — 1. Those which take suffixes like the singular nouns : ^Vlf? side-of, near, (»?V8) near me &c. (see 134, III. Oi«.) ; nw, IM near, behind, round, out- side, for (*^!?3, '^IM, &c.) ; n?-1T besides, except (see above) ; *7^3. before, ('n?J &0.) >lb opposite ; 1^1 on account of. See also 104—108. 2. The following take suffixes \^^ plural nouns :— ^^ (in poetry ♦^{J) to, towards, *Vl2 interpreter 2^V Joab Cyn^ serpent 'q?n hewent, walked ^J?J he bolted, D3TP altar flVD he was angry E'yp noise, earthquake fastened ri^ni! desert; Jor- IDS fear ilDlK gronnd D?! door dan valley 'in woe ! "in? he made a wall ^| heap (of stones) 11^8 oak nnoK latter end n^.''^ hf^ night nsD wound, stroke npb Moreh ^'0^ he did good B?J there is (are) vho full of 1 t'K there is (are) (or evil) pn:^ Barak J'?''^S EUsha not, none 13X perishing ; eilT he pursued "ly adversary VIOB' heheard, listened destruction DB'iq Harosheth npin terror VxN Sa'p^n '^iitt nn'iyns tnarm '^xn ixv niini PN ^nS^TS f-n^a |y*4 : -inn n^i '^N-ib'* 3 jn-ib^iiSx T T T " - T T : ; T T - I v.- '• |t iiyn'?^ mn^ 16 r^p^l^y Sa^ nin^is :ii^'py ini* JDn^^y '?:in T nnn n^ is . n^x ny innnx 17 t o'^iy-iy ii'^a Wi T - J- T .. .. -: • -: r t - ) ■.. yv .:Dn*nnn na'K njsnxnso j^t nnn sr^naia j'?iinnn a'yi nnn nnK23 :^jny3 lix n'?^^?^^ jnya -inisi i^^n^n '^in^} 2?,';)C '^D^ ^^^ p"?! ^* • ^^ ^V^ ^'^^\ • nnnx n'?'^n '^yise .^nx ii'7n ni'iss . Q^iim nK'in ny ^y;?!) *ya ny njn '75,-1 31 : onya pSan 30 • an^j^a oipan «•?«: 'inn nan 38 : ^hm^s nWn ni5ten n«3 s^ t^Dvn nnn 35 . vn^f va^ao 34 j wh^i nb^ac e'k a^ni d^d^id 1 This is the construct state of the noun [.'X nothing, which form is used at the end of a sentence or clause. 62 IKSEPARABLE PREPOSITIONS. \- T I <• ' On account of what ? ' V. e. Wherefore 1 ^ Supply ' There is . . .' -^ See 74, Ofo. <^ ' On me [be] the blame.' See 71, 3. « Poetic (2nd sing, fern.) and pausal form. / See 73, 2. Write in Hebrew 1. The camp of our adversaries is before tlie city. 2. Tliy fig-tree is opposite our oak. 3. The Egyptian slave is at the side of the king's throne. 4. There is no God besides thee. 5. There is no other but him. 6. Thy husband said unto them, Who are ye ? 7. The God of heaven and earth (79, 4) hath given unto us life. 8. The king's seer did not listen to her. 9. Balak said unto him. What good hath thy God done unto thee ? (cf. 15, above). 10. That city is near Q>V) the Great Sea. 11. My adversary fell upon me. 12. Her husband was angry with (against) her. 13. What has the king of Egypt de- termined concerning us 1 14. Great fear has fallen upon them. 15. Woe to you ! 16. Great is the mourning over him. 17. The faith- fulness of our God is great, (even) unto the heavens. 18. This Beth- lehemite went as far as the upper gate of Jerusalem. 19. The day is darkness around us. 20. The mountains are round about Jeru- salem. 21. Our adversaries round about us are very many. 22. This is the covenant between us and you. 23. These high mount- ains are between them, and that good land. 24. I was behind her. 25. They were behind you. 26. The king of Israel pursued after us as far as our camp. Inseparable Prepositions. 102. As is indicated by their name, the three ' inseparable pre- positions ' 3, I, ?, are only found in close connection with another particle or word. 3- is derived from n?a house, and means in, among, hy, with, when (in general statements of time) etc. 3 is contracted from JS thMS, so, and means as, so, like, according to, when (in. precise, statements of time), , aiowf (approx- imatively) etc. ? is shortened from. "^^, and means to, for, etc. i 1 Though 7 mostly marks the dative, and may be used in certain periphrases for the genitive (80, 3 a, and Note ; 153, Note), it is (1) also, improperly, employed by Aramaising writers as the sign of the accusative ; see Jer. 40 ; 2 ; Lam. 4:5; Job 5 : 2. (2) It sometimes marks the agent, after passive verbs, as Est. 5 : 12. INSEPARABLE PREPOSITIONS. 63 103. The rules^ for the punctuation of these prepositions are the following : — 1. They regularly take simple sh«wa. B. a. *B3 in my mouth, B'^3 like fire, *pb to whom ? 2. Before another simple sh^wa, their own is changed to Hir^q (30). And if the second one stands under ', it wholly disappears. _ Examples are Hf? with a kid, m^jS Ukehoney, h^pph for a fool. Again, inn?3 becomes first inn»3 and finally in'")''? in Jericho (of. 69, 4). 3. Before the composite sh'was, they take the corresponding simple vowel-sound (11). Thus, nS3 like a lion, n^^"3 in truth, iSnS [lo-h«li] with a disease. 4. Before the tone, they sometimes take Qam^z. Obviously, only a monosyllable, or a dissyllable accented on the penult, can fulfil what is required; e. g. nj? in this, nVJ^/or ever. But we also find ^E'^ like a tempest, D'l? for blood, according' to rule 1. 5. Before the Article, they first extrude the ^, then take its place and vowel-point ; but ? does this less frequeatly. Examples are tJ^S^ to the king, "I'VCI like the grass (or hay), in? in the mountain,— iaaUad of ^^^H^ &c. : but' Di»n3 as [it is] to-day (73, 2). Obs. (3) So weak is X in its consonantal power, that when these prepositions are connected with D'rf^^ God, D'jhS Lord or lords, the N and its vowel- sound regularly merge in the preposition's vowel, which is sometimes thereby lengthened, as.in a''CI?N^, ^JIKS ; hence also nin»3 {i!S,,Obs. 2, a). So, too, the common verbal form "ibNl? to say, or saying, is for 'VS^'^. Observe (6) the phrase: DJ^) '?i'na What (is there) to me and you? i. e. What have I to do with you ? Regarding the combination of these inseparable prepositions with suffixes, see the paradigm. Exercise 15. ^7lp he reigned. njpJ possession, Ni^P fulness, what pJO portion, lot ruled- inheritance fills lir again, still, yet naJj he sat, sat I'sri he delights 3^ father DiB' whip down, dwelt J'Sp pleasure, de- DS mother JpJ? bridle |i]J5 Canaan Ught in love ; one be- ia, ia ba«k Oi3 cup 2 \\-\\$ lord, master loved ^'p? fool "lb prince tikis' tribe; rod ^\h Levi 11 multitude. tDii joiest n^^ri. reproach fjS also, even Vin sand 1 Compare, the rules for pointing the conjunction Waw, 69. 2 In Seripture;' thepiuraf *^1>; may mean my lord{\^, 2 d) or my Q«i, 19 : 2), while *5"1N signifies the Lord. 64 IHSEPARABLE PREPOSITIONS. Transcribe and translate '^i-iJi ne'e t'r|Ti'"ma5 na^xna i»'tj4 jnja nyns Diss DW3 n3n8 :Dnn3 lian '7ip7 tSKity^s nn Di*n h^i nS 14 '/Nin Dnsa rns^ n'? 13 .. ^3 nin^ ny 12 j •n'7»n pxi7 {nin^p *ai6 : iiynSxa nijf |*N 15 : oniiif iii'i'iifs 19 :Ybyp3 jw^D^nSxn *fjia3 pxis : Qyn-Ssa !inb3 £332''? 23 :"nnS 13^22 jnwn n^y3n''^»S2i j^^d!id3 -.v : • T : V /v - T -: - - • : I IV : jitoS {ni*DSiy nBin24 jpN3 n'?m hb'D |ni iih"'hr\ T I - T T - : V I V |T T T -; r V I - T . .. _ VpN27 jD^Ji^3t«V *3iix 3N26 t nxi'^toi p>«T mn*'? 25 I •• • : V T - T T T ; I V IT T T - ^^30 j^t^ ^-in^ ni-iS *JN29 .nn nrh p«28 jvsjn Dn3 I : ••:■;■-; v v t I •• P v i" v t v't^rh nto-ntt3n 82 • a^i 3k r^h va 31 : nS*'? "nS-tiN Di* V T V - : T '• T T T P •■ T :iT I : p - 35 J ha'-i&^i phn w'p-nts 34 j n^nSxn sj'^n 'n'?! Vna 33 " T : . : I V I- T - • v: it • Kt t y\!2rh :in» d^dS t5iB'36 ."t^bs o'^iyS liy urh-va phn ft -;r VJv - : T : v t P •* f v i- D*3n msin^i Sn"ie>*38 .nixn ^'p-nis? :d^':)*D3 uS i33a'i See 88, 1. ' See 46, Ofo. 2. c See 91, III ci. <« Plural : 'among the gods. "^ 'As is. ..so is...' / ' I am as thou art ' &c. i' See 87, 1 6. A See 80, 3 a. * See 80, 3 J. * See 83, 1. ' ' The earth is Jehovah's...' ' I am my beloved's, . .' &c. '" Jer. 8:9. " Eccl, 9 : 6. Write in Hebrew 1. David ruled in Judah. 2. The God of heaven delights in trutL 3. Thy blood (be) on thy head (Of. 4 above). 4. The righteous de- lights in his God. 5. The prince sat in the gate of his city. 6. His delight (see Exer. 13, no. 84) is in my law. 7. The delight of fools is in the calamity of the just. 8. My delight is in the law and the com- mandments of my God (see 98). 9. In my dream, behold (there was) PREPOSITIONS. 65 a man with (=:and) the jawbone of an ass (80, Note) in his hand. 10. The Lord dehghts in him. 11. We are like you (see 19, above). 12. In his latter end, he perished like a fool. 13. Who said such things (said like these : cf. 103, c[)1 14. The light is hke the dark- ness (cf. 19, above). 15. Who heard (anj^thmg) lilie this ? (See 63, Ohs., and 103, d). 16. There is no bread in the city for this great multitude. 17. He has (there is to him) a heart like a stone. 18. We have no inheritance (there is not to us an inheritance) in the land. 19. They have no son or daughter (cf. 31, above). 20. Our God is a refuge for us. 21. The shepherd gave to the man a sign. 22. What have they to do with us ? 23. Who is like thee in Judah ? 24. Behold, the heaven is Jehovah's (belongs to Jehovah). Thk Pkepositions n{? and ^V : the Prefix ns. 104. The Prepositions ^9 and ^^ (or '^^), both of which mean with, together with, take doubling Dagesh in the second consonant, on their assuming suffixes. (See the paradigms). This Dagesh ia compensative (19, 1), since Dl^ comes from the verb DD^ to collect, and T\\^ is shortened from njjj nearness (50, 1). Ols. In Joshua, Kings, Jeremiah and Ezekiel, this 'preposition' n{! &c. 105. Quite diiferent in sense and use is ri{< or 'r\^, a prefix, mostly joined with (a) a direct and definite accusative ; rarely (b) with an indefinite ; sometimes (c) it marks the nominative of passive verbs ; seldom is it employed {d) as a mere sign of emphasis, to mean self, same, as for, &c. Except in this last case, it is incapable of being rendered into English by a suitable equivalent. Examples are (a) SlP'vriK HDN '?S^b'.* Israel loved Joseph ; (b) Ex. 2 : 1 ; Prov. 13 : 21 ; Isa. 33 : 19 ; Job 13 : 25,' '&c. ; (c) y^NHTlfJ p.'pn': ^niJ? 'qN but by lot shall the land be divided, Num. 26 : 53 ; cf. v. 60, also 2 Kings 18 : 30 ; (d) 2 Kings 6 : 5. Note. Determinate accusatives, that may take nx before them (for, unless the object be a personal pronoun, not in the q^^-form [176, ff.], the sign is often dropped) are : — (1) Proper names, (2) suffixed nouns, (3) nouns or adject- ives which have the article, (4) nouns in the construct state, (5) nouns marked by numerals [145 flf.], (6) all pronouns, except JMf the interrogative. Obs. The accusatival prefix is usually repeated before each of a series of ob- jects, as in Gen. 1 : 1 ; 1 Kings 1 : 10, but not always, as in 1 Kings 1 : 44. E 66 rsEPOSiTioNS. 106. The particles ID, n^n behold, 111? still, yet, *« where? ^3 all, as well as the affirmative ^^ and the negative I'S, likewise take suf- fixes. Thus, *35n hehold melhere I am! >[Vi)l. he is {was) still, DJ^K iliey are{ox •were) not; 0553 ye all &e. Cf. 129. Exercise 16. HjisS. work, reward 'hv Eli n^B' he sent ni3^! mighty one, hero y'i dispute, con- 10B' he kept 131? he crossed over % for, because ; if, troversy Di7E'5!!< Absalom 'H living, alive when: that (co?^'.) Plpl silver, money DS^ he judged 13t he remembered ns here TV T ... - _ . T - - T - - " T ■ I IT ■ '.i--i • IT I : • IT v; V * T -.. : T : V • T : • • : t ; - v t : : TiriK 'r\''^'i nan n j iurix ir-px lo : ^n^J &)D|n mn 9 T : •• T ; • V - T • •• • - : V ;v T V : • s'? m^n^ 15 J nx-Tn n^iitsn r'nxn-nN do'? ini Di^i'?^ T ; - T - P V IT T V •■" T I - T V " v: ^p"i*n-nN n^y Qi'^K'iNie jariNnSx nin^. n^va^nx ^p^ rhff^Tk^i : Dnx nai nin^ 17 : iay '^N'lb'* B'^n-'^di N^n 20 :ninDi»3 n^m Dy^nS nin^ np'p^danNw xm_ {■^n^a i3n22 j o'piy-ny ^yx2i ♦ n^nSx im np^ *3 iiarx ^iiniy 26 J ^tey niy 25 • DariN Dan 24 • nn ns; ^an 23 :*D*»n Dniy29 j^n 'nniy28 ;Dnx«:3 iiWy^? jptn nvn T IT I ; ■ IT : • : i't^ I T T *rina nxT 33 ♦ n|;x 32 . ^^ 31 ♦ av^n ^aay ns i^K'.; 30 !iib 36 J nVa vn* n^yyjs 35 . -liajo * *nx nin^ 34 . * cnx T •-. T '.. T T " -; r • : ' T : t : ni»n ni3*D''»n « See 103, 4. s See 63, Ofo. « Cf. Matt. 1 : 23. <« See Exercise 1, 1, Translation. «See72, 1. /See 55. ? 'to himself for...' a This form Is the plural of the adjective,— not the noun life (143, .2, c). « These forms con- tain the preposition, not the prefix (104 Oh.) : they should not be imitated in composition. COMPOUND PREPOSITIONS. 67 IVflte in Hebrew 1 . The fool went with the multitude. 2. My father is with me. 3. We have a controversy with you (Of. 1, above). 4. Who is with them ? 5. Your reward (93, 4) is with him. 6. I am not with thee. 7. The old man took his heifer and his ass (105, Obs.) with him. 8. Jehovah remembered us and his covenant with us. 9. Israel has not kept (pre/.) my covenant with him. 10. The seer heard him in the garden with my father. 11. This man beard (pre/.) the voice of his God. 12. David remembered (pre/.) Jehovah in his distress. 13. He is not with you. 14. Thou art not innocent in this thing. 15. Thou art not the prince's daughter. 16. Ye are not Pharaoh's shepherds. 17. She is not beautiful. 18. Here we are ! 19. Behold she is (Behold her) in the court with the damsel. 20. Behold, I am (Behold me) with you for ever (even to eternity). 21. She is still in the land of the living. 22. Thou art still very frail. 23. They are still poor. 24. They are all sick. 25. Whom (87, 1, c) did the shepherd pursue ? The Pkeposition t^: Compound Prepositions. 107. The preposition ]^^from, out of, &c. is thus combined with other words : — 1. The I mostly ^ assimilates itself with ordinary consonants suc- ceeding it, which then assume Dagesh compensative [19, 1], as HJ^ip from death, for Hip'IP. But, from a consonant which (a) has sh^wa and (&) is not a mutable, the Dagesh may be dropped ; as nyipp at the end, but HSP of fruit. 2. Further, before an aspirate, t- becomes -[9], as ^^'^ from fire. But, before strong aspirates like ^ or n, — sometimes remains, as in ^Vn'Q from a thread. 3. Before Yod with sh«wa (!), the t and the r are dropped, and * quiesces in the t- of the t*? ; thus ni-liTip out of Judah. 4. Before the Article, \Q either (a) becomes P [cf. 2, above], or (6) is written fully, with Maqqeph [44]. Thus, from the man may be expressed by ^^^^ or t5''«np counsel, purpose draw near JJ garden B^ab to clothe self, Jnn to slay, kill ISC' to break n;x whither be clothed i ns), nKih why 1 Vj? yoke m-} to rage 7E'3 to stumble 1/1} to vow 2^^ to love n>ln3 a virgin nip^ll? deep sleep "l^^avow Hp^B' meditation D}U to leave, for- nttp?D war, battle DB' there ni^V now ; therefore sake Di- t t jt "iiton-mi9 ipm:h 'nni nin liifD nStii 'rha mn^i« "! V T ; [t T T T : : T : ^ t j)- v: t ; * *n^nK-n23 23 . « *rn3 nns 22 ; ^S^a ii'^is '7y-nN ^n^iasj' • : ^- T r • r T • : iv t ) v ^v ^ v • : - r • ■ ■ : - T V T - I- T ■ - - T I^V T Di7ri26 {"''rnnN IX wyB'""?iniin ^S^725 t^-nnx D\'-i'7K -: ■ : IT T T AT\ -:r 3) : IT •• t it • v: nin* hsp^ ^)it2^ x'728 J Q3n!in3 sini ^win27 . ^pij^hn T : I : : IT iv •■ - y w - ■ :■>- t ■ : i- t '?J3n-m3o 5Miii 'r[':jip-nK *j^y»B^'^9 no^D iinp':? n'^i - V MT - I: I V • : ^ r T ): IT : : IT T\T 'ITT T T :iT IT T : • - |: ir jpxn '^y^s !i3in d^sns* '.mn* TK'y?3*!i':'n5-n2288 j°qi^;i I V IT T - •■ : |T -J- - r : I \v -: r :it -i<':5 39 J ' Dfinp'? -• sn^N-JiK 38 : -hii DriypB' n':' 37 r ^n;^^ 41 tTT^niifa mry^o jD^n^Kn *3 nan *nx Dnn'?2J''Dm J IV : • :^ T ■ -,■; |T ■ T •• • V : - : v - V IT V ■ : : J- T " See p. 70, foot-note. » See 80, 3. ' See 55. "^ See 19, 4. « See Note a, ill Exercise 17. -'' See 113, 3. 9 'such [a thing as] this...' : see 63, Obs., and 103, 4. '' See 87, 1, b and c. < For ''J?riD3 : see 50, 1. * See 87, 2, J. ' See 86, Bern. 3. "> Supply the substantive verb. ™ See 110, e. See 74 Ofo. p Pausal form. a Mark here the efiect of pause on the vo- calisation, first, of the noun itself (see 45, c), and consequently of the Article (71, II. 4) : cf. the form in 27, above. '' '...my gods (idols).' « See 112, 2. Write in Hebrew 1. This woman is very old. 2. The virgin took to herself (to her) 74 THE VERB. [some] of tte honey. 3. This beaiitiful damsel is clothed [with] wis- dom. 4. Why didst thou not go with us ? 5. Whom (105, Note, 6) dost thou love ? 6. I have forsaken (pref.) the commandment of my master (see p. 63, foot-note 2). 7. We have vowed a vow to Jehovah our God. 8. I vowed (pref.) this vow before (108, a) Jehovah my God. 9. If thou hadst not forsaken me, / would not have forsaken thee. 10. / also (Also 7) have forgotten you, because ye have for- gotten me. 11. We have broken (pref) the yoke of our adversaries. 12. We have slain their young men in the war. 13. We remember (pref) our covenant with you. 14. We have heard that our adver- saries are departed from (108, c) the walls of the city. 15. If thou hadst not drawn near to us, we would have perished in the wilder- ness. 16. The righteous delight in the law of their God. 17. We have heard that another king reigns in that land. 18. Wherefore have ye made (cut) this covenant with them ? 19. We know not whither they have gone. 20. Ye know not who have fallen in this battle. 21. Pharaoh's shepherds pursued after us. 22. litheyhsA not oppressed us, we would not have slain them. 23. The walls of Jerusalem are laid waste. 24. Our adversaries have devised (pref) this evil counsel against ns. 25. These young men took to them- selves [some] of the money which [was] in the house. 26. Ye have taken our cows, but we have not taken your asses. The Imperfect of the Verb. 115. In the Imperfect, fragments of the personal pronouns are prefixed to the verbal root (c£ 112) ; when this is not sufficient to distinguish forms, another fragment is sometimes affixed. But not always ; cf. in the singular, the 3rd fern, with the 2nd masc, and in the plural, the 2nd and 3rd persons fera. In Gen. 30 : 38, I Sam. 6 : 12, Dan. 8 : 22, the form npbp! is used for the sake of distinction. 116. (1) If the Qal perfect ends in a, then the imperfect ends in ; but (2) if the perfect does not end in a, then the imperfect does ; so too (3) do verbs whose second or third letter is an aspirate. Tims (1) -IDB' to keep, becomes "ityp) ; (2) |P{ to he oU, |bD to he little, be- come ti3t!, W^^. ; (3) ^Hf to ash, y^3 to swallow, become !?NB'»^ V^y.. Obs. a. Some verbs (mostly intransitive) have a in both the perfect and im- perfect, as POO to be sweet, Piiir??. b. A few take -n- in the imperfect; DE'; THE IMPERFECT OF THE VERB. 75 to sit, ini to give, become 3ti'.1, JP|^ c. Others assume imperfects both in and a ; of these, in general, the latter is intransitive, the former transitive ; thus, IVpJ to cut off, to reap, but "IVl?? to be short. Bern. The final o of the imperfect is but ' tone-long,' just as in the im- perative (120) and the construct infinitive (123). Hence, (1) it is seldom— and only by way of exception— written fully with 1 : see 12, 19, 23 &c. in Exercise. (2) Before Maqqeph (see 44, Ohs. 2) it changes to Qame'z HatAph (24, 8, and 25). (3) It is destroyed by the additions i-r and -1, which take the tone (see Para- digm I.), though this, together with the o, returns in pause (49, 2). A similar principle regulates imperfects in a ; see 29, 31, 34 &o. in Exercise. 117. By the Imperfect, cases such as these may be expressed : — 1. The simple future, as being still undone : bjP) DSB'? njn? Jehovah shall judge the world, Ps. 9 : 9. 2. An act or state viewed as repeated or continuing ; '?X prfHTID where- fore crie.1t thou to me ? Ex. 14 : 15 : cf . Josh. 9 ; 8. Cf. also the name assumed by God Himself, Ex. 3 : 14, to signify continuous existence (46, Note). 3. A command, prohibition, wish, or permission, a. A command is express- ed thus, especially after an imperative : see Prov. 7 : 4. h. A prohibition must always be expressed by the imperfect ; see 121. c. A wish (in the first or the third person) is mostly expressed by the imperfect : the verb in this case gen- erally comes first, as )'.p^i1 J'DE'fl let the earth hear. 4. Habit, wont, or reiteration ; as ■133B'; Tn3 tliey dwell alone Jer. 49 : 31 ; □ 07 VJPPI ayj!? to a hungry one thou refusedst bread, Job 22 : 7 ; Di' *JliN ]Hir\1,1 bv me they seek daily, Is. 58 : 2. 5. Indefinite or uncertain occurrence ; hence, with '3 in the sense of when- eoer. Lev. 25 : 14 ; D^^ if, whenever (in futm-e contingencies), as K? njil^ D^ -Hr~ip55'.'' if Jehovah keep not a city, Ps. 127 : 1. 6. A general saying ; hence the frequent use of the imperfect in proTerbs, &c. as -Ipfip.* D*3-1Jj| D.'O stolen waters are sweet, Prov. 9 : 17. 7. Actions regarded as still unaccomplished, whether viewed in themselves, or in relation to others ; thus the imperfect is used after "IS lest, Dp^ not yet, 1D1D3 before that ; after the prohibitive particles "^X, K? (121) ; after telle particles such as )i?p7 in order that &c. 8. Many forms of the ' potential ' mood : riB'S nSB'nn can a woman forget? Is. 49 : 15 ; naN^sn n3B'J:i na^ why should the work cease? Neh. 6 : 3. 9. Obligation, diity ; thiis h^'^h) rWV*-m what Israel ought to do, I Chr. 12:32.1 Obs. The imperfect is also used with reference to past actions, after cer- tain particles ; as, Then (t^) y)ake Solomon. But see also II Chr. 15 : 2. 1 For a fuller discussion of the perfect and imperfect, see Driver on The Use of the Tenses in Hebrew, chaps. IL, III. Though substantially the same idea may often be expressed by both forms alike, we must not thence conclude that the two are fundamentally identical in their mode of representing a concep- tion, yet that which always luis been may also be regarded as that which always 76 THE VERB. 118. Notes on the Paradigm of the imperfect : — (a) Third Peismi. The prefixed ' was formerly the 1 of X-IH. i As in the perfect, the appended -1 is a contraction from the fuller D-in ; in this case, as in that of the 2nd pi. masc, the ending 1-1 is often found, especially in pause. The feminine prefixes its distinctive R. (J) Second Person. The prefix PI, of course, is from niJX and PX : the affix ' of sing, fern., is from the old form 'PN (90) ; nj- or rf- is a fragment of the plural pronoun n^n. (c) First person. This does not need distinguishing a/formatives, — the p«- formatives N, 3, being enough to mark the difference. Exercise 19. nril)? gift, oiFering ins to fear 'q SB* to pour out VlKti' unseen world, pns be righteous pit to sprmkle ygB' to be satisfied death, the grave nan a cry, shout 13^' to be drunk a!?") to be hungry i'Tia?? destruction HB'O to anoint n;^!-1j;, *ClO"1i; how IgB to visit pa"! to cleave to Nia: prophet long? nt3|l to trust, confide 1^|^ wool VDJ to sow 1-11I troop, band 107 to learn n^'l? fat cattle 33"5 to ride njj slay, sacrifice TQV leaf 7D swift (horse) 33B' to lie down n3J. a sacrifice n^S sprout, flourish "IS'lK' trumpet - I : * T - V IT : • V- : • ■ ( iv will he. The prophets and poets, especially, largely availed themselves of this power of presenting the same idea in different lights ; hence the frequent trans- itions from one form of the verb to the other, which are found so perplexing. 1 V1\ to know, "h) to hear, instead of J(!I), "h) (187, A) present us with like instances of *, at the beginning of a word, used as the substitute of 1. THK IHPEEFECT. 77 V ( : V V T I V /-J '^ V : V - v - : v V /V - T - • T - : V T T T - • IT : V ; - : V - - - I : V t t it ''T^ 'nDK'n lE'N ^nna ns'iss j»n;v5^j? «'? ji'^iKi vjv - V I I IT : - : • T : • v iv •• •• :°^y^3 iih t^rhh) vh^: ^h nsiB' bip^o tnan^ '?p-Sy IT : ■ v\¥ - : ^ T : • t | it ; • |- o See 117, 3, c. » See 72, 2. « See 101, Obs. a gee 87, 2, b. « Job 21 : 4. / See 112, 2. (? See 55. '' See 116, iJcnJ. * Pausal form. * See 83, 1. ' See 80, 3. » See 117, 6. " Bzek. 34 : 3. » Jer. 42 : 14. Write in Hebrew 1. The wicked (man) shall not come near to me. 2. Let tlie kmg (117, 3, c) be clothed with (ace. ; see 35, iu Ex. above) righteoiisness. 3. Jehovah shall pour out His Spirit upon us. 4. Then shall the earth be at rest from war (see 55). 5. May thy cry come near (117, 3, c) before the' God of heaven. 6. Jehovah hears (listens to) me (i. e. always will hear, as He always has heard : see p. 75, foot-note, and c£ the Psalms, passim). 7. Let the priest sprinkle some (see Exer. 17, Note a) of the blood upon the roll. 8. Obey (.Thou shalt hearken to : see 117, 3, a) the voice of thy master. 9. Cleave (Thou shalt cleave) to (cf. 34, above) Jehovah thy God. 10. Let all the earth fear before (from the face of : see 108, c) Jehovah. 11. (pref ) The blood thou shalt pour out upon the ground. 12. Thou visitest us (ace.) with thy goodness : we are satisfied (i. e. as often as thou visitest, we shall be satisfied ; cf. Ps. 104 : 27). 13. /shall be king over you instead of my father, -and ye will have rest from this war. 14. How can I be righteous before my God ? (cf 7, above). 15. Let all the righteous trust in their God. 16. These virgins will ride on their asses. 17. Your adversaries will so^v, but they will not reap. 18. Ye (f.) shall not ride (Not ye shall ride) upon my asses, 19. If 73 THE IMPERATIVE. ye do not (will not) keep this m}' covenant (86, e), I shall not listen to your cry (93, 4). 20. Ye will sow, but we shall reap. 21. How long will ye not sacrifice to me 1 ' 22. Why are ye pursuing after me ? 23. Why do ye (habitually) break my commandments ? 24. Ye shall remember them no more (cf. 21 above) for ever (to eternity). 25. Why should we not dwell (117, 8) in this good land ? 26. (pref.) This man shall we anoint king (for a king ; cf. 11, above) over us. The Imperative, Cohortative, and Jussive, 119. In Hebrew, the Imperative is evidently but a shortened form of the Imperfect, which likewise provides for forms not found in the Imperative (117, 3). N. B. A useful rule, based on the similarity of form between the Imperfect and Imperative, and holding everywhere except in the Hiphil (164), is this : — From the Imperfect, to find the Imperative, reject preformatives,-^and con- versely. Thus, from 7bpri reject the Fl ; 7bi? is the Imperative. Ohs. 1. Of two imperatives, oombmed by the conjunction Waw, the former commonly expresses a condition, and the latter the result or consequence of its fulfilment ; as ' Believe and live,' i. e. If you believe, you will hve, — or. Believe, that you may live. See 25, 26 in Exercise. Obs. 2. Imperatives are often followed by Imperfects, which, however, indic- ate command ; see 117, 3. 120. Both the Imperfect and the Imperative may either lengthen or contract some forms. (a) The lengthening is effected by adding n— , but this only to forms which end in consonants, viz. the 2nd sing. masc. of the Imperative, and the 1st and 3rd persons of the Imperfect, — though very rarely with the last : in these, the final vowel of the word, if tone-long, may be shortened, or even lost ; but it returns in Pause. B. G. ibt or ITiat [zok-rah] remember ; "ibK'K I shall keep, npp^^ let me heep, but npb^^ftt'. This lengthened form is often called 'energic' or 'cohortative,' and signifies desure or wish ; its fl— is cognate with a like sign which is joined with nouns, and marks a tendency towards a place (209, c). See 7, 13, 16, 19 &c., also 37 ff. in Exercise. (6) The so-called ' Jussive ' form is similar in sense to the Cohortative, but difiers in its being shortened (when this can be done) from ordinary forms. It is not found in the first person, or the plural number. This contracted form occurs (1) m common verbs, only in the Hiphil (171), as Tippl he mil hide, but "iBPi let him hide ; (2) in both the Qal and the Hiphil of'Ayin Waw' verbs (19i, 8) ; and (3) in all the imperfects of verbs ' Lamed He ' (197J. THE IMPBEATIVE. 79 Obs. This short form of the Imperfect, besides [1] its jussive use, [2] may be combined with "7S to signify dissuasion see (121, a), and [3J is usually joined with ' Waw Coaversive ' in continued narrative (162, 4). 121. All kinds of prohibitions are expressed, not by imperatives, but by 'imperfect' forms. Thus: — a. 1Bp)?"7S!t do not lament, — spokeu eutreatingly. b. ']'Bpt)'iO thou shalt not lament, — spoken with autliority. Obs. The particles XJ" pray, '3 I (or we) beseech thee — the latter always followed by 'jhx or 'j'ix — emphasise commands or entreaties : see 11, 12, 18 in Exercise, and cf. Bxer. 13, Note g. Exercise 20. 3P3 to write <^'PZ birth-right Yn^^ to wash (the )3? to make bricks fnat memorial, re- 13!? to sell body) (109, Obs. c) membrance Y^\> to gather pHT to be far off, f\'yi> to bum, bake "Igp book '^1? garden ; Carmel distant bricks n|Pl, thi} hither nia to fiee i HST to kill, murder n&ip burning nVpp prayer ^itp to ask 35| to steal 5^13 to bend, bow TJ? strength IHtt to be clean njjS brick (67, Obs. 1) "rp^ to kneel, bless It- ; IT : • : ■ V - -TV : '"''^ rin-^3 nbt & : nN-n n^^n-nx 'Q^h 'inna * : nssa J HNT-Sy \i'?N ^ ^"p-n^si 7 } nin^ ^nito lyisS ' r^m-'h-^^^ s " V~ v; • TIT T ; V I ; i - j~ z t - ■ r ; J nan * iin^p lo • ''ha :3"ip 9 : <> ii^br N^iani Siniin ^anx-nx » T 1" : ( • IT •• - I : I : \T - : t - t -; v 14 :*n'?*3n nytoB'is tn^r xi-^y«32'i2 : ^'^m w-yasj' ^ • T': t;. t*j' *|: T-: "HK n'lSto 16 : smn* ynt ry 't^:h 15 : ^yj:^^!! ^ nnN ^np T : • I . . . I" . . . |y -. ^T - - 1 : nn'?EJ> 19 : ^t Ki-n'?^' is t pB^n-nx niai7 t *S ^niba T : • hv T T - : I V iv - v • : ■ i- v I : it : nn-^N '^Nnb'.^-'^rnN h^ pp n'pK' 20 . 'rn-m hii -nn!i23 : ^nx Tinni nn^322 jnnn !ii'?-n"i32i t^Sa-nan -: ••v!:f: t:t •; r t: v:-- m_^^ :nin; Dytt nix '^'^-W 24 tnnin^ PF'^^^I^ 1 In writing the exercises, the student should avoid using 7^\?, which is very rarely employed in Hebrew (only in Ps. 139 : 19 ; Job 13 : 15 and 24 : 14), though, on account of the strong and unchangeable nature of its consonants, it is most convenient for a paradigm of the verb. 80 THE IMPERATIVE. 80 ' : py -i3TJ;i 'lyS-Sxi " Ti^a-ny nin^ Sjifjpri-SK 29 . vSx Dnjp nnpn x"? 34 : vSn ytotrn-KV 33 ♦ nin Dipsa *pJ nnipx 37 . i- 3b;ift ^i'7 36 . ? n^nn «'? 35 : nna » Dri^ri'?^'?) nin^S ' nnan 39 : -nay nni « nnn^: 88 . D^iy nna ds*? T - T : : • I iT • • : t : : ■ t • : . t • T ^- -: r T : : V ( v iv - v I : t : : v f. '...this [as] a memorial...' * See 32, 5. « See 114, OJs. 1. <* Job 7:7. « See 112, 2. / See 19, 4. ? Pausal forms : see 49, 2. * See 29, /., 2. »■ Vocative. * See 72, 1. ' See 119, Obs. 1. ™ '...exceedingly, and tlo not for ever. . .' " See 63, Obs. « ' their gods.' p See 22, 1. « ' Let us...' »• See 73, 2. » Supply ' them,' ' '...our Maker : ' see 93, 3. Write in Hebrew 1. Break (pref.) the yoke of the king of Egypt. 2. Pour ye (pref,) this oil upon his head. 3. Pray, rule thou over us. 4. Make (cut) ye with us an everlasting covenant. 5. Judge this people in right- eousness. 6. Pour out thy good Spirit (76, 3) upon us all (106). 7. Sow, and [thou shalt] reap (119, Obs. 1). 8. Pursue after these young men. 9. Be ye (fern.) clothed [with] wisdom. 10. Sprinkle, pray, some of the water upon my hands. 11. Cleave to Jehovah. 12. Send (thou) the damsel with them. 13. Send ye all the people Idther unto us. 14. Do not write this in that book. 15. Let not the righteous flee from (the face of) the wicked. 16. Do not bow before the gods of the nations. 17. Trust ye not in an arm of flesh. 18. Pray, do not C^J"^^) listen to their voice. 19. Do not send this messenger to the king. 20. Do not ask this thing from me. 21. Let no man (Let not a man) sell his birthright. 22. Let no man flee from (the face of) his Maker (93, 3, and 95, 3rd. sing. h). 23. Do not fear (from) him. 24. Let us not sell all our asses. 25. Let us all obey the voice of our master. 26. Pray, let us send and ga- ther the people of the city to this place. 27. Pray, let me not hear thy voice. 28. Let me bow and kneel before my Maker. THE INFINITIV£S. 81 The Infinitives. 122. ' Infinitives ' are really verbal nouns, expressing tlie most general idea of the verb. Hence, they may be employed as subjects or as objects, and in the absohcte or construct state (79). The Ab- solute Infinitive is the more rare ; it is unchangeable in form. The Construct is of frequent and important use : except in the Hiphil, its form agrees with that of the Imperative (see the Paradigm). Grammarians who wish to mark this portion of the verb as being in reality a noun, call it the 'substantive' mood ; its nature as such is more evident in other languages, as Gr. to Aeyetv, Ger. das sprechen. 123. The Qal infinitives (163, 164) both regularly end in o ;<2) thus, absolute li'^?', construct 10^ to keep. (X) Less common forms of the infinitive are (a) 33B' to lie, (b) HN"!''. const. riX"1^ to fear, nj^^'J [do5-qa/i.] io cleave to, HPpn to pity, (c) m'Z\ to be able, and perhaps {d) tj'ljp Ezek. 36 : 5. C2) In nearly all the other ' conjugations ' also, the absolute infinitives end in an ; this vowel being, like the whole form, quite unchangeable, is mostly written with 1 (26, 2). On the other hand, o of the construct, though long, is changeable, and seldom takes the 1 (cf. 116, Bern.). This HoMm of the con- struct form, (a) before Maqqeph, becomes Qame'z-hatfiph ; thus D'5"'^aE' to shed blood : (b) and when a pronoun-suffix is assumed, the short o is in gen- eral retracted, as in ^"131? thy crossing ; but D???-'!' your eatiTig. Instances of the legg common forms with suffixes are Tai^p her lying down, in>tT. to fear him. 124. Viewed (I) as a noun, the construct of the Qal may (1) be governed by a preposition or other word ; (2) it may be followed by a genitive, and this either (a) subjective or (b) objective ; (3) it may take suffixes. (II) Viewed as a verb, if transitive it takes an object after it : such an accusative may be (1) a noun, (2) a suffix-pronoun, or (3) a separate pronoun. Thus, n>|J»^-n^5 '^llptsn Sl'lb ^nnx after the king had burnt the roll, Jer. 36 : 27 ; here, the infinitive, as a noun, is both governed by the preposition, and is in the construct state before the king, which in this case may be viewed as a subjective genitive ; while, as a verb, it governs the roll. Other examples are the following : 1*Vi?0"n^ QJIViJS when ye reap (or in your reaping) the har- vest ; -UpX njn^ riNIJB'a m Jehovah's hating (or because Jehovah hated) us Deut. 1 :27 (cf. also 9': 28) ; *ri'« QipXT. their fearing me Is. 29 :13. F 82 THE INFINITIVES. Hem. 1. Sometimes a passive rendering must be attributed to active forms of tlie Infinitive : see Est. 7 : 4. Bern. 2. ' To keep ' may be expressed in Hebrew (1) by the absolute infinitive I'lDB' ; (2) more frequently, the simple construct is employed, "fOp ; but still more frequently (3) the construct with the preposition > is used, "iopb ; or (4) "ibi^ |i?D7 (in order to keep). Bern. 3.' 'N"ot to keep' may be expressed by (1) ibp ipl???, or (2) ib^p (lit. /roTO keqnng). Bern 4. ibB'? pX may mean (1) there is no one to heep, Ruth 4:4; (2) it is not lawful to keep. Est. 4:2; (5) it is impossible to keep, 2 Chr. 20 : 6 ; Ezra 9:15. 125. These uses of the Absolute Infinitive should be observed : — 1. Before the same verb in 2i finite form, it mostly gives the latter greater emphasis ; as "i^tPi li3J thou skalt certainly {thou must hy all means) remember, Deut. 7:18. A negative is usually placed between the finite form and the infinitive : see no. 3 1 in Exercise. Ohs. (a). In a few instances we find the construct used instead ; as JSTeh. 1 : 7. Ohs. (fi). The infinitive is not always of the same ' conjugation ' as the finite verb : thus, in 1 Sam. 2 : 16, the finite verb is Hiphil, the infinitive is Piel. 2. After the sams verb in a finite form, the absolute infinitive de- notes continuance ; as tiiSB' 133?'; he will be always acting the judge (he is always judge-judging). Gen. 19:9. Obs. The notion of eontuiuous increase (or decrease) is usually expressed by iji^n, following the leading verb, — that form being again succeeded by an adjec- tive, a participle, or an infinitive ; see Gen. 8 : 3, 5 ; 12:9; 26 : 13 ; 2 Sam. 3:1; 13 : 19 ; 16 : 5, 13 &c. Cf. 129, Obs. 1. 3. After a finite verb-form of quite another root, with which it is connected by the copulative ), it represents a finite verb similar to the other which precedes : as ail?) Tjp; nnfea nS.X the hind brought forth in the field, andforsooh (the young one), Jer. 14 ; 5: see also Judges 7 : 19. 4. Standing alone, the first word in a sentence, or a clause, it is (a) mostly used for the imperative, as in the fourth commandment, n-iB'n nV-ns li3|, Ex. 20 : 8 ; see also Is. 21:6; {b) less frequently for any other finite form required by the context, ■ as IJi? I?;) 79? ^'"i? they conceive sorrow, and bring forth iniquity, Job 15 : 35 ; see also Jer. 32 : 44 ; 2 Kings 4 : 43., Cf. the Latin 'historical infinitive.' 5. In the ' Hiphil,' the absolute infinitive occasionally becomes a noun or adjective (quite indeclinable), or an adverb ; as ^Wk^ rest, hWT\ prudence, Q3?'0 early, ^WVi much, great, many, ^Ki'D well, carefully, PD"7D far. THE INFINITIVES. 83 Jlxercise 21. f\Si to smito yn to break down, nriS to open laS to catch, cap- '?!iri to cease destroy 1tl3 to choose (3) ture "iBp to count ID'B' bribe Heats' oath fjXJ to commit ad- "109 number 7S65' asking *")?5 strange, for- ultery li^"} to dance, leap ^5J'B' to hate eign f\\i^ joy 7^71? thick darkness tStJ to haste n3| to deceive (3) Jin to kill 1p^' to watch 313 lying, false, HD dying, dead DPlE' to slay ^y knowing deceitful ns trap, snare 3''3S? ear of corn I : ' - T T ; IT T T V ■ : I vv/ - : •■":!- T - V ; - T IT : ■ I " : • - T • ,- : • *ii*3p ^ ny 6 : » ianS '';)'7teS ^ nnbnn s : "^jS^ n^S " Skb'^ fWB' nnK iri'ii'p nxv nnx tJ'*N-'?| nsy7 {-tip-, ny"i j^finiS'i triwb Dn^^y 'i^lp.B'.a :^^y3 pB''? "i;^n nin^s yn^ B'^x ^33 rxii th&y\ h^2 nm nx ^Sy s'npaio - •• • T I •• IT T : V : IT T •• - T - T I : • nx^': n^n 13 $ d;?-^3K' jy^S ^n\h im ^2 j d^v??"1^'^?'? t: t • t;*:*!::' it;t • r: inx ri'inah) mn^-nx nN-i*'?^DN-*3 "naya '^xb' '?[^ri^K jt -; r : T • V T ; • : • • ( at • '• " I v 17 {^^rv^x-nK iiinam iii^sy* Qa'ie tnin* ni^ia na ibB'S I • V J" : T ; :v- T T T . : : • v : ■ /TTIT T 'IT: • :i- T T.TT TT;* " TT-Jl" nx:y *innfia 20 . >^^ri'?N nin^-nx '"niry * nai yi 19 : 312 J : \r : ■ : I • it v: t : v ( " : t t t - r* -riN i"i;bJj')3!i'n3nN nin^ nnriNb d33 mn* ^n5 2i joyn : T • V : V T : j- -i r '• av t t : - t it t T : • : • : • : I /,:• r. t : v - : • - jt ■.. : - 24 J «n3 "inana m^toS '^b'x:* i6 n^a ay-' 23 • vDSB'toi t : • : VT : t : : • • : t - : it t : • T -t-t T • :|T T t:(TT|t jDDnx npa^ njjS'D^ri'^Ki nb ^DiiK28 . Dinx m-^s nbiD27 V : V I : • I T • T V : V • : I - r | r V " v; T • V T -: r : a ~ t : • - v i : : • t 84 THE INFINITIYKS. i):h nan »i : -^^hbn ^Sto '3 ^riy^' ^?^' ^° • ''^"^pi^'^'?'' nan 34 jps]Nii 3J533 jnj'^fa^'^iSni s]iN3 32 ♦niaVj^'? jmn Di»n-nNnbT35 jjnx tDha^i '^l'3?''^T ^O^^l t^^'^ -nT 38 J '• y^an ^in-ma « niibB' 37 . mxan-Sa-nx » nba' 36 V 1* T rr V ^ •/ T T : • " T V T 40 : Dyn-p bs3 nann 39 j'n^SD^na^h^'pi^K nixn •?!? ittI' -t •■;- ~ \' T TT- T tj: ! inb ns^n nl'iib "iisa^ *pi £27 d^ « See 32, 5 and 7. '' Supply the verb to be. ' 'in asking '...'by loving.'... <* Sheba ; 2 Sam. 20 : 1 ff. « See 91, III. c. / ' but. . .'(see end of Vocabulary, Exercise 18). s ' in our remembering (when we remembered) Zion.' A 'Both their love and their hatred...' » 'thy leaving (that thou hast forsaken)...' : see also 32, 5. * 'When he opened [the book]...' Neh. 8 : 5. ' 'from Jehovah's loving (because Jehovah loved) you...' ^ ' by not keeping...' « See English Version of Exodus 21 : 8. " See 55, a. p See 125, 4, b. 9 See 125, 4, a. »• ' the month of ears of com (Abib), i. e. the month in which the ears become ripe. » See 73, 2. ' This word means what springs from grain that has fallen on the field during the harvest of the preceding year. Write in Hebrew 1. [It is] good to draw near to Jehovah. 2. This is not (Not this is) the time to sell thine ass. 3. There is no king to rule over us. 4. There is no woman to lament for them. 5. Let us send a messen- ger to ask this thing. 6. Our adversaries descended from the mount- ains to steal the cattle. 7. There is no man to be king over them. 8. I am not able to judge this great people. 9. The people fled be- cause they feared (in their fearing) the king. 10. My people have ceased to remember their God. 1 1. Why did ye smite m.e when I fell (in my falling) ? 12. Ye do not know [how] 'to make bricks. 13. [It is] not good for us that we have forsaken (our forsaking) our God. 14. We have forsaken our Maker, in not keeping (not to keep) His commandments. 15. I have determined (purposed) not to make a covenant with you. 16. The Chaldeans slew every man when they captured (in their capturing) that city. 17. We crossed the Jordan before (108, a) our enemies captured our camp (124). 18. [It is] not good that we have sold (our selling) our cow. 19. Fools are al- ways falling. 20. You are always asking money. 21. Ye must (shall by aU means) keep my law. 22. I shall certainly not lament over this [fellow : see 86, 06s. b]. 23. Remember (abs. inf.) your oath ! 24. Go ! 25. They slay and eat, they cheat and steal ! PARTICIPLES. 85 The Participles. 126. a. Verbs transitive, in Qal, have both an active and a pass- ive participle-form, ?t?p killing,'-^') 7-lt3iJ killed, both having the idea of continuance, — the latter being probably the only remnant of a now lost passive ' conjugation.' h. In verbs not transitive, the participle Qal is like the perfect in its form : thus, X^^ he delights, and delighting ; li^J he fears, and fearing. c. All conjugations, other than the Qal, end like the perfect, (^> and assume the prefix o, but Niphal takes a J (see Paradigm). (1) A rare form of the active participle Qal is p'lp'p ; see Ps. 16 : 5. (2) In Niphal and Pual, the final vowel of the participle is made long ; see Paradigm. Obs. The participle, as its name indicates, may discliarge the fmictions of several parts of speech, (a) As a noun, it may take suffixes, as ''"iDiJ' keeping me {my keeper). (I) It is often to be regarded as an adjective, as bgi "in a falling mountain ; it may also be used in the construct state, as in Bzek. 9:11, Qi'ian B'u'? clothed with the linen garments ; cf. v. 2. (c) As a verb, it may govern another word in the accusative : see 1, 3, 7, 9, &c. in the Exercise. 127. The plural endings of the participles are like those of nouns ; but, in the singular, the active feminine assumes the termination n- in preference to '1— . a?hus DnpB' m. and n'nob' f. those who keep ; n^jpE' (130, Ohs.) she who keeps, — more rarely npDEJ' or nilDB'. 128. {a) The active forms of participles mostly have a present- sense, but may refer to past, or even future time : thus ?8i may signify falling, fallen, or about to fall. [b) The passive forms sometimes possess (1) an active sense, as "l-iat remem- bering, Ps. 103 : 14 ; (2) sometimes they have the meaning expressed by the Latin Gerundive, as ??rip lavdandus, alvero^, Ps. 113 :3. (3) When in the construct state, the word on which they lean may indicate the agent, as '^•1"13 njn^ blessed of{\. e. by) Jehovah, Gen. 24 : 31. (c) A participle, with the article pre^xed. Is usually to be rendered as a re- lative sentence ; thus 13^0 he who speaJcs (or spoke), or whoever speaks. {d) The idea of continuance, inherent in the participle, may be strengthen- ed by the addition of the substantive verb, as in Ex. 3 : 1, Jud. 1 : 7, Gen. 39 : 22, Job 1 : 14, Zeoh. 3 : 3. 8G- PARTICIPLES. . 129. Tlie participles tn, ^3^ behold, t^.* there is, ]'» there is not, '3 all, liV still, to all of which the suffix-pronouns may be joined (106), are mostly followed by the participle, which agrees in number and gender with the nominative ; as ^??9 "^'^ '^^^^ i^SO behold, the bush burned with fire ; ''7^ D'rpB' Dj»s they liearken not unto me ; ^'I'QV rij'iv sJie {g (or was) still standing. Obs. 1. The participle ^Vin going, followed by another participle or by an adjective whose meaning gives the special coloui- to the sentence, indicates growing intensity; as b')'\i) '^Vin t{''xn the man became greater and greater. Est. 9:4. Obs. 2. In the various kinds of ' circumstantial clauses,' which describe some- thing accessory to the main portion of the sentence, the verb,- if there be any, is usually in the participial form, while the subject is placed first in it, and is mostly introduced by 1. See Gen. 19 : 1 {lohile Lot icas sitting). Exercise 22. nar to labour, na fine white HDX to bind, fast- rT^ni? Athaliah serve ; till linen en, imprison inj to go down, de- ntr to help, assist |an Haman i'-INB' Saul scend is; river, canal, ncJO bed ]P\ to sleep hSmi? stumbling-block the Nile D*i-13rjg (&ni)sup- nor to stand pjn strong "ins to interpret plications 7ilV0 circular ram- pjn to be strong "IJn to gird n-13?» kingdom, roy- part 13F1 straw niSX ephod alty, reign 1-lSi; pillar irp to be tossed : i}7h nm nj^s j o^i^s ^p^ nin;* t'^p'-'^^ ^m ti'^rh^ 3 :D^'p }nii ^3iiK |s?3| n.'!?"^'!?^ • ^^ \'^ '^ '?^^ pl^^i3■'?^« 12 {""iN^n-'^y naj; mni D^n nj;n3ii :»^'7 pni s]D|nw 14 :'n| nisK ^!i:iri -11313 xSm ]^Nt infiii ^ria'pn Di'?n :pN| nB*»n DOT 'y ^^ 5'nm ye'n |*|)n •?« i<'? le .nsj-n :»^jj|jnri "^ip y&B' *5 nin; ^ijnaw :n^an-Vy '7Sii fan is nianni iidx d^idh 21 . inin^a «B3-'7y ::b'^ •sj'psn 20 PARTICIPLES. S7 pxn-^i mn 23 J t^t^iya^ p' ^^W h^aii; nun 22 . '^^d.s "itoj; "^i^an n-in25 :i:2^»n vgrin B'^xn ^^2^ j'nbpb'i ma^'* D7iy7 rixn 27 : li^na may naSsn 26 . -inssjn-Sy IT *pjx n5n29 tpxn-'^sj n^Sb n;'7ny28 j^nnsjj; fnj ^jjn 31 J rd\^ k'^i nyi^ did^Sw npb' *Jin so : ^*Sk IT : • - ,v " ^ T ^ • : • V - T T *33*N nj;*i3 '^to^{ nj S5 . |'n'i»ri-nx 'nnj; ^3J*n 3i : prn Di»n 88 :pini ijVn 1^37 ..^Dnip Six "^yNss .jipi Q^ip |r,ii "nVn naan 40 ;/;3^', >3':5ri Dyn 39 5 on^'^y lybi 'nVn D»n !■• ~v" ~ ITT I" T T w *■ -: ■• : I •• T- : rnm ^r\r\ r\h>r\ a'*xn-')3 « j^nitsi Sn^i IV T - I •* - V T - • T • T T ; o See 74, 05a. » Pausal forms. ^ See 71, 2. "^ See 53, Note 2. «See55, c. /See 69, 5. Write in Hebrew 1. Betold, tte man is sitting on a stone. 2. Tlie queen was sit- ting on her royal throne (cf. no. 2.0 above). 3. Haman was standing in the upper court. 4. Who is the man that loves (128, c) judg- ment ? 5.- This is the bread that perishetL 6. David was then ruling over Israel. 7. Behold (129), he is coming down from the mountain. 8. Blessed is he that remembers the poor. 9. Behold, she is lying on her bed. 10. I am still watching over thee. 11. She, was still standing there. 12. I shall not (see 34, 35, 36 in exercise) sprinkle the blood. 13. I dreamed a dream, and lo, [I was] stand- ing before the king. 14 All the straw [was] burnt with the fire. 15. He will not make a covenant with you. 16. Behold, I shall make my covenant with thee. 17. I shall not help you {dat!). 18: I shall not give you (<^a^.) wood to burn. 19. Thou (f.) shalt not rule over this people. 20. The house is broken down. 21. The damsel grew more and more beautiful. 22. His appearance became more and, more terrible. 23. The people grew stronger and stronger. 88 NOUNS. FiKST Declension of Nouns. 130. The participle-form ?t?"p may be regarded as tlie type of first-declension nouus. These (a) end in -tt : (b) any other vowels they may have ^^^ are, normally, unchangeable. (^> Obs. The ordinary participle feminine, and others similar, ending in D v«-, are 'Segolates,' i. e. second-declension nouns (135) : all other participle-forms, besides these two, are third-declension nouns (138). (1) Monosyllabic examples are [3 son, DtJ' Tiame. From these must be distin- guished (a) nouns doubling the final letter on additions being made, and forming a special class of segolates (212), as ]'!ff tooth (iJE' his tooth) ; {h) forms like "i.? stranger, "ir witness, from 'Verbs Ayin Waw' (190), — third-declension nouns. (2) 'i^go aze, ISpO brick-kiln, D?X dtimb. On unchangeable vowels, see 26. 131. Rules for inflecting First-Declension Nouns :— I. The construct singular (a) of common participle-forms is mostly like the absolute : (b) in monosyllables, — is sometimes shortened ; while (c) all other forms take simple pa^ah. Thus (a) lots' may either be the absolute, keeper, or const, keeper of; but *I3i< perishing, has const ^3V?, Deut 32 ; 28. (6) 13 son, has construct forms "13, |3 (see 144). (c) ^Spl? mourning, has const. HSpIp ; VDK' hearing (12,2) <:onst. J?DB'. II. (a) Before ww^^additions, -rr is for the most part lost, i. e. changed to Sli^wa ; sometimes, however, it is retained. (fi) Before those which begin with consonants, it is made short. Thus, (a) tSa'a' a judge, pi. D*P5t5' ; jn'S a pi'iest, ijns my priests (10) ; but nDpity, D^fpOiB* astonished ; \b) ^3;n % en«niy (in pause 13;V<) ; ^^5:!^ thy redeemer- {t^. "^J^i) ; Uy7'^)5 your staff. "' ' N. B. The student should here carefully revise what is laid down in 48. Exercise 23. 7X| to redeem; to tyns to spread out ) Da womb, belly "inv to persecute, avenge n?3)? dark purple "IVJ to form, shape ; be an adversary VYl to terrify ; On-lp? precepts l^fi* a potter nn| high place to tremble 7E'p to rule HTpn stork hlTiO spy Vi5T to beat flat, 7?X to eat, devour ll^'lD appointed time 1131(3 sacrificing spread out HD^ to rejoice or place: assembly "1^150 burning in- VI) to touch, smite Di^B' peace, health IDh clay cense t^lij to be holy tJ'l'J to seek, search TIN to curse t2.jiQ)p deliverer FIRST DECLENSION. 89 T - - . T - I- - V • I V - T ; • ■• T : Di»a 6 J ^ps Y\^i'Q<2 "yjin-Sa & j rn^sn ^yph mn» ^djk 4 I •• :-- V •• ^ -v " V 1" : -.-jw • -. - : ;■ tt- - T • T : • -: T ■ : ■ : i r • : ^ v - : n&jj'p Dpiy-nsj) D^iyp nin^ non ^ • inx n^^^ia r\hp' 13 j^nshn nnK t)^7/i3^n Sxiiis :vnj?s npiSii inn;i -d^'-nDi i^:B'-n;& 1* : ^js-ja d5 t]i;i-D5 nriN-Q5 iiJs-Vp'ij " f : ' : • IT : t ; ; v t : ■■ : !iJ:i2i* nriNi i^hnnimx 25 j|D3p^^ri ^^> See 18, Ofo. 1. » See 29, J 1. " See 114, 3. p All these forms are Piel participles (168). Write in Hebrew 1. This is his son (Dagesh conj. : cf. 15 above). 2. Behold, I will slay (129) thy son. 3. What is thy name ? 4. What is the name of this place? 5, Wliere art thou (Exer. 16, no. 32), my son? 6. Here is (behold) thy staff ! 7. We all (106) heard her bitter lam- 90 SEGOLATE UOUNS. entation (76, 3) for her son. 8. We are not his spies. 9. Hearken unto me, ye who seek (seekers of) Jehovah. 10. Thy priests forsake thee (are thy forsakers). 11. The inhabitants (dwellers) of that land are tillers of the ground. 12. Behold, he will deliver thee (cf no. 26 above) into my hand. 13. She will not give ns into their hand. 14. Thy God [will be] thy deliverer from all thine enemies (cf. 37 above). 15. Jehovah is the Judge and Redeemer of his people (98). 16. An everlasting covenant will I make with those who seek me (my seek- ers) and who remember (rememberers of) my name. Second Declension of Nouns. 132. The nouns called 'Segolates' (see &, below) are somewhat numerous, and for the most part regular in their formation. . The basis of their subdivision is the nature of their leading vowel-sound, which may be a, or e (i), or o {u). To illustrate the process of form- ation in these nouns, we shall employ the root ?QP. 1st. Glass 2nd. Class 3rd. Class (a). ANCIEHT GROITHD-FOllMS /Dp 7DP 7tip (qotl). (b). These forms are not quite easily pronounced, from absence of a vowel-sound between the last two radicals : accordingly, s''gol was introduced after the second radical (hence the name ' segolates ' for this whole class of nouns). T/ie tone, however, still remains upon the penult. Thus arise the following TRANSITIOK-EOHMS 7t?P Ptjp 7!3P (c). But the first syllable is (1) open now, and (2) has the tone ; its vowel therefore (37) is made long. The words thus finally assume these ORDINAKT FORMS 7^15 7^0 ^DJ? Ohs. 1. Whether a segolate which has the form 7Q|7 be of the first or second class, can only be determined when the noun is elsewhere met with, in a shape which shows its proper vowel under the fu-st radical. B. G. J^P horn, pTV righteousness, are found to belong respectively to the 1st., and 2nd. class, from SEGOLATE KOUHS. 81 the occniTence of such forms as *J"1? my horn, ipTV his righteoumessA Ohs. 2. Some nouns refuse to take the final S^gol instead of the Sh^was ; as ■^■53 spikenard, XtJD sin, DB'p (qost) truth. Obs. 3. The a of fu-st-class Segolates is often lengthened in pause ; see 45, c. Sometimes even second-class vowels become QamsSz ; thus 1^3, DD^I. Obs. 4. Unusual are i33p his thicket, i'pgD his bwrden, from '^bb, 75b. 133. Y 01 \hQ plural absolute,- all three classes of Segolates have but one common form, ^v?!?. 1. This form is founded on the singular 7Ci3, which is essentially identical ■with 7P|7 (132, a) as will be seen (a) from the occurrence of such double forms in Hebrew as 1^1 ^'^^ "'3^ ^^"i tC^ ^"^^ i^'"'? thumb ; and (6) from the fact that 7t3p is a common form of such nouns in Aramean. (Of. the construct infinitive with sufiixes, 123, 2, b). 2. The only two exceptions are D'B'^B' (M-ra-«iJ"m) roots, from ^yff ; and Q*?''7i? (q.o-£ia-«iym), with article D*B''Jj5r|, from B'jf? holy place. 134. Laws for inflecting Segolates : — I. The Construct Singular is mostly like the absolute : see the paradigms. But these words take a special construct-form : yo?, e. 5?Q5 a plant ; THD, c. inn chamber ; IJB', c. IJB' /cEtos ; V5^, c. WB' idwm ; VB'p, 0. yB*]^ «m«; and V?). seed, once (Num. 11 ; 7) takes the form ill]. II. The old ground-form is that to which are joined (a) all suffix- es, both ' grave ' and ' light,' (96) appended to the singular ; (b) the endings of the dual, and the construct plural ; to this last, again, are joined the ' keavi/ ' plural suffixes. (See the Table). III. The form to which light plural suflSxes are joined is furnish- ed by the plural absolute, from which the final D must be removed. Obs. The rules now given apply to prepositions which were once nouns simi- lar to these ; thus 1.JI3 before, ^'IJ.J &c. 135. With these nouns are classed (I) their cognate feminines which end in n_ accented, as ns^D qiieen (from 'n?9) ; '^7'?'? (=''5P) hiding ; n?ps (= 75X) food : (2) those feminines which end in n, and have the accent on the penult; as na.B'* fem. part, (from 3.B" ; 127) sitting ; nna? mistress (suff. *'!l'?5|, from m. 1'3|) ; riD3| brother's widow (suff. if"?5;) ; nwri? brass (dual ^IW^}. brazen fetters, double bonds). Obs. 1. Some of these feminines in T\— exhibit a decided preference for the other forms, particularly in the construct state, and in assuming suflSxes ; as na^OD kingdom, const, (and abs.) n37l?D, suffi ''pppipD. 1 To guide the student at first, the figure (i) or (2) will be placed after forms like these, to show their class ; thus ij^p (}), -\f^. (2). See 2i 4. 92 SEGOLATE NOUNS. Obs. 2. The feminiiies return to the crude state as the ground- form to which aU kmds of suffixes are joined ; thus ''Ty\'C)i^ my garments, but plural absolute Obs. 3. Though, as shown above, both the masculine and feminine forms of these Segolates are often co-existent, some, which have the masculine form in the singular, assume the terminations of the feminine throughout the plural ; and conversely. Thus B'Qb. soul, pi. niSJ'^J (once Q*— ); 0.735}' ear of corn, plur. whli^. Exercise 24. ailij near a(7/. na'5(i)bow 1*pn constantly fwa? Lebanon Dho Sodom -|3D (2) sepulchre nn^ (^) midst n.;i.^iD (i) birth, origin ; QN") wild bull ■qpj toanomt, pour b'J.? lamb; nE>33 or native land JJB'ini Joshua out a libation nB*?? ewe-lamb "IflpN Esther Vy\> to rend, tear \Pb dual loins tS'-ll^ clothing T|0/. 0130 telling ^33 (2) garment \im gift nip^b, nbpE' outergarment tSB'S to put off, strip K'^J5 holiness; sane- )nil threshing-floor n^3 worn out 03^3 under garment tuary, holy place I J 1 com, grain DV? odour ITlxan splendour 5^7j53 " Q*ri':5N 2 :f'^^*n-'75 i|nn3 Di*n "jj^in ^pisi mni -^2 \r\ 5 : iNi: ^^Si ibK' 4 . ^^'i'^ 'a^s^^^n n"? 3 j ^3^«^ nin^ 11 5 vj^i'? DNn *jnp 10 • ^^^_ Q^p js^^j 9 .. ^^^^'-^-^ I IV »■ : T : \,-/ T T /r IT T v.- ■■ . - T - -._ : - ^ n5n22 t^Sjrnx *mrTi2i f^i^Sji fpi'-!2o tnpsj' Dpi^pia ^^f?nT24 :ri'nmpvm*nD23 j Dp^nhip-m nns *j« ^s'?^: *MDJ26 tna'lp ND5-'?y nty* D*!-iSN25 :/D^B;ipn niJirVs bi2 |jm riinx28 tvinan inis? r^B'np-in-'^y np34 t^^^ii^SS Dto33 jnin; ijanp:; nriK32 . D^sipi nn 36 : Dn^^y ' ni'?^ ni2:Sb' 35 . n Wn * rt'y^ y^cj' ■ nun SEGOLATE NOUNS. 93 42 j?niri5-nN 'Mb^t- nn-Spa "^iripSpa^o .D^inn " Vocative. * See 32, 1. « ' To me,' i. e. mine : of. Exercise 15, nos. 25 and 29. d See 83, 1. « The abstract noun 'deceit' instead of an adjective ' deceitful.' / See 80, 1. s See both 83, 1 and 80, 2. * Hos. 9:1. » See 91 B. III. c. * See 76, Exc. 2. i See page 40, foot-note 1. »> See 125, 1. n ' Esther did not tell'... The verb is a participle of the Hiphil form (171, 1). Write in Hebrew 1. Thou hast heard all my vows. 2. Their vows are before hun. 3. My vine is in the midst of the garden. 4. Let us open thy king's sepulchre. 5. We opened the sepulchres of our kings. 6. Our souls cleave to the dust. 7. Jehovah our king rules over all the king- doms of the earth, and his kingdom is everlasting (is a kingdom of eternity). 8. Our vines are from his vineyard. 9. Wliy have ye rooted out the vines of their vineyards ? 10. Why hast thou not put off thy holy garments (83, 1, and 80, 2)? 11. Who shall dwell in his holy mountain ? 12. Put on thy dark purple robe. 13. There is no corn in my threshing-floor. 14. Our feet (dual) did not stum- ble upon their hills (93, b). 15. Who stole my garments out of our threshing-floor ? 17. There is no peace in their midst. 18. Why hast thou taken my money and my books ? 19. Write this (63, Obs.) in thy book. 20. Why have ye not taken your books? 21. Our outer garments are garments of wool. 22. Thy woollen under gar- ment is worn out. 23. Thy garments are worn out. 24. Thy right- eousness is very great. 25. Open your doors to your king and (99, Obs.) queen. 26. Jehovah will again gather the tribes of Israel to their land. 9-1 SEGCtLATE NOUifS. Segolate Nouns with Aspirate Roots. (Second Declension, continued). 136. (a) The common form of Segolates, with only the first letter aspirate, is regular. Those of the second class mostly take -r- for the first vowel. Thus, 13,J' Q-) servant, XW pleasivre, '5'?ri month. Ohs. V)''Vi a man, is really a noun of this form (first class), and modified from B'JN (see 144). {b) Of Segolates whose second radical is an aspirate, those of the first class take, mostly, two pa^ahs ; third aspirates take pa^ah for i\iQix final sound. (No form occurs of second aspirates). E. G. "il?3 a youth, (but also, with strong aspii-ates, Dn? bread, DriT womb), 3nT breadth. Obs. B'N'n head, is properly a segolate (originally K'NI) ; the plural absolute D^^H') is for D'E'X-l, &c. (144). See 14, 2, and cf. 103,'oJs. a. (c) "When the third letter is an aspirate, all three classes of Segol- ates take paiah for their second vowel. The vast majority of forms are of the second class. Examples are V?0 (i) rock, H^S (2) sprout, ni'K way. Obs. -inh, -ma Uen. 1 ;2, are for irin, iri3. 137. Modifications in inflection, a. When a Sh^wa is to be placed under an aspirate, the Hatephs are employed, according to the laws for aspirates. h. Second-Class Segolates in which the first root- letter is an aspirate, mostly assume s^gol in their first syllable when it is closed. Examples are (a) Dn?!? scra«jiN is : Snn '^an nVnb -las* o^bnn ^Sin VA" t jv T -: " ; - V IT - V V f - T • T -; " -: •^^firii7 j^nnenhTO ib^"? ^nh'p'i-'^y np^^'p ^V ^w B'sh D^V n-n E'thnis trrxsn-Sa-nx^NnLJ' na'^ttS rni V T V - V I - tT ; V T V T ; - : - : I - T I -:i- • I - r IT T - ■• : T : I ■ rt- t t; *jnN-Dy 22 t nWn D^i^xn r\h 21 : on^Sj-ia ni'?^ niSy; 24 : '^N^B'^ ^£:^B' nixsEJ'-'^y ''n^yn nya' 23 ♦ ^nna mar! •• T : ■• : • : - • t -■ -; - I iv • : v r - ' t: it vt : IT ca'29 j*Sni2'^ 'n^SnN'7 28 xt^hn^^ nsr* dpi B'^x npy^ T 1" T ; • p \v T : • T ■• T • ) -;r ^toifya Di'^B' rx 31 . !irni;b5fy ^B'i^ so : n'?npi3 ' nSn« *.- T -: r T ) ■■ I" : - «, : it it ■ : - v t; it -pairi |»yj nyps33 ♦ ^j^inpin «r!iy;bB> 32 :>nK^n™*jBt5 :nto»tJ''?"*man np'^n-JiN iijni ^i^ns^ td'?iyS '?iy"iDi ^3 T ' : ■ ■ T i V .)-:■.■ V : IT - : it : I - : - : I : 1 The feminine (in/orai ; for this word is but once, Eccl. 7 ; 27, construed as feminine) is sometimes used in designating an office. 96 THIRD DECLENSION. 41 rn^'iii n^xSan^o • D^B'-Sy '•Dn'?23a'a '•DnhxtJ'a «See83, 1. * See 134, I., Exceptions. <: See 56. ''See 76, 3. «See 76, Exceptions, I a. /See 128, c. 9 Cf. Exercise 21, Note c. * Sheba, in Southern Arabia. » Supply ' shall be called : ' Ezek. 48 : 31. * The cry usually raised on the outbreak of civil war in Israel. ' See 95, 3rd Sing. a. ™ 'because of... " 'my pleasant portion : ' see 83, 1, and 80, 2. » On the Dagesh in the ^, see 19, 5. p From Is. 57 ; 6 ; observe the change of meaning in the same word. « See 114, Ofc. 2. >■ See 93, 6. » See 125, 5. ''he thatdoeth'... " The accusative is here used in an adverbial sense, 'deceitfully' (208, 7). Write in Hehrew 1. I kuow the transgression of Israel. 2. Thy transgression is ever before me. 3. This is ovir bread. 4, My servants are your servants. 5. Her servants were around her. 6. His delight is in the vpays of thy servants. 7. Blessed is he who dwells (137, Note 1) in his tents. 8. Our king will put forth his hand upon all lands. 9. Our portions have fallen to us in pleasant lands (83, 1). 10. I am thy pleasant portion. 11. We have taken our portion in their land. 12. Their swords are in my bones. 13. Pull off thy shoes (dual) from off thy feet. 14. May his leprosy cleave (117, 3, c) to thy servant and to his seed. 15. What is his business in the tents of the children of transgression? 16. His kneading-trough is upon his shoiilder. 17. How dreadful are thy deeds ! 18. Thou knowest his evil device a- gainst the gates of righteousness. 19. Cursed be his basket and his kneading-trough. 20. My delight is in thy tents. 21. On that day, we do not (129) perform our work (cf. 41, above) according to our pleasure in all our gates. 22. Peace be to thy bones ! Third Declension. 138. The forms of third-declension nouns (and adjectives) are va- rious, but most coiltain at least one vowel a, — long, but changeable : this may be taken as their most distinctive sign. THIRD DECLENSION. 97 Examples are l^l word, Dpr) m. and n?p3n f. wise, \PX m. and njRt f. old, 3j;? cluster of grapes, SB'iD seat, b^^Tf palace, U){>ip place, 1|np imld- erness, "liVi? harvest, D''?5'P anointed, Messiah, n'^^ field; participial forms like f\>i-\^ m. np-na f. 6?ess«d, "ip?'5 m. nilpfi (but not Dlf^pB'J : cf. 127, and 130 Obs.) i. kept &c.; also feminine nouns like iTliPl law, nj'a understanding, njp' yea?-, njtf' «Zc«p, rii'jny righteousness (cf. the forms in 135), nnuin a6o- «ii?ia! Up ITI^D prison, custody itation n^OE' remission, t?."^ ear (64, J) riDna beast, cattle *55V Iiost, army(67, 1) release 7'^V uncircumcised 'J5? Levite ni mouth 115 wander, flee Dl?] indignation l^fj Nazarite ; un- lity? tongue J?B'T wicked, guilty "ISU shut up, confine pruned vine N1J to be afraid, 7?^ slain; profane fQ)} neck, back 1X3 gather (grapes) fear (126, J) IK*; just, upright n313 blessing 3ni wide, broad •v - : ■ • T • T : • IT T : v v : - : pN tJ'^'i LsSE'in* 9 : D^;b3n n^-^ yasr s : *Dhx f\^ n^ia^i -T TT ; -T-:-;' -: 'itI t -: T •■ V ■■ : .■ - : V : - : :| • t : t : r ■ : "^j^a iDi?5 niinp nnsin: nxbn w : ^nS '^p\ mh>n ^s -'7317 snjsn mn^^^Dna yiTis j^mn^'? dpin D*D!|'^315 *nari '^3B'«2i f'm'ikppi DW'i nii^so •.Tj'^an'WB' l-r T -: it:* : I : ir -; t : - -: t : v •• -: N-ih"*iin27 :^nny^bT26 t^jiyn22 25 :i^n-^S'?n n'? • : • P iv T -: : ■ -: v v it •• : - ^ix29 jDiTK n^iy n5n28 'nEynn px') D^B'tn^D^ae' • -; t : T T - -; " - ,T T -: P v /v : v t -; -j- t ...... T : • T : . .. -: - - ^ • it t ; - -; THIRD DECLENSION. 99 i . : - T T - T ; - -: I- ■ : v i : >•■;-: » •• -: y : . T •• : V -it- - |: t • "DnbB' nW^s tn^itsan ixna "i!ixy"!i3ny42 x^^^^^ siiw T ; V ■■ T T - - - —. r \ T yv ^ I" T : ^ : it nana « *'? 45 . ^rix^n^ nsi ^nanx ns ""^ns ** : onnsna ; jSiia D*;ij_y pK-47 ^Niin^B'njb nanx Dipan^e tnnart k V : V : ■• • T : ■ v.- t /- -; i- • t o Supply the copula. '' As a proper noun, Jehovah cannot be construct with a following genitive; cf. nixay D»0'^^' Ps. 59 : 6; 80:5 &c., also ♦31^ nixaV. But this expression may be viewed as an ellipsis for niNlS 'il^J? iT['"''* Ps. 89:9, or niN^-yo ^tJ^Nl njn] in Amos 3 : 13,— Jehovah, the "Ood of Hosts.' c See 79, 3. "* See 114, Obs. 1. e . . . ' a man of words ' i. e. eloquent ; see Idiom 2, in 139. ■''See p. 72, end of Vocabulary. 9 See 121, a. f^ See 129. »' See 69, 4, and 126, i, also 06«. b (on the construct). .'^ See p. 62, foot-note, 2. * See 128, b, 3. ' The constructs of n^B* and njB' are iden- tical in form. "» The meaning of this form (' will be short ') is an exception to the general principle stated in 116, 06s. c. " See 68, Obs. 2. » See 140, a. P See 114, Obs. 3. 9 See 127. »• This is a wish, or prayer. ■■ Dative of possession : ...'(belong, belongs) to'... : cf. Exercise 15, nos. 25, 29, 30. ' See 66, Examples, and foot-note on p. 38 ; also Exercise 9, nos. 23, 24, 25. « The subject of the sentence is ' The Children of Israel:' •" See 93, b. " See 83, 1. * See 56. ^ ■■■' wide of (both) hands (i e. spacious) and'... Write in Hebrew 1. The gold of that land is good. 2. Where is my golden cup ? 83, 1, and 80, 2). ■ 3. We did not hear thy words. 4. Ye have not listened to my words of peace (80, 2). 5. We delight not (129 and 126, h) in the blood of the slain. 6. Tour blood will I shed upon his- ground. 7. We do not fear the wrath of our master. 8. Pour not, we pray thee (121), thine anger upon us. 9. The elders (old men) judged the congregation of Israel 10. The elders of our congrega- tion are God-fear jng men (cf. 12, above). 11. Their fields are for- saken. 12. The blessing of Jehovah is upon his field. 13. His cattle has perished from off his fields;' 14. Pharaoh and his wise (men) are hard-hearted (hard of heart : cf, 89 and 40, above). 15. These dam- 100 THE DUAL AND PLURAL. sels are sad in spiiit (cf. 40, above). 16. All the wise (men) are very handsome (beautiful of form). 17. Those virgins are of beautiful ap- pearance (cf Exerc. 9, nos. 27, 28). 18. Who is wise-hearted (wise of heart) among them ? (cf Ex. 24, nos. 31, 32). 19. All these are wise-hearted (men). 20. Keep thy tongue from deceitful words (i. e. words of deceit). 21. Jehovah formed our flesh out of the dust of the earth. 22. Who has eaten thy flesh and thy corn ? 23. I have not eaten thy master's flesh and corn (cf 98). 24. Behold the hand- maid of thy lord ! 25. Cursed is their ground for your sake (because of you : 108, a) 26. The hand of Jehovah is very strong. 27. The sea is wide (cf 50, above). 28. All the Nazarites were holy to Je- hovah. 29. The priests are clothed with (121, Obs. a, 1) their holy garments (83, 1, and 80, 2). Note. The vocalisation of certain plural forms of the third declension is identical with that of segolate nouns ; cf. D'"!^^' '^?^> '•"'3'7 ^o. with D*"1BP, n?ii?, nap, fito. The Dual and Plural. 140. The Dual number is, in general, confined to what may be re- garded as a pair. The instances may thus be classified : — a. Organs of the body, as D*JtK ears, D?p3? wings. b. Things made in pairs by human art, as D!p7'=! folding -doors, D;71?5 shoes. But the latter word occurs more frequently in the plural. c. Numerals, as D?3tJ' two, DjpXlp two hundred (14, 2). d. Any two objects viewed in close connection, and thus forming an ideal ■whole, as onnj two rivers (viz. the Euphrates and Tigris), Djpi' the space of two days, L. biduum. €. Certain intensive nouns, as W'.pjjp") double wickedness, D?pnV noon. (ht. double light). Obs. 1. Some words append the dual enduig to the plural form ; thus n'lDin city walls, D^pbh double walls. Obs. 2. The dual may appropriate some special meaning : thus O^i^i horns (of animals), pL niipp horns (of the altar) ; DHJ hands, but n'nj handles, sides, &c. Obs. 3. The dual femmine of numerals expresses multiplicity ; as D?riV2")8 fourfold. THE DUAL AND PLURAl. 101 141. Nouns masculine which end in W, make their fall plural in D''?T- ; but in most cases this termination is shortened into QV. Thus, *V a ship, becomes D«V or D^X. Ols. A few nouns masculine, found in the later or poetic books, assume the common Aramaic ending ^t-, instead of C— ; thus, J^pJ"*? kings, Prorerbs 31:3, &c. 142. (a) Nouns feminine which end in ^-r- ("-- 136, b) reject this ending previous to their assuming Hi the plural sign, (b) Those nouns which end in n*— change this into ni>— ; (c) the termination n-1- becomes ni»_ . Thus, n^JK letter, becomes niljIX ; nB3t3 ring, becomes nil?3D. Again, ni^VI? an Egyptian woman, becomes ninvt? ; n-UpO kingdom, takes the form' nViaVe. 0J«. Some feminines retain then- final n when they assume the plural end- ing; as n^jn a spgar, pi. D''ri'')q and nirT'jn. 143. (1). Some nouns do not assume the plural form ; such are the following : — a. Collective nouns, as JX'V small cattle, f|D women, and children. b. Nouns used in a general or comprehensive sense, as 3n| gold, t^K fire. c. Some abstract nouns, as rh-fjti folly. d. Nouns applied only to units, as HB' a (single) sheep or goat, the corre- sponding collective being )X'V. (2). Some other nouns occur in plural form : — a. Nouns which denote a state or condition, as D'llJD blindness, D*?-13tJ' b. Bodily parts, as D»3S the face, Dns-}X «^« wcc^ (also singular). c. A period of time ; thus Dn.iirj 2/o« forget ^^,3 (2) twilight nsni side nipll? deceit tSUI? a little, few P'g' sackcloth nnrD cave Dnn3 youth yip thorn O'Pl^VO cymbals D'^IND balance D^KJ-I?!? youth p3n foldmg. Dps (1) vineyard 1^* form ; thought nB'3 shame nip-1315 slumber ^5^(2) shekel ci-I^N friend, guide H^p owner Hjip word(pl.t',D*) 6 :ti^33 Qnnifi Mj'72'3 5 t ^ni ^ d^np'?ton * :C]*S33 ( V IT - • ».- t; IT - : ^- T T T * r ( T : V - • it t : V T I ■• T : • IT : ■ : r v ; t r : - -hv 9 J pnn nips ^ 5yin "d^wb' nr s : D^ar onS ^mr] I V IT r v)v: T TT • I- T : v "jt va* V • - ^ • ~ T ; -v.- ; ■ T : - • T I : IT -v- t : . |t ; . nil 16 5 nix;t3 !i'7B':d " ^3ia 15 ■ :'»Spb'3 DnyB''Q''nNDi4 • T . 1 : IT - : • I V IT : • ' ; ■ - t ^ : " ■: T : • •• : r t : - ■•:;-: t t -; r "nain ntso . viy3» y^i^anxn ii":) ns^ 19 : inm nyj w'px I •• : - V T '., : • - T T T •■ vr* T IT - •., : | U'^K23 : t33'np3 Q^:!ijT Pin 22 • y^^h |3 *m|7*^ 21 : ijnyaa 26 J D**n 7snn jy^xn *» 25 . D^»n >^ na'? 24 j nn^ q^^j^^ •-(■•TV • T * ... jj^ ^1^ , ^ P !".• T JIT T/T IT- • • T • IT-., -:t- I : IT -p n*xsi tr\t2'hs)b nr^rta n^n^o ♦n^^':) o^^n^ ^(^29 Dm nm iiMip n^K' yT33 : vinxa « "iajj3 3^ J^^nx Tfiii'^y nB'3 35 : Ynntnn " *»*3 T*<'^ia "lii^* tv'?y3 r\W toytj 36 : niy-natn nh ynmh^ nsinv »pi3B'f| :.Dn!)n»'p Sin^ 'r^xs? :-3|b?5? en; pan tayp niasuri uya -nV^o j^insri p^a^|TS89 :nsp Q*spi D\^n iiy^irss THE IBBEGULAR KOTJNS. 105 .^, I-* VT- r V i':*T i'j*- " Supply the copula. * Present : see 110, c^. « See 128, a. ''See 86, Rem. 4, a. « Supply ' has been.' / In token of mourning ; of. Jer. 16:6 and 41 : 5. s See 126, 6. * See 68, Obs. 1. < See 71, 1. 2. * See 64, a. « See 83, 2. '"2 Kings 7:1. " See 134, II. J. 866 144. PSeeSB, 1. ft See 79, 3. r gee 73, 4. « See 87, 1, a. ' See 143, 2, 06*. « See Ex- ercise 15, no. 19, and note e. " 'in the days of...' See 144, and also 103, 2. " Prov. 6 : 10. « See 74, Obs. v See 117, 6. Write in Hebrew 1. Youth (is the) time to learn. 2. Even to old age I am with thee. 3. They are not diseased in (ace. prefix : see 1 Kings 15 : 23) their feet. 4. He is still diseased in his knees. 5. The name of that place is ' Two camps ' (Mahanaim). 6. The sandals on my feet are worn out (68, Obs.l). 7. Our sandals are new. 8. These Egypt- ians are uncircumcised in lips (see Exerc. 26, no. 29). 9. Their lips are uncircumcised. 10. They have ears (ears are to them), but they do not hear (imperf ). 11. Abram dwelt in Mesopotamia (Syria of the two rivers : see 140, d). 12. Our young master is bound with brazen fetters (see 135). 13. Jehovah will send blindness (140, 2, a) on his enemies. 14. Let me sprinkle (120, a) some of the blood (Exerc. 17, note a) upon his face and (his) neck. 15. I love (perf.) my master (pi.). 16. Our life is in the balance. 17. A measure of (see. 83, 2) wheat for a basket of fruit ! 18. The noon is as the night. 19. These Jewesses are very pretty. 20. His snuffers are (of) silver. 21. Thy face is like the face of an angel. 22. In thine old age, forget not the mercies of thy youth. 23. In her widowhood 4;his Moabitess has forgotten the husband of her youth. 24. Behold, the Egyptians are fleeing between the double walls, with (=:and) their swords in their hands. 25. His hands are on his loins. The Irregular Nouns. 144. In Hebrew, as in other languages, some nouns in freq-uent use are quite irregular in form. The derivations of a few may still be traced ; the others may be looked upon as primitives. The fol- lowing comprise the chief irregulars : — 104 THE IRREGULAR NOUNS. DX fatlher, const. *3$f, suff. ''3N, ^»3X, V3N, or -in^^, DD*3S ; plur. ni3^ const. ni3S. See 67, Oha. l/and 93, h. nx JroiAcr, const. 'HS, suff. *i:i!j!, '^'HN, VH?! ; pl. ^''^'^, const. *0>?, suff. 'OK &c., but Vri^! Ais brethren,. B'*t>' »i3», husband (for SJ'JS 136, a, Ofo.) ; pl. n*E'J^? (seldom D*?''^), cons. \B'^X, suff. VB'1^?, DrtyjS etc. See 96, a and J. nE'X woman, wife, cons. n^S?, suff. 'J^B'N &c. ; plur. D'E'J, cons. 'g'J, suff. VB-'J, D5*e'J &c. ' ' nttX maidservant, suff. 'ntt^ ; pl. flinax, cons. ninipS (with H retained). n?3 ^iMe, const. n*3, suff »ni3 &c. ; pl. D»p|, con. »B3,i suff. -13*^? etc. J3 «o», const. -J3 (rarely "tg, iJ3 or *33), suff. '33, ?I55 etc. ; pl. D'33, cons. 'J3, suff. 'Jl/Dri'jg. nS daughter (for n.5|), suff. »fl3 (for *n?3 ; cf. 50, 1) ; pl. ni33, cons. ni35. DH father-in-law, suff. ';|'pn (like ^^5). Di» day, pl. D'p^S const. ♦»;, dual Q^pW v| ««sseZ, instrument, weapon, plur. D»^3, const. *^3. D?p woito-, const. »0 and 'JJ^D, suff. Va'p etc. Tr city, pl. Dni;, const, nr. ns OTOttiA, const. »S, suff. 'S, 1»S or -liTS etc. ; pl. D'S and nVS edges. TNT Aeaci (for B'ST 136, 3, Obs.) pl. D»E'N'J, const. 'IS'S^. Note the following :— 1. nDPl^sn \E'^X !!Ae men of war, soUiers. See 80. 2. 1Hpri7P V? his weapons of war. ; Exercise 28. V?J fool (wicked) ^')S fool (stupid, |'S3 despise, reject ^y shadow lSi3 well, pit/. obdurate) DND reject, contemn ^S,T turn, change : DriN ^nx 15 J Q^nx it? px w j N;in n\W ^nx 13 ' '\ ^n^j 1 Pronounced bat-tlym &c., rather than bot-tiym : see 25. THE IRREGULAR NOUNS. 105 - : T - : - V • -: ■• : • ; t ; t t -n3 22 nyja Dn^i^a ij'nfc'i ^ !i3^n« is^nasi .^^3 o^iani I" T ■.■■•:• •• T ; V - - ; - IT T ■ T - : m) tir\'p) niyn nx) D^^nbN niyrnx nriri3B'28 . »j^j»fx 36 J Sx3 'PI 35 • B'N "rts^B' ' D3ny 34 ; n^xn anyn nD : ri7^'n 'a nx nTn nyn Dxa 39 • ij^iiyj *»;-nN ri'npj V ■• I IV - vl : IT T : V •■ •• V ( - t t : T T : \ : ir I ". : - : • •• : - t « See 117, 6. » See 93, b. ' See Exercise 18, note q. ^ See 91, III. d. « Supply the copula. / See 114, Ohs. 3. 9 See 76, 3. '' See 87, 1,6. »■ See 110, d. * ' He who guards ..." 'See 114, 1 . '" See 77. " See 128, i, 3. " See 120, a. p Accusative of direction : 208, 1. Write m Hebrew 1. Where is my father ? 2. Blessed (be) thy brethren, the men of thy father's house. 3. This is his first-bom son. 4. Lot was Abram's nephew (son of the brother of Abram). 5. Abram was Lot's uncle (brother of the father of Lot). 6. Joab was David's nephew (son of the sister of David). 7. Your children (sons) are like theirs (their children). 8. This old woman hates all her grandchildren (i. e. sons of her sons). 9. Their daughter is my son's wife. 10. Moses took with him his wife and (his) children. 11. Moses went down to Egypt to visit his brethren the Hebrews. 12. Your fathers, — where are they? 13. The children (sons) of Israel forgot (imperf. 117, 4) the God of their father. 14. I shall rejoice in Jehovah all the days of my life. 15. In the days of our fathers, the famine was very se- vere. 16. The men and women of that city (98) despise the God of their youth (143, 2, c). 17. Our wives are Jewesses (142, b). 18. 106 THE NUMERALS. The houses of Egypt are burned with fire, and its (fern. ; 64, a) waters are dried up. 19. The words of this fool's mouth are like the waters of a river. 20. Where are the weapons of your men of war ? The NujMbeals. 145. Bemarh on the Forms. Excepting "H?^ one, which is an adjective, the cardinals are properly collective nouns, or abstract numerals, like triad, pentad, score; they are construed accordingly. Ols. 1. The numbers from one to ten have forms for both (a) genders and (6) states. 2. In those beyond, up to nineteen, gender alone (in general) is recognised. 3. The tens (20, 30, &c.) have but one form for both genders and states. See the paradigm, i 146. Syntax. (1) Only the numeral ip? follows the rule regard- ing attributives (53). Thus in^ Di* one day, nriN n3B> one year. (2) The foi-ms for two agree in gender with their noun ; but; in the case of numbers three to ten, feminine forms combine with nouns masculine, and conversely, Thus D*B'JX ^JK' two men; D^E*} *B?' two women, ot wives; n'lBN E'i^B' three cubits; V^5 T\VTV& Ms four sons. (3) The numbers two to ten stand mostly (a) in the construct state before their nouns, which then, in general, assume the plural form ; (b) less frequently, the numeral is in the absolute ; and (c) only seldom is the numeral found in the absolute after its noun. For instance, th/ree sons may be rendered thus : — (1) D»33 TSf^'^ (three of sons : trio of sons) (2) D*J5 PIB'pb' (three sons : a trio, sons) (3) rwHf D'ja (sons three : sons, a trio) 147. Observe these formulae : — 1. These three years (past) =D»3B' ^'hf nj 2. You two = Dp^J?' 3. Seven years old = D>3B' )}'^f'\^ ^ 4. The two kings = D^gS^PI ''^^ 5. These two kings = n^NI? D'S^jpPI *J?' 6. Thy two sons =1)^3 'JB' 7. The cherub was ten cubits = n-IISn n»Na nB'B 1 On the use of the letters of the alphabet as numbers, see 2, 3. 2 The expression is applied to the lower animals as well as human beings : of com'se, na is used for the feminine. THE KTIMEBALS. 107 Exercise 29. n"ntt dimension 1?»35 cup.bowl ai^ height bn,y (') bed 3{f5 (2) form, shape fHO"? likeness nnj span ^'j'N length rnijp candlestick np'^D change r-HB' week ^?. D», HI anT breadth See also the numerals 1 — 10 in the paradigm. nrta nvpi nn« mb^ nmi^ hm '^ix nnx rha^^ TV V )v: - - T • I IT • •• ■• • T --- T ■■ : T T V T - T - ; V " ; T " ; • t •• • V J : T ; T : •• : t v w " ; - - : v • T : ; . T I V r/ : \ : IT t t : • - y : it t t f-mii^inh nriK ni?:ii4 {D^sj^^ij ny^^x n^iioais inm^ It:-;-: TV : ••: /tt:- it;- t-t T- V m .j~ r t: ■-; "T (•• I-tI't;*; VITT - ■■ ; T T - T • T t; V J" ■ • T T -rfv It : ■ I ■• : : T : t : ■ t -rt I v --||23 jD^j^» ny^B' ^V)? '7i?T22 t'^S-nficpri nyne* nyi2'2i 25 : n3S!t: rn':'* nW n±2r 24 t'i:jSt53 !in»B'N* n3B> t\±^ T : • >T : IT V V" T : ; t : t ■ t t v ; nsyy nnisn ^rh 26 • n^^x nisx wt\ bha B'ny isj'ny ... yy - V - 'J T ; T - - ■^" V : -" vvv \ : - mb'yss :«!)j^n Dnin^n ins pn *i3 nnB'y27 Jnite^< tt -; IT T ^« : - J- I T r " ; v V ~: o Dative of possession. * 'Two [things]...' : see 63, OJ,j. c See 110, «^. <« See 19, 4. « See 108, a. f See 116, 2, and 117, 8. a See 114, Obs. 3. * ' in one day.' See 208, 4. * See 71, 2. * See 2i 6 and 7. ' ' when he began to reign,' See 124. '"SeeBO, 3, «. « 'they (viz. the Jeira) slew.' Write in Hehmio 1. Both of them have (To the two of them there is : cf. no. 2 above) one brother and one sister. 2. Both of us are very old. 3. His two wives have bom him two. daughters. 4 My two brothers have gone to the war. 5. We have not eaten flesh these two weeks (147, 1). 6. These three men (147, 5) have no bread. 7. These are my three 108 THE NUMERALS. daughters. 8. Where are thy three sons ? 9. The length of that curtain is three cubits (cf. 12, above). 10. This child is three days old. 11. I have four sons and five daughters. 12. In Jerusalem we dwelt four weeks. 13. These are the four elders. 14. The length of my bed is four cubits. 15. We four are brethren. 16. I am be- reaved of my five children. 17. The five bowls of the candlestick (are of) gold. 18. We have sold our five cows. 19. The five of them are shepherds. 20. Who are those six Jews ? 21. My ass is six years old. 22. The king's two wives bore him six sons and four daughters. 23. For these nine months, we have not slaughtered nine ewe-lambs. 24. Those ten horns are ten kingdoms. 25. Their son is eight years old, and our daughter is seven years old. 26. The seven priests stood beside the seven golden candlesticks. The Numerals {continued). 148. {a) Forms from 11 ^o 19. These numbers are expressed by prefixing to ten (modified into 1?'V, f^^JS'J?) the proper units, — as we make thirteen (i. e. three-ten, Ger. dreizehn). Of units thus employ- ed, the absolute form of the feminine is joined with a noun in the masculine, and the construct of the masculine with a noun feminine. Eleven and twelve show some anomalies : see the paradigm. (&) Syntax. These numerals mostly succeed their nouns, put in the plural form : some nouns in frequent use (as Qi'' day, B''!* man, nj^ year, t^SjJ soul) are singular, and then succeed the numeral. Tims nnbV-l/3-|X n^-)V fourteen, cities, but nf VOPV \ihf thirteen years. Cf. two foot, fow year old, &c. Observe the formula t5''S "I'^ril D^JB* the twelve mm. 149. (a) Forms of the tens. The tens append the plural-ending D' to all the unit-forms from 3 to 9 : but 20 is derived from 10, not 2 : all these are unchangeable. See the paradigm. {b) Syntax. The tens, in general, precede their nouns, which in this case are mostly singular ; but, if the noun precede, it must as- sume the plural form. Thus, in Lev. 27:5, we have both njB' Dnbj^ twenty years, and Ong'tf D»7i5^ twenty shekels ; but Dn^y niBN \wenty cubits, 2 Chr. 3:3. THE NUMERALS. 109 150. (a) When tens and units are combined, Waw must be em- ployed : the early writers commonly place units first (thus, jfke and thirty), but later writers mostly place them last (thirty and five). (b) Nouns with such compound numerals are mostly placed (1) behind them, in the singular ; (2) in later books, especially, they are ^prefixed, and put in plural form ; (3) sometimes they are repeated with each element found in the numeral. E. G. (1) 1 Kings 20 : 1, thirty and two Ungs 'SI^ip D!5B'-1 D^E'^E', but Num. 7 : 88, twenty and fom hdfera Dn^ nr^-lK) DnB'I?.' (2) Dni? Djnsy-I Dn^B twenty-two cities. Josh. 19:30.' Of. Ezra 8 "; 35 ; Neh. 7:26. (3) njg' D»r5B') D»jp' E'er! Jwe and seventy years. Gen. 12 : 4. 151. (1) The higher numerals (Awwc^rgc?, thmisand, &c.) are con- strued like the units 2 — 10 (see 146, 3). B. G. a Jmndred years njE* nKD Gen. 25 : 7, or HJ^ H^p Gen. 17 : 17. C)^' P)?^ a thousand years, Ps. 90 : 4 ; f\7^ D'jbTJS a thousand darics, Ezra 8:27. (2) Large compound numbers are expressed according to the rules already given (in 150) : we may take, first, either the highest or the lowest numeral. The noun may be put first, or last, or after each numeral. See Gen. 5 : 18 ; 23 : 1 ; Ex. 6 : 16. Observe the phrase : S|03n "133 JIKD the hundred talents of silver. Exercise 30. n7V15 upwards npip height nafl ark, chest n^UJ? wave-offering ia| prevail ^iJE'D weight 7Q& weigh, weigh out ?n5 congregation inho DV nij'y im 2 j nyn^ nnby 'F\tilih r\m m 1 nay nJB' nim dw^ ;«j;j"i3 tj'Tp ny i^yb'-in ■s^'n ; [T T T •• : V •■ : ^-" : - ■■ | t - • ■• - ( v v T T T •■ ; •• T ; • •• ; • v ^ t ; r : -,- ■ t : - t^bn 7 : njj'y nyaiN 'B'Si-'?^ e : ^*y mJry-jy'pB' Dnny " -: T T T T : - v(v T •••:•,' : v ■• t ntoip nsK rrnEyy nibB's jo^m innj^n'^yto'^a nax mjyy - I T - " : V V ; IT - y : IT r : - : ■ t - •• : v : I V I •• liT ■ • T T T • : V V - T V / : I T : • • ) I- : • • -: ':-■•:• : t : t r 5in»pn5f njB' nnxi Dnt^y-fa 13 : ^33 D^yaty nsijpin Tj*:' TT --: "ivlv T* •;• \.t ;- Di*n ^!)JN nan 15 tnnxi d*65''?B' D^s'^an-'^s w riD'?»3 110 THE NUMERALS. r\m wi^hm niinn nax d^b^oh ninn TtnK nax ni^a T- • : t:t t- ■•-: t"- tv / t- !3»jn DnB'y D"i3Da 19 : Denial D-nSx lai i* : nnaip njiy nab Dnn:3N-^"ri-*iJj' *a» nWso :niN?3 m) fha 22 j-nEyy D^iK'i WTMib D?3 2i : D^JB' i^oni nJB' D^y^aSJ'l T T " ; • V- T T \ • T " T - : T T * : * I : "hWii tiD3-"i53 D*a'?i< nnjj'y 23 j e^^k ni«a ^b'B's dwh :D*B'B' nixa B'':'^' D^aSx Ni3"i y^^x 'im^ '^npn-'?^^* □>B>'?B> nixa {^''?K' d^sSk nyiB' * an^nhaxi onniy 25 liTT TT -t;- a:t: 't tt • :Iv t;*; • - T ■ h- T T. T • : • T - V T : - I - T I ; V : T ■ "t:- t - TT t: • : I - r o Deut. 1:2. » Bveiy soul, i. e. all the souls. » Cf. 215, 4. <* I am i. fi. I have been : of. 110, d, 2 ; also the like idiom in French and in Greek (as Luke 15:29 iSoij, roa-avra 'irrj SovXevia a-oi). « See Exercise 29, note Z. /See 79, 3. g The preposition 3, joined with numbers, or other words indic- ative of measurement, marks an approximation, — 'about' >> See 116, Rem. 1. ' 'as one,' i. e. together. * See the list of irregular nouns, p. 101. Write in Hebrew 1. The shepherd has eleven sons. 2. Thy servants are twelve brethren. 3. Where are the thirteen talents (148, Obs.) ? 4. We shall sacrifice twelve ewe lambs. 5. The elders of our city are near- ly fourteen in number. 6. His whole (= All his) family are fifteen souls (148, b). 7. The damsel is seventeen years of age. 8. We dwelt in that city eighteen months. 9. My brother is nineteen years old. 10. Weigh out twenty talents in the balance. 11. Let all his people mourn (117, 3, c) for their king twenty-one days. 12. We have captured twenty-two cities. 13. The number of the elders of this city is twenty-four. 14. The children of Israel ate the manna forty years in the wilderness. 15. The weight of the iron is about eighty talents. 16. From that time ye shall count fifty days. 17. The gold is fifty shekels. 18. The number of his servants is about two hundred. 19. Let me sell thee a hundred oxen. 20. The hun-_ dred soldiers (151, Ofo.)were with him. 21. The number of the' slain is three hundred and fifty-seven. ORDINALS. Ill The Ordinals, Distributives, &o. 152. To form the ordinals from 2 to 10, tlie termination V is added to the ground-form of the cardinals ; in the majority of in- stances, another V is interposed before the final radical. The fem- inines end commonly in n*- , seldom nj- . ' First ' is expressed by liE'Nn from tJ'K-i, UmI. Obs. The feminines are used to indicate fractional parts, as JT'B'v?' a iMrd ; also these masculines, *Vn or 'VD a half ; VSp and V37 ^ qiMrter ; E>!Jiri a fifth ; f)-\fV a tenth. 153. Beyond the number 10, Hebrew has no peculiar form for ordinals ; the cardinals are used instead, and then mostly succeed the noun put in the construct state. Thus V'yf\ D'Y^V T\if the twenty-seventh pear, 1 Kings 16 : 10; on the other hand, we also have nJB' n^B'l? y3")N the fourteenth year, Gen. 14 : 5. Obs. 1. Di* day, and njB' year are frequently repeated both before and after such a numeral ; thus n^'p nisp B't?' njB'a in tU six hundredth year. Gen. 7 : 11. Obs. 2. In dates, the cardinals are often used even for numerals under eleven ; as 1 Kings 15 : 28, tJ'i^B' HJ???! in the third year. Obs. 3. Words commonly employed in measurements &c., as day, month, shdcel, piece, ephah, loaf, &c., are frequently left unexpressed; thus P]p| f|7j^ a thousand [pieces'] of silver. Note the following formulae : — (1) In the second year of Z>ariMs=B'.)J")"!V D?S?' T\lf^. Cf. 98, ft {2)Onthefirstdayofthemonth=^rf> 1p§t 01*3, or Pirf? in^3(0Js.3). 154. (cl) The repetition of a cardinal supplies the want of special forms for true distributives ; thus Gen. 7 : 9, ^I'if ^''.IV two by two. (b) From lack of special forms for numeral adverbs, Hebrew em- ploys (1) the feminines of cardinals, as "DX once, ^''.^f twice, (2) rarely the feminines of ordinals, as n»3B' a second time, or (3) certain nouns, as E3*3b nn.B'^ seven times, Gen. 31 : 7 ; I3?pKa twice (lit. two heats with the foot)," C^^T ^W thrice (lit. three feet). (c) Multiplication is expressed by the dual, as D!i?!'3")K fourfold. 112 ORDINALS. Exercise 31. boa cut, carve, hew ) 3^ white VSR strike, blow (a nOS Passover mb tablet, table nhB* black trumpet) J PI feast, festival pi. ni I'l? spotted B'nn cut, fabricate, np'^ omer (a measure) naa-ip chariot nD;S(2)pair, yoke plough HS'S ephah DhN red, ruddy T\3,p Sabbath 3^}.' (i) evening l^i man . .. -. . T • T T T : V - V IT \*" - V J ~ ; . • : - T T : V - A- : ' ... - , t : v - n^B'B'ri njB'a* tD^'^'na d^did n^y^i'in nianfi^!) D^hS • • : - -J- - P IV v; T - T - • • : - it t : •nSa ID*? y^'in'? n^y^B'fin njB'3 7 . nhsitJ'3 D^jnisn iiypn T T ; ■ T : T T •• : •' T * v: T : - r: - -; T ; T T T : • : V - : * t t v •• : ■ ; I * T V J ~ •■ T : • - T T ; I ~ T T ; I V yv T - -; - T - - v.- *AT : - T I ■• V ^ - T T T T ; - ; niinii :pNnSy23 D*an ^inin i^irh "inxa nia'Nna nity *' * I V |T T - ■* H- - 1/ : IT V A - T V ; I • T T T niy 16 • x!in 'nsxn nn^sj'y "i»j;n 15 j t|p3 "^p^ yn^ n^a tnjpa^jaVis {DnS^nnJj'y n^a ^nnp'?" jn»wy™na P - T ? • T : - : V iT T T -; • r : ■ : J - t t ■ • -; r V IT . T -f -: - " - : • V " T I ■' « See 116, Eem., 2. 6 The adjective is of course the attributive of 'day :' cf. 82, Obs. c See 153, Obs. 3. " See 129, Obs. 2. « See 76, Exception 2. DEGREES OP COMPAKISON. 113 >■ See 80, 3. ffSeeUO, t. S'Blisha was ploughing, [with] ...' *' with the twelfth :' see 148 Obs., and 153. * 'between the two evenings,' i. e. either the interval between sunset and complete darkness (as the Karaites and Samaritans hold,— and this view agrees best with Deut. 16 : 6), or the space between the de- cline of the sun and complete sunset (as Rabbinical writers maintain). ' See 80, Note, c. »» 'in it,' viz. in the land. " See 154, 6, 1. " See 84, 2, and 86, Bern. 3. p See 119, Obs. 1. »• See 44. » ' twice, [yea] thrice,' i. e.. often ; Job 33 : 29. Write in Hebrew 1. Saul was the first king in Israel, and David the second. 2. This- is the first and the great commandment ; and the second is like it. 3. IMoses broke the first two tables of stone (80, 1). 4. The third gate is (of) iron, and the fourth brass. 5. This is his third wife. 6. The fourth heifer is red. 7. I am my father's fifth son. 8. His fifth daughter is five years old. 9. The sixth sign was very terrible. 10. The sixth curtain is five cubits long. 11. The seventh plague on Egypt was hail. 12. The seventh and eighth horses (the seventh horse and the eighth) are black. 13. The king's messenger sounded with the eighth trumpet. 14. On the seventh day, thou shalt rest from all thy work (135, Obs. 1). 15. I do not remember the tenth name. 16. This is his eleventh year. 17. In the fifth year of our king (153, Note 1), the famine was very severe. 18. In the third year, in the fourth month, on the thirteenth day of the month (cf. no. 4, above), the king of Egypt captured their city. 19. In the thirty-seventh year (cf. no. 11), his two sons fled from the country. 20. In the three hundred and forty-fifth year, the kingdom ceased. 21. The shepherd sold his lambs by sevens. 22. Wherefore hast thou deceived me these three times ? 23. Let us send the messenger a second time. 24. The soldiers were standing by fours. 25. A seah is the third of an ephah (cf no. 15). 26. A span is the half of a cubiti 27. I have reaped sevenfold fi-om my fields. 28. We have received tenfold from the Lord. Degrees op Comparison. 155. The Hebrew language has no special forms for marking the ' degrees ' in adjectives. Prom want of these, it takes some words already used in other ways. 114 DEGREES OF COMPARISON. A. What we call tlie Comparative Degree is commonly expressed (a) by inserting !P before the word which takes the lower place in the comparison. Thus n>13jip nipsri naiD wisdom is better than strength Eccl. 9 : 16. (b) When but two objects are compared, the article may be suf- ficient to express the difference. Thus, with reference to their mother Rebekah, Esau and Jacob are called respectively hSiin njS and '|Qi?n FIJ? Gen. 27 : 15, 42 ; of the two sons of Joseph, Ephraim is called T^^-yn Gen.' 48 : 14. (c) Both the article and tP may be employed. Thus ';]PP njDjpn riP^m thy younger sister Ezek. 16 : 46. Observe the expressions : — (1) *|pp 13| too heavy for me Num. 11 : 14. (2) KiB'lip Vni too great to bear Gen. 4 : 13. nijiri^pn -lll^p ptn the battle was too sti-ong for him 2 Kings 3 : 26. 156. B. For marking the Superlative, Hebrew has choice of sev- eral modes : — 1. The article is often merely prefixed to the simple adjective (or positive) : tivVO '^'^ the topmost basket. 2. The simple adjective may be enough, if otherwise it be quite clear that the superlative is meant. Thus, Vni ^y1 piPP DlJri"P3 allthepeopU, from the least to the greatest Jer. 42 : 1. 3. A pronoun may be suffixed to the adjective : ^/'n| '^^\ Ofi^ipP from the least to the greatest of them Jer. 6 : 13. 4. The adjective (or verb) may take ?3P {than all) between it and the object with which it is compared. Thus DJiV*J3"?3P Vna greater tlian all {i. e. the greatest of all) the sons of the East' Job 1 :3. 5. A noun may be used twice, — first, in the construct singular, then in the plural absolute. B. G. Cant; 1 : 1 D^n^B^n IibJ the Song of songs j cf. Gen. 9 : 25 a servant of servants; so, king of kings &c. 6. Similarly, construct adjectives are placed before plural or col- lective nouns. Thus DJiil ^V"} the worst of the nations, Ezek. 7 : 24 ; V3| )it3i? the young- est of his sons, 2 Chron. 21 : 17. 7. An adjective, with or without the article, is sometimes placed before a noun preceded by the preposition 5. Thus D''B'|3 na;n the (most) beautiful among women Cant. 1 : 5. DEGREES or COMPARISON. 115 157. A more indefinite superlative ('superlative of eminence') may be expressed either («) by simple repetition of the adjective, or (b) by appending words like 1^1? very, &c. Thus Bccl. 7 : 24 pbO pb^ deep, deep {i. e. very deep) ; n'NI? h\l^ or Vni 1'KI? "i'SD very great. Exercise 32. 13^ neighbour, in- njH wild beast I51? afflicted; meek D'Jp thing devoted habitant (20) H^l high, proud 71 weak, poor np3l?'P family (135, pinn distant D-lVr strong fi^ij family ; thou- Ohs. 1) t^tYieaadv. D VI? be or become sand JJO shield pVnD sweet strong "l^V^f small, young 13^ reward 8 J npiya t« ^'^ nto 2 . rm^ n^b nhp p^' nits 1 T IT •• T • \ T T ■■ |t I •■ T D^!iib 7 t D^in niB'yto t"? nitD ^oix e . ^a^i^ nnx p^'^s 5 • T T T -: '■ } T • T ■ IV • T - I ■•a'lN iit3 in*K'N"i» "111 nnriN 'niDs nnxn-p Q^iLfn ( V V A * " " '•'■ "^ '■ " '" IT V IT I ■ •\- ; - Dy nun 10 psaa n-n n^aa '^inj siavNa :n!ir;iaato''nn ... ■ IV • \V - • ^ T V " - - : • - T : J- T : Hv ■ T : /- T iv • t ; - ■■ t : • •• : T- -T ITT'lW:- •:y-T • T AT •■ : It T : iv • - : • I )t- • t -iv ■ T t - |: - t -: ■• T t - I; - •• : t ■■ t -. - it I" -.\- \ : IT ■ : - T : Iat|t- • t tw • ■•^Stt T\m inx 20 t V35-S3D fpr-m nnx '^N'ns^* 19 T- T- T TT T*l" V -T -T:' njj'3»3 S'^n * ^s^N n^n 22 • na-iNn ^Js-Sy ^iyK man ,f - . * - - • : - •■ • ,T T -; IT •■ : - v -: t t t nns^pp-hp rrny^D "'P^tis^^^^ : ♦nx npa n^y^n pix) ^jiNi DNnVxri 'rha N^n DaNiVx mn^24 .p^is tsici' » -. - ■ v: T •• v: V •• v: t : P • t ; • v/- ?nnK26 jnin^V Nin 'D^sj'ip-B'np ain-'?5 25 tn^inxn 116 DEGREES OF COMPARISON. I T - I V IT T - : : 3 : IT -J- - : " : :Dwn wi a*»B'n^»'? jns^ IT T - ^" : -v- T - • I •• «See88, 1. ' See 93, 6. «Eccl. 7:8. f J^^^^\ Deu't. 14 : 26 ; mark also -inDB*! and •we shall keep (or and let us keep), and Jpx^ljl and thou shalt call. 1 Bwald and other modern Grammarians prefer to call it Waw Consecviive, since it marks sequence, progression, &c. For a f iiU discussion of Waw convers- ive of the Perfect, see Driver on the Hebrew Tenses, chap. viii. 118 WAW WITH THE PERFECT. 160. Besides possessing conversive power, this ' Strong Waw' may indicate various ideas, which require to be rendered in English by special conjunctions ; these must be determined in each case by the context. Thus, the Waw may mark {a) simple connection [and] ; see nos. 1, 4, 13, &c. in Exercise : (b) purpose [in order that] ; see nos. 15, 16, 17, 27 : (c) inference or consequence [there/ore] ; see nos. 20, 24, 29 : (d) the apodosis in conditional sentences [if ...then...] ; see nos. 5, 26, and even such sentences as 21, 28. Exercise 33. fjDX gather, collect, PiilD dancing [5^ verily, Amen "l^ corn take away lin! together B'^IJ take possession, pV'i cry out (for nx-13R fruit, produce \i ibB'is : nin» *jn ■; vr*T 't:- t "Vti-t: : t;--; pNn-'?3 "n-ma "nVn ♦33x20 nay Mtr^i ♦nx-'px "siS I VAT T T |VW : I" • T I • It ; T T; - T V } -i WAW WITH THE PERFECT. 119 V : - IT : - " ) - ! • • T : v /v : • v vt : - u ; t | : - rr ; *^iSn23 tdyn-*ja ny^a riiayi H'l'^^ ^^ ''^^ P^'^ '^ I T IT T •■ : 'J~ i \j : - vr : I T • IT P ^ V v: T : A" T : • - : I •• :- - • t ; ~jv t : it . : '7Nnb*3 " '?Sii ipy*3 " *inx rh^ " nn'i 25 . ti-inx5-Smi " T : • : - T : ( ": - ; t -: - t t t I iv : t . nin':'-^itj' ^'7-^51327 i^^^y) ^^m tbpn !iynx ^^-m^^ ■.,■•; I : T : : IT T : t • I ) t - • t \ - - I • T : - V •-, - - I- : - IT : a* 't i" ^ . I V T : ■ - T v\.T - : . - - r -; I- ^r : - it : t : i . J D''*Pi!i iT\r\y[ !■ - - Vt : - IT " See 123, 1, 6. » See 118, a: « See Exercise 17, Note a, and 144. d See 71, I, 2. « Supply ' it upon.' / See 112, 2. s See Exerc. 15, Note I. '' The preposition here means ' against.' ^ ' and let. . . ' * ' Let them [the. officers]...'. ' See 126, Obs. « See 114, Obs, I. " ' therefore [160, c] be strong, and keep. . .' ° See 117, 5. p See 160, d. i See 125, 4, a. <■ This and the following sentence together form one continuous whole. ' Vocative. « 'Therefore...' " The object of the sentence. " See page 63, foot-note 2. «» See 158, 2. »^ Ps. 25 : 11. y Contracted (50, 1) from 'npnj. TF»'il ; DiJ*! (see 25, 2, A, 4) and he arose, for Bp'l, which is the pausal form. i]}) On the other hand, the lengthened form (' Cohortative,' 120) is sometimes used : see 26 and 27 in the Exercise. WAW WITH THE IMPERFECT. 121 5. Except in pause, this Waw mostly (a) retracts the tone, especi- ally to an open syllable, and {b) shortens the final vowel of the word : see the examples just given (under 4, a). Bern. 1. The meanings which this Waw may take are various : — (1) and; (2) hvt — especially after a negation ; (3) now — explanatory, as in the passage, ' Now the Lord had said unto Abram,' Gen. 12 : 1 ; (4) therefore, accordingly, so, as in Gen. 12 : 4, ' So Abram departed ; ' (5) that — in the expression so fre- quently employed 'And it came to pass... that...' Gen. 12 : 11, 14 &c. Bern. 2. Although this Waw, converting the Imperfect, is most used in a connected narrative in which a perfect has preceded, it is also found where no such form has gone before, as at the beginning of a narrative : see Ruth 1:1; 1 Sam. 1:1. N. B. In the following Exercise, a careful study should be made of the pointing and the precise shade of meaning attached in each case to Waw with the Imperfect. Exercise 34. B'SPI bind up, saddle "IJD shut B*!/"} tremble, be nj^Sl? ship pVI cry out 'JSE' dwell, inhabit shaken; crash jjh sailor 1)0 assembly, b^V calf, bullock ~>V^ burn up, con- Dnip tear out counsel DNJ hide, cover sume 7*l'l? robe, upper D3 also, even tJ"! tremble, be nij^5 groaning, cry garment njj cast off, reject angry Kni? fat cattle "irfe" hair '•h-n^^nii^ jD^iy nns mS nn'i^Nii lya^'s '.r^^'W^ D« 9 : a^nSx uyhvi yw^i hv^ ^yaa^s j rhf^n in nm ^^J2m mn* "itoa im ^ibio j^yaB'ni irhn5ftt '^ha pyw ... .,. T - • V i" T : ■ : T T • T : V : : •: a" t : • t v I v vv - v t : | : v it ■ -v- r : *nnnKi5 '/tDipsyNi ^'^wpJJ'i* tSbs wbto^ nnn ^m ^ipN nin.' ipN *N"inii nya le • -inia -^h^^ 'P^^^] ^^T^. ' y .._ - - : V : • • T - T -: " : ( : t ; 122 WAW WITH THE IMPERFECT. : Y^i<^ ^'y'lfii ntjnso : DNfini nniT is ; ^xn inx nhs^*N1 I V ir T - : • - /T : IT IT : • - T : \- T '" '" i j m22 033 *ja Sn5 ''pip pw) vb-nx ts^S 'nSsnai - : \- T • T : - I - - . . - . ^ T - I • /r : IT • v. Di*n nti* i!^*r>< ^* * 'r^'^iST^^ ^2TN) 'pN^B'^ ^i 3 nj^Nrnx T*:-";:- V -TT T } : ': ~:*" I IV T T ; : V T Iav: t ;- - • ;-T • " ' »" « See 117, 3, c. » See 117, 3, a. ' See 114, Js. 1, and 19, 4. <« See 161,0is.c. " 'then hear.' /See 161, 06s. c?. f ' I would have lain down and been at rest' — a smgle act and a continued state (see HO), Job 3 ; 12. * See 116, Bern. 1. * The verbs here (Job 29 : 25) indicate jjasi ' use and wont ;' cf. also 117, 4. * See 91, III. d. ' See 208, 7. '» See 103, 4. " See Exercise 17, Note a. Write in Hebrew 1. Draw near unto me, and let me {or, that I may) hear (120, a) thy voice. 2. Let us gather the elders of the city, that they may (or, and let them) hear these words. 3. Let us draw near and listen. 4. Remember thy God, that He may remember thee. 5. If we have forgotten the name of our God, then let our enemies pursue after us (117, 3, c). 6. Cleave unto Jehovah, that He may keep thy foot from all evil. 7. Send a messenger to («. e. that he may, or, and let him) count the people., 8. Let (may) Jehovah hear and judge be- tween us. 9. Let us lie down and (that we may) rest. 10. Keep my commandments, and I shall hear thee in thy day of trouble (80, 2). 11. Who is (so) holy that he shall dwell in this place ? 12. I am not (so) old as to («'. e. that I should) forget all this (63, Ohs^. 13. We crossed the river and captured their city. 14. There, we lay down and rested all that night. 15. Israel hath forsaken and despised his Maker (Exer. 20, note i). 16. Why hast thou forsaken MODIFICATIONS OF THE VERB. 123 thy people, and sent this evil (63, Obs. G) upon us ? 17. We sowed in fear, but (162, Bern. 1, 2) reaped in joy. 18. Thou hast not re- membered thy vows, but hast forgotten the God of thy fathers. 19. I cried unto Jehovah, and He heard my voice. 20. I took with me my ten servants, and pursued after the spies. 21. Joash was seven years old (147, 2) when he began to reign (124 ; cf. Exerc. 29, no. 23), and he reigned forty years in Jerusalem. 22. We have chosen the evil and rejected the good. 23. Ye have forgotten your vows, and sacrificed unto strange gods. 24. I hewed the stone tablet (83, 1, a), and wrote thy words upon it. 25. We saddled our swiftest horses and rode on them, and pursued our enemies two days. 26. Why have ye stolen your brethren and sold them ? Modifications of the Verb : the Niphal. 163. Besides the ' Qal '^^^ or primary and simplest form (' species,' or ' conjugation ' '•^^ ) of the verb, there are some other forms derived from it. The names of these are taken from the verb 7{?| do, make, which was the model verb employed by old grammarians, (^> just as 73tJ is now used by most Hebraists. (1) 7i3 i. e. light, — without additions to the root : the other forms, by way of contrast, are named ' heavy ' (Dn3l). But properly, ' Qal ' should be named Pa"al : see 164, 1. (2) A 'conjugation' does not signify in Hebrew, as in Latin or in Greek, a different mode of inflection adopted by different verbs ; it rather means a kind of verb. Such forms are either simple or derived: the latter may be passive, reflexive, frectuentative, causative, &c. of the former : see 165. (3) The root 7j?S is not well suited for a model verb. For, (a) the changing sound of S is troublesome at first ; (6) the 1? is not easily pronounced, nor (c) can it show the doubling (18, B) in Piel, Pual, and Hithpael ; {d) the verb, in Qal imperfect, takes the form prs; (116) instead of the more common termin- ation — . Although ?Di5 is very rarely used (see Lexicons and Concordances), it is much more convenient as a model verb, because its letters are all hard, unchanging consonants. Ohs. h'SB is still employed, besides, in the classification of irregular verbs. Thus, the first radical is called the 3, the second, the r, and the third, the 7, of the verb ; and verbs whose first radical is aspirate are called ' Pe aspirate ' (Pe guttural ; see 4, 2, and foot-note), &c. 2. Niphal 3. Piel 4 Pual 6V^3) 6m 6m 5. HiphU 6. Hophal 7. Hithpael 6s^y}, ^Qp/. for ^Pi'J^n; &c. ; see 50, 1. 167. Significations ^ of Niphal. — 1. The Niphal, primarily, is the reflexive of the Qal : as iPf 3 keep one's self, beware, (j>vXdTTey part, a fowler [DDJ] Ni. repent; Ni. be caught [IDS'] 1 Hi. destroy, tJ'^ri deaf take vengeance Di23 revenge, Ni. iVi. be destroyed (inp) fii. hide, i^i. n?nFI psalm, praise, avenge self ("IKB') 2 Si. leave re- be hidden, hide self subject of praise Dno curse; pro- maining, Ni. remain "11?! rebuke n»B' thither, there perty devoted t3...ne'N3 as.. .so 3 fiij^'pj D^nSx Jinx 2 J m-iN3 sj^e^j "linri Sip i * '. . ^_ . . • -; T IT : • • T : J- -: r t ; - : : • • : t^nbSpi '^N'lK^^ rijn)3)b6 :''nannt5 byib ^j^n^j^ t^^n'? 12 :*N^nn B'ssri n'lari^n'isnii :*js'p£5 iaa^ ta^'^ n'?! 1 Those verbs whose Qal is not in use will be enclosed in brackets. 2 Those verbs whose Qal is seldom icsed will be enclosed within parentheses 126 THE NIPHAL. ';|^'?y'f)5fj'5a ^wsB'Jis J cm* ^h\ r\p\ ysK'V^ 5"iW . ; - : • V -; - T T \T T ; IT • " T * ^j^ri'?«26 niB'^S!! Dm Dn'?j25 :D3m toSsr'N J3 QD^nisx ..... . - T • ■• T • V : ' " T • I •• V " -; « njtitJ'n 28 : Q:h " DnSsn " N^n D3*ri'?K mn* 27 : ^^h » Dn*?* vjT . • V T T ; • - V " v: T : it vvt • > : IT • I IV T ■ w : IT ■ " -; - av ■• -; - / -t • I v P : «npin3i : *:i*xD njbp3Ki n5ia DmN *in 30 •Qri^niB'sn I'.VT • IT :- ■• \.T /:iT • : - t - " "^ ' • iV •• : - : 34 5 D*ri'?N3 *'?-nyna'n 33 • w^sr'^y LDbm 32 '.'^snia*? •■ V T : IT • I IV : - - •• T ■ IT : •• v 3h|'3 36 :jj>x3 );0i;\ Dina nsS^n 35 v^rm £3SB'j"*jin m33X38 : iiynSx mn*S "nnriDsn 37 ::iS-nsEJ'jS nin* yr : T ■ I" v: T - T : • - '•"::*: t ; T - ^ : - : I.' : IT • : t : • -: • • - : • : ir : "^a : - : T : : • I " I " t • T : y r • t • t ■ ■• t • = Pausal forms, » See 110, /. ' See 112, 2. <* See 125, 5. c gee 87, 2, J. / See 125, 1, Ohs. a. 9 See 118, a. * See 91, B. III. d. « See 125, 1, 06s. 6. * See 105, c. ' See 124, Bern. 3. ™ 'By myself...' « See 121, Obs. " See 91, B. III. c. p See 73, 4. ? In these forms, observe the retraction of the tone from the final syllable (because of another accented syl- lable immediately succeeding) in which, accordingly, the vowel is made short (37, and 48, 2). r Supply ' to follow,' or ' in following ' (see 193). « See 124, 1., 1 and 3. ' See 126, Obs. a. " See 129. * See 104, Obs. » ' Secret [things (cf. 63, Obs.) belong] to...' (see Exercise 15, note I). Write in Hebrew 1. The seed has been sown in those fields. 2. Thou art taken in thine iniquity. 3. Ye (f.) shall be taken in your iniquities. 4. The city has been captured. 5. All their cities have been captured. 6. I was sought by (see 166, Note) them aU. 7. "We were sought for all that day. 8. All thy deeds are remembered before Jehovah. 9. The people are utterly (125, 1) destroyed, and their name is cut off (162). 10. Ye shall quite (125, 1) be cut off from your land, and be destroyed (158) from the earth. 11. Thine arm shall be utterly PIEL AND PUAL. 127 broken. 12. His blood shall assuredly be sought for at (from) your hand. 13. When I am remembered (cf. note s, above) I shall be sought after. 14. The former things (cf. no. 37, above) shall no more be remembered (c£ 22, above). 15. My people shall not be forgotten, but ye shall be remembered (158) in your days of distress (80, 2). 16. Take care (beware) lest ye stumble (Niph. ; see also 117, 7) and fall (158). 17. All mine enemies will be cut off, and I shall be glorified in their destruction (in their being destroyed ; cf note s, above). 18. Let us not swear by the God of heaven. 19. We have sworn and we will not repent. 20. Swear not (121) at all (cf no. 31 in Exerc. 21). 21. Gather yourselves together unto me. 22. Thy name is very glorious. 23. How glorious are (perf ) the works of Jehovah ! 24. These are glorious (things ; 63, Obs.). 25. He who has escaped (128, c) in the battle will be captured in the plain. 26. Escape for your lives. 27. Let us beware, lest we be caught in the snare. 28. Abstain (i. e. keep yourselves) from all evil 29. Let us hide (ourselves) in this cave, that we may escape (161, Obs. c) from the hands of our pursuers. 30. Wherefore do ye fight (117, 4) ? 31. I am not able to fight (124, Rem. 2) with you. 32. Avenge not yourselves (121). PlEL AND PuAIi. 168. The doubling of the second radical forms the distinctive mark of the Piel and of its passive, the Pual. (Cf. also Hithpael). \. The Dagesh is omitted (a) when the middle letter is an aspirate (see 9), and is but seldom (5) put even m strong consonants which take sh^wa ; thus, •IB*!?? they soiighf. A subscribed hateph sometimes marks the want of dagesh in this case ; see 18, Obs. 2. 2. The vowels of Piel should both be pa^ahs ('active' sounds ; cf. HI), as is seen in Arabic (2nd Conjugation),— thus 7BD. (a) That the foi'mer vowel is an a, clearly appears in all the other parts except the perfect, where a Hi^r^q is preferred, to make some difference of form. The Aramaic is 7tSi?. (J) And that the second vowel, e, is also really an a, is seen (a) in other persons of the perfect than the third, thus JJp^^i? ; and {p) in the fact that some verbs always take a patoh in their final syllable, as, *73^ he destroyed, B'JIp he sanctified. 3. The x of Pual is a 'passive' sound (cf. 126, a). 128 PIEL AND P0AL. 169. Notes on the paradigms of Piel a;nd Pual. 1. The prefix D, of the Piel and all succeeding participles, is connected with the interrogative 'P, and signifies some one who... The Pual participle some- times drops this, as in 2 Kings 2 ; 10, nj?? for nj??*? taken. 2. Three verhs, in Piel perfect, take t in their last syllable, viz. "IS'T he spoke ("IST in pause), IS? he atoned for, D33 he washed. 3. In the imperfect, imperative, and construct infinitive, whenever Maqqeph follows, the last syllable assumes s^gol (48, 2) ; see 18 and 31 in Exercise. 4. In Pual, for — we sometimes find Qamfe-Hatuph, as in Dl^D dt/ed red. 170. Piel is the intensive active form : its special meanings are the following : — • 1. Simple intensity ; as ''W to smash, from '^3?' to break 2. Repetition, or frequency ; as "13? to bury many. 3. Causation (cf 172, 1) ; as 1??^ to teach, from "'Of' to learn. Bern. Verbs which in Qal take one accusative, in Piel, with such a causative sense, may take two, as Teach me thy statutes, Ps. 119 : 12. 4. Help or permission given ; as 'V>\ to assist in child-bearing, from 1?? to bear. 5. Declaration, or opinion given : as P3V to declare just, justify ; (c£ Hiphil, 172, 2). Obs. 1. Piel is mostly transitive ; rarely (in poetry) it is intransitive, or even passive, as TVB'i to sprout, DFin to he broken. Obs. 2. Piel is sometimes formed, not from the Qal of verbs, but from a noun or adjective ; e. g. Wl to remove ashes, from \p'^ ashes ; "Igr to throw dust, from nsi; dust ; vh^ to divide into three, &c. from wb^. These are called 'denominative' verbs. Obs. 3. Piel, in certain verbs, has come to bear a sense considerably different from that of Qal ; as nsp to write, count, ISp to recount, relate. Exercise 36. nhf be safe, finished ^^f, nns?*' rest, [IIU] Pi. blind, (tS^B escape) Pi. de- Pi. complete, restore, remainder make blind Uver rescue pay, perform, repay (lOT) Pi. tithe, [ej^p] Pi. make yi^^f. be strong. Pi. (7?ri) Pi. wound; profane give a tenth slippery, pervert strengthen (S^n) Pi. praise Hi^B seeing ac??. HS-J weak, feeble (Itt) prane) Pi. sing ^3 3 x^ipn ^h^ i|'^-nto2 fD^T^ nxi L^|!3i ^^i PIEL AND PUAL. 129 - - V I"- : - T ; ■• V T : - • r I I"- -: \T - V : I ■• - -: v v t v i" t : • • " : dVjj' 29 : iitjy t2n!nto ™ Diiy 28 J 'aSsn-Dy nnana » naniy " - • • : - ; T Iv IV - • vw - : t/v T u- T J : - I V IT T V : - IT T •■ • : - r : - : *.. T IT - -.. vvv I i- V - : V mt • : - : • : • T I V re ■■ • : v- ■-. ••, t t : - - 1 •-. t t iv t •■ T : • I -; V )"•-.: " '•' ' ^ - t t : • •■:■-.: t \ : T *•. : T ; T IT ■.. : ^1 : IT - iv •• : ♦yp nn-Sy46 r'75x !i3i^N mprii srxa nyh nitpn'-niin N^inn ^iiin-nx'^fta'nii siyibK'* x'? dk« • onay nsni mn» • : - T ; , ■'A : • , • IV T • •• - : T : 1,- T B'K-aa"! nuni nsni npn fi^DVn nan 48 j-iax^ ^jy'inj V V •* • : •■ - ; ( T • : t •• •• - : r T T V "I-;- T T V T T I • -T V ..... : '33n, seldom (6) the form '?»113n except with affixes (177, Obs. 2), but (e) very frequently the lengthened form ly'i'^^n (120, a). Obs. 4 In Hiphil, the afibrmatives -1, n-r , and 't- have not the tone ; but in the perfect, they have it, if Waw conversive is prefixed (159, b). Obs. 5. The participle feminine assumes the form (segolate) nT)|tD. 172. Meanings of the Hiphil: — 1. Hiphil is mostly causative or factitive in sense ; e. g. tJ'*'7i?i7 to sanctify. Obs. As in Piel, such verbs sometimes take two accusatives (170, 3). 2. It may be declarative ; as P*1VD to justify, pronotmce righteous. Cf. Piel, 170, 5. 3. In verbs denoting quality, Hiphil may appear intransitive, as Pi??n grow old, V^f'^ become fat ; but in such examples we may still 132 HIPHIL AND HOPHAL. mark the truly causative idea of the form {acquire age, produce fat). _ 4. As in Piel (170, 5), some Hiphil forms arise from nouns ; e. g. ^'''W'^ put forth roots, r"?i?n put forth horns. Exercise 37. 113 pit, cistern [D32'] Hi. rise early, JW snow )>*i? harvest, sum- \^\^'\Hi. cast, throw go early (73'^) Si. be wise, mer nbr bond, rope [7DiJ] Bi. assemble, con- prudent [riD^] Si. act wick- "linD pure, clean voke, summon "IJISI gather har- edly, destroy; NOp unclean P?*!^] Si. give heed vest, collect So. be corrupt V T ^T ; - : ■ : T I : - : i : v I ■ : ■ • t , trixtotsS nihtsn nx:n3n "pa "D^i'^'inni D^syn-p aonx • T T ,■ - T I ■ V : V • ; - T T : • -: |t vi3-nNi5 ♦Vi5-nKi fpnx-nN ^hi^i :i:npni4 ^TO^^^ n^j5N DH^'py "^hpn nin^ 19 t vj^-nx djin a'l'^*^ vn^a iK'xh nan 23 jDnpp ^fipb^j^n ^Syss jn-rn ^i5rI-'7^< inx p^inj^ss .y]^>^ p^-rjyx ^^24: jntoinn nya ^^x^'^'^^a Dlb'28 J D^p'ia'p nto\3^3 27 ' J ^|-533 a3jj,-p, 26 r\'5>^^;b Sip'p !ii\B>(pri 32 { ^Sk N3-n;f j^n 31 j Dyn-nx >■ V:'npri HIPHIL AND HOPHAL. 133 "^iinsg ♦ mn^-nN apisxpn ^i^ih^ss jTiSaa'to n^'K*' * : • IT : V •/:-):■ ■• : v it ; - t • " n3n 41 J ^inN^^ » nriB'tt » hit '' lii^ix 40 . t>^xn-nN n^na^a •• • IT - V- : T -;■• T I V IT T V • : - " See 159, 160. '> See 162. ' See 160, c. " See 101, Obs. « See 161, 0J«./. /See 146. ? See 125, 1. a '...the Holy [One] of Israel.' '■ See 112, 2. * See 120, b and Obs., also 121, a. ' See 172, 1, Ofe. "> See Vocabulary at end. « See 95, 0J«. 3. » See 128, a, and 129. p Supply the copula. 9 See 126, Ofo. a. »• Of. 48, 2, and 169, 3. ' See 155, a. t Vocative. " See 74, Obs. " See 171, Obs. 5. " '...[anything] corrupt...' Write in Hebrew 1. Let us make us (i. e. to ourselves) a king, to rule over us. 2. Do not provoke Jehovah (120 h, 121), by your appointing (124) a king over you. 3. Jehovah hath separated between you and the nations (101, Obs.), therefore ye shall sanctify (160, c) his name. 4. Why do ye not separate {perfect) between the righteous and the wicked t 5. How long wilt thou hide thy face from us ? 6. Jehovah hath hid- den his face from us, and clothed us (cf. 17, above) with reproach. 7- We have provoked thee, and thou hast destroyed us. 8. Destroy not the righteous with the wicked. 9. Why have you not sanctified my name, and offered (162) the sacrifices of righteousness? 10. Sanctify unto me the sons of Aaron, that they may offer (161, Ohs. c) sac- rifices before me. 11. Let us not make mention of his name. 12. I will sanctify thy name, and make mention of thy deeds. 13. Jehovah is he that sanctifieth thee (thy Sanctifier : cf. 25, above). 14. Let us strip the Egyptians of their garments, and cast them into prison. 15. Behold, I will rise early in the morning (129), and offer {Warn Gonv. ofP&rf.)mY sacrifices to my God. 16. Wherefore have ye not given heed unto me ? 17. Behold, they shall cast thee out of the city. 18. The snow will be white on the mountains. 19. We have utterly destroyed that place, and have not left a man in it. 20. Let us assemble all the elders of the city. 134 HITIIPAEL. HiTHPAEL, AND RaEEE CONJUGATIONS. 173. The prefix nn of Hithpael has a r^exive sense : as in Hiphil, the n is mostly lost after additional preformatives.^^' The n may be (a) assimilated/^) or {b) may interchange its place "-'^ with the first radical. <') Thus, we have the imperfect %\>r;\), for "p^ijriri*, &o. Of. 171, 3. <2) Assimilation of the n (a) most frequently takes place before another n, a T or a D, as "int2ri to cleanse onis self; (6) sometimes before 3 or 3, as S33n to prophesy. See 50, 1. <3) The n is interchanged only with sibilants, D, V, B*, t5' ; as "IJSPlK'r;! (for IJSE'rin to give heed to onis self. See 50, 2. Ohs. After S, a transposed n is further sharpened into tO ; e. g. pITOVD to justify on^s self. Note 1. As in Piel, the vowel of the final syllable (except in the participle) is often Paah, and in pause, Qarafe : see 7, 8, 10, 15, 16, 19 in Exercise. Note S. The passive Hothpaal is rarely found ; Num. 1 : 47 ; 2 : 33, &c. 174. Meanings of Hithpael. — 1. This form is properly reflexive of Piel, as ^3i2pn to sanctify one's self. Rem. 1. The reflex action may occasionally appear to bear more directly on an external object, as in 1 Sam. 18 : 4, he took off (t2B>Spn) Ms robe. Bern. 2. Hithpael sometimes practically coincides, ia meaning, with Qal : as 73X or 73Npn to mourn. 2. Sometimes this conjugation indicates pretence ; as, iB'I^Jpn to feign om's self rich. 3. It may show reciprocity, as 'Wy>'^^ to conspire. 4. Rarely does it assume a simply passive meaning, as iss^n to be expiated, 1 Sam. 3 : 14. 175. Less common conjugations are the following : — 1. Poel, pass. Poal, and refl. Hithpoel ; as B'nit}' take root, pass. E'lit^. 2. Pi''lel, Pu''lal, Hithpa''lel, are all used mostly of states or colours ; hence )3X^ he at rest, tJKT be cjreen. 3. Pe"al"al ; as "in'inp to go roxtnd quickly, palpitate ; a passive form is "lO'l'JQ to be made to boil. 4.' Pilpel, Hithpalpel ; as \h% roll, h^lV.V' roll self. 5. Forms from quadrihteral roots : tE'iS to spread out, Sxplj'n to turn to the left. HITHPAEL. 135 Exercise 38, t7?B] Pi. judge ;ffif/i- lOPI giveadaugh- Dnj overflow; [ISJ] Hithpa. be re- pa. intercede, pray ter in marriage; Poel pour out cognised; simulate sjiij be angry ; Hithpa. Hithpa. join af- jp prince, king [ilD^] Hithpalpel de- show self angry finity with Pi5n carve, ordain; lay, linger 1179 to-morrow *iyO mountain-fort- Poel decree [B'»N] Hithpolel show yi^ break down, break resspZ. Hi ['^3 D] Pilpel stir up one's self a man forth on, scatter NpD be unclean; (tJ'B'i^) PoeZ gather p^S] PiZp«Z dance pV;] Hithpa. place iVi. c6 Hithpa. (bipK) languish, ' ar cloud, ^5?. ni, 0* self, stand pollute self droop =:PMZaZ "liSD fortress, bulwark IT T : IT ^T : - ; V IV - - - V- '.. ; ■ •/■•:• • : j- - : ' •• - : V IT : V (.'■-:- ^ v - : • i v - : • nin* MNn»i nin^-nx dnsxpn hnna? •mn^-'^x aDtya IT - : • I V W - i" V: V .. - : . ,. - •• t I -; - : t:-:vt 'ii-T IT V It-.. T- -T !iB''?!pnni4 t'^^iN-njn w^tj'n'?^ Ni-^Ss^nnis :<^D*to* *toi6 :nin* Dna T"is'"ts ^jy-^pn^ D^inJsn Dais nnaV IT ; V T I : • I V T I - : • ■ -: - - it t : T : - : V 1" V ^ : V- T : : - : • it - : • - t : J Tin^B'b-Dy nisynn 20 n3yn»i nin^ y^cj^is niitb-^y ),v • : • T :i- - : • r - : •- t ; - t it ''^f\p!Dp 1)1 nan 23 .^^inx !iai;inn?7 22 jd| jrinnn n-'2i -'7K26 t*p'q£3V3"n)!3 25 :^j^yj3"^fij^B'N24 j nm»3 ^litey 28 , J 'nnaanp nx ^nj ns'p 27 . nW-'?D3 *^Na^n ma Dsr nan 30 • pns ^ippin^ D^arh 29 : D^a !i2:it niny vn*x-nK3i •'"Dnxtos Dnvto ^n^DiD^s : D^xy 'na'B'ptj T IT : \ T •• : — I T : " : - ; • t it . i . - : 136 AFFIXES TO VERBS. IT : • : : • I iv : • : • • : v- : - : • " See 143, 2, c. » Cf. 48, 2, and 169, 3. «Seel62, 4, 6. , nttiB', 'JjEIIKB', &c. 179. The perfect Qal, which suffers more through vowel-changes than some other parts, is here presented in its altered form, before assuming affixes: — Sing. Plur. 3 m. i'Di? (!?e)l? with heavy affixes) 3 c. -li^p 3 f. n^DI? 2 m. IJ^Dp (Jji^Bp) 2 m. -IPl^QI? 2 f. *n^^l? (p^Di?) Ic. 'fl^ei? Ic. W^DI? Bern. Of course, verbs whose first radical is aspirate demand a hateph for a simple sh^wa (29), e. g. ^3il^ he loves thee. 180. An affix gains in emphasis by the insertion of a Nun between it and the verbal form : this letter has been named Nun Epenthetic (better Nun Demonstrative). But it is only found where these con- ditions are fulfilled : the verb must (1) be of the imperfect ^ form, (2) 1 Very few exceptions occur : see 43 in Exercise. 140 AFFIXES TO VERBS. end with the final radical, and (3) be in pause. The Nun is, for the most part, fused with the preceding consonant, in which case it is represented by a doubling Dagesh. Thus •1S7'73I5 tkou magnifiest him, from -inj?!?!!! ; 3i^35*< I shall gather thee ; see also 50, 4. In some cases, however,' the Nun evidently constitutes part of the original form of the verb, as '^J;in')E'» Is. 60 : 7, 11. (Of. 118, a). Uncontracted forms, such as nj-isyp* Jer. 2 : 24, are poetic and rare. Exercise 40. 90 hand / yn thrust through, 7bj can, be able ntopi; maiden, virgin ^"ID)) Pi. chastise, pierce 9\y^ purge, refine, [DIIJ] Pi. precede, an- con-ect ^S only, but purify ticipate, prevent "^iN 3 : ^i^i ^jn-iD mn^ 2 J n'i^\!hi>i wz: !iii:'?o 47J2r\ i 6 t'niyip ^jpnaSs :DpB''7pp nin*''*jN4 na^'iptomn: - : • it: t : I : V - : -i - - i : - \ ^-.- -/-,■ iiSD^-xS 14 : iE5''^p'7 naa'n Di^-m "^i^B' 13 • tDsa'iba "nw ' ! IT 1 .-I- : w - - V T IT J . : I - 19 :'*!ins*TTi aiSa' E'psis j^^inptj!) ^jiitn .n^ ^j-ipni I" : T : T I"- -i-jiT -viT IT v|:t: :Y,?« '^p*?^' ^n^^ 5'D'*n aij^sriso jiim^j'sni. ^^s-i") iD^fian^ii Dfiix *iin24 :pb ^jn3 mn^ss .•ij'i^t mn^sa !• : ~ : VT : • : • p ■■ .;' : it*: t : it t ; t : nnp27 j^^nnSa' ^3 nixn "T|^-nT 26 •D^rinSK' xS*^3Jix25 - 1 : ' !• : - : ■ t | ; v i- : - : ■ t »'?K29 : Tj^jTintoB'i Tjitpy ^3JK n5n 28 •y'riwnp ^3 ""^W 32 J Dnfinjj' JJ>K 81 : "Tiiinnx ni2:Sy 30 r^jnnw US'? 4i< 34 J wn »^2^-S3 'lim^' inm ^m 33 J iinnSsN nyn n»n "■ ~ ■■ : ' • : : • v w t . ,t t -: t t t - = = ■ -IT : ■ : .,.. :): . „ - ■ i : : ■ 40 J !|3"I3IK N7 39 j^^ibxE'n naSss j'nh3B'N xS*^3is'37 IV : ; V 'I*' T : • T ^t I I" T : V ■ t AFFIXES TO VERES. 141 -ei'ix3 ijriS'lx 'D^ri'?N iiiwna^s tD^aDn*nm «WW3 I T : ■ T : - ; A* v: vt : - : i" : - : t - ^•' t : :nyin ^^nSibii *jxi niiitsn *iri'?»ii ^nnx^e j&m IT T IT I J' : - : • -; - t - • j- : " i t - I v it « Supply the copula. ' See 143, 2, c. « Vocative, * See 125, 4, a. « See 144. / See 176, Obs. 9 Gen. 37 r 4. » See 32, 5. '' See Ex- ercise 16, note h. * See 112, 2. ' See 19, 4. "» Is. 65 : 5. " It will be observed (Matt. 27 : 46) that this sentence from the Psalms, appropriated by our Lord on the cross, was there uttered in the cognate Aramaic. » See 110, d. P See 117, 2. ? See 55, c. Write in Hebrew 1. Who rescued them ? 2. Let us rescue them. 3. Thy God hath rescued thee from the hand of thine enemies. 4. Who will deliver them into our hand ? 5. We will not deliver thee into their hand. 6. Teach me thy ways. 7. Teach (ye) them his ways. 8. I will ga- ther you from all the lands. 9. Keep (thou) him from evil. 10. We shall keep thee in thy way. 11. Keep (ye) them in the way of truth. 12. Remember (thou) us. 13. We remember them. 14. All the days of my life will I remember them. 15. We know thee who thou art. 16. I do not know him. 17. Let us capture him alive. 18. I anointed thee king (for king) over Israel. 19. Do not ask him. 20. Let us bury them in that cave. 21. His sons went down to bury him. 22. The maiden took them. 23. Why have ye forsaken them ? PART SECOND. THE IRREGULAR VERBS &o. PART SECOND. The Ikregtjlak VERBa 181. Some deviations from the model of the verb, as it has now been given, are caused when any of the radicals happens to be (a) an aspirate, or (b) a quiescent letter ; or (c) when the assimilatioa of a radical takes place. A. 'Aspirate' Verbs are subdivided thus : — (1) 'Pe Aspirates,' i. e. verbs whose first radical is an aspirate (163, Ols.), as 3E'p to think : (2) verbs ' "Ayin Aspirate,' as np|l to choose : (3) verbs 'Lamed Aspirate,' as VO^ to hear. B. In the 'Quiescent' Verbs, the consonantal sound of the weak letter merges in the vowel which precedes. This class comprises (1) 'Pe Aleph' Verbs, as 75 K to eat; see 185 : (2) 'Pe Waw' Verbs, properly so called (see 187), although the 1 is often written *, as IDJ for in} to descend : (3) 'Pe Yod' Verbs (proper) ; as pJJ to such; see also C, 2 : (4) Verbs '"Aym Waw,' such as n-1D to die: (5) Verbs '"Ayin Yod,' as 3n to contend: (6) Verbs 'Lamed Aleph ' ; as N"li5 to call : (7) Verbs ' Lamed He,' as njij to luy. C. Contracted Verbs include (1) Verbs ' Pe Nun,' as "llj to vow : (2) some Pe Yod verbs which are inflected like the verbs Pe Nun, as nVJ to set cm fire: (3) 'Double "Ayin' verbs, as 23p *o go round. Obs. Many' verbs are doubly irregular; e. g. V3J h£ smote, is both Pe Nun and Lamed Aspirate ; Dg'l? to do, is both Pe Aspirate and Lamed He. 182. Pe Aspirate Verbs. — Bules. I. Where the first radical of common verbs assumes simple sh^wa vocal, Pe Aspirates require a composite instead. The hateph used is mostly — : but verbs with N as their first radical prefer •7.; e. g. J1D kill, but ^38 eat. 146 PE ASPIBATE VERBS. II. When it is otlierwise indifferent, (a) preformatives assume the simple vowel corresponding to the composite sh^wa under the aspir- ate succeeding them ; but (&) if the vowel under the preformatives characterise the form, they give the aspirate a vowel like their own. Qal forms give Ulustrations of the former case ; thus anp? to kill, 73*?? to eat, 3tl?! he will leave. But in Niphal, Hiphil, Hophal,' the class of vowel under the preformative remains, and regulates what follows it ; hence ^0^3 Tip.^n, T'Pl??, &c. See, however, 20 in Exercise, and 11, c. Obs. 1. In Qal imperfect, verbs which end in o begin with a, but those which terminate in a begin with e, as also verbs which are at once Pe Aspirate and Lamed He ; thus "ihvi he will serve, but pin\ he will be strong, njrjj he will see. Obs. 2. Strong aspirates soraetimes do not accept a composite sh^wa : yet the preformatives assume their vowels just as if they did ; thus iblH! he mil desire, 7'^l^\ he will cease. This is the ' hard ' pronunciation of the. aspirate. III. When, further, a vowel-afformative (-1, V, or H-p) is added to the root, the composite sh^wa under the aspirate becomes a short vowel ; as •'np??!, from li^^^ IV. The doubling qf the first root -letter, in some parts of Niphal, being impossible, the vowel which precedes it is made long (9), hence we have 'HS'?" for '^5?'?*. Bxercise ih D3 p be or become il fish nro^ tears (cf. 66, Obs. .6) n^?D cattle wise nj?n ,Dh integrity, tD^C support ; Si. be- tyiri be deaf, dumb nyi; counsel innocence lieve, trust ; M. be Hi. keep silence "IW he-goat [t!N] ITi. listen to, trusty, faithful ; be nEltt staff (1?^) Pi- teach liear established "iDip search ''p!:h nssj yZ2^'3 j«!iMm" nsito iiyas's ra^ni yaa'i i^sa p*?N hin' i6^ t'^ona sts?)^ rnxne ninx :iTyn * I • I . ■ . / 1/ •• " T "■ I V VT T IT ~; ~ t6^^ "^Sa-nx n^yn ^h^ ''l^^^^l f>i'?pf^8 .p^n PE ASHRATE VERBS. I47 IV . . T : ; V ViT : V T ; -; - I y . _ . 1 ■•'':- V V - T T V • -: - T I - -; " T T 27 j'iitoan '■'?|sWni ^nnn26 t^itj^n* qdii jj'nn^s S*^k IT ; • V /v T : - v: V ,T ■• : - ; ^_ . .^ _ S3 :npn3f i"? na^yn*^ nin^a rmn ainx 32 ti^^initoKj •^snj n^an 35 • MrnyrNri 34 :mj5ari t]pKn ny sS" D»n ♦j'l DJi r^n h^m 37 . nN?-ipn» a^ri^x 36 . ^r\h r .- - r ( V T T - v: V | t -: - ■ • 4r: it r : a;irin^nT a^39^ t Vxib'^-'^a y,*?? 'l??^.! *lD^f^ ss t^iSDH* r T : - a See 119, 05a 1. * See 117, 7. « See 87, TOs. "See 167, iVo^e. *Seell8, «. -^ See 80, 3. s See p. 61, foot-note. ^'gods.' 'See 161, Obs. c. It See 124, Bern. 2. i See 117, 8. >» ' shaU be made to stand' [Hpphal] i. e. set, placed. » See 117, 5. " Observe the different forms and shades of meaning in these imperfects. p See 1 Sam. 9 : 27. « See 112, 2. '■ Note the peculiar pointing of this form. » See 172, 06s. * See 124, Bern. 3. " See 117, 3, a. » Supply the copula. » See 129. ^ See Prov. 17 : 28. !' See 120, 5, and 05s. * See 196. 5. i See 127. sHos. 4:3. s See 86, a. 4 See 2 Kings 3: 23. Write in Hebrew 1. women (73, 1), love your husbands. 2. fools, when will ye he wise ? 3. Cease not to mourn for (on account of) the forsaken (ones), i. ■Cease mourning for the dead (pi.) 5. Do not (pi) pass through this field of mine (86, 2, e). 6. Cursed (be) his loved (ones). 7. Ye Jwce oppressed and forsake the poor. 8* Ye have loved evil and taken liold of iniquity. 9. Let me cross ovier, pray, to eat of (i, e. fiJomD th6 frmt,of ihat itEee. iO. If thou (f. ) wilt be utterly silent' 148 "atin aspirate verbs. (125, 1) at this time, then (161) salvation will arise (stand) to the Jews from another place. 11. Why dost thou still (129) maintain (keep hold of) thine integrity ? 12. It is better for us to perish in this great and terrible wilderness (76) than to serve the Egyptians. 13. Take hold of thy staif, and stand before me. 14. Saddle me (i. e. for me) the ass. 15. I did not believe his word, and took (thought) him for a liar, 16. Why did ye not believe these trust- worthy (partic.) witnesses ? 17. His words have been trustworthy. 18. Behold, ye (112, 2) could not stand before him, and how shall we stand? "Atin Aspirate Verbs. 183. 1. Whenever the regular verb takes simple sh®wa vocal, the second radical takes Hateph-pa^ah (10). Thus ■IDHB' t?iey slap. From this =■ again may be taken ■=- as the vowel for a short syllable preceding it (cf. 11) ; hence, in Qal imperative TODB', and the feminine form of the infinitive nyrjS to love (123, 1, 6). 2. In Piel, Pual, and Hithpael, the second radical may cause the vowel that precedes it to be lengthened (9). Hence "(ItiS, "spi (for ^^3, llll), to Mess, be blessed; but "l.V? to consume, f fit? to despise. 3. So little influence has the aspirate over a vowel following, that only in Qal Imperfect and Imperative, and in the plural feminine of these same parts in Niphal, Piel, and Hithpael, is the -=• always changed to -=■ : in Piel Perfect it sometimes remains. Exercise 42. [Vna] Ni. be terri- [Jl'iE'] Pi. serve, at- [tS»] Pi. refuse (Orin) Pi. pity, fied, tremble ; tend, minister fl'lQ tear in pieces compassionate Pi. terrify ("10^) Pi. tarry ; re- []V^] Ni. lean, re- t5''3| drive out, *J^B folly, simplicity tard, defer cUne, rest expel ; Pi. id. )-::-: i -; it ; • : | : v |T -: | ■• t I nr : it ; ^ Vt ; it -: ( •• T : V -: ■■ IT : v v ; - ^' ; it ( v f t *'ayin aspirate verbs. 149 1 ■ - T T -: T ■ IV •■ -: • -: r • 15 j'ftwri N*?!* : D^flwtt ^D^is t'lMN *ink »iNi2 liT : • "-it: t -^ ^. IT " - -: • -; V T : - -: - : vht t ; - •• -■..-: r - - -: mn» *3sS nbyS «'i'?n toiiB'-m nin* h'^^^n Kinn nsjais 20 j^pnhyn ^^a-m "Di*;! !innai9 natya "ni^iS!! 'Ornish !it3nB'»5 nn«3 D»)^ni D*iri5n n-in^nsi f>yyii2 *Mna npNn N*? 'nyiis^'n!) pnin nS ^npnx '*mip22 tnoisn I" - : • T : ( T I ■ • \t : • • : -|" - it - Dm^ *M7 i*N25 :t|Di» ti^b "t)hD2i tMin ^!inn|5 23 -: : IT \ : 'i- t ■ v : v - -: ■ t t iv -: r • lynjN B'^a 80 J vNi^-Sy mn* onn D*3a-Sy ax 'Dn^a 29 •• T -: " T IT •• ; - T ; - • • T - T •• - : IT : - - T : ": I : * • : * t : iv • v : v ! IV .* T ; v I ; .. - . . I • T " - I - T ; J- I v r « See 29, 6. ' Piel imperative. « See 105. ^ Supply the copula. «See 128, b, 3. / Note the peculiar pointing of this word. b Pausal form, contracted from 3n.N^ : see also 117, 4. " See 129. • See 22, 1. * Hos. 3:1. ' See 124, 1. 1, and II. m See 180. » See 80, 3, 6. » See 73, 2. p See 87, l, c. « See 118, a. '' See 173, 2, a. '' as one [man],' all to- gether. « Is. 46 : 13. " See 125, 1, Obs. b. ^ Cf. Exercise 15, nos. 27. 28, 31. " See 125, 3 ; also Esther 9 : 16. « Psalm 44 : 23. y Gen. 27 : 42. i Psahn 77 : 3. ' Write in Hebrew 1. When they lean (in their leaning : 124) on thee, thou shalt b'e broken. 2. Let me lean on thy hand. 3. From all your sin will I cleanse you. 4. Let all my attendants purify themselves. 5. Why 150 "LAMED aspirate' VEEBS. (87, Ohs.) do ye aslc (117, 2) my name ? 6. Salvation is far from us. 7. When they assemble against you, be not terrified. 8. Let us bless even our enemies. 9. Assemble yourselves, yeiprifists, and minister to Jehovah. 10. Love your enemies, and bless ttem that curse you. 11. Thou shalt not love those that lova eviL 12. ye adulterers, tremble before the God of heaven. 13. Let us slay the ox. 14. Ye shall wash your flesh with water, and purify your- selves for the passover. 15. We will not be terrified.. 16. Our en- emies have been utterly driven out of the land. 17. Cry unto me, and I shall nottarry. 18. When (117, 5) they cry to me, I shall not pity them. Verbs 'Lamed Aspirate.' 184. Since final aspirates demand a sounds (12), Verbs ' Lamed Aspirate ' (a) take paiah as a substitute for, or (&) in addition to, anr other kind of final vowel found in common verbs. Thus, — L A merely tone-long o is simply changed to a, except in Qal construct infinitive : but when unchangeable, it takes (12, 2) a fur- tive pa^ah after it. Cf. the Qal imperfect and imperative with the absnlute infinitive. II. So also -rr is displaced for — , except (a) in participles absolute (131, I. c), {h) in absolute infinitives, and (c) everywhere in pause, when it remains, with furtive pa^ah following. III. But -1 and V always remain unchanged, and take the pa^ah after them. See Hiphil perfect, and Qal passive participle. Note. Of two, silent sh^was at the conclusion of a woi'd, the former, under the final radical, mostly becomes a helping pa/ah ; see 7, 9, 21, ni Exercise. Exercise 43, 1-U> dog-fly, gad-fly 0!?^ prosper ri*"!? "bolt, bar nny'XO trumpet yw3 x^'^ snaETi *J3 Din 2 •.^K^nteB'* wn lai - T i- • : ■ : - -: it - - . t t I •■ lAMED ASPIRATE VEKB3. 151 "vh frill i^i^p ni See 103, Obs, m. " This word — mostly applied, as here, to a solemn declaration of Jehovah — is generally regarded as the construct form of a Qal passive participle, dictwn. The imperfect occurs only in Jer. 23 ; 31, " See 46, Obs. 2. p See 126, 5. ? Ps. 145 : 16. Wfite in Eebrm 1. We shall certainly not (J25, 1) listen to thy words. 2. Be- hold, she is listening (129) to your words. 3. Listen to thy father's words, and gladden his heart. 4. He is not (129) fleeing from the face of his brethren. 5. May (120, b) thy God make thy way pros- per. 6. Why dost thou trust (117, 2) false words (words of false- hood : 83, 1) ? 7. He still (129) refuses to hear. 8. Behold, thott hast sent evil on me, and hast rejected (162) the faithful friend of thy youth. 9. Cease to swear by the king's life. 10. Do not for- get to sacrifice to the God of thy fathers. 11. When thine enemies flee. (124) from thy face, thou shalt by all means listen (125, 1) to their cry. 12. Rejoice, my son, and let me rejoice (120, a) over t^y joy. 13. I shall not open my mouth, lest I transgress (117, 7) 152 'PE 'aleph' verbs. against thee witli my tongue. 14 "When thou so west (117, 7) thy seed, thou shalt by no means forget (125, 1) to rejoice in thy God. 15. (It is) time to sow the seed. 16. Let every knee bow before the God of heaven. 17. Who will refuse to bow before him ? 18. Behold, our mistress opens her hand, and satisfies (171, Obs. 5) the mouth of the hungry. 'Pe 'Aleph' Verbs. 185. These verbs really form but a sub-class of 'Pe Aspirate' verbs, from which they differ only in these respects : — In the im- perfect Qal, (a) a quiesces in the vowel o,(" and (6) disappears from the first person singular f^ (c) the final syllable takes - or ^.^^> Thus, ^5^ to eat becomes SsN* or hpM^ (see 3, below), and in the first per- son singular, 75'X, or ?3'N. 0) This is found, besides, five times in the Imperfect Hiphil (Jer. 46 : 8, Hos. 11 : 4, Neh. 13 : 13, &c.) and once in the Niphal Perfect (Num. 32 : 30). (2) The X is omitted to avoid being written twice ; elsewhere it rarely disap- pears, as in Ps. 104 : 29 eiph for f\QtiF\, 2 Sam. 20 : 9. (3) The vowel -^ is found under distinctive accents ; but (a) under conjunct- ives, or (b) where there has been retraction of the tone, ■=■ is found, but some- times V. Observe the constantly recurrmg form IDK? (to say) saying (for ^bJ?/ : see 103, Obs. a). 186. The verbs always inflected in this manner are five in num- ber : 1^^ to say, ^Sf? to perish, ?5X to eat, fi?>? to be willing, fi??! to cook, — the last two being also verbs ' Lamed He ' (194). Other three verbs occasionally adopt this mode, but are sometimes wholly ' Pe Aspirates : ' ^0^? to seize, ^hn to love, ^5^ to gather, take away, (impert 'OK' or tn^j &c.) Exercise 44 nVir burnt-offering ■JiJlJ {const. 'i\F\ 211) ^I'S, r\'l% howl HJX desire ^5P pain, pang middle, midst how I |»p; right hand c. ^ ' -- - t:vj- nr-wr 'PE 'alepii' verbs, 153 . r I* : - -: V- I •• T " T • T V < - IV " -: 72xrii nw'na riiy B'Nns tDi'^axn m^ tnrh Vaxn . ^ ' I " • IV - I T - V V - J IT ^ T V: ~ '' . * '" AT • T V T T - V rf - I" I • • : • AI T - V T • T V I - I IT - I •• nS D\iSN "i^K lan-'^ina ^b>n |*yn nstoi : S^Ni jan **3i3 ji^ij^i Y^r\-\t2 ^^V-njni ne'Nnis Jiiiaa !i'?3Nn I • T F V* T I • • T : IT T ■ T I tV * : - - - ,.. • T : I •.« 1" 'hp !in;iNM D'-iiaj te tnis jii-iax^ ^*n*Ni7 .•aSsn y . - • • / : IT I •• 1" I w : I v v - nn»aN2o jn-tn B^^xn •jj'Sia nna^j w-'?ki9 tnanSa ' -* IV - ■ T V V : T ; I T - IT T : • **5 22 tiNto oariNi ^^nns? n"i»B' ♦b'SJsi •n^ae'^i n*s7 I : V" -; T I V •• \T : IT • : - t iv : ; v jfj^to* 'jTnKn24 :'annN» D'Sanss riinariNi '?n'ijj'» 'nsja I IV r -v-t I -: • T -: j-' -: t v t ; • -j~ « See 117, 8. ' See 103, Ohs. a. <= See 26, 2, 6. "See 110, rf. « This and the two following sentences are connected. -^ ' Is it actually [true] that... ? ' ff See 19, 4. » See 117, 5. • 'for (i, e. on account of) the life of... ' * 'When... ' ' See 52. •» See 161, Obs. e. » See 185, 2. Write in Eehrew 1. Let us not eat of the fruit of these trees, lest we perish. 2. Let us not perish in the midst of strangers. 3. Say not, I shall surely perish by the hand of mine enemies. 4 Let my soldiers (men of war ; see also 80, 2) seize his attendant and slay him. 5. May his hand lay hold of thee, and preserve thee from evil. 6. Let the wisdom of their wise men utterly perish. 7. Who would (117, 8) eat the bread of iniquity ? 8. Let us bless the Lord (117, 7) before we eat. 9. Let us love and honour our aged father. 10. Whenever ye say-(117, 5), Let us eat flesh, ye may eat (117, 8), but ye shall by no means eat (125, 1) of the blood. 154 'PE YQD' VEES3. 'Pe Yod' Veebs. 187. Verbs which in Qal appear 'Pe Yod' belong to one or other of these kinds : — A. Verbs properly and really ' Pe Waw ' (as shown in Arabic), e. g. "I?; to bear, bring forth. These verbs are both more numerous and more important than the others. B. True ' Pe Yod' verbs (189), as 3^: to be good. G. ' Pe Yod ' verbs whose inflection, in some points, is like that of verbs ' Pe Nun ' (201) ; they are both few in number, and of rare occurrence (see 203). 04s. This classification is not rigidly Observed. Thus '5'?*D to^ away, Ex. 2 : 9, might appear to be a verb of the second class, though it is really of the first : '^yi^ I formed thee, Jer. 1 : 5 is like a verb of the third class (or a verb 'Pe Nun'), but belongs to the second; while on the other hand, the ETiphal nviJ Is. 43 : 10 and Hophal nV-1» Is. 54 ; 17 might lead one to suppose that it belongs- to the first. 188. Verbs properly ' Pe Waw.' — Rules. I. When the first radical begins the form, in Hebrew it appears as Yod : this is ob- served in the perfect of Qal, and throughout Piel and Pual. II. When not initial (i. e. after preformatives), the 1 mostly re- mains : (a) if it assume a vowel underneath, it keeps its consonantal sound, as in Niphal imperfect and imperative. (6) But when it reg- ularly would assume sh^wa, it then quiesces in the vowel that pre^ cedes, which in the Niphal and Hiphil is a, in Hophal u. Thus, we have ip\1 from ag'lJ (naw-saJ), 3'>B'in from 3''B'in, &c. III. In Qal imperfect and imperative, Yod may remain, or it may disappear, (a) Retained, in the imperfect it quiesces in the.Hlr^q that precedes, while the next radical takes pa^ah after it. Thus ^\ to possess,. vav^eiLVfyi, imperat. Bb?. (6) If Yod be dn'opped, then the preformative takes -r- , which the next syllable likewise assumes, though -^ is preferred beside an as- pirate. Thus yO\to sit, imperfect l^l., aBj.*! (162, 5), inq)erative agJ, n^ip (120, a) ; but VIJ to know, imperfect ri,'., imperative V^. 'PE WAW' VERBS. 155 Ohs. 1. Verbs of the latter class drop Yod, besides, in Qal constnict infinit- ive, which then in general appends a n to form a segolafe : thus JTJp, n^^^ (103, 4) to desaendf, (sufL'Jill'ilonoe H'J") : niJ^ to know, though rsvM, y^ are also found. • Ohs. 2. The other class of verbs is mostly regular in the construct infinitive, but some also form segolates, as DB'jj, nE'^b topossm, nbb) to be able, nBa» to be dry. ExerBise 45. rrap booth ffjh? frankincense [ns J] St. convict, con- UJJ be Weary, m- ITJtfJ native 7bj be able ; imperf. vince ; chastise. Ni. per/. 1?J*J ; Hi. ii* dispute together weary (cans;) [JJB»J] Ei. save '''il?n go, depart/;; 5)!?^ be fatigued; m- tjD^ add : imperf. 3 y» pain,, labour imperf. '^h^. perf. f^V'') usedisni.f\''tiv I v: I'.' I V vv - ..... T 1 TV I- • T : ny^a'' ^im njssas .-^^y •n^^iy «^{y» r^ih^ 'd^' nsB'«4 - : • : !*• v. - I IT * I : ; - ■■■■■» t t : ^^ r -. y ni3&3 *5 M^nhT >iyn* tyjbS :nJ3D!i i^ib'* ^nnwn-'pa •'d^d* ■-. - . V ■■ / :i" I - - : I •-, - \ ; I" t ; v t t ft-T 6 jDnxib r'^^«i cniN *j*^xina '^nijj'* ♦i^-fix ^j^^ann Dn^:3N 8 J nn'?D mn* "■ ^jnsy ^:rT\iT\ 7 : d^j^ n'?n i^ys T T : - V %• •■ T : • /-T -: t •• • i> t r : i- vv/ : "fiK i*? n'?-in3 ^nj£5> nxto-n Drriixa tpns»-ni< n^Sin 14 :y-ij n3*f«^'3 jDirix £3*33 *3 y-iN *nmi2 itt^iik |T •• T. ••' ,1V - ..... ... ; I !■ T T T- V, - ., - |T ; ■.; : k» - r -: " t ; • : : Dn*? *nyni3 \kb 17 t iiain ynij px is j V^v k*? no'i'? IV T ■ :;V- IT T - - I " T IT - - T ""♦jynin nin*i9 :'?ni2'*s D*ri'?x nnx ^^'y-ti* *Di»ni8 • V- • T ; r* T : ■ ; ' v: t - • - t • in« jy^N -i;by x'^si ni^ •n^sNU-ntt ""iuyninso tny-rxi - T I - - V* • T it •• T T -^ " V «T "r- r - • IT V V I" -- : • : '?iNB'-VN 2A t nnitt- ^*n'? nnin 23 • njnan-'^N iiyji : V IT : • • T ' IV -: - - v ( : - - : 1 For the ii^regulasritiesafMJus verb; see the" fuller account given at the end ia the; 'VOoeabnlaiTi, 156 'PE WAW' VERBS. -Sk N^nsn nann :rm ns'n T|':)»n D^ri'^xn "ty^K ^D^l'tonn .J, • T - .. - . - T I" vv • I V rt - • v: T ^ • V V : V T r : - -: - : I r t r . i * D^jn^na nnx niSB' i^^Sn^o :nnD!iJi Ni-iiaS^^ tB'^xn "ly^ni *jKi nibnn ay nb '•Da'? ^a^'si tna' iiaf^i 'la'pii mSS '?3!i« nS33 j^sy ^maSn T\ih^^ :n3ny naSi VV.- T - 1- • T : - ■• T T 1 I ■ 40 :pNri-nK'!iE'>^ Dyn *3sV '^'?^^ :D^a»'fl*pin nin» nnxp ^'742 t^mn*3 ytrij Sxia***! t'nytyiKi ""jy^B'in Tri'?^ nstyn "^x^i \T\'ni'\ wp2 oy^sriN n'?'! Dn*ri'?K 1 AV v: - : ■ - viT : v |v : " • : A'' " v: txniani "^nan lantea "^p^Siisn Dnxp pxa ^Tjx^ifisn « See 48, 2. » See 19, 4. " See 117, 8. <* See 208, 5. « See 114, 2. '' See 147, 3. ? See 105, c * See 63, Ols. * See Exercise 43, Note ra. * See 73, 2. ' See 184, II. •" See 177, O, 2. » Joseph. " Vocative, p See 80. « See 117, 3. •• See 114, OJs. 1. » See 161, 06«. ' See 117, 2. « i. e. by asking incense to be offered : Is. 43 : 23. " 'thou art able {117, 2) [to do] everytliing.' Job 42 : 2. " See 120, 6 : observe the precise shade of meaning here. Gen. 30 : 24. « See 167, Note. » See 155, Obs. 2. ^ See 74, 2, and 73, 4. Write in Hebrew 1. We shall not be able to dwell together in one house. 2. Pray do not sit down there. 3. Thou shalt not be able to go thither. 4 Let us go thither, that we may dwell in peace. 5. Let us go down, that ye may know the way. 6. Why should you sit down (117, 7 and 8) before that you are tired ? 7. Whenever I am wearied, I fall asleep (117, 5, 4). 8. Even if you are wearied, do not fall asleep. •PE WAW' VERBS, 157 9. Ye will be too tired to sleep (155, Ohs. 2). 10. Do not weary ma 11. I shall not weary you. 12. Go down to the stream, before the waters dry up. 13. Let us consult together, before we occupy their land. 14. Our God will save us, and make us dwell in peace. 15. Who will be able to save them ? 16. To-day there is bom to you a Saviour. 17. I am thy Saviour. 18. Let us conduct them to their land, and save them from their enemies. 'Pe Waw' Verbs (continued). 188, B. Some constructions, chiefly involving the use of certain ' Pe Waw ' verbs, require consideration here, (a) Expressions indic- ating a single repetition of an action : — 1. I'll? mU 'Bip?!? I have again dreamed a dream, Gen. 37 : 9. 2. ^\V Vs\>^ Sip's N^ I shall not again {lit. add to) curse, Gen, 8 : 21. *13!!^ *l^r f|p»l and again he spake. Gen. 18 : 29. Tw^ fjp'j and again he sent out. Gen. 8 : 10. DJ??n» fie'lK N^ I shall love (183, 1) them no more, Hos. 9 : 15. 3. "la"?]!)! fjljini and she spake again (fit. added and spake). Est, 8 : 3. 4. D^^^? 1W fj^pix N^ I shall not again have compassion, Hos. 1 : 6. Note. Sometimes the second verb is not expressed, but left to be supplied from the context, as in Job 38 : 11, 'Hitherto shalt thou come, but no further' {lit. 5)'ph N7l). Additional instances are found in Ex. 11:6; Num. 11 : 25 ; Deut. 5 : 22 (Eng. v. 25) ; 2 Kings 19 : 30 (or Is. 37 : 31) ; Job 20 : 9 ; 34 : 32 ; 40 : 5 and 32 {Eiig. 41 : 8), probably also Deut. 5 : 19 {Eng. v. 22). For other constructions expressing the same idea, see the examples given at the end of 191. (/8) Expressions indicating continuity or progression, — increase or diminution. In these constructions, which have already been briefly described in 125, 2, Ohs., and 129, Ols. 1 (see also the instances in Exercise 22, nos. 37—40), the verb '!|?ri is mostly used (but see also 125, 2). Examples are given in the fol- lowing Exercise, nos. 14 — 22, which should be carefully studied. The general meaning of such sentences is 'he drew nearer and nearer,' 'grew stronger and stronger ' &c., or ' he went on and cried,' i. e. cried as he went along. 158 'PB WAW' VEEBS. Exercise 46. Y") rMtmhigpart. "12 J to be precious, ^!? scoffer, mocker nO? instruction !?.)» wickedness, dear, lionoured 11>J to appoint (a p^5;] fit. to be con- iniqnity ty-ID"! wealth, substance time or place) ; tent, willing hb'OPi. curse ("in J) M. be left, remain ; Ni. meet 131? the other siile, J)^>' side, rib fii. leave over riEii;'? opposite (108) this side 2 : ^sy ^^1 nin^ fp^-r\J2 "Hsjiki 'n'?^Vn "nr^ w ^^^^ - T : I" _ - T :j" : t ;at - v t t : : I" - T I" T : • " V .. - -; I • I . IV •• ; * • V " T • - V • : T : I • iiijj'p::^ ei^Diss :ihy niy ft^Dix-N'?^ tDinx y^iJ'inS vv |: - -: I -^ 1 -: | * iv : v - • : 11 5 ti'p^hp rh^') "fjD^jio s nfayS psph nS 9 : niy ^'^x DK13 : f)*!piN n'?! ^riis"! ^nnKi2 : |a "I'prii r\mr} '^t^r\\ ijiSn "'Tjyi HnS ^p t^^K n3ni4 ttj^DiN ^j'? ''nhk^ Siy {j'^Kn '?*nj»'i 16 : ni'n-bK :i^pi ii^h ^riK'bsn ""aS*^ is : inpi u'^hh ^^m ji^ii ph] "^Sh ii'ii? tSnJi ^br\ "^h*) T • ■• • IT ( T : I T " T : ■ " : - ( v ■• - i- - : nam lini it^n n^iSh 'Tienso t'^'^pa!! Nix» nsv ^'h thh ^^nm) ^"I'na vb'jki nil iiS*^ 21 : m ^didi "B'K-nin n^Sy nE'x !^njM-nN22 i\,^p>) -ai'^n in&y'? inn ybsa ma r\:h Q^xtsn n»s* 0^23 .npyn ihn •a'^pii nynp T ■ ' : • T - : ■ )titt : | r I v /■• - ' rJT n3 25 qS nm r\y?h "n^yya *nB'»n-'?M24 jariN ^hr\-hii Iv T(.T VJV T I i)V •• : T T - V IT • I ■• •• - 26 :nKhn-ny n^bji ^iiaS DNn'?^ jyinnV iw'^a B^^xn nax '■ T - T : •• : : • v: : • : v ; • t - t : nn^ «n^m y\ aL^'Jian 27 . --iji^jj ^ptV a^'W nis'Nn 'n'?pii !*■ ■ " VJf • - T : VV • IT V J" - T • T I Vi" - n)n'?5B'3o r-^w;! *^£)i-n,Tri29 ..^^^;3 ^j^^L.'^,, '^f,^^^ ':EE WAW ' VERBS. 159 { ' j}'>« dnp irt3 ^h 31 : njjfto ^toe' n(?»i 'pinb' 'nsy 'hbp T • I V A " - T T - ) ■ V ,T T ■• T • nteB' Dps ny!ix35 {!nyi3 n^^Sans* jiishBTi Erxa luaa T T V T ■• T • IT . T ; - I : ' •• T w ■ ■7X37 5»jri*3in ^avpa-Sxse. jVnib'^ ^jiS niSB' *rnyiii hy nS^o { p-^i^ri ^^ya -^^i^^) luSxin "SiS 39 . npS ^tibvi J * * » ,, : - V - va" T 'TV V • ; v ■- : •■ ; ° See 103, 4 : 'in this [place],' I.e. here. » See 73, 2. « See 161, Obs. <* In these and other instances, the retraction of the tone causes the shortening of the vowel in the final syllable ; see 48, 2, and 162, 5. « See 154, b, 1. / See 129, and 190, 06s. 1. s Circumstantial clauses ; see 129, Obs. 2. » See 79, i. "To the [place that seems] right..-' * In Hebrew, as in English and many other languages, such an imperative often loses much of its original and proper meaning, and becomes more of a hortatoiy interjection, Conie/ Of. Fr. allons, L. age, Gr. aye, i6i, 4>kp€ &o. 'See 114, Obs. !• "" See 108. " See 155, c, Obs. 2. See 86, Bern. 1, a. p See 170, Bern, s See Exercise 21, note c. '• See 156, 4. « See 32, 1. « See 213, V.I. « See 180. « See 203, Bern., 4. " See 72, 2. « See 125, l. Write in Hebrew 1. Let not a bone be left over. 2. Do not leave a stone remaining. 3. Let us leave some of our bread to the poor. 4. Do not weary us again. 5. Let us know what they will yet (again) say. 6. Let us not go thither again. 7. Ye .shall not chastise us any more. 8. We chastised him once, but shall not again (do so). 9. I have saved them twice, but shall not (do so) again. ] 0. Come, and let us again reason together. 11. Be content, pray, and teach us again. 12. Let us meet there, and again consult together. 13. Behold, two men are walking together, and talking as they are going. 14. The one woman became stronger and stronger, while the other grew weak- er and weaker. 15. The two hoys grew, and became stronger and stEOuger. 16. Let my sons be dear in your eyes. 160 TRUE "PB TOD' VERBS. True 'Pe Yod' Verbs. 189. These verbs mostly preserve their Yod : occasionalljrliow- ever, it is dropped ; but then it is sometimes represented by Dagesh in the following radical, so that the form assumed is that of the third class of ' Pe Yod ' verbs (203). The true ' Pe Yod ' verbs are these : 3^J to be good (of which, in Qal, only the imperfect is used), P3J to suck, Hi. suckle, Y^l to awake (oidy used in Qal imperfect), l^J to be straight, right, IV) to/orm, [^^I] Hi. ^*^'n to howl, [toj] Hi. V^'U to go to the right. 1. Qal is inflected as in the strong ' Pe Waw ' verbs (188, HI. a). 2. Throughout Hiphil, the ' quiesces in -r- : see the paradigm. 3. Niphal and Hophal are not used. Forms like ■1"1*|!'?! Prov. 4 : 25, h''^\\ Is. 15 : 2, 3, &c. are anomalous and likemse rare. Exercise 47. W teat, breast : *S-1N if not, unless ; (TnS) expand ; M. V^'Db left (side) ; du. D?l^ perhaps separate self north ■aSten »i*y3 mta^n ^m n^iynns tDob °:2b'»i n^a )^iifi DE'-nN DW« o*b"7 I'DS^iin ^I'b^ne t^nsy ni*tD»N •■ V • v: • ■■ ,v •• : - J- '• I IT ■ TV" " jn'77W nnsDKS t^ntD^n d^bSB'n iiB'i'is t^^p^pnbW 12 J -n^jj-^pyT ^nyB> hhr] n j mn* dv nhp '3 !i'7^'?^n 10 »yya "1^" *S!iNi9 j^ipn nan") nj^is j^j^^us :*|*j5»>i ^iin AND ' ''aYIN YOD.' 161 IT T -i IT I • T T T T IT V • v: T : V • - I* v: T « See 161, Oi«. » See 32, 1. "^ See 117, 3. <« See 155, a. « See 125,5. /See73, 1. s' See 159, a. * See 45. <' and shall caU ' (158). See also 192. * 'a nurse.' See Construction 1, at the end of 139 ; also 171, Obs. 5. t See 142, b. m See 187, Obs. « See 177, C. » See 48. p ' If [thou wilt go to] the left, then (161, Obs., e)...' a See 158. Write in Hebrew 1. Who will form for himself (for him) an image ? 2. What (105, Ifote, 6) will thine hands (64, b) form ? 3. Thine enemies shall not again awake from their sleep. 4. In the morning they howled, and we awoke. 5. Let us lament and howl, for our sister will not again awake from her sleep. 6. Perhaps our words may please (be good in the eyes of) the king, so that (161, d) he will save us. 7. If thou wilt go with me, then I shall do thee good. 8. Even though thou wilt do me good, I shall not go with thee. 9. Send away the child and its nurse, after it is bom. 10. The mother has suckled her son. 11. This woman will not be able to suckle her child. 12. Let us go to the right. Verbs ' "Ayin Waw ' and ' "Ayin Yod.' 190. General Bemarks. A Waw or Yod, occurring as the middle radical of verbs, may (a) quiesce in the vowel u or o, or i, since these are homogeneous (13, Obs. 1). (b) The Waw or Yod, in presence of a vowel differing from it in kind, but yet characteristic of the form, may disappear. Thus (a) we have Dip in the Qal absolute infinitive, and Dip in the passive participle, for DiiJ (qa-w6m) DliJ (qa-wiim). Again (6) we have DiJ in the 3rd. sing, perfect Qal for D3|5, njj for Al^ he died, {5*3 for B*'!^ he was ashamed, y} for 3!T he contended. Obs. 1. In place of the ordinary participle Qal, another (adjectival) form is used ; thus y^ running, W dying, dead (128, a). 1C2 . VERBS '"aTIN WAW' AND ' "aYIN TOD.' Obs. 2. Verbs ' "Ayin Yod ' and ' "Ayin Waw ' include those only whose mid,- radical is weak, as just described. A few verbs keep the Yod or Waw as a strong consonant, and so far are quite regular, as 31N to be an enemy, fl.^U to languish, 11 n to become pale, J?l| to expire : this always holds in the case of verbs which are likewise 'Lamed He' ; as njri to live, n^T to be, T\Vi {Pi.) to command. Obs. 3. Verbs ''1? are few, and differ from verbs VT only in Qali Some verbs have both * and 1 forms, as DW and D^b* to put, place, set. 191. Special Eemarks. 1. The ground-form ofVerbs '"^ and '^"^ is mi the third pars. sing, perfect of the Qal (109), but its construct infinitive, which takes the vowel '1 (or ' -r). As in the common verb, the future and imperative resemble it. Perhaps this -1 of the construct infinitive has been assumed to make a differ- ence between it and the absolute. 2. The tone falls regularly on the root-syllable, except («) when it is assumed by the heavy afformatives QJji- , ))?- , or {b) by the help- ing vowels (see 5 and 6, below) i and V ; (c) or when retracted, as in the imperfect Qal or Hiphil (see 8, below), or {d) thrown to the end by Waw Conversive of the Perfect (159, b) ; also {e) in the case of the participles. Accordingly n^i7 means she stood, npD is the feminine participle, standing, npi51 and she will stand. 3. Except in Niphal, which takes i (and keeps it throughout), the vowel-endings of the Perfect are as in the common verb. 4. Preformatives lengthen the vowel they would regularly take ; but Qal and Niphal perfect take Qam^z for short Hlr^q. Thus, in Hiphil, D'lppl, D*i?J stand for D^li?^, D*)i?i &c. 5. In the Perfect of Niphal and Hiphil, when the root-part would regularly take Sh^wa, Hdldm is used instead, in order to preserve the stem-vowel, which, however, may be changed (for euphony) to -i. Thus for PlDii??, we have both niDipj and likewise nilp-lpi ; while niD*pn is for J5«?»i5n. ■ ■ T , .-: 6. Under the same conditions, the Imperfect Qal with -1, and that of Hiphil with V , either («) preserve these vowels by assuming ' 7- in a succeeding syllable ; or % letting Sh^a remain, these vowels change to i and tt respectively. The lengthened form is generally found in Qal, the shortened in Hiphil. Thus, in the Qal, we find forms like nj\0-')pn and HJlDpPl, but hi the Hiphil njPi7.I5 rather than nj'p*!?)]!. ' ' " VEEBS ' "aYIN WAW ' AND ' "aYIN YOD.' 163 7. Instead of forming Piel, Pual, and Hithpael, these verbs, re- peating the third radical, prefer Pilel, Pulal, and Hithpalel (see the paradigm) : sometimes-Pilpel is found, Di?.«?i?. 8. (a) In the Qal, from the Imperfect l^-lp; ^e derive the jussive form Dp; let Mm arise ; with Waw Conversive (retracting the tone, 162, 5), Dij'l (25, 2, A, 4) and he arose ; but in Pause (45) the tone and the old vowel are restored, hence Di??!. (b) In Hiphil, similarly, from D*i?; we make the Jussive form 051 let liim raise, Avith Waw Conversive D?*! and he raised ; but in the 1st pers. singular the full form is mostly retained, as in D'i?,f55 and I raised. Obs. An aspirate, from its strong preference for a sounds (12), may obliterate distinctions between forms lilce those just given. Thus, "IpJI (from l-ID) may either be Qal (for ''\p*).) and he turned (himself) aside, oi Hiphil (for 1C|;i) and he removed (trans.). Note. Abnormal forms are -ll^ (for •1'^T) they are estranged, Psalm 58 : 4; Dinijl (for D-inijl), Deut. 7 : 16 ; 13 : 9 ; Ezek. 7 : 4, 9 &c Constructions to be noted — (a) 35?5' ^W lie down again {lit. return, lie down) 1 Sam. 3 : 5. (*) '^^rii?*") 3-1'5'¥ I shall take back again [lit I shall return and take) Ho. 2:11. (c) 33^'>1 3BJ;i and he lay down again (and he returned and lay down) IK. 19:6. [d) no?'? D-1B«K xb I shall not again destroy (return to destroy) Hos. 11 ; ft See p. 157, and (on the general principle regulating such constructions) 200. Exercise 48., a-'lB' to return m^r. ; D-ll tobehigh; ffi. ty-ID give way, move njipD purchase, Bi. restore, sendback raise, lift up, ex- D'lD totter, shake thing bought n-1D to ^^perf. and alt; Pilel exalt B'-ia be ashamed, ^a/. 1'h\ born; a part.WiHi.^M.t [|-13] ffi. establish, ^\ii, impf. ^\'2\ son to death ;PtW slay setup;iVi. t» inij timid, afraid H^ni? foreskin D-lp to arise, stand be established 3*T to contend; Hi. id. (25, 2, A, 1) I'-ia to be scattered ; Wa trample, tread 1*3 to understand; 7 *.il exult, rejoice Hi. scatter [n-ll?] Hi. to awake, Hithpalel id, DOJ to plan, pur- l-lD to turn aside, de- arouse; iV^i. bea- Q9K dumb pose, propose part ; St. remove 1D to circumcise . [J*-1p] Hi. awake : n^ya naxi ^^liisj «Ni-:3K»3 j r^m nia-^s y^ ybi:^ ^^k I* * : ■•, T : i' : ; - t t t it ■ - ...)... 164 VERBS ' "aYIN WAW ' AND ' "aYIN TOD.' "Dai nbn^ten-|Jb dvO ^^^ -^W^^ ^^^^^) '^^'^P^^ nip^io :D'^a3'? D^riSx ^ibK' n*? "hT^i^r) DnT9 :mn* n^a'to I T IT : V : • v: (t at t ) t • t it . / . mo mn* nn" :Visii: 'Vh±^^ ^iD^yi va^ix ivifi^ u'rha T\T T : - IT T ■ (T : - : j r : a^ : a t • v: . X • -: V -: - - T - " • T T ; V - it • " oan^DM-ny Ti^rN '3sS D^ipS '^i^n n^i^ :'?N^a'^-nK V : • -: - I V : •• : ■ I t " i- t . • • v ♦ ^t^K'-i ^Tinisy ID*") ts^EJ'sn *SyD •^nh3 1* : Dsa^iaD Dnnn |. vA- -: -\T- • : • - T •■ • ; IV : :| ■ • v V - ia^ty Sytt *'i'?3Di i'?y Dn^'^aa ^di ^iSDiaN ^nn-'^yw : • - ■■ t: ■.. ; •.. V ■• -: ■• x : ^v -: - t 18 j^'^ip niiDnn *»-'7yi7 t^nif-'^y ^t Dhriie jn^D' I I T y • -; • - P IV T - V I : IT T IT nin* '!i».ib'"i2o :n,Dah nin* pib^i9 :^iii Dahri npnif T : 1 IT ■• T : I • : i " : I ^ ^ ■" DB/ !iiDi22 t::S ^ivSk '"1;d^b'* xS D^iii Dii-DN2i nyri^N T : J- (■• J" -; r T 3 T • .» I" v: T-l • 1: -iTiT tt; it:v: ^h) ^lajy °B'*K26 :»L:3B'bS ns^'^ni 'n"i^yn25 ♦ •aMib'ii!) : - T * I- : : • : x | v.* t : t ^' t i ,-,• ; - *n"iniy27 :Dni^b ^iny^ ^b) ^x\t ^h D^jbty ^n'^a-iy Dip^ t : [T t: • V" i l-T • - t ■ : • - [^t I ■ : - : T ^v : t : - ; t • t v Mv t ; ii^-Sx^a>^x33 t rtnn vSn y^'^a 32 j nay an* '•x^n-^tj "T- ■ Tl-T"-- I'T* 'T • :atr; -inm 'N'n^-^a35 jTjnn 'nan 34 qrib ^an^pa ^ayi i« DnxS nii) db' ^2:37 tn^rnK «|a*i Darin jj''*Kn ^2336 r T : V T • , V 1 •■ t; \t t V • T t pianx " D*ap|Xi39 . ^^ Viaa " Vin ^ritoE' 38 . q^k nw-^p naj-'rai'Da'? ^Sian Da^i^ai 7a ^'ij^m "la'N ^nna nxT^o wptti ^n*a ih' h^J2\ h)i2'r\ "oaS h>)^'> 'D*b* naba'-rai VBHBS ' "aYIN WAW ' AND ' "aTIN TOD.' 165 ' i ' IV tt:-: itt:t -: v ■^t;- tt- Jiv;- B'ijj'41 .iftx ii'^ai in*a ^tJ^iN-^Di nia SxytoB'^ Dnnax I - K • •' : - T ; 1 ; •■ T : •: t t : - /• ; - ; -V- T ■ ' i i- IT " ■ : - •■ T T - • T -Vu B'b' iB'Ka litjS ^*W m\ih nin* niB'^^s :^»5?i ■^iT^a noVS :mT\ ^h 47 : dSa^n^-riN y^^'rh ^J^ibar *niB' I V /v - V w T T ■!- T ; V • " ; • : t- T ' : /- tn^jB' Snik'» *jmx Sb iiB'^s :xNin |. .. .. T ; ■ ■■ ; V r - o See 25. 'i See 120, a. ' See 125, 5. <« Contracted from *J?noiD : 50, 1. « See 168, 1, h. /Job 19 : 9. y See 135, Ohs. 1. a Is. U : 25. •" See 132, Obs. 4. * See 19, 4. ' See 29. "' ' set heart on ' i. e. care much for. . . " See 112, 2. " Job 14 : 12. p' because of . . . ' 2 See 126, Obs. a. r See 87, Obs. » Hos. 4:4. < ' Whoever. . . ' (87, 1, a). Jud. 7:3. "See 161. " Supply • as.' » See 155, a. ^r gee 125, 4. v See 167, Note. ' See 147, 3. i See 105. 2 gee 137, iV^oie 2. Write m Hebrew 1. Let us return from our evil ways, for why should we die? 2. If ye will not restore my golden crown (83, 1 and 80, 2), ye shall sure- ly be put to death. 3. Let us lift up our voice, and exalt the God of heaven (see 17 and 20, above). 4. Do not return to thy land, lest thine enemies kill thee. 5. Do not kill the fugitives (the fleeing ones,—partic.). 6. Two shall put twenty to flight. 7. Let us flee from his face, lest we be put to death. 8. Stand up, and put to flight those who stand up (part.) against you. 9. Let us depart from evil, lest the Lord remove us, as he has removed the children of Israel from their land. 10. And the queen rose up against him, and removed (see 191, Obs.) his crown from upon him. 11. When I return unto thee, turn not away thy face from me. 12. When thou departest from his word, the Lord shall depart from thee. 13. We are quite ashamed of the man and his deeds, therefore give no heed (put not thine heart) to him. 14 Let us lie down again. 15. Why will ye again contend with him ? 16. Your adversaries shall not a- wake again. 17. His kingdom shall not stand, nor shall his throne be established. 18. In the morning we awoke and arose (191, 8). 19. Do not again turn aside. 166 VERBS ' LAMED 'aLBPU. Verbs 'Lamed 'Aleph.' 192. All tlie peculiarities of N"^ verbs are owing to the nature of the iinal radical, which is an aspirate, though weak, and (much more) a quiescent. I. The 'Aleph, as an aspirate, prefers an a sound in the final syllable. The N is not strong enough to seciu-e this sound in every case, Hke Verbs 'Lamed Aspirate' (184) : the a is only found in Qal imperfect and imperative, and Furtive Pa^ah (12, 2) is unknown. II. As a quiescent, (a) N requires its vowel to be long. (b) When, regularly, the third radical would take -r, ** refuses it, and then quiesces in the vowel that precedes, which (1) after the perfect is — , and (2) in the perfect is ^ ; but transitive verbs take -r in the perfect Qal. Stative verbs follow rule 2 ; as '•riN/O I am full, Jer. 6:11. (c) 'Aleph having quiesced, afformatives whose first letter is n drop dagesh and sh^wa. Thus, we have inNVD, nxVD, for :Plt;(Vt?., P^V'?. Ohs. 1. X is sometimes dropped, as in 'JiyD, Num. 11 : 11. Ohs. 2. The Qal participle feminine mostly assumes the form riNVb (for m'p) seldom nsV'D or nvb. Obs. 3. 'Aleph assumes its consonantal force before the pronominal affixes ; thus iNB'5, 'qXB'J, For additional remarks on these verbs, see 199. 193. Abbreviated construction {constructio prwgnans) or ellipsis •results from the omission of either of two closely connected verbs — usually the second, and especially a verb denoting motion— which the reader must supply after considering the context, particularly a preposition following. Thus, ''Tp^a '■•:-: v : - : t : ■!■..::• ■■ " T T IT -: - I T - T ; • /T T : I ■ • - ■ • -: nn'iph pan 17 t^^^xytoKi ^nx'ip'? 'nxr/e {Gn^|7^{ - IT - • ■ V - T : I - : • • T T - - : • ' iv v: 20 : nyn tf^ ^n^^a ^h *3 ^m '^Nthi '^nx;? ''yya nib ly D^nN;^in) »iNX-nx ij5^k2i rNb'pi ^nx^fS n'ly '■V^ix iih v^v : V •• : vjv it t ; - v * * -.■ - • - t I ■ T • I v : - T T ; • - " •• • IV " -; • T IT : T T -: - T T ;•• •• • I T • /T T V // " ■■ -; - . ^.. . I V IT T T ■■ : - .. - T T T iT : - ■ T ; T : I : • I V \T T t ; >- • it V; V V : V ) V ' IV T • •.*•;;■: V ' v t : ■• t I V IT T I ■ : V \T T-: • 1 For some of the more important forms arising from these verbs, see the general vocabulary at the end. 168 VERBS 'lamed he.' o See 74, 2. » See 143, 2, c. « See 19, 4. <« See 91, III. c, 3. « See 125,4. /Seel59, 6, 5. i- i e. pleasant. a See 118, 6. «i.e. bitter: see Ruth 1 : 20. * See 55. ' See 117, 5. ™ See 160, d. « See 167, Note. See 24, 5, 6. ^ See 180. ? See 158. '' See 117, 2. » See 103, 4. ' Supply ' and cast,' or ' by casting ' (193) ; Ps. 89 : 40. « Supply ' and delivered him.' 2 Sam. 18:19. "See 191, 8. " Supply ' by delivermg me.' 1 Sam. 24 : 16. '^ Supply ' and cast them.' Hos. 2 : 20. Write in Hebrew 1. What evil have ye found in me, that ye hate me ? 2. Woe to you, for ye have sinned ! 3. ye daughters of Jerusalem, if ye win go on hating (125, 2) instruction, ye shall not find favour in mine eyes. 4. If we have found favour in thine eyes, let us go out to meet them. 5. We lifted up our voice and cried unto them, saying. Do not be afraid of us. 5. Fear God, but do not fear man. 7. Go ye out to meet him, and carry your youngest brother (156) with you. 8. We have been very zealous (125, 1) for thee, and have come to fight with thine enemies. 9. When ye go out (124) to seek your flock, / (112, 2) shall not go with you. 10. Ye have brought on us aU this evil. 11. Why have ye not fully followed him ? 12. Thou hast sinned (in taking) from his flock. Verbs 'Lamed He.' 194. Verbs designated 'Lamed He' are really (a) in general. Verbs 'Lamed Yod,' though {b) sometimes 'Lamed Waw.' 1. 1?a' to »-«5« isatrue 'Lamed Waw,' though its imperfect takes a Yod, hence the form ■IvE';. 2. From these so-called 'Verbs Lamed He' must be distinguished those which have a consonantal n as their third radical, and are thus really verbs 'Lamed Aspirate' (184), e. g. rl3| to he high. 195. Rules. L Whn the third radical concludes the word, it is retained, as Yod, only in the Qal passive participle ; elsewhere, '^ is used instead. The vowel used.with the concluding n is always long : (1) in the perfect, it is a, as TOi &c. ; (2) in the participles and imperfects, -?, as n^j, n.^3' &c.; (3) imperatives take - , as TQi, &c. (4) Of infinitives absolute! (a) Qal takes 0, n>|, forms like iNT and riiriB' being rare; (J) Hiphil and Hophal take -, '1?JD, njjjn J (c) Niphal and Piel take - or -w , n^jj and n'?|r:i, T^l and VERBS 'LAMED HE.' 169 n?| : no instance of Pual or Hithpael occurs. (5) Infinitives construct regu- larly end in ni— , to which all suffixes are joined gimpHciter; as H^ST to see, 'J;iS")a when I saw, &c. Such forms as n'B'lf, 'Vi>V are exceptional. II. But wJien the root receives additions at the end, Yod may (a) quiesce, or (b) disappear, or (c) remain. (a) The Yod quiesces before afformatives beginning -with a consonant; if this be n, it takes no Dagesh. The vowel in which Yod quiesces is, (1) after the perfects (t. e. in the imperfect and imperative) -? . Of Perfects, Qal takes -r , Pual and Hophal always — ; the others may take either -r , or -:? . See the paradigm. (6) Yod mostly disappears before a voieel-lefter in afformatives ; but in poet- ry, especially in pausal forms, it is frequently retained : e. g. -IDn they tviisted, but Vpn Deut. 32 : 37, HJDri she trusts, Ps. 57 : 2 ; irpn.; Ps. 36 : 8. (c) In words without afformatives, but taking affixes, the third root-letter and its vowel disappear ; as DNT he saw them, 'JK^I? thou shalt see me, &c. Ohs. 1. The Hiphil perfect sometimes takes -7 in the first syllable ; hence ns'in he showed. Obs. 2. The Qal active participle feminine from np's is often nn's rather than nns. (See p. 38, foot-note). Obs. 3. Through the influence of an aspirate, diflFerent parts of the same verb sometimes become identical in form : thus ^7V1 may either be Qal {he shalt go wp) or Hiphil (Ae shall bring up, offer a sacrifice). C£. 191, Obs. 196. (a) A common mode of making an oath or a strong assever- ation is found, fully expressed, in such a passage as 2 Kings 6:31; DVn vSr rB^'^x tyxn ibjjrDtit Ipivnb) D»n?js <|)-n^i?rn3 So let God do to me, and so let him add, if... Of. 1 Sam. 3 : 17. But the intro- ductory declaration is often left to be understood, as in Job 27 : 4, so that (1) if the proposition commences at once with QS<, it must be regarded as a strong negative {Assuredly... not), 1 Kings 1 : 51 ; 2:8. Such asseverations are even represented as made by God ; see Num. 14 : 30, 1 Sam. 3:14, Ps. 89 : 36 ; 95 : 11. On the other hand, (2) in abbreviated propositions of this kind, ^^ ^^ must be viewed as strongly affirmative ; thus 1 Kings 20 : 23, 25, D??? PJDJ s6"l38< we shall certainly be stronger than they. (6) Another strongly affirmative particle is *3 (perhaps originally preceded by 'I swear') which may be rendered assuredly, certainly ; see Gen. 18 :20, Bxod.4:25, Josh.2:24, Ruth 1 : 10, 1 Sam. 10:19; 12:12; 26:16; 29:6, 2 Sam. 2 : 27, Is. 15 : 1, Jer. 22 : 22 ; sometimes D^ »3 as 1 Sam. 26 : 10. (c) Other introductory formulae, in strong affirmations, are (1) v fl? vC /<"" be it from me which, however, is often followed by an infinitive; and (2) ^5^ '0 -^s I live Cl^JD «« thou livest &c.). 170 VERBS 'LAMED HE.' Nole. Certain constractions of the verb njil to he with 7 require considera- ■Kon here. 1. Followed by a commoii noun, the expression frequently means to become, as Jer. 20 :7 piHE*? 'n'^n I am become a laughing -stock ; 1 Chr. 17 : 22 D*n$N^ Qr\h ri^n thoa becamest their God ; see also Gen. 2 : 7, 24 ; 17 : 16 ; Ex. 4 : 3, 4 &c. : hence— through the Septuagint— the Hebraism found in the New Testament, e'vai eis for yevea-Oai Matt. 19 : 5 &o. 2. Followed by ? with an infinitive, it may indicate (a) what is determined, fixed, in the future ; as Is. 5 : 5 "IW^? n*!!* he is to be consuiiied (124, Bern. 3) i. e. he is destined to be destroyed; similarly Deut. 31 : 17 73^?^ ^V7'^-- ^ut njn may be omitted, and the simple infinitive then comes to mark future cer- tainty, as in Is. 38 : 20 'iy'B'in^ njn* Jehovah [is] to save me, and in 21 : 1, where ^VT}? signi&es it sMU szoeep along, Bccl. 3 : 15 ni'n? "IB'X that which is to be; see also Hos. 9 : 13 &c. (J) The construction may mark immediate futurity, as in Gen. 15 : 12 KU? t^'l^g'^^ ''m and the sun was about to go down ; it may further (c) convey the idea of necessity, obligation, or duty, as in Is. 5 : 4 niB*!? ji-nD what is to be done ? Of. 10 : 32 ; Job 30 : 6. (d) In late Hebrew, the combination may be a mere circumlocution for the imperfect ; as 2 Clu-. 26 : 5 Q»ni)X B'")']'? »n;i and he sought (continued to seek) God. But this construction should not be imitated. Exercise 50. T\m to be like ; Pi. Vm^Tlt new wine nna to be fraitful njJB' to drink; Hi. liken; think, purpose Up 3 to weep nj J commit adultery usedisT^^^n n^-l to see ; Ni. f» be "iny? fresh oil n^U to go up ; Hi. bipi camel D^^Da seen, appear ; Hi. to na"! to be num- bring up, offer n^B' a waste, ruin cause to see, shaw erous, increase (a sacrifice) nn''13P rest, repose n^3 to be completed ; ^^B' Almighty 3.JJ the South (nriB') n;inRK'n to Pi. to finish, consume n32 to build THa to rebel, Hi. id. bow, worship n^r to answer, reply njS to turn (self) Tfjl vapour, mist nairi desolation -'^K nynn nnSa-^s ^E'yM-ntJ ^^sn 7 • "nay mn» n\n-^3 V IT T IT ./T ; IT • * -: - - • : I IT * T ; t t • jfnxn-nx ^jy* dhi Dwn-nx myx nin* dw Ninn VESBS 'LAMED HE.' 171 I -7N 11 i Titey n^HN nft2 oy *n»n li^n^ lo • Ssy^r.-riK r\^h ^^^s^-hii 12 5 n^topi ^is ^nkn dvn ^ *k rtx^i ^sjori ■:*im'?ito pN-m nxni nii? iiiE^; nS »3 •^^h'? nan ^^ nyisri nbnnni Dp^bN wai oi^Sx *Jin Sk^jj*: nn Srij^S n^^ni '^s'n;^ '^^ib') ^nx "ii^n^ ^':ib' SN17 sTiy-irnK Dnxp pN!i n^vn i;iy 19 . ^n^sin^ '^^sa *;jri is j D^ay : ai»ri njn ^n'^n-n^ ?|^v^ '^i^« ja-W Y?*^^ ^P* "^^l^*! riNnan ':'> N^^SO doing wonderfully, jud. 13 : 19, cf. also 2 Chr. 26 : 15 ; n3g'^ •Ipp'Sn dwell deep. Jet. 49:8; 0157 0^305 HBJ why didst thou flee away secretly (Ut. hide thyself in fleeing)? Gen. 31 : 27 ; Nil^ D^n 333^!! and thepeqplewent stealthily, 2 Sam. 19 : 4. (b) The second verb may be in the construct infinitive without ?, as p''t^'^i< I'nj I would flee far away, Ps. 55 : 8; ]ii *3''pn play skilfully (lit. do well in playing). Is. 23 : 16; n,3^ ^'JVl' to walk humbly, Micah 6 : 8. (c) The two verbs may even be simply co-ordinate, — in the same 'mood,' as Hbn ?»Kin he went willingly, Hos. 5:12; Vbva •inaK' -linD they quicJdy forgot his works. Psalm 106: 13; ti!?S)n inD escape quickly. Gen. 19:22; 33"! TV'i ride^ prosperously. Psalm 45 :5 ; •13^^' •l7*SB'n sit ye down low, Jer. 13 : 18 ; \r\p^ -Ip'fpi!!? they have deeply corrupted, Hosea 9:9; "^Vi D''3B'D departing early, Hos. 6:4; ^^Fl l^B'pK'l arud thou shall come down on the third day, 1 Sam. 20 : 19. ifl) The verbs may also be joined by Waw, either copulative, as n3,!?1 HnnD come quickly 1 Sam. 23 : 27, or conversive, as N3M "iriD 1 Sam. 4 : 14.' Exercise 51. na^ smk, fall, de- ntt-IS^ anything [N^S] Ni. be wonder- iTJJ to cast, throw cline ; Ri. desist, (np3) Pi. cover, pardon ful ; Hi. make Hi. to throw ; cease, let down [inD] Pi. make haste, wonderful teach, instruct N^T heal ; Pi. id. be quick ^D dew [n'JJ] Ei. praise VERBS 'lamed he.' 175 ■ : • T • : - (it : T •• • : i ■ ninT] ni»n nits n'^s :'nni lax "Ht ^a* }nw':'3 t I" T ; • • V • I 1 T V ; V v: TV- I - : "nS 9 J rsi^n D^uh Dfiy linvn ^Jts^-Sa ^ySy vn nibin 8 I " I I - • w ■ >■• v: ■■ ; T ■• T T T - T • I V IV - ■ : IT T IT V : • - : v /v - Sy^-Sx 17 : i^^M tyn-'^x i6 : vj^ya nan n^'^*-ts )ih>ii2 -\.- - I' : I - ./- - IT " : r T V : • I V : - ■ : |si)i2o jpN-'^K rsn-'?Ni9 :Dyn-nN Wnis :Dyn-S3 Iv-"- IviT V P V v- - IT T V - r- jT T T W22 jD^i^a pNi3 ^Tr'^yten "n^hSN nin* *5Jx2i .i^yjn -^ . IT : . [ ./^/./ .. J: — - ^ y y. T : • t - i- - Jv(V IT T y ; - ^ - V |T V T ■ T : *n^ iay-Vap D3^ '*»26 t^n^yi? ^-i;^ !=i']5"'7«25 :!:]X)b nin* xn-^i 27 J nin^ n^mx p^i a'^E'n*'? '7y^'i iay vrha I : T"- IT - ■• V Iv^•: ■- t • -j-; ^ • t -.-: ^n*"i28 jvSx^nN^an nin*'? nita db' p**) di^n-'^k . .- ,T " V : ' - T - - .. ; , T Ivv" /.T : - V ni% ii'i '^y*') 29 : ^«3 ^NittE' "n3ni n'^^yn ni'^yn'? iribs ^ ■ T -<-- IT " : -■ • : T T -: - : - : rha ay) viK "nx^ipb eiDV hm^^ 5 n'^'iyn niSyn^s S:3^i V : * : T - " • I V •• : - it t - -,:!;••- IT -: - - : - IT T -; : - vv : •• : - T IT : • : \v T V y • V I" T V — • I- • 'j^ya y^in ni^'y'? ni^n 39 ♦ N^^n'p oyn Dp^i;^ 38 . jaiS J inann ^la^uji-Sx ^i j »yya i^»n nitJ'y'? ni^tpn 40 ♦ nin* jfi'ina ynto^i mynS ix^'^sn^s ^jiya *jd33 ";nn*2 V 1" - : V -; ) V ■■ : I • • v ; v , , - 176 VERBS 'LAMED HE.' :th\vih ^S mi3 48 :nnia inba *»47 :S« n*!i D?n« IT : I : V IV \ T ■ I '" ' I ' IT ...:-• >.r - -: • I : it - : IT • -: - T ; • : • II" • : - v : . - « See 128, d. >> 1 Sam. 18 : 17. <^ See 87, 06s. <« Supply ' that.' « See 125, 1, Obs. a. /See 55. » See 196, Note 1. * Sinularly the Fr. ' Vive le roi ! ' « See 119, Obs. 1. * See 74, 2. ' ' whosoever : ' see 87, 1 a. Ezra 1:3. " See 128, c. " See 162, Bern. 1, 5. » See the general vocabulary at the end, under N^D II. P See 137, Note 1. « See 199. r See 208, 7. » See 110, e. Jer. 51 : 9. « See 125, 5. -■ Psalm 51 : 3. r 2 Chr. 26 ; 15. " See 195, 2, c. » See 171, 3, c. Write in Hehreio 1. Do not build thy house there. 2. Command thy son, saying, Do not as those who turn (128, c) to idols, to worship them. 3. Let not the child drink wine, but make him drink milk. 4. May our God, who has redeemed us (74, 2) from death, show kindness unto you. 5, Let thy blessing be upon us, and be thou with us to show us the way, that we may go up, 6. Do thou this, and live (119, Obs. 1). 7. Let the damsel turn, and go up to see. 8. Let me not see thy hand stretched out. 9. Weep not, saying, Let another go up instead of me, for I cannot go up. 10. When I was in our field my father cried to me, saying, Turn and see ! And I turned and saw three men, and went up the hill after them. 11. And it came to pass, when we were in my field alone, that (162, Bern. 1, 5) a wo- man appeared unto us. 12. Let us go up quickly. 13. Behold, we have offered (129) our sacrifices, and have done all that he com- manded us (195, IL, c) to do. 14. Then spake the man to the damsel, saying. Come with me, and become my wife (196, Note 1). And she answered him and said, I shall by all means go with thee ; so she became his wife. 15. Let us not speak much. 16. Ye have answered him well. 17. Why hast thou (so) often rebelled against mel 18. This woman has often wept. 19. Let us sit down low. 20. Our God will do great things (magnify to do) for us. 21. How wonderfully I have been healed ! 22. We have been wonderfully preserved. 23. Let us be ever praising (128, d) Jehovah, and in- structing others in His holy law. 24. Do not be constantly rebelling against your Maker. 25. Let us go down early, and build an altar quickly, that we may offer sacrifices and praise our Redeemer. VERBS ' PE NUN.' 177 Veebs 'Pe Nun.' 201. In ' Pe Nun ' verbs, Nun mostly disappears when, through inflection, it has lost its vowel (i. e. assumed Sh^wa), espepially after preformatives. Ohs. 1. As Tvill be noticed in the paradigm, this rule applies (a) to the Hiphil and Hophal throughout, the latter taking -;- in its first syllable. (6) In Niphal, only the perfect and the participle are aflfected ; whereas (c) in Qal, it is precisely these parts which are not affected. The other conjugations are obviously quite regular. Ohs. 2. Nun seldom disappears in any case from verbs whose middle radical happens to be (a) a vowel-letter, or (b) an aspirate ; hence ^n^J? thou shalt wherit, }'S?? he despises. But in Dnj {Ni. from unused Qalj he repented, &c. the N.un is dropped throughout ; Tinj to descend, has Qal imperfect JIH*, but Hiphil imperative nOJD. (c) In Qal, imperatives ending in o always retain the Nun ; imperfects sometimes do the same, especially in pause : hence D'pj avenge, "I'XJ keep, "liDJ* he will retain, Jer. 3 :5, but also nit2* Ps. 103 :9 : see Jer. 31 : 28 for illustrations of the construct infinitive. But forms which end with a mostly discard the Nun, according to the rule. 202. When Qal construct infinitive discards its Nun, n is ap- pended, and a segolate (132-136) is formed, — a 'first class' segolate in 'third aspirate verbs,' but a 'third class ' segolate in verbs which end in ordinary consonants. Thus, from nB3 to How, comes finS, nnp? ; from t^JJ to approach, is At- rived riB',^ (iW^c), ng'jS. Ohs. i. Only some words adopt such forms ; others have two or more con- struct infinitives. Thus, Vl) to smite, has both Vii and T\Vi ; yaj to plant has UbJ, nrp; Nbj to lift up, has T\i^f, mw^ and more rarely m\ &c.i 06s. 2. Except in the Niphal, ni?? to take, is treated like a Pe Nun verb ; hence in imperfect ng;, imperative ni3, construct infinitive niHIJ^ J^f j?? ; but Niphal ni?^3. Ohs. 3. The verb tOJ to give, further assimilates its final Nun to a succeed- ing consonant ; hence JJpJ, -Upj for JJJpJ, WSpJ- The other chief parts are the imperfect fpl?, imperative [fl, njFl (120), infinitive construct mostly nS (for n.3p ; suff. »J?ri &c.) nOf', but also thj, "tpj. 1 For the sake of simpHcity as well as convenience, the sentences containing verbs which are not merely ' Pe Nun,' but which have other weak radicals, and thus exhibit additional irregularities (as n'^J, TV^), T\^} &c.) will be given in Exercise 53. M 178 VERBS 'PE NUN.' Exercise 52. hs>i fall; Hi. cause [3V3] Ni- stand; [im] Hi. reach hh^ booty, spoil to fall, cast down Hi. place, set up to, overtake nn^H riddle, enigma b? fade, fail, im- njS corner n^a spring, n3-VD pillar, statue i)«)-/cc« "jS! ["?S3] ffi. deliver, fountain 'HDJ. drink-offering B'DJ forsake, desert snatch, puU out mi approachi HB morsel, piece [133] m. recognise [lii] Hi. teU pB*? kiss 1^9 support, sustam aix "1^1 nin^ -t^a «Ni-nSsi2 tvis^ '?isn Sisi^ TT -: t;-: tt:- itt: ^ ^j^^sni np3-'7«<^'33n4 nSb^. nnn? oa^ia 3 t^nSbi^-VN naS "ny-iii ni'^nii tiS^s) n^B'iNn !n?2N»i6 :>n':5ten ^is*? 7 :n3V-Vy V^iiin Sb*i ni'^^iiii iS^s*") ii7 nwn ny^n p^^jn ^i3 9 {lyjsV N^n ^t|53 t)i5i 'rixs t^m io j?y^_ ^ly vji^ npy^ii t^iiisr nin*-D« ^3 ^nin* ^nio ns^a : T T T I -: - IV t: • T ; • • t : - it -hii) yhii n?vi^ *^3 n!iii5 •."nnlsK YpJ^'^* • V'^^ ^'^'^^ 17 tininy "in-nx mi nin^ dk»i6 .tisk nnin mn I T : V V • - T ; - T I iv ■ - ■ na njiN-aa hhr\ Sh3 is . jsap nSy Shia Sia*. dn:?^"^? ni5{n •■nnx 20 . ni^n-Sy rasfii 'm Dipa nun 19 t Dyn T ; V- • T - 1 - - vT : - ■ ; ■ • I T •• ■ IT T ^23 22 t"nT3 "H^ay 'n3X3n njyxn ^3K2i :*px ri7i:i5 IV T \T ; - vyv ■ - T • T • -; I v it : inWri Dn^'^n-':'! m f?kh 1^53 nan 23 ♦."n'pN-nN Tan ^jtsx'^ii *ikS ri^T] 26 5 ^jT^a^i !n*3n 25 • ^ica' w-nn^an 24 ... • T : " • IV ■ - : V - nv : t t ■ - 28 t mn aViba ^3 nan Sin^S 27 : n*ax ^iiSi *r\nan ih I* T - : • • - ■., T : !• - I T ; • :v- • :nnn^a '•nnaa nnci* ^^29 .i^^a TtSa'? n^an"? n^a» n^ IT : - vw ~ •• : V I " IV T ( v/v : • - : ■ - I t niin nan 31 t^Sy-Sx nsnten-nx Tanx? nt Ssiiba'so 1 See the general vocahulaiy at the end. VEEBS 'PE NtJN.' 179 DS^'^y *ix Dn'?i 37 : {}>K)!3 i:)5fi!3 "iiN nr se • '?^2K3 rx 35 V •• -: ■ r - : • 1" •■ T •.. V ,- - I ■• »i>ij^js>n 39 t V^jfpi Wm j^EJ>n Jiij^n ^3 hnn 38 . o^nx '75{*i " : AT V V ( " „ I" • - : V- : \ IV IT -:. T\mh "ti^DiN^a t47-r\p) nay ni!: '^'^-nan^a sin'ian tiS V kv T I • I ir I - : V T • T I : V - r., - • I' T / t; - V 1/ V T : • : V T -; IT T : • - V \ T : • v<- IT - V v;-'- - i-t:-: -■- i^f i ' |t-; t t ; • t t " v <- : :r'- !•>.- t't V "T^ - V <- i*t; t (tt:v i)-'- ' V *- 'AT •-. C /T - T : * t - ; vv - I vf»l 1 Kings 22 : 35 ; IVJ to form, imperfect -iniV'. Is. 44 : 12, and n^f*?! Gen. 2:7; "WX to he straight, imperfect generally IB'". &c., but n^'1,g';i in 1 Sam. 6 : 12 ; DnD^ I shall chastise them, Hosea 6 : 10. Note. A few verbs ' "Ayin Waw ' likewise sometimes take forms resembling those of verbs 'PeNun;' thus [n-lD] Hi. D^Bri {to incite), IT'S;, ffBD as well as n»Ori, n^pj; ni3 «o mit, takes in Hiphil the forms 0'?!^, O'l.', 0*50 as well as O'JD. D'S). &c. See 19, 3. Hem. An earnest wish or desire may be indicated (1) by JB! *0 that....' Would that... {lit. Who will give...?). This expression may be completed in various ways, thus : — (a) By a noun, or a noun sentence : as D*p *B'S"1 tfll *P '^a' ^V ^"'^ nj5a jjT)*-^p ni^xn i-iyii in'iy jri^-^tt nDx;^ "ij-^i^ IT : T : V T • : J • -; - .. -. ~ } •• • • it ; ■ - . .. ; . r\iiyh nr n^:h nwiw*to63 Jl^^5^:a^<1 ^nyT "|n^-^tt52 r ; ■: v t t ; t t : I ■• • • •• t : v : * ; v-t I •• • 56 J V1X3 i3s^' ^jjsj}'^ *tt 55 J -131 ni'?K |n^-'a 54 . *nk I V IT t " _ •I" ■ ; • ,.. _ - .,.; I .. . . ,. : ^iyttp !)'? 60 J ^isV n^n* hii)^w\ ^h 59 : h ^^m m T ■ 1.- ; : • / IV T : • • : : it t ; i- J lyto^ri '|?p-Dx ^di*ri 66 : ^S-y&tJ'Pi-DN 65 . ^riisib'? « Isaiah 9 : 17. 'Regarding this pausal fonn, see 19, 6. « See Exer- cise 17, Note a. rf Exodus 10 : 24. « See 161, c. f See 80, 1. ? Ps. 139 ;:8. In the Old Testament, this word (from pDJ ascend) is found here only. * See 208, 1. * Est. 4 : 3. * See the constructions on p. 157. ' See 200, d. 184 DOUBLE "aYIN VERBS. m Deut. 30 : 4. « See 66, Obs. 6, b. » See 182, d. p See 196. » See 18, Obs.l. »• 'To accept the person of...' Proverbs 18 : 5. » See 124, iJem. 4. ' Job 31 : 5. « Job 23 : 3. " Deut. 5 : 26. " Sse 125, 1, Obs. * See 72,3. JFnVe in Hebrew 1. Behold, I will kindle a fire in thy gates, and all thy houses shall he burned in the fire. 2. Let us kindle fire in his forest, that the trees may be burned. 3. Do not kindle fire in their forest, lest the trees be burned. 4. Set thy foot upon this stone. 5. Do nob set fire to the thicket again. 6. Behold, they are setting the idol in their temple. 7. Pour ye some of your oil upon their head, and kiss them. 8. Why hast thou set up this pillar, and poured out on it a libation ? 9. Let us pour some of this flask of oil on his head. 10. Let us not touch the unclean. 11. When you touch them, I shall scatter you like the dust before the wind. 12. Let us scatter the wicked, but let us not touch the outcast poor. 13. Scatter thou their armies, as a flock is scattered. 14. I shall quicldy scatter them before thee. 15. I shaU utterly smite them. 16. We have been utterly smitten by (167, 5, Note) our foes. 17. Let us not incline our ears unto them when they lift up their voice and weep. 18. Let us lift up our hand [and swear that] we shall not turn aside the poor in the judgment. 19. that I were a king ! 20. that we were strong ! 21. that ye were wise ! 22. that we had bread to eat ! 23. that some one would tell me ! 24. Would that we knew ! 25. that we had refused to go ! 26. that I had obeyed your commands ! 27. Would that I had died instead of them ! 28. if they would speak ! Verbs 'Double "Atin.' 204. The cause of the pecuHarities of these verbs is their prevail- ing tendency to drop one of the two like radicals. However, no con- traction can be made in forms (a) with Doubling Dagesh, or (6) with unchangeable vowels. Examples of contracted forms are 3D for 23ip, -lap for -1330, 3b for 330; incontractible forms are the Qal participles 33b 3-13p, Piel' 33p &c. VERBS 'DOUBLE "aYIN.' 185 205. These verbs, in their contracted forms, present some points of likeness to verbs ' "Ayin Waw,' — in fact, the mode of inflection is perplexingly identical : compare the Niphal imperfect Dip? with Qal imperfect 3B?, Dnj with 3D; &c. Their common features are these: — (1) The root is shortened to a monosyllable. Cf. 3D, from 33D, with DS, from DIP. (2) The accent is mostly penultimate (cf. 191, 2). Contrast the imperatives -ID-li?, -lafa, with •1'IDB'. But participles and (of course) words whose afformatives are ' heavy ' take the accent on the final syl- lable. (3) Preformatives mostly take long vowels, and these if possible of the same class as in the common verb, but the Niphal perfect and sometimes the Qal imperfect take a Qam^z : see the paradigm. 1. The imperfects of Qal and Hiphil, instead of- taking a long vowel under the preformative, sometimes retain the original short vowel of the regular verb, but in such cases the first radical is doubled (19, 3) : see the paradigm, and the following examples. 2. In the Qal imperfect, three different forms occur : (a) tjn to pity, tt^ to plunder, spoil, lyo to rob, despoil, "IIN to curse, T10 to measure, \T\ to shout, pi5? to lick, lap, Jap to dance, celebrate a festival, ftr to be strong, with others, become fn;, t3J &c., and take no other form : this class is most numerous, and is composed of active verbs. (6) The neuter or stative verbs THDi to be bitter, 72\>^ to be diminished, despised, swift, nnr; to be broken, he confownded, TIDT to be tender, "SV") 2 to be evil, mxike a loud noise, assume only the form 7D.1, "ID'. &o. (c) DDl to be dumb, silent, still, DOIjl to be complete, to finish, T1i7 to bow the head, become D'h;, Dh?, Hp;. {d) But 33p2 to turn, on^s self round, to go round, to surround, becomes 3bj or 3b; ; l^yi to be an adversary, to be in distress, has the forms IS) and IV' : while DDn i to be warm, hot, has three forms, Dhj, Dn,'., and Dn; ; similarly, WCW to be de- solate, laid waste, to be astonished, becomes DB';, DJ^J, or DB*'. 06a. Such difficulty has been found in dealing with the imperfects in this class of verbs, especially the intransitives, that even such eminent authorities as Ewald, Gesenius, and others, do not agree in their views regarding some forms, particularly those of Qal and Niphal. But since it is sometimes hard to de- termine the precise difference between the meanings of the two species, it may be a matter of indifference to which conjugation certain forms are assigned. 206. (a) The shortened stem-forms in these ' Double "Ayin ' verbs retain the last vowel that would regularly appear in the full form : but Hiphil, throughout, takes — , and imperfect Niphal ends with -r-. 1 On the impersonal use of these verbs, see 227, and 38 in the Exercise. 2 For a fuller account of these verbs, see the general vocabulary at the end. 186 TERES ' DOUBLE "aTIN.' {b) The Dagesh which should mark the contraction (19, 1) is omitted from the final radical if this concludes the form (18, Ohs. 1). But it is inserted when afformatives succeed ; and if these are not al- ready vowel-sounds, a vowel must be introduced between them and the stem, to make Dagesh distinctly audible. This helping vowel (which assumes the tone) is, in the perfect, i, but V in other parts. See Paradigm. Eem. Besides the regular intensive forms (168), Po"e!, Pilpel, &c. (175) are in common use. Exercise 54 773 to roll lin hole, cavern n^^D plague, pesti- [p50] Ni. melt, pine pi?3 to empty (?7n pierce) Pi. pro- lence ; slaughter away ; Hi. cause '""?? grain (uncut) fane ; Hi. begin D3T to multiply, in- to pine away p'n bosom B'lp'^D sickle crease (D&9) -^*- ™6lt away J ^ I- T V y : : ■ IT T : - • V : • ; • "IT - - /~ T • T " : - I' T : -jv \' r nin» i^_ •^\nrii ink ^iSBn nnx \n''i t inx isbm. pxn riD* ^J3^>i3 jcE5'> nny-':?3i2 nian nani fixn pian ^piarm D-sn !i^pi5 : bnnnx nsK'j pNn-'?3 14 j nxr*?!? tinK** * ~ " I J- r." •■ -; - T V- T I V ;t T T I - . ~ . 5*n^3^y3 hpii) ttwha ^nnt^ ^nmie tnanxn ^is '7^23 h'^a 20 : ^^ji p^^ nsj^n 19 . ^^p^^ ,yr^ is . Dp^finh !iVp* 17 rty^^n-^l 22 J ^jri'ppn y^nib 21 • oa^Syj: iT/nx "^p* D^fin2i : };n7n-nN *^nyS Miin-Si ^aj!i23 th^^ra^ 26 :DnN'*&n-ny Ninn ^i]in-'?y -i|bSK25 :*!in'nDj ^n ^3h28 .yL,p ,^^, ^3--,, 27 jntenn n*N^::3n iiisn^ :iy'ia • TlT •..- ^_, TTT VERBS ' DOUBLE "aTIN." 187 ^T? DiNH ^33 tnijj's?'? D^nn ™nT82 :a>i i:?™! psn I , T , .. .. 1 -: - T • - V I- 1" T I V T T "HiB'N'i DnWis *ma35 jn5{ "la^-nasi tnanxn ^jrSy T * T T •,_:•.) - IT T - T IT T -: T " : ^h m^n* 89 J ii:j-i5{ ^3 ^j^n ss . tDnx mn^ |n»i hki^' T : |. - . .y. T IT T : t T^T- ■■ T : • iT T T ■ rf •• -: - - - T : ' r : V t IT *■ 'i^* : V - ■• T T " T ; • • : ir r -; t t y " " " • - T - " -IT TV"" - ; T ■■ J- •• -" V\T I T !• - / T 1" •• • - j~ .. . IV : -'— - IT - - } vf " I - ,. _ J J.. J . n3n54 jy-iri ii^nn^s rcnz: ^S ynj52 t^^^j^ ^nx xi ... - 1" T : • IV " I : - T I" T - - T Sim ^piin ns^an n^nn mrss ty^nS '^na ^Di^ i^ya T : ' " ,' A' ■■ - - V : • - I" T : t • t pan iJiB'S'i nnra nipsn vj^yi v':?J^-'7y naj; ^Niini x:3X-'73 >ipDJi ^DOTtt Dnn iistoii 'iD^Ji'^ Dn^bSn ee . aniu^ T : T I - T : A» ' • • T /- T : t : . ■.•••:- iv • : « See 73, a 'See 154, 5. « See 80, 1. <« See 139, 11. 0J«. 2. « See 208, 1. ^ See 162, 5, Bern. 1, 5. e Isaiah 11 : 14. '' See 125, 1. Isaiah 24 : 3. i Gen. 16 : 5. * See 200. ' See 124. '» Gen. 11:6. "See 87, 2, 6. See 76, Exception 1. p See 117, 8. i See 52 and 77. Zephan. 1 : 15, 16. '• Isaiah 7:8. « See 112, 2. ' The full form of the pronoun, instead of the suffix-fragment, appended to the preposition, is quite exceptional. Jer. 10 : 2. " See 88, 4, c. " See 155. «" See 200. ^ See 125, 4, b. Zechariah 14 : 12. v This is a circumstantial clause : see 129, Obs. 2, and 222. 2 See 167, ^o(e. Isaiah 34 : 3. Write in Hebrew 1. Ye have completely rolled away (125) tlieir reproach from up- on us. 2. Cause ye this book to be rolled (up), but do not let those 188 VERBS 'DOUBLE "aTIN." books be rolled (up). 3. We rolled stones to his door, and surround- ed the house. 4. I will wholly remove (125, 1) my face from thee, and thy kingdom shall be transferred to another. 5. His kingdom shall be wholly transferred to others, and I will remove my face from him. 6. Let lis encompass their house (cf 5, above), that we may plunder their money. 7. Their houses have been completely plundered, and their fields quite laid waste. 8. We have despoiled many nations, and plundered their cities. 9. Let the heavens be as- tonished, and the earth be dumb. 10. I was dumb and astonished because of this great wickedness of theirs (86, 2, e). 11. Let us lay waste {Hi.) their vineyards, and spoil their cattle. 12. Let not thine heart be tender, neither be confounded because of (cf 44, above) thine adversaries, when (117, 5) their hand is strong. 13. We are con- founded because of our adversaries, and we are despised in their eyes. 14. Your hand will be strong over all your adversaries, and ye will be swifter than the eagle. 15. We have finished measuring (cf 23, and 24, above) the upper court. 16. We have quite gone round (cf. 23, and 24) these walls, and have measured their length and their height. 17. On that day we were dumb before Jehovah, and bowed the head and worshipped. 18. Do not begin to dance before (117, 7) ye have finished eating. 19. Begin to drink, but do not lap with thy tongue. 20. Pity them, but do not curse them. 21. Pity us, for we are distressed (cf, 38, above). 22. We turned round and pitied them. 23. Those walls cannot be measured (cf 36, above), and the trees have increased too much to be counted (155, c, Obs., and 124, Bern. 1). 24. Let not thine eye be evil on thy brother, when thou measurest his field. 25. We have done more evil than our fathers (49, above). 26. I shall do greater evil to them than [to] you (52, above). 27. Let not thine heart begin to melt away. 28. Why have ye done evil to us, and cursed us in your heart ? THE CONSTETJCT STATE. 189 Additional Remarks on the Constetot State. 207. Besides its more common uses already mentioned (79, 80), the construct state is also employed to mark close connection under such circumstances as the following : — 1. Before a preposition : this mostly occurs (a) in poetry, and (p) when the construct word is a participle. Thus i^ »3in tJwse waiting for him, Is. 30 : 18 ; "V))^ I'lS-Vp on the nvrth of the city. Josh. 8:13, DlispjD'^N a God at hand, PITip ''b'^^f a God far off, Jerem. 23 : 23 ; "lil"*J5N"7S' ^ill* those going down to the stones of the pit,ls.\i:\Q. (Cf. 209, 6, 2). 'See also 1—13 in Exercise. The constract is likewise found before the accusatival sign, as 'ri'X ''D'7^0 those who minister to me, Jar. 33 : 22. 2. Before a relative sentence, both (a) when the sign 1B'^? is ex- pressed, and (b) when it is implied. ^ Hence D^^-IDt? ^^SH '^ipS "Ig's? DipD the place [in] which the prisoners of the king were bound, Gen. 39 : 20 ; TiT lijrj ri*"||? the city [in which] David encamped. Is. 29 : 1. See further Gen. 40 : 3, 1 Sara. 3 : 13, and 14 — 18 in the Exercise. 3. Before an adjective, which, properly, forms the attributive of the preceding construct noun (55). This adjective generally expresses quality, as D'1?T ''3t^7p evil angeU, Ps. 78 : 49, but it may also be a numeral, particularly HIJ^, as llj^ j'nx 2 Kings 12:10. Note. The first numeral sometimes takes the construct form even when not explicitly combined with a succeeding word, as in Zech. 11:7; or when (in the attributive relation) the absolute would certainly be expected, Gen. 48 : 22. 4. The construct is also found before adverbs. Examples are D|n ''P'^ hlood [shed] causelessly, 1 Kings 2 : 31 ; DPI' 'V na n^-in3 virgin daughter of Zim, Is. 37 :22. See also 20—25 in the Exercise. 1 This paragraph will be better understood at a later stage, when we come to treat of the conjunctions : see 219, especially Obst and Bern. 190 THE CONSTETJCT STATE (rESUMED). 6. Before the simple ) copulative, — but such cases rarely occur. Thus riV^) nD3n wisdom and knowledge, Is. 33 : 6 ; also 26 in Exercise. 7. In poetry, instead of more explicitly employing the absolute form together with the preposition usually required by the verb, a participle is sometimes more briefly put in the construct state. Thus, 1.515 ^35'B' those lying in the grave, Ps. 88 : 6 ; DJH \f 'li' those who go down to the sea, Isaiah 42 : 10 ; '?.p3-1 »JV n'DX n.)»W) "^fh iSB** those who sit in darkness and the shado^o of death, bound in affliction and iron, Ps. 107 : 10. See also Gen. 23 : 10, 18 ; Jud, 8 : 30, and 27 in Exercise. 8. Rarely is the construct found before the infinitive ; see 28, 29 in Exercise. Exercise 55. {•vy&) Pi. seek PIDT throw, shoot 3^n milk (fresh) 1''Vi; harvest (of fJ^D (1) prey, food NIB* iniciuity, false- npn trust, con- grain) X'ni wild ass hood, vanity fide in 3?3 (i) dog r\'7\ D-txns jQna inx nm m^ rrS tmh nisjijqi T T T T T IV •■ - - T - - ( I" \T T T - -; 'h-T\^^ x'ur\h^ njj lix nibSif psn •''ya;^^ :D^to-'?3 V IV ■• -; - T V T : - I viv : •• : . p. ' " :n ^Din-'^t) »n^K8 tDnss'b *p^ny ri'^nib h^'ai, ^rriv ' "l ' ■■■■'[ '"' ' '" " y r , ■■ '■■■■ liT - ■ : ■ - I- |t- - : ■ : ) V r : ^ „ D^ys;! ^x^; nanfis ^q^x^bis • ^r\) n^n n^?:-i5 nzsS n^n nnxto iis'^n^ ^^a^' npia ^^s^ajj'a '^inis j tints'? nriE'tt -liiEj'n '7ip-nx iiypB'n na'K DipDa 14 . tp^^'p'^* ^^ n^^^ n-i-nx D^nbn iipj-^S ia>K Dipaa 15 : iiyj^x iii^ipn rm 'nsB'17 :'?N 5JT nS *Diponji6 t^^-^-nx ^p^; ni'i ij^'prinn "•*;b*-'?3 n^siN^ ^jnps n'^is jyto^yx ^ris?-t* vC .•' ■ "= ' ^ ^ .■ W'T IT : V • : \- T "m^ ^^Nvnx nnj5 22 t^aa-na n^piina "i|y-'?y ♦^e'!i"'7'i THE ACCUSATIVE. 191 a See 52. ' See 185, Note 1. ' See 137, Note 1. "^ See 55, c. * See Exercise 51, vocabulary : Isaiah 28: 9. / Lamentations- 2 : 18. ^See 95, Obs. 3. Ps. 58 : 5. » Job 24 : 5. < Isaiah 5:11. * Supply ' him who.' Job 18: 21. 'Supply 'those (or one) whom.' Ps. 81:6. "> Supply such an expression as ' the time during which.' 1 Sam. 25 : 15. " See 196, c. " See 71, 1. 2. P'a, woman [who is] mistress of a conjuring spirit.' 1 Sam. 28 ; 7. ? 2 Kings 10; 6. »■ 2 Samuel 20 : 19. 'Isaiah 19 : 11. 'Psalm 78: 9. ••: Is. 51 : 21 : Psalm 88 : 5. w Isaiah 56 : 10. a: Psalra 127: 2. Note. As the above constructions are exceptional, no sentences are here prescribed for translation from English into Hebrew. Uses of the Acousativb. 208. Besides marking the direct object of transitive verbs (105, Note), the simple accusative may be employed to indicate other mod- ifications of the idea presented by a verb, such as the following : — 1. Direction to a place ; as 7|?3n np?;) let us go [to] Oilgal, 1 Sam. 11 : 14, 0.?p''1"'3 S^nj let MS go [into] Jerusalem, Jer. 35 : 11. See 1 — 12 in Exercise. 2. Rest in a place ; thus Jp!*? nng 3B'* sitting [in] the dow of the tent. Gen. 18 : 1 ; irpJI {♦'JK jn;i arid, he encamped [in] the land of Gilead, 2 Sam. 17 : 26. See also 13, 14 in Exercise. 3. Distance, as Di* ';|p7l "laiBS '^\\ he went a dmjs journey in the wild- erness, 1 Kings 19 : 4. 4. A point of time, as Di»n to-day. See also 16 — 19 in Exercise. 5. Duration of time, as ihljg D*pj nC'tJ' six days shalt thou labour, Ex. 20 : 9, The accusative may likewise indicate the space of time within which an action is performed ; see 23, 24 in Exercise. 192 THE ACCUSATIVE. 6. The instrument, material, manner, &c., as FlpV 0*^? -IB? t?ui mountains were covered [miib.] its shadow, Fsalm 80 : il ; 11 SS >1Jn girded [mth] an ephod, 1 Sanj. 2 : 18 ; "Ifil? DINriTI^ l^'H aM(i Ae formed the man [out of] dtMf, Gen. 2:7; na^J OJDX / iciW Ime them willingly, Hos. 14 : 5. 7. A brief descriptive detail. Thus, nE'5 T|;?{j! tl-ipp' OJX I am sent unto thee [with] heavy [tidings ; 66, Obs. 6], 1 Kings 14 : 6 ; Vni Vlp prj^J and I cried [with] a lovd voice, Ezek. 11 : 13 ; nD|I"t3tJ'! he shall dwell [in] «e- curity, Pr. 1 : 33 ; D*"13V 'J?* Dn'K -IDiB* ^Zacs «Am [in] two heaps, 2 Kings 10:8; D*>1"lttg D??SX D'i?3ri Ephraim has provoked most bitterly, Biosea, 12 : 15 ; 'H,? '3.'''>'"7rl*H^ 0'?'^ 'A"'' ^si smitten all mine enemies [on the] cheek-bone, Ps. 3 : 8. Note. While the simple accusative is certainly capable of bearing the var- ious significations now indicated, these may also be more clearly distinguished by speciiic prepositions and other constructions. Thus, {a) motion towards a place is frequently marked by "7??, ? &c., or by the old accusatival termina- tion n— (209, c). (b) Rest in a place is often marked by 3. (c) A point of time may be indicated by 3, as Di>3 to-day. Gen. 25 : 31, 33, or by the same preposition 3, as N-iriD Di*3 on that day. {d) The latter particle is further much more frequently employed to mark the instrument, as 3tip3 -inSH they smote him with th£ sword ; or a descriptive detail, as 7'n| 7ip3 Ipl^Jl! and they cried with a loud voice, Neh. 9:4, Exercise 56. n-1*)*J? blackness, darkness nifJI unwalled villages n%13i? burial ; sepulchre dnifto nn"i*n ^in 3 ♦ ansa ^'!\^ 'h 2 : mm ns j 1 •V- : • • : - -IT : ■ I" iv t - Sa. "nisrij -la-Dsn Dsn "oyns \hh^r\ ni'?^* tniry'? V i - : V IT : • - . T - T T IT : • - vt : i- it : v : tVrt) fl^XSJ^l pN D!'^^'!? '^^>? Y'?^'"' 'T^^ '^^^""T : nil r-iN ni»n-m iiini? Qnsy 9 j d^ntJ'SiD r"i« 'inun IT T - I V IT •• -: - - : T : • - j y - V: - .jT T - - : - T - ,. T T ■.. .. IT : • - <• T it: I V V T T : •• ■ : It t mn*i8 sni!3 nm 'n^^'h 17 t'^N^jy' ^j^ya ^Sin '^nx T ; — .. I"* T ~ T T - I" T ; • ■■ It . ) : y - •• r :|«a "nan anb 6nn !iii)Sto "Dviq xh^'p ypB'n im THE ACCUSATIVE. 193 22 jpN3 na^n D^n3B'%nT2i :d^jb» r\B^sj> ntryn nisso i V IT T T T T ■ ^- T : V r T -t r' v -; - n'i!in:-jj'^N-nK ^V-pyns* jp^n-nNi Dwn-nx nin^ •. V ' ( v: - I V IT T V : -i- t - v r - ■ "^ ' r T . . ,T . - . I vv r J !• T V / : 29 ifiB^nin D^iii '"ht nnN28 :n!nnp ow 2^^aSN27 ' : I' ^1 .'IT I - 1 I- .1,- T • : - f vjT T T J IV I - T T •• • : - T : - 1 1/ • : t v nin:-SN ^'?ip pyrx mn*-'?x »Sip82 x^r\^ '^ip n^Sa . .' ''" '• " r T r •■ ■ I IT - : V *ii£5n miipss tnanni anx aha d'^B'!i^* "aa^n ninas^ - (; ir " : t t •• •- t : ■• - t ; IT : tv rr •• ) t - » Josh. 8 : 20. » Lam. 2:1. « Ps. 134 : 2. <« See 26, 2, 6. « See 128, £?. 1 Kings 5 : 1 [^jiy. Vers. 4 : 21]. / Hos. 4 : 15 (cf. 5 : 8, and 10 : 5). The prophet, in his characteristic fashion, really refers to Bethel, which had lost all right to the name (see Gen. 28 : 16—19), since it had now become the abode of idols (1 Kings 12 : 28, 29 ; Amos 3 : 14 &c.). s Hos. 7:11. * See 120, a. i 1 Kings 8 ; 34. * Ezek. 28 : 2. ' See 73, 2. '" Hosea 7:5. « See 207, 1. » See 147, 1. P See 149, b. i Isaiah 43 : 23. '' Psalm 44 : 3. i Psahn 108 : 7. <■ Psalm 17 : 13. « Is. 1 : 20. " Is. 49 : 23. " Zech. 2:8, '^ Jer. 22 : 19. Write in Sehrew i 1. Our queeu reigned twenty-four years and seven months. 2. We surrounded their city for three years, and there was a famine in the midst of it for five months. And we took the city and set it on fire, and it burned for three days. 3. I shall come to you with- in ten days, and dwell three weeks with you. 4. You can destroy this large city in two days, but you could not build it in twenty years. 5. My days are full [of] trouble. 6. Ye are full [of] de- 1 Only a few of the most common uses of the adverbial accusative are involv- ■ ed in these sentences ; exclusively poetical constructions, and even some which frequently occur in ordinary prose (such as those illustrated in 208, 1 and 2) have been avoided. N 194 OLD CASE-ENDINGS. ceit. 7. Fill his cup [with] milk. 8. I am clothed [with] shame, and full of grief. 9. We clothed him [with] a new tunic. 10. Let us praise Jehovah [with] one mouth (i. e. one accord). 11. Their cities are twelve [in] number. 12. [At] evening, ye shall eat the passover, and [in the] morning ye shall be driven out of Egypt. 13. Do not strike him [on the] head. Old Case-Endings. 209. The few old case-endings still to be seen in Hebrew are n r 't- (or i) and -1. These terminations show affinity with those of the Arabic, which formerly- had fi, I, a, as vowel-endings for the nominative, the genitive and the accusative respectively. (a) The termination i ( -i in some proper names), which was per- haps that of the ancient nominative, now marks the construct in a few rare instances. Thus, ^INinin the beasts of the earth. Gen. 1 : 24 ; 1^3 W3 son of B^or, Num. 24 : 3 ;' '?N-l'j3 Penuel (the face of God), Gen. 32 : 32 (but v. 31 gives the form ^S*??). Note. This ending and the following mostly receive the tone, and shorten or reject preceding vowels : cf. the termination T\t (below, Bern. 1). {b) The termination i-r- occurs more frequently, chiefly in poetry. 1. In proper names and certain particles, it marks the construct singular. Thus pTyiapD ''n'551 ?i? ctfter the manner of Melchizedek (king of right- eousness). Psalm 110: 4; 7S!''"!'?! GaSricZ (man of God) ; 'Jlb-U besides ; 'SD from, (see 107, foot-note). 2. It is often appended to a participle, either with or without a preposition immediately following (cf. 207, 1) and with or without the article prefixed : see 2—6, and 8—10 in Exercise. Thus n.Jp »3?E' dwelling in the lush, Deut. 33 : 16 ; DBB*!? 'nx^D nnp a city full of judgment, Is. 1 :21 ; tiV ^ri33il stolen hy day, Geii. 31 ; 39 ; JSJ7 ^tlp'S binding to the vine. Gen. 49 : 11 : see also Ps. 113 : 5—9. 3. Probably ■*3f?, 'OS (144) are really old genitival forms, (c) But by far the most frequently used, even in ordinary prose, is the termination n-r ^, which chiefly marks certain accusatives. I Very rarely il— , as nai to Nob, 1 Sara. 21 : 2 ; 22 : 9. OLD CASE-ENDIKGS. 195 This ending mostly signifies (1) motion to a place (of. 120, a), as H^jin to the mountain (see further examples below) ; sometimes (2) restim a place, as n^B* tlwe (besides its usual meaning thither), 1 Kings 9 : 16. (3) At other times, more especially in poetry, the tei-mination does not seem to affect the meaning of the word at all (see 18, 27, 28 in Exercise) ; this becomes more evident when a preposition also is joined to the word (see below. Rem. 2). (4) More rarely, it is joined to a word indicative of time, as Tufl night, hy night ; npJ? now ; n^'ipj Wip)\pfrom days to days, i, e. every year, 1 Sam. 1 : 3. Bern. 1. This termination seldom assumes the tone ; see the examples given, and contrast what is stated above, in a. Note. 2. It may be added to a construct noun, as 2ii7\ HV^Jjl to the land of the South, Gen. 20 : 1 ; fjOi* HJ^I'S to Joseph's house', Gen. 44 : 14 ; or to a noun with a preposition, in which case it ceases to have any appreciable force, as in n|lJS3 in the South, Joshua 15 ; 21, n^^^a in Ahel, 2 Sam. 20 ; 15 ; H^pjS in Jahesh, 1 Sam. 31 : 13. It is even found after IP, as n^J^P from Baby- lon, Jer. 27 : 16. 3. On assuming it, feminines in n— change this to fir , as nnW to Gaza, Judges 16 : 1, nj^l^jna m Biblah, Jer. 52 : 10 ; and an implicit Dagesh is ex- pressed (18, Ohs. i)',a.i r\l Gath, but nns to Gath, 1 Kings 2 : 39, 40. Exercise 57. (K^J) Hi. deceive njp^g! widow 3*13 willing, gener- fn| pride Dinp height; adv. R3| be high, proud ; ous; m. prince, . B'ln forest on high Hi. exalt ]^^ smoke nsiD whirlwind :D^a^'3 ^;ia'»n ^;^y-r\K ^mm y'?n^ 'A^T^ *^!'s^ '^'^^^ Dina ^B'Sh y'pDn njnii ^332' '^iS pi] ^m ^N^^hs n'p D^x n^sn ^ishn :3|ba: niSx ^is'pa px "^'pin^ tny^a ^r\a"i n^yn "Tin nnK'* *nD\^7 :D*i:iyyaS ^'i^n D*b ', T - • T T T JT : IT T •■ • IT " ', ~ ' ■ T - 196 OLD CASE-ENDINGS. 15 t m^ Wiii^rom '?s^;a« "m, v i* t nn^an ^m { nibwn n^yn JB'y nW nsn is t n^^ten X5f» nps nsn ■ t:itt- •tI--: tt "• t:it •. jVTpnS nnjan nin^ ^j^ysnpjis trrnnn "bi^ n^yi^ *jfiS '•SsJ tin nsn 20 . nan nanpi nsJiJi nis^ ^^^^ ^^ .... "It " • T|TT T ilJ"T T .V.-T T / T T .,_ ... T I : •• T .. .. • T . IT T . vSy nyi nin* nsni na^b^'n y*5^ ' ia'Nn^ n^n« n^a ^^^ i^ 23 . n^jj") n^flif 1 nanpi na* mis^^ pixn nsya )■■ T : IV T T ^ T ; T :/"T TjT T : -T I *. at t . t Sxinn nn;^5 D'ik ni;^3 tj'? D^ip 24 5 pmi rrnana ^ann? - ; I - T T T rr : - - •• t : • t V : J • "y5j'rDnB'nn28 jii-i'ifp^ nnsiDi ^lyir "nn27 jnny^ii - W V : — : I ] : ■ t w : t : ■ - t it : : ntynh!! ^ni"! 29 . an^^fp nnSiy T : I - ■ T IV : - I : tjt : - « Isaiah 56 : 9 ; see the Revised Version, with the rendering in the margin. '<'3f is a poetic form, for nnK', and Vns (195, II. b) is an imperative, for -inS come ye ! » See 207, 1, a. " « Zech. H : 17. <* See 83, 1. « Is. 22 : 16. / See 207, 1, Bern. 9 Jer. 49 : 16. '' Ps. 1 14 : 7, 8. * Lam. 1:1. * Ps. 113 : 5—8. ' See 200. ™ Hos. 10 : 11. "2 Sam. 22 : 2, cf. Ps. 144 : 2. It may be a question whether this combination really falls within the present category, or is not rather a case in which the affix attached to the participle is repeated— for emphasis, or in the Aramaic fashion — ^with the preposition, as in "h '3;V< mine enemies, Ps. 27 : 2. The 'h is omitted in Ps. 18 : 2. » See 196. ^ri [v.^ri] Pause-form *"38 *"?| *Vn 'la *D^ 'r'ip Light^suffix Dns vyt? 'vq^ ''*iif' i'f'P -li;.?;"?? Heavy suffix Dnn? D,:;i*D^ pn^Ii'P] Note. In some plurals, the radical ' is softened into X ; thus D^Kpi, D*^{5V (but D'jns, D*;aV are also used). Less common forms are npa weeing, nV5 end, •in'B' a swimming. See also 136, c, Obs. The first-class forms are comparatively rare. 211. Segolates from verbs ' "Ayin Waw ' and ' "Ayin Yod ' (190) sometimes still show the penult tone, but otherwise manifest wide deviation from the normal forms, resulting from the weakness of the middle radical "Ayin Waw "Ayin Tod Absolute tos? D^J^N lia' nnitJ'" P-iB' ^'W ^V ^'^m Construct flK *J^N liB' 'ii'^ P'^^ *5-1B' ^*0 '^^0 Suffix-form »}iK "iB' °f"n ^^"^'^ 198 ADDIirONAL REMARKS ON SEGOLATES. Rem. 1. {a) There are no second class segoktes derived from '"Ayin Waw' roots. (i) Some feeble forms have given up aU power of internal inflection, and may accordingly be classed among indeclinable nouns ; thus in a gener- ation, Y)p thorn, n-13 a whelp, I'lN light. Rem. 2. From ' "Ayin Yod' roots, instances of first class segolates alone are clearly discernible : in these, the plural absolute sometimes takes the form D*nn olives. No third class forms exist at all, while second class forms have become so weak as to have almost completely lost inflecting power, and may be viewed as indeclmable ; thus T'B' smg, 3n contention. 212. Tlie Segolates from ' Double "Ayin ' verbs (204) contract the root — ^just like these verbs themselves — into a monosyllable ; if an addition to the end is made, the repetition of the second radical is shown by the insertion of Dagesh (18, Obs. 1). 1st Class 2nd Class 3rd Class Absolute Dr, Dl> D*!?!? W 0*^^ ^^ O*'?? P" ^'ii'n Construct ' Dr >m •\f, \y? ''SB' n§i ♦?;? -pn *i9n Suflix-form ' end Sjii; birds, fowls ^Sl beauty, splendour D*_»nn ' f y 3 t tjjpis « ^^yn 2 : D^i'?K n^na jin n*u ^ ^jx 1 ♦33 "nin? T\jh iiarij ob 7 * ^^^3 qv ^riyi^ n^ e ; nani< ADDITIONAL EEMARKS ON SEGOLATES. 199 IT T T : I : V • • T - I •• : v t t nB'-73ii :^S^n n^sin ^nib^n ihaio jDy^-nx iwn " T T liv " T V : • v) : IT : r ; it " V '■ * IV •■ •• V T-: I v^v - :• tit:-- t 't-;- T : • • : • -: y .. . p. , _ .. . t - ir " : I •■ nyninis nay liii-^'? oa'^is i'ri^^n rhiy^'^ :n^pinnn *■ : /" I • I T T • ^ I IV • - : IT - v/v ^' : " . I* ■ - T ■ • T • -., T : ) IV ■-, • - T rnn* pjyn *D*syn-S3» Dss'ia^N'^si jnin* ^aS^ni* D^ai T : I - T • - T T • V : X " IT : \v * - r •-. • nnnrp vxhto 'D^mn nri yp5326 j:3it3n'|\^3 ^21125 :Di3 rnsjij V2fni niiss ^nn *5fn ra ind nSina -"N^a na^i T :v : V : T V T T T • -; T A : t • " t tt *nNn28 :Dnn wy-'^a *j^yT 'ft':'N-nnn!i °ntonn-^'7 27 ♦a* '•*j^ThN»3o :«|j^jy msB'n nteS29 5^ay ^iy-nx w^n •• : • I ": I" ; T - : ■ t vt i- - ' t: v • i* t IT t i-T t: I ■■ t I : / t t : t -^ ■ 1 - I • ) w " : " - I AV " " -: - : • - ■ t t: t r - i'?x3 36 :fl*^n'?2 D^nri ^nnass :pi*nS-'?y «nny2:'i34 ■ : MV T : ■ * - • - T IT v: V - t r : • «!)yt3j88 :^^t3*l -j3^ Hi]i37 } *3nS pintt infii *n-i)3n : • nv : T ; | ; - - t r ■ .- ^ t : ■ • ; - . ^ •?|W vs*3 ijSa^a {^s»i-i i;5im "jnn ""ipB'^i nriya ins , . _ M VT ; . I • - .. -,• V T ■ * ; - T ; - • T r." v: V • i» ■ " Supply the copula. ' See 80, 1. ' See 52. "^ See 207, 7. Bzefc. 31 : 14. « See 196. /See 209, Bern. 3. ? See 18, Obs. 1. Isaiah 30 : 6. '' See 191, 8, Note. * The preposition here signifies 'because of...' * See 156, 4. ' See 207, 3. » See 208, 7. " Zeoh. 14 : 4. » Psalm 50 : 10. P See 125, 1. 2 See 117, 2. »• Job 30 : 16. - Note the various means employed in this verse (Isaiah 53 : 4) for marking emphasis ; cf. 55, and 112, 2. 200 PRONOMINAL EXPRESSIONS. ' 2 Chr. 21 : 15. « See 119, Obs. 1. » Of. 83, 1. Prov. 31 : 30. " Isaiah 33 : 17. " See 107, 1, and foot-note 2. Write in Hebrew 1. We have planted olive-trees in the midst of the gardens, but who shall eat of their fruit ? 2. Let not their garden yield its fruit in its season. 3. We shall not sit down upon the points of the rock, but in the shadow of the mountains. 4. His arrows are sharp, like weapons of death. 5. Thy strength is that of («. e. the strength of) many peoples. 6. My people is like thine (i. e. thy people). 7. The rams are not stronger than the oxen. 8. My sickness is an evil [one}, even to death. 9. Death (73, 3) hath cast its shadow on our house. 10. My affliction is worse than thine {i. e. thy affliction). 11. Thy rebellion and the wickedness of thine heart have brought upon thee all thy sicknesses. 12. Remember thy mercy and thy truth, and deliver us from our sicknesses and our affliction. 13. Thou hast delivered me from the jaws of the lion, and from the workers of in- iquity. Pronominal and other Constrtotions. 213. The Hebrew language shows a marked deficiency in pronoun forms. Sometimes a single word must therefore be employed for several varieties, which, in our own and other languages, have their appropriate forms : moreover, nouns and other words are borrowed to supply the want. This will be understood after a careful study of the following constructions. I. ?3 signifies (1) all, collectively (Exercise 9, note 6) : in this case, it is mostly joined with a plural or collective noun, as Di;n-^3 all the people, but it may also stand alone, and signify all, indefinitely. (2) It also signifies eacA, — every single one: in this sense, it is joined with the singular, as Dipp"7|) eva^ place. But such distributive meaning may also ie indicated (6) by using bJik, as in ID'^q E^'SJ -ID^DM and each dreamed a dream. Gen. 40 : 5, Jud. 9 : 85 ; or t}'*N B^'i* as in Ex. 36 : 4; or B'^KI B'»» in Est. 1:8; E'2'}. ^^ die each, 2 Sam. 21 : 20 ; or (c) by repeating the'noun to be taken distributively, as ni? f^t! Tjl? each flock by itself. Gen. 32 : 17 ; cf. Isa. 6:2; ox (jd) by the plural fonn of the noun, as D^"1i52^ every morn- ing, Is. 33 : 2, ^''Vyf} every moment, Is. 27 : 3 ; or (e) by joiolng a predicate PRONOMINAL CONSTRUCTIONS. 201 in the singular with the subject in the plural (114, 3), as nipn *"){?$? ever;/ one of them is cruel, Jer. 50 : 42, cf. also 46 : 15 ; Prov. 3 : 18. (/) Rarely is nn^ used in this sense, as '!|^»n *;35 "liilh? ^n^ each one resembled the children of a hing, Jud. 8 : 18, II. For indicating reciprocity or mutual relation, (1) the Niphal (167, 3) may be used, or (2) the Hithpael (174, 3). But the same idea may likewise be con- veyed (3) by repeating the noun, as njE' *^n>5 njB' one year after another, 2 Sam. 21 : 1 ; -inSiriyi Di.'lVD '?-13|l n)fN?D from one end of the harder of Egypt to the other. Gen'. 47 : 21 ; (4)'by repeating nj, as HJ-^N n.J N^Dl and one cried to another. Is. 6 : 3 ; Job 1 : 16 ; njD n?^) njD n?S some on this [side] and some on that, Josh. 8 : 22 ; (S) by the combination 'V^;l^?•••'>''^ (fem. nin^...n55'K) or ■inp...t5''6<; thus, Vm ^rp B^'N one from the other. Gen. 13 : 11, ■inrT?^ ^''^ one to another, Jud. 6 ;29, — a construction which is used even with reference to inanimate things, as Ex. 37 : 9 ; (6) by repeat- ing nn^ (with feminines, of course, nnt?), 1 Sam. 14 : 4, 5. III. To express reflexive action, besides (1) the Niplial (167, 1) and (2) the Hithpael (174, 1) forms of the verb, (3) the pronominal suffixes are employed, joined with the proper particles, as in'S N'^J he shall bring himself. Num. 6 : 13 ; "h DViii JF\^Jpn I sanctified them for myself, Num. 8 : 17 ; some- times also, but more rarely, (4) B'g.3, 315 &c. are employed, as DB'SJ? QOijl? their bread is for themselves, Hos. 9:4; 'B'SJ T'lN ii^ I do not Icnow myself. Job 9 : 21 ; FlJ^Jja prtJ^l a7id she laughed within herself. Gen. 18 : 12. IV. For expressing emphasis, various methods are adopted. (1) The em- phasised word is repeated, as N-in '5>? '3X r am he, Deut. 32:39; similarly npn nnS3 n'n^S nnb*;! P^J? the valley of Siddim was full of bitumen wells, Gen. 14 : 10. (2) A suffix, afformative, or affix is repeated' in the full pronominal form, as fll^n 'J*? '3 on me' be the guilt, 1 Sam. 25 : 24 ; 13K nan D'ppt, their' memorial has perished, Ps. 9 -.T ; ''3,^!"D3 'J,3!13 bless me' also, Gen. 27 : 34 ; see also 112, 2. (3) The emphasis may be indicated by the prominent position assigned to the word (see 55), as p*TX 'n'NT ^n'N thee' have I seen righteous. Gen. 7:1; or (4) it must be inferred from the context, as, WiilZ iDl his blood shall be on his own head, Joshua 2 : 19. (5) The noun B'SJ may be used, as n3 ?n *3B'3 DB'SJ they themselves are gone into captivity, Isa. 46 :2; also D'3?, as hnpS D*3?h ^iJI thou thyself goest to battle, 2 Sam. 17 : 11, Exod. 33 : 14. (6) The 3rd personal pronoim may give emphasis to a subject, which it follows (91, III. c). V. A partitive meaning may be expressed in various ways ; as {a) Dl?n"|l? some of the people, Gen. 33 : 15 ; (b) D^nS D*9J some days. Gen. 27 : 44_; (c) the simple plural may be sufficient, as D'OJ some days, Neh. 1:4; {d) B*.! nnps "ig'K there are those who say (or said), Neh. 5 : 2, 3, 4. VI. Negatives may be expressed by a great variety of constructions, exem- plified in the following : — 1. Persons, (a) l^i? no one, none (also nothing; see below), as njn*3 J'S there is none like Jehovah; (6) D^^ J'K Eccl. 8:8, or I!gl Dn^ Gen. 2:5, 202 PRONOMINAL AND OTHER CONSTRUCTIONS. or {y^N !*$«! 1 Sain. 9 : 2, t?iere is no man ; . (c) 1J''N "i^Pi K? not a man (or no one, none) was left, Josh. 8 : 17 ; 3'!ii?''. X'? B''^!t wowe steZ^ approach. Lev. 21:17; l^yr'?X 8J''!>' let none go out, 2' Kings 10:25 ; {d) nip'. ^5■!? B;'K-73 no one shall approach. Lev. 21 : 18 ; Jer. 51 :"43 ; (e) in^ DD?? "iniJ N? not one (or raoKe) o/ them was left, 2 Samuel 13 : 30, but see also Ex. 8 : 27 ; (/) ^^>^^h^'? OShf ]''ii no one has peace, Jer. 12 : 12, cf. Gen. 9:11, (hence the well-known Hebraism o^ TrSo-a a-dp^ in Matt. 24 : 22, Rom. 3 : 20). 2. Things, (a) "in'5 inj* iih nothing shall he left, 2 Kings 20 : 17, "^S niT •IB'rS Gen. 18 :V cf. ver. 22; (6) 131-^3 -irnj iib they knew nothing, 2 Sam. 15 : 11 ; (c) TDa TT "I^T n*n K? iAerfi was nothing bad in thepot, 2 Kings 4 : 41 ; 13 XSfflrTx? nU"l no evil can be found in thee, 1 Sam. 25 : 28 ; (d) n.'Sa 73 'ipriSB'? pS thy handmaid hath nothing in the house, 2 Kings 4:2; 73 dHd 1^3? X? nothing mil be too hard for them. Gen. 11:6; («) np-IN^ wij i6 WrSn iAd Zoc^ foi«w nothing, 1 Sam. 20 : 39 ; (/) I',!!?!?? I)?J fS" 13B 'io straw is given to thy servants, Ex. 5 : 16. Vn. 1. The indefinite personal pronouns 'whoever,' 'whosoever,' 'any one,' are variously rendered ; thus (a) *ns *ip whosoever is simple, Prov. 9 : 4, cf. also Ex. 24 : 14; 3X1*3 |»firi nB>t5 »p whoever favours Joab, 2 Sam. 20 : 11 ; (i) B''^-3J^? <3 when' any one steals, Ex. 21 :37; ^wNl'??"? n*31? E''X »»*« whosoever of the house of Israel,. Lev. 22 : 18 ; 3np; "ItJ'K E'*S<"^|i whoever approaches, Lev. 22 : 3 ; (c) X0pri"i3 B'gJ, whenever any one sins. Lev. 4:2; (d) 73X"75 whoever eats, Lev. 7 ; 25. 2. When reference is made to things, the most common construction is that found in Gen. 31 : 16, "ION •^E'^? 73 whatever he has said; but sometimes use is made of ilD, as in 2 Sam. 18 : 22, Job 13 : 13, 14, or n» followed by the relative, Eccl. 6 : 10 ; rarely is such a construction found as *J^5'^»"^D "ISl whatever he will show me, Num. 23 : 3. Exercise 59. "V^^V rich WO withhold, IT stranger, sojourner [THS] Pi. hide, deny; B'T poor restrain nj-IDR appearance, form, Ni. be hidden "IJS (?) carcase "ipn want, lack likeness ilpD wipe out, destroy nnx pN B^^K Qi'? ii/bnn 2 j a^s'? iid'? x^s-ba *in 1 ' - - I V V • V T • T -IT - : V- T T .«,— • i ' V IT T ■ : • IT T : • y „ ^ . , T • . T • : T : !■ T •'■}:• v t ■ i ; PKONOMINAL AND OTHEE. CONSTRTJCTIONS. 203 • T -; ■' ; IT ; • - \t t - ; *• t • -ha n? :3ip k':' w : sj'n nnxi "i^tyy nnx '^niix i^yn vn V V - I T IT T V : • T TV TV • ; T l^n-nN'np'? fi 21 s nr ni£5 |3 nj niJsa 20 . rh'hri-h's ht 25 :^jS ^iira ntonan p^24 jmSa E'^n iS nin^ K''p3 23 IT :/- T T •■ : - I - it:- • t : )•• • 'Diptoa27 •/a^^hia'flii ^'itosj'n 26 n'? naan pijsbn ^dk I : • IV " : - : it- I t t : ^- t t : - t -Oil Tii5'n-n>< D^n'?3n ^pS* ni:33 D^-nx D^nSsn ^ipp':' ^B'k - V. ' : IT V • T : - I J T ^ T - V • T : - M ; t v -: nyatJ'j 29 J ^i^{-a^l ^^^ ^W' ^sS dditdn *js 28 • nnx T : : • 'IT - i/' ■ -;■/:■ - t • • ; t it :*^m t<^n :ifr«v Ttiiyss .j-iin d^S t>x nay-K'7 37 njjsy ji^^x pxse IT T • I ■ • - T IT • • I ■• :i?3pi3fi Ej'^xNvr'^N^rrirtri b'*k i^k^'^o tsy^u "rjSpi ^^^39 «S42 t^K'|-S^'? uh^ px p^n nV(p-nyi ^^< "nvpJ:" -':'3 Dn^N^ >jS44 jbSsn ikh "i^y^s :n:i':i oaa y^ax TV-: !■■ T • • IT T V • - : V -n'7 46 :tyn-V3 T3 n^ini nnn Nsaa nS^s :nii»n IT T T - : v.* -; ^ VA" T : ■ IT : Di»348 :rijn DV3 E'^K nav nS*^ tnl^nj-'^a iS^Nn i6 ^ni-Sa 51 : ini^-'?3-'?x nn^B''pi-'?N 50 . on^syya-Va T T T IT T : T ' » V TV*):- - IV ■• -: - t 204 PRONOMINAL AND OTHER CONSTRUCTIONS, -•t:|-t I T ::- t;-: itt ... - • IT : • T : V T : it : :Si3* t'^sj "^i^i^ nr^aeg .s^jj^s nnni n"i* ^jcbs in^^nj^ 1 ■ Iv- T Kt • T - IT •• T : •■ T • IT — : :nsDO '^-inm ^'7 at^n i^'k ^^a^o <• See 55. * See 117, 2. c See 53, Note 2. <« See vocabulary at the end, under NpiJ II. « Proverbs 9 : 12. / Jerem. 17 : 21. ? See 207, 2. '' See 203, Hem. i See Exercise 18, end of vocabulary. * See 195, 11'. c. ! See 24, 5, 6. " '[upon the spot] under him,' i. e. where he is. " See 18, OJs. 1. See 196. J' See 117, 8. s See 191, 8. " Isaiah 54 : 15. s See 55, c. Write in Hebrew 1. Let every man return to his own lionse. 2. Take ye every wo- man, a gift for her neighbour. 3. [Every one of] his words [is] truth. 4. Let one servant assist the other. 5. Let us love one another. 6. As one goes, another comes. 7. Our master himself will go down with us. 8. My own children have left me. 9. No man can tell. 10. No one is here. 11. Do not give them anything. 12. We can do nothing. 13. No idol shall be found among you, from one end of the city to the other. 14. Ye shall not eat any unclean [thing]. 15. Why have ye not kept any of my commandments? 16. Nothing was too difficult for him. 17. Say not one to another, 'We shall each take some of his fruit and no man shall know,' for nothing is hid from our master, and ye shall bring evil on your own head. 18. Say not to thyself, 'I shall see no evil, neither shall I lack anything,' for thine own children shall forsake thee, and thou thyself shalt be driven from one city to another, and no one shall help thee. ADVERBS AND INTEUJEOTIONS. 205 Adverbs and Interjections. 214. A. Some few adverbs are underived, — at least, those may be regarded as primitive wbicb cannot be assigned with certainty to any root. Such are pB' there, thither ns here, ^^^l then, nb thm, and" the two neg- atives k!?, h>S (121). 215. B. The vast majority, however, are derived from other parts of speech. 1. Some are accusatives of nouns (208, 7), as *l'sb very (lit. with strength), 113 alone, apart (lit. separation), ID! together, }'-in outside, without, VJT for a moment, in a moment, Twh^i wonderfully (lit. wonders). 2. Adjectives, mostly in the feminine form, as 3!), nil very, much, exceed- ingly, Psalm 78 : 15, fTnriO speedily, quickly, JT^inX hachwards, TT'l-IIT'. in the Jews' language. This is especially the case with numerals : see 154, 6. 3. Adjectives in the construct form, thus flll'D much, greatly, Ps. 65 : 10 ; 129 : 1, 2. 4. Nouns or adjectives with a particle or particles prefixed ; as Di*n to- day (73, 2), DrSO now (lit. the time, or this time), 1p^3 together (lit. as one) I0I?O3 quickly, almost, (lit. like a little), D*?^? i^f ore, formerly, D'JBpi in front, linXD behind, DliSD before, in front, on the Mast, of old, long ago, nnnsp on the morrow, next day, n^ap within, inside, |"inp outside, with- out, nnFip below, beneath, ^I'BD above, lOBP around, on every side, pin^D afar off, DJP on the West, — the reference being to the Mediterranean, which bounds Canaan in that direction ; njjISJp from this time, D^p thence. 5. Nouns with a particle affixed, as DOii by day,ti'ir\ gratis, free, in vain^ mthout cause, itP'O by night (209, c, i), nipl? mow, (from DO time). 1 It will be observed that in this and other illustrations following, the pre- position |P, from signifying departure or origination, has come to indicate a more fixed relation. Of. the Greek Ik Se^tSs, e^ a/jio-Tcpas, on the right [hand], on the left, &c. ; Lat. a tergo, behind, afronte, in front, &c. ; Fr. dedans (i. e. de dans) within, dehors outside, dessus beneath, dessous above, &c. ; Ger. von alien Seiten, on aU sides. In some adverbs of time especially, the particle even seems occasionally to lose much of its force, as t^p long ago Is. 48 : 7. Regarding the conversion of adverbs into prepositions, see 108, Ols. 20G ADVERBS AND lUTERJECTIONS. 6. Nouns in the plural form, as D*53 in front, hefore, Ezek. 2 : 10. 7. The infinitive of verbs, especially Hiphil, — mostly in the absolute form (125, 5), thus pmD far, Ex. 33 : 7, Josh. 3 : 16, n^^n very, piuch (seldom niain as in Amos 4 : 9). 8. Pronouns, either simply, or with a preposition, as n.J, nj3 (103, 4) here, nJO hence, on one side, on the other side, n|n hwe, hither, riD why ? 9. Many adverbs more plainly show their composite character, thus P'^OS! afterwards, »riD-iy how long ? TVZ'IV hitherto. 216. Interjections may be natural ejaculations, (^> or derivatives from otter parts of speech, — particularly the imperatives of verbs, (^> or nouns. <^) Examples are 1. PiriK, nx ah, alas! 'IN, *in woe, alas! 2. nsi see, looJe, behold! np? cornel (Exer. 46, note/c). 3. '5 (for 'l?? entreaty) pray ! Other common interjections are HPyp (196, c, and 209, c) and the appended NJ (121, Ohs.). Exercise 60. py terrify; tremble; jr? derision, "lUD fear, terror, H -inn mercy, grace ; Ni. be feared mockeiy dread supplication nS 4 : in^ nan'? J 3 . ^jTi^tj;* -n3-2 . ^j^jij ^y-,n 123 1 -IT T-:t' • : XT r TT 1: TTT "T !)i^'?K nSye tnan Q*b'-ip-niD3 'pyi "'tks .nan Esiax :nn^n*^ !ii»y nann-'?N8 :n^3nnK oa'p-nx ^napn? :nnn2p : th^ ^'m Dy *^fii •^n'p-njsjj' nan 10 ma Jiiyab' ''in 9 pj!25fyD Dxy Dyan^nxiis rjy'^n ^jb^d^ ^n'?-nyab nann IT T -: ■• vA- - ^ - - IT - V : - /T T : IT Dni?^ DnNi5 r'T^S D''3S7 n^yn-SK'ii joysn ^nmaxis "J. T, I -t: "t •■ -IV- T^T : a^aDtt nii;!3 17 t Dnpjs D*a* *-»nnaT le : ninxa D*nB''?fi!i 19 5 nnna y^i^T[ bsji Sy^tt Dwa t:!>rhi^r] 'N^n nin^ is :nsaa nnai n^a^: nnx "nnsai "nsi-^xy nan ^ r^m • ' ' * ^ i)T T : - IT ; " h " "' - •• I ■ ■■ -. B'an niip anj ^niniansi tnnjtia ^^yni a»a°Wn''a2o tnTiin TKp Dnj^tt'-nxT yw'n 'i2f x^ikdm ^ani pa»;a : rh'}2) D^i* Difn ^is^ '?Wnx5 ^ajxa* jd^" ^naS; nnyss nann nn*n y;in-byiia ^nnyse jyn-'^aa ^n^n bypass ADVERBS AND INTEEJECTIOITS. 207 n3n-ny3o {D^riSxri "^3 nun ^nx mrh^ Dm ih^^ T ■• - 5. r V; T • T " - V : - ; v - IT : \T T -; *in 83 t ^'^rhan n»» ^:^'^' ^a ^uS *iK 32 . ^S srnx 3i' IV ■• ■• : • T -: IT - : - t 'it - -; - T : ; " T T • v; T -; T -; I -iT : ' • ■ DvS nnx 35 { ^t5N T\J2 ^jnx *3 nn*n-m n-tn Dyn-nx T -; I- T T -; • I ■• : — V V - T T V liv • v: ■• : JT : I ^ • » Psalm 89 : 8. ' See 128, h,2. ^ i Kings 18 : 37. "^ Psalm 123 : 3. « See 114, 06s. 3. / See 114, Obs. 1. s Gen. 2 : 23. * See 120, a. i Jud. 1 : 23. * See 110, d. ' See 213, IV., 6. "> See 79, 3. The meaning of the term "isi, which occurs only in the passage here quoted (Gen. 6 : 14), is un- , certain. " See 158, 159. " Gen. 12 : 8. p See 72, 1. « '... [were] pure gold.' »■ See 63, Obs. « Ezra 9:8. « Eccl. 7:17; see also 125, 5. « See end of vocabulary to Exercise 18. " See 177, C, b, 2, and 179. " See 213, IV. 4 ; Isaiah 5 : 20 ff. ^ See 46, Obs. 2. v Observe the abnormal pointing of this form (11). Josh. 7 : 7, 8. ^ See 80, 3, a. Write in Hebrew 1. Let the elders of the city be gathered hither to-morrow. 2. Let me sit here alone. 3. Pray, speak with me in Hebrew. 4. The hill [is] on the north, and the river on the south, the city to the east, and the tower on the west. 5. The forest is on the right, and the rock on the left. 6. See, our enemies [are] in front, and behind ! 7. The sea is beneath and the. firmament above. 8. Come, let us go hence. 9. Look now ! What (87, Obs.) have you done ? 10. Pray, send thy servant thither to-day, and let him remain there. 11. Do not go very far. 12. Woe to you ! for ye shall certainly die ! 13. Alas, my father ! we perish ! 14. Jehovah went before his people, of old, in a pillar of cloud by day, and in a pillar of fire by night. 15. Behold, our enemies are before and behind, and we are far from the city : I am afraid lest they fall on us in a moment and destroy us together. 16. Woe unto you [who were] formerly seeking the way of truth, but are now gone back ! How long will ye thus stand afar off? 208 INTERROGATIVE PARTICLES. Interrogative Particles. 217. 1. The interrogative particle n is pointed variously. a. Before an ordinary vowelled consonant, it regularly takes -=i ; as ^pprin wilt thou be king ? 7?X iXnn did he not eat? Jer. 22 : 15. b. Before an ordinary consonant having sh^wa of any kind, it (1) takes — : (2) a strong consonant then sometimes takes Dagesh separative (19, 5). Thus DflI'!!,*D do ye know? t3^n to a smfQ&a. 17 : 17. This pointing is obviously identical with that of the Article (71, 1). c. Before an aspirate (1) it usually takes—, thus HPIND art thou? *JXn am I? But sometimes (2) it takes Qamez, as Judges 6 : 31 DplNH is it you ? (3) If the aspirate has Qam&, it takes — , as *3ilNn am I? 2. When an alternative question follows, or when substantially the same question is continued in another form, the second may be introduced by 0^5 or ^^), less frequently by 1 or i^ or l| repeated ; or it may have no introductory sign whatever. See 16 ff. in Exercise. The combination found in Mai. 1 : 8 is rare. Obs. 1. The particle n is (a) in general, a simple interrogative, and may thus receive either a negative or an affirmative reply; when thus employed, it corresponds to the Latin enclitic -ne, (Gr. ■^). But (6) it often corresponds to L. num, (jjiri, apa firj, fiQv, &c.), thus expecting a negative answer : see 4 ft'. in the Exercise. This meaning however, may likewise be indicated by 7X, as in 1 Sam. 27 : 10 Di'n DJJItpE'a'pN surely ye have not been malAng an attach to-day ? (c) Nipn (Lat. nonne, Gr. ap ov ) expects an affirmative answer. {d) A question, however, may be marked as such without any special sign, but simply by the tone of voice, as in 1 Sam. 16 : 4, 2 Sam. 18 : 29 (cf. v. 32, where the sign is used), Job 2:9 &c. Obs. 2. The addition of n.J (86, Bern. 3) or nb*^' (Lat. tandem, Gr. Sr)) im- parts animation to questions ; thus ni"'^ where? n^.ip ''fi: whence ? See also 28 flf. in Exercise. Exercise 61. Djr?N truly, really, njT lean, poor f]!^ drive away (201) '"IX babam, balm indeed (215, 5) IBB* fat, fertile nnj^ happen, befall ^\) chaff, straw INTEEROaATIVE PAETICLES. 209 6 tM*rt5« niyrnx aijinD^ns '."^ibx ^m itob'n* -m t^y^T] ^m^ "lisa r\m *jinnSn7 nsa-tiiKn ^nSiySn V T : \- T V ~: - " T - ■ " : T : - it ) - v: v t : " I " - 'IT ■•.•:- IT ; - : - : " : - i- : • - IT ■ T ^ - !■ V: • •• T T ■ - I V IT T T ■• : - IT • - : - V T -: T T I T T V IT T I T • V T V T ; IT T ■ T : - T -; i DiPinn D^wSr'^N ^Sy^{rI2i :e]nnJii li^y K'lrnxvfny.j^, n3h3!-i26 jDE}> px ash DK nte r^^ '^5{n25 t™n^3 V : - IT J •■ ■■ • T : • : I •• • r; - r t ; :n3 pK nsSto DN p»va px"nin^n27 {>i'p-Qx-xin ^[35 r* T ( : • « See 45. ^ See 55. « See 80, 3. ■ 2 Sam. 5:9. « Note the peculiar pointing of the interrogative particle here. Jer. 8 ; 19. " See 217, Obs. 1, d. P See 86, Bern. 3. ? 1 Sam. 11 : 12. >■ See 207, 3. « See 83, 2, and Isa. 66 : 1. « Note the significant change in the forms of the verb. Write in Hebrew 1. Is this the man of God (80, 1) ? 2. Is this thy daughter ? 3. Are these your children ? 4. Do ye not see the tower ? 5. Do ye hear ? 6. Is he still (106) alivel 7. Are we fools ? 8. Shall we speak, or shall we be sileut ? 9. Is the earth good or bad ?. 10. Is 210 CONJUNCTIONS. their house new? 11. Ai-e their houses new ? 12. Shall I return or shall I stand here ? 13. Is the river deep or not ? 14. "Where is the new gate ? 15. Whence are they? 16. From what people are ye ? 17. I do not know whether he has found his ring or not. Wilt thou go with me that we may see, or wilt thou sit here? 18. Go aud see whether the man is tall or not, whether he is rich or poor, whether his children are strong or feeble. Conjunctions. 218. A. Simple conjunctions are comparatively few, and may be viewed as primitive, or underived. Beades 1,i those most commonly employed are *3 that, because, for, when- ei-e>; &c. ; ?)« and Da also, even, {ns...ai, both.. .and); Sn or, IIK but, DN if, wheneoer, "JS lest, D7-1N nevertheless, hoivever, &c. 219. B. Compound conjunctions are more numerous and varied. They are formed by making use of other parts of speech, usually pre- positions, nouns and adverbs ; or by combining two different con- junctions. Sometimes the components are fused into one word, as J37 therefore, Dp^3 before that, before, '16!'X3 when, as, &c., "hv unless : in other instances, they still remain apart, as in N7 Da neither, '3 Da even though, *! flK much more (after afiirmations), much less (after negations) ; or they may be connected by Maqqeph, as in ]y7V therefore, 13"7r"'3 forasmuch as, because. Ohs. Specially noteworthy and important are (a) combinations of certain prepositions with '3 or — still more frequently — "lE'X, either of which changes the whole into a conjunction, requiring a finite verb to follow. Examples are •11?I?B' n"? -ift^-hv because they did not hear, 2 Kings 18 : 12 ; -lanplJ Ig'X "TJ? until 2 we passed over, Deut. 2 : 14 ; Tirn nj^SH "IB'X ins after the city was smitten, Ezekiel 40 ; 1 ; n^"l!S IK'S ]V^b in order that I may see, 2 Samuel 13 : 5 ; ''5'13||| IB'5? nPin because they have forsaken me, 2 Kings 22 ; 17, cf. also Deut. 21 : 14 ; 'BW W^n tih I^N 1??! because they went not with me, 1 Sam. 30 : 22. Other illustrations are 'S':!!?? 'n'!?S V^ '3 ^V because our Ood is not among us, Deut 31:17; ')p?3 '3 bi?.K because thou hast despised 9ne, 2 Sam. 12 : 10 (cf, also '3 DgN because, in v. 14) ; ariN 15 nnpl because 1 Revisal should be made of what has been already stated regarding Waw, both Copulative (69 flf.) and Conversive (158 ff., 161 ff.). 2 We also find DN lE't? n;t? in Gen, 28 ; 15 and other passages. CONJUNCTIONS. 211 he loved, Deut. 4 : 37 ; DSp *3 jr* because he has rejected, Isa. 8:6; »3 nu I'SJp 7^3 MBiti^ Ae became very great. Gen. 26 : 13. (i) But sometimes the properly conjunctional element (IB'X or '3) is omit- ted : in such cases, only the context — especially the finite verb following — can show that the remaining word is really a conjunction, and not a preposition. Thus 1DN ]Vl because he said, Ezek. 29 :9 ; ■nipB' N'b hv because the}/ did not keep, Ps, 119 : 136 ; •13E' "TQ until they returned, Josh. 2 : 22 : n?B' iriK after he had sent, Jer. 40 : 1 ; "ISDJ '^DS a/i!e)' he has been sold, Lev. 25 : 48 ; 'ii^')) ]^^7 in order that they may see, Isa. 41 : 20. i (c) Sometimes, on the other hand, the more specific (prepositional) portion may be dropped : in this case, it may be difficult at first to determine the pre- cise force that should be assigned to words of such varied meaning and use as "l^f? and '3, especially the former (see also 223 &c.), but here again the con- text must determine. Thus, in Deut. 4 : 40 l'? 3^". "IK'S signifies in order that it may be well with thee, ]VKi^ being understood (cf. also Exodus 20 : 26, Joshua 3:7); 1 Kings 15 : 5 IB^jb'nfjt r\bi} D^ "IK'S means because David did what was right, ]r;, nnjl or another similar preposition being understood. See excellent illustrations also in Josh. 4 : 21, 23., Note. Even the simple subordinating '3 (that) may be omitted, just as in English ; thus Zech. 8 : 23 Djar DiO'^S •ijVp?' we have heard [that] God is with you. Rem, When we bear in mind that the prepositions used to form compound conjunctions were originally construct nouns (99), it is easy to see, after what has just been indicated {Obs, b) — considering also what was stated in 207, 2 — how any noun of time or place, in the construct state, whether with or with- out "IP'S?, and with or without a preposition, may be used as a conjunction to introduce a relative clause. Thus Jer. 6 : 15 DirilBi nj;3 at the time that (i. e. when) I visit them ; Ex. 6 : 28 nin*. "IST DVa in the day on which (i. e. when) Jehovah spake, cf. Job 6 : 17, Zech. s' : 9 ; Deut. 4 : 10 Rlpr T^S D'r on the day when thou stoodest. In Ps, 56 : 4, Di' simply is employed.2 Cf. also Genesis 1 ; 1 D^iTPN N'la IT'B'XT)? in the beginning when God created; Hosea 1 ;2 njlT. -IJl Jiprin in the beginning when [ie, when at the fii-st] Jehovah spake, 1 Compare the employment, in Enghsh, of ' that' to give the force of a con- junction to another part of speech, particularly a preposition, and its frequent omission, for the sake of brevity. Thus Gal, 2 : 12 ' Before that certain came from James,' and on the other hand, 3 : 23, ' Before faith came ; ' further, Rom. 1 : 21 ' Because that, when they knew God, they glorified him not as God,' but also 8:7' Because the carnal mind is enmity against God.' 2 Such a temporal or local connective is sometimes quite omitted, especially in poetry ; it may then become necessary to supply an appropriate conjunction in order that the connection of the whole sentence may be clearly expressed in English. Hence Ps, 27 : 7 N"Jf?S! 'Vlp <^P\ i>W should be rendered Sear, Jehovah, [when] / cry [with] my voice ; see also 49 ; 6 ; 53 : 6. Other conjunc- tions also are occasionally omitted ; see Ps. 51 : 10 ; 55 : 7. 212 CONJUNCTIONS. Exercise 62. (>13) Pilpd contain 7^n pity, spare (D!in) Hi. devote to Dt^'X guilty [IJ-n] Hi. shout, make IpJ found, lay destruction, de- r35 stroke, blow; a loud noise a foundation stroy utterly mark, spot - : • I V \i VJT • liT • J- T • •• 'J" : T I — : - : - i" 'j:- •• t • : : - • - vit- D^atj'h'^^ijj''!! D^j^sj'n nan 7 jdik *aa ni3'?-*5 eix nin* naa • - T - •• : ■ - T - •• • IT T •• : • ■ I - T ; V-iv D^nsjsnx ^p' nb'asn-nbts :nn n)3n-*5 s|k«'?|^3'7^^ nS "75; 9 \^pr\ ^ ^f^ Wi njn nnnn-nx rim n^x nj-^y" nynn-Va nx on^'^y nin^ x*;in p-'^y nin^-nx ^isry na'x T T T T •• ••■■•-: T ; . .. I .. _ T ; v : t v -: ^a^nhK wa^ ^ '^m W nin* nan n'^inaio :mtn py^^n ^h ij5y ''jniNn ja D^ia^n :nTn nsDn nin-'^y n*3 nDin Vy n'^na nynn ^ynn Dyn-'^s 12 • nin» Sipa " ~ t: t : ••• TTTi_ it; j: : naniN ^ijnn-'3 n-rn nnnn-nx nw nty« w'^^ snin* T Jiv ; IT -; I •• T * V - T T - V T • T V -; I - - it ; -Da nB'y-Da ■i)'? wa nan na^'y ijj^ jiSkb' n'? ik'x jy^i* |y* 16 J *nN nin» nB^» jy» ^'^y mn* *ans nin 15 : ni^a I - - r T : - T I - - - T • v: T -: - it |y:i7 {nin)-DNa *)nyp^ ^pax Dai. ^asS ^naprn. '^aii'p-'^n N*;i» *aani9 '"^^^ *1\^WX ^V. ^TT^^ J?P^i? I^^^^ iinnjpJi-Ssso :*i!i^ty -i^x nn?i n|n Dipan ^;3^*-Vy nyn nan ^aia^n na'K ny ijsy "nnB^'^i ^nx-'^x ^S-nnai 22 ♦ 4^ iijp nf'N ny liib nann n^^ap '^[SB' *j?a en 23 ♦ ^nx CONJUNCTIONS, 213 na26 mm ^n-nai-ax ny ^'^^n n'^ss ."■.yn ^ns^'-^a T p. T :■:;-■ • - - ' IT T •■ i T '^^Ns? :vi^K 'isS f\y^ hvi'^^', ii&n if« '^in^ '^^ «iJirim ^tJ^fs nns ^lyx^ ^^m ^ym "^y !ijn3K dw« I ; : • V -: - T : v .... - : it t ; *• - -DK ^SN^i.^riyae'j nm op :h 'vk Dy29 t^n>< nxT? :NnpN »DV!i linx ^n^iN ^^w txsi Piy^an niiaa ^iiS : trxn iiifta Di^'^N nin* ^ai nv3 "niiibn-'^a Dn^xn x'^sa mn^ h'^T] ava nx-fn r\y^n nn^-nx mn^"? n^^ nsn^i 33 T : • ■ ; - T • - •' : • V T - ■ T .. -;- 35 :'DniB"ia>N nv iT-nx n:DT"N'7 34 t vi^x-Ss wa ink IT T V -; TV ; T IT : T I - • I >v " • -; T • 1- T T ; ■ \ -/v - V '; *• : T J nnx iiiD^nnn ^^to^-'^a "na^Nti iii^ps-x'? 37 ; nbax «1 Kings 3: 26. i' See 156, 5. o See 117, 8. <« See 154, c 2 Sam. 12 : 6. «See 185 and 186. /See 196. " See 162. 2 Kings 22 : 19. A Num. 20 : 12. « See 162, Bern. 1, 4. 1 Sam. 15 : 23. * Josh. 3:4. ' See 195, n. c. "See 172, 3. « See 158, 159. Gen. 27 : 43, 4i. <'See72, 1. Joshua 8 : 26. P Gen. 42 ; 21. « See 18, Obs. 1, and 124. ^ Deut. 4 : 10. '^ Ps. 95 : 10, 11. Compare the renderings of tliis passage in the Authorised and the Revised Versions. ' Gen. 24 : 3. « See 219, Bern. » See 213, VI. 2. » Ps. 78 : 42. » Lev. 13 : 46. v Ps. 56 : 4. " 1 Sam. 25 : 15. Write ill Hebrew 1. Neither man nor beast was seen till we overtook the host. 2. Because I did not think before I began, therefore I spake as a fool. 3. Think not in thine heart that thou shalt escape, for both the rich fman] and the poor shall stand before Jehovah, that they may be judged, each according to his works. 4 Behold, we chastise the foolish [man], much more the transgressor ; and if we do not spare our brethren, much less shall we pity strangers. 5. Whenever (117, 5) thou findest a godly [man], then (160, d) let him become (196, iVote 1) thy friend, for the blessing of his God is with him, and thee 214 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. also shall Jeliovali bless. 6. Even if tliiiie enemy provoke thee, do not' smite him, neither do thou answer him hastily (200), lest thoii repent after thou hast spoken ; but be silent until thine anger cease {lit. return : cf. 22 above). Nevertheless thou shalt show him kind- ness, and be unto him as the messenger of thy gracious God. Conditional Sentences.^ 220. In conditional propositions, the natural order — protasis, apo- dosis — though by far the more usual, is occasionally inverted : see 196, «. I. Protasis, (a) In propositions embodying the notion of con- tingency — the possibility of an occurrence — '^'i' or '? is employed, mostly with the imperfect, but sometimes with the perfect, or the participle (if a verb be employed at all) : !n is found chiefly in late and Aramaisnig writers. The corresponding negative is ^'^ QiS. Thus nag'Jin njn»^ nh'V na'rg-DN if thou wilt prepare a bumt-qferingf, to Jehovah shalt thou ojfei- it, jud. 13 : 16 ; D'K'|n3) "l*i;n-|P •IKS.''. '? when- ever (or if) they come out of the city, then we shall capture them, 2 Kings 7 : 12; i^ D.;^; x-in D'n'^^'QK if he he a god, let him plead for himself, Jud. 6 : 31 ; •In-1B''1'!-1 DJHr^'D^ if {i. e. when, whenever) he slew them, then they, sought him, Ps. 78 : 34 ; 'Q^i) ^i) NrDX if it is not to be redeemed, then it shall he sold. Lev. 27 : 27. ' {h) In propositions more strictly presenting a mere hypothesis— a supposed, but (in the mind of the speaker) unlikely occurrence, or even an actually impossible case— ■i'? (^5.1'?) is the proper introductory particle. The perfect, naturally, is the proper form of the verb when the reference is to the past, while the imperfect is employed when the action is regarded as future. Thus ISam. 14:30 DlJ.p ^5K ^bS N-l!? if the people had really eaten... Ezek. 14 : 15 )>pN3 n'l^K nWT njO"-!^ if I slwidd cause evil beasts to pass through the land... But sometimes DK is used with this meaning ; thus Ps. 73 :^ 15, Job 9 : 15, and OX in late Hebrew, Est. 7 : 4. The corresponding ne- gative particle— presenting the idea of actual occurrence or existence— is i;?-'!^ (or N'?.!'?): thus 1 Sam. 25:34, nN3P11 pinD *% If thou hadst not come quickly... See also Ps. 124 : 1, 2. 1 For a fuller treatment of this subject, advanced students may with profit' consult Driver ('Hebrew Tenses,' chap, x.), and particularly the exceUent mono- graph of Pnedrich ('Die hobraischen Conditionalsatze,— Konigsberg 1884^ CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 215 Ohs. 'Virtually hypothetical' sentences have no introductory particle to mark the protasis : their true character must thus be discovered after consider- ing the general drift of the passage, as in Cant. 8 : 1 "^pf^ y-in? 18V*?¥* [^Q / should find thee in the streets, I would hiss thee. Cf. the Interrogative sen- tences, 217, Ols. 1, d. Note. It has already been pointed out that the protasis of a conditional sentence may be employed alone, to express a derived but somewhat different conception ; thus Kii-DK (196, a, 2), DN (196, a, 1, and 203, Rem. 3), and 'h (203, Bern. 4). Regarding the 'hypothetical unperative,' see 119, Obs.X 221. II. Apodosis. (a) In conditional sentences, properly so call- ed (cf. I. a, above), the commencement of the apodosis is (1) often left unmarked, and can be determined only after consideration of the whole sentence ; Zech. 11 : 12 ; Amos 9 : 2. But (2) it may also be introduced. by ), either the simple copulative, or 1 conversive, accord- ing to circumstances, Josh. 20 : 5, Micah 5:8; or (3) by i^.?'!' beliold I Ex. 7 : 27. See also the examples already given. Obs. As 1 is used for various other purposes, the point at which the apodosis begins may not be obvious at first : this can be determined only after due con- sideration of the whole context. See Exod. 23 : 22 ; Isa. 1 : 19, 20 ; Ps. 89 : 31—33. (b) The apodosis in purely hypothetical sentences (220, I. 6) is occasionally introdnced by '^ then, more frequently, however, by T>? '3 surely then, or "^y »3 certainly now. But sometimes no in- troductory sign is used at all. Thus Djp^S nj •133B' nnu »3 •WnpriOrifl sl?-l'? if we had not delayed,, toe should certainly now have already returned twice, Gen. 43 : 10. See alsO' Ps. 119:92; Jud. 13:23. Note. The apodosis (as well as the protasis,— cf. Note above) of such sen- tences is sometimes found alone, the protasis being suppressed : as in Ex. 9:15 ''lir'^^ 'JTID/^ njjl? *3 I should certainly now have put forth my ha7id ; see also Jobs :T3; 13:19. Exercise 63. TS? young lion DOp tread, trample ?1>D be faitlJess DDK' hate, persecute ( V T T V : - : • I IT - - : V • -vh nin^ DX3 nSsNn *n"in Dnnz:ii iiJNan D^{1 "hts^T^ • • -: : • T ; V • i- ) - r : t ■ t ; • \r\ *nx!f23 Ki-DKS tD-Ti^y-i Dipan-^a'? ''mm'\ "Dp^'ix I ■■ • See 208, J. Isa. 1 : 20. « See 208, 6. Ps. 127 : 1. <' See 24, 5, 6. « See 160, d. f See 208, 1. ^ Psalm 73 : 15. '' See 205, 3, 2, b. Num. 22 : 34. ^ See 188, III. * See 129. ' Job 9 : 20. ™ See 143, 2, d. '» Jer. 23 : 22. See the renderings of this passage in the Authorised and the Revised Versions. " See p. 157. p Esther 7:4. « See 220, Ohs, Nehem. 1:8. »" 2 Sara. 19 :'7. ' See 153, Obs. 3. 2 Sam. 18 : 12. ' Gen. 50 : 15. « See 125, 1, Obs. b. Job 6 : 1, 2. " Jud. 8 : 19. « Isa. 48 : 15. « See Exercise 26, Note b. Isa. 1:9. v Jud. 14 : 18. » 2 Sam. 2 : 27. W^riiJe in Hebrew 1. If ye were wise for yourselves, ye would fear Jehovah. 2. If we had been wise, we assuredly would have listened to his voice. 3. If I were thirsty, I would not drink wine. 4. If we had known, certainly we would not have gone. 5. Unless you had told us, we would not have known. 6. Unless you had helped us, we certainly would have perished. 7. Believe and live (119, Obs. 1). 8. Be just and fear not. 9. If thou hast deceived thy friend, thou hast done evil to thyself. 10. If Jehovah be with thee, then thou shalt pros- per. 11. If thou wilt give me this field, then I shall give thee two hundred pieces of silver (153, Obs. 3). 12. If ye wiU go up with us, then we shall go up ; but if ye will not go up, we shall not go up. 13. If you were to ask him, he would not tell. 14. If we have found favour in your sight, then let us pass through your land. 15. After these things came a messenger from the king of Babylon to the captain of our host saying. If thou wilt deliver the city into my hand, I shall give thee a thousand pieces of silver, and to each of thy soldiers, five shekels. And the captain answered and said. Even if thou wert to give me the half of thy kingdom, I would not deliver it unto thee. And again the king sent his messenger and said, As I live, if thou hadst not answered thus, then certainly I would have had compassion on thee when I take the city, but now I shall certainly kill thee. 2J8< THE RELATIVE. The Relative. a. Complete Construction. 222. The Hebrew 'relative' 1^^ is not, in truth, a pronoun ; it is rather a conjunction, a connecting sign or particle (219) : as such, it marks the point in a main sentence where a secondary clause is introduced."^ 1. It must be remembered that in the EngKsh language (as in Latin, Greek, &c.), the relative pronoun is really a compound, formed through the fusion of (a) a conjunction and (b) a pronoun, — personal or demonstrative.^ Thus, in the compound sentence, ' We met a man who showed us the road,' ' who ' is essenti- ally the same as ' and he,' — 'We met a man, and he showed ...': the difference between the two is merely formal, — the second or additional proposition, intro- duced by the more refined a,nd elegant relative pronoun, being made subordinate to the first ; whereas, in the other and more primitive construction, both mem- bers are co-ordinate. Similarly •- ' He went to London, where [i. e. and there] he remained.' In like manner, ' of which ' is obviously equivalent to ' and of it ' (or 'them') ; 'whose ' may be rendered by ' and his (her, their, etc.)' ; ' whom' by ' and him (her, them, etc.).' The sunple co-ordination of the different mem- bers in a compound sentence, as being more easy, is precisely the mode of con- struction most naturally adopted m the earlier stages of all languages, and by the less educated everywhere : more refined and subtle distinctions, as well as nice balancing of the various constituents, are found only in languages which have reached the higher stages of development, especially in syntax. 1 Attention may be called to a monograph on "Ig'K by A. G. Sperling (Die Nota Belatwnis im Eebrdisdien, Leipzig, 1876), to the remarks of Ewald (see the Bnghsh translation of his Syntax, Edinburgh, 1879, pp. 207 fT.), and to a very full discussion by Windisoh ( Untersuchungen iiber den Ursprung des Belativ- pronomens in den indogermanischen Sprachen, Leipzig, 1869). 2 Thus : qui, quce, quod, eujus, cui, etc. are formed by the union of the con- junctional sign or particle (represented by the hard q or qu) and is, ea, id, ejus, etc., — the final s being dropped from the nominative masculine to distuiguish the form from the interrogative quis. In Homei-'s time, os, rj, etc. were also used as demonstrative pronouns (otrre who,' originally os re and he) : they were fur- ther employed as posscssives. THE RELATIVE. 219 2. In Hebrew, the fusion of the conjunctional and the pronominal elements into a single ' relative pronoun ' (or adverb) is, for the most part, still incomplete (but see 223; i). Accordingly, {a) in translating, from Hebrew, relative clauses which are fully expressed (cf. 223, 224), we must combine the two elements into the single word employed in English ; and (fi) conversely, the English relative pronoun or adverb must be analysed mto its proper constituents, before being rendered fully and explicitly in Hebrew. In all this, it will be noted that IK'S —and the same appUes to nj and -It (225, Note 2), though these are originally pronouns — true to its peculiar character as a conjunction, stands at the head of its own proposition,! and is absolutely indeclinable, although a complementary personal pronoun (suffix, or affix), like the 'relative pronoun' in Latm, Greek, etc., agrees with the antecedent in gender, number, and (usually) person.2 3. The complement of the relative may be {a) the pronominal suffix of a noun : the combination is then equivalent to whose. Thus »nn rlj? IB'N flB'xn the tooman whose son [was] the living' [one], 1 Kings 3 : 26 ; ^pa O*'^?^ iV^'^J'TiK a land whose stones [are] iron. Dent. 8:9; 11,^3 i;*3^n NSpr-ig'K B'^^'h the inan in whose hand the cup has heen found. Gen. 44 ; 17 ; 'bJX ^g'^? 'JW3n 1V"]N3 3B''' the Canaanite in whose land I [am] dv;elling, Gen. 24 : 37. {h) The complement may also be the pronominal suffix of an inseparable preposition,3 as 13 noa nnx "pA T'D'i'i? thy God in whom thou [art] trmt- ing, 2 Kings 19 : 10; 3:3 -IjnjK '"IK'S ni?nn the trouble in which we are, Neh. 2:17; tSib t^l 3?'; iV^ D'lV'^ *^« <^*'^'«« *« "'^^c^' ^"^ ^^^ '^«'«^*. G™. 19 : 29 ; H'^^s' "ipi* y^^ rin|?5n iAe damsel to whom I shall say. Gen. 24 : 14 ; Dn? njn* IDX "Ik's tVinXl n^'p Moses and Aaron, to whom Jehovah said, Ex. 6:26; jaii^ risijp >\i.''in\ N7 IB'N HDna cattle from which they do not offer an offering, Leviticus 27 : 11 ; brinnk Dn'UN -13^0 T^ Cli!^3!? their lies, after which their fathers went, Amos 2:4;' D»n^5:?'irix'"13'n"'ig'f? iris^ at the appointed time which God sjyake. Gen. 21 : 2. (c) The complement may be the affix of a verb, as D-iri'. N? "IB'X Dfinn the natimis whom they have not known, Zech. 7 : 14 ; nJiT; IDriS "W^. iTJE* afield lohich Jehovah hath blessed. Gen. 27 : 27. {d) The complement may be a local adverb, as 02* HOI? "iK't? DipBH the place where he stood, Gen. 19 :27; ntpf D-i:; "I^S DipD ap^acc whither (or ifo wAic/j) Ae may flee, Ex. 21 : 13 ; 'db'D n|37 'if t? ^l?'^^?^ «Ae ^rowjid from which (or lohence) he was taken. Gen. 3 : 23. Note. That "IK'S is really a conjunction is not merely evident from (a) what has now been stated, and (J) the remarks already made in 219, but also {c). from the fact that the simple conjunction \ is used in a similar manner and under like conditions ; this wUl be evident after consideration of the following passages. Isa. 57 : 15 iD^ B'npl "II? \i^ Nf 3} D"J "lOi? ns can be properly 1 It will be remembered, however, that in compound conjunctions "l^X is preceded by the determining element (219, Obs.). 2 Instances of the normal agreement with the first or second person are found in Gen. 45 : 4, Num. 22 : 30, Hos. 14 : 4, and exceptions in Isa. 44 : 2, etc. 3 But see also 225, 2, foot-note 1. ' 220 THE RELATIVE. rendered only by employing the relative pronoun : Thus saith the high and lofty [One] inhabiting eternity, whose name is holy. Similarly, Isaiah 10 : 10 I'nDtJ'O-l D.^B'-n^p Dn\'?*p?-1 b*!?Sn nia^Dp"? n» nsyp evidently means my hand hath reached to the idolatrous kingdoms [83, 1] whose idols exceeded [those of] Jerusalem and Samaria ; Isaiah 48 : 6 OFt^y. S7) n'nV? signifies hidden things {63, Obs.) which thou knewest not; Isa. 5:4 lil? hVE}'|??"np ia 'ri''B'r S^l 'PiaV wAa« is yet to be done (196, Note 2, c) io my vineyard ■which! have not done'in it? Ps. 78:45 DFl'Tl^J'Jnl rAllSV-l Cl!?3K»l 3'"i;? n?B'; he sent the gadfly which devoured them, and the frogs which destroyed them; 2 Kings 4:8 DH^"'??^^ ia-pjDBl nVn^ HfK DK*) D^'lt:'-^^! I'B'VS "I31?!l and Elisha passed on to Shunem, where was a great woman, who constrained him to eat bread ;_'Sumheis 35 -.11 nST OB* Oi) Q^b nV.;riPl tD^^pp ^V ^e sliall have cities of refuge, to which (or whither) a manslayer may flee (of. the illustrations in 222, 3, c). With these may be associated instances which some might prefer to regard as examples of the ' circumstantial clause ' (226), such as 2 Sam. 17:25 Xnn^ iOB'-l ^%-\^ Ne'e!? Amasa\yi&s ih.e] son of a man whose name [was] Jithrah; Gen. 24:29 fl? iDB*-! riN njJ5"!l? Bebekah had a brother, whose name was Laban ; cf. Gen. 16 : 1, Bst. 2:5; also Gen. 11:4 DV??'3 IB'NII 7'??P a tower whose top [shall be] m the heavens ; cf. Zech. 2:5'; further Lev. ' 22 : 4 WIS X-in) fnriN* 1?>JP B*'^ B*'!;! «j;«-2/ OKC of the seed of Aaron who is a leper ; cf . Num. 33 : 40. Instances in which the con- necting 1 is omitted (in the same manner as "IB'N, 224) occur in Zech. 6 : 12 iDE* npV B''N n|n behold a man whose name is Sprout {d. -2 ^dtm. 20:21, Job 1:1)'; Amos 5: 27 'IDB* niX3V 'H'^S njn'. IDN saith Jehovah, whose name is the God of hosts, Isa. 48 : 2, Jer. 46 : 18. Exercise 64. t!?8 (}) cedar npB'J breath, spirit HW wait, expect D-IO spot, stain, blemish 2 tinpi Qn'i^it n^ha ik'n nb^n-nx w^sj'n '•'':DJi< nsj^x i^nn is t ony^n-nN T^y VisS TV' .... ... - .J _; V •/ - 1* T : - V I " T : T T : VT T : • : ^ T V -: t : - it ; - t : v- t v -: iiy-in2o jn3im ^S n^Sy i^a' nm "i^x pxn 19 tnss* ; •■ Tiv : V I : T iv T •• T - V -; I V T T | it v V -: • T IT : ■■ V -: } v (.v - v :i3 ntoh nm '^m Tj^nSx ^«js'_^-'7K22 • n3?an-'?K nip* inan «b ni^'x nin^ n^^ nx yn?. n3*«25 ni^ c^nx ts;iB'n27 '/Tj^nnpia nB^■^{ npy.* ^"^ny Sn^k'*, nmse jnin^ T : V -: V •• : v • * r t - - 1 : * t ; Dnk ifi^pn 'iJJ'N nin*' nyia nW 29 • n nisryS isS Dipisnsi tnrij'i'n 'na'K p^n-m }mi7 3o tonyiDa -y -; X " - T T : ^- T V ": " " " T • T i" I v\T T •••):■ V • T " T V V,V T 3' T :y-T { n3»» nin n*? ^d^' n^Sy ^^a ntstonss :DiJ'» nxif^-'iK'K XIV • ■■ •• T T J* T V -: T • - IT ■ T /r T V -: Kin Dn^a pNp nV nriB'n'? nissj^-xn nm ie'k f ^^{n se IT • V T : V - « Amos 2:9. & See 114, Ohs, 1. « Deut. 28 : 49. ^2 Kings 7 : 17. '•222 THE RELATITE. « Isaiah 49 : 23. / See page 219, foot-note 2. 9 See 19, 4. '' Deut. 12:2. * See 209, c. * See 173, Note 1. ' See 83, 1. ™ See 196. "■ See 184, mte. See 143, 3. p See 213, VI. 1. « Isa. 50 : 1. '■ Joshua 7 : 14. « See 87, Ofc. Esther 7:5. < See 155, Ois. « ' the God of Bethel...' See 80, 3, c. <■■ See 217. IFrz'^s m Eehrew 1. This young man, whose father is rich, loves a young woman whose mother is poor. 2. I am a poor [man] whose adversaries (p. 219, foot-note 2) are near, whose friends are far off. 3. Good is the land which we have seen, and strong are the cities which we found in it. 4. Better is the word which thou hast spoken, than the deeds which thou hast done. 5. The people whom you know are not men from whom you will receive much. 6. More blessed is the man from whom much has been received, than the man to whom much has been given. 7. Trust not those strangers whom thou knowest not, but trust us, with whom thou hast dwelt from thy youth. 8. Strong- er is the king to whom we are fleeing than the prince from whom we have escaped. 9. Better is heaven, whither we are going, than this earth where we are. 10. The land to which (whither) ye shall go is not like the land from which (whence) ye have come. The Kelativb. b. Omission of the Eelative or its Complement. 223. I. Omission of the Complement. When the relative sign has attached to it (a) the subject of the subordinate proposition, the complement (1) does not really need to be separately expressed when the clause contains a finite verb, inasmuch as the latter already con- tains the personal pronoun required (112, 2: accordingly, such a pronoun is rarely added, as in 2 Kings 22 :13. (2) The complement is occasionally expressed, however, when the secondary clause does not contain a finite verb (though in this case also it is very frequently omitted), the reference to the antecedent being regarded as sufficient- ly obvious. THE RELATtVE. '^23 Illustrations of the first remark occur in Jer. 7 : 28 IWDE' Xi^ IB'tj! 'ijn nj this is the natim tliat iMve not obeyed ; 17:5 DnN3 n^3*. 1e'^5 na^n "I'lIX cursed is the man that trusteth in manA Examples of the second class of propositions, with the complement expressed, are Num. 9 :_13 lina X-in-ng'i? E'^fjin the man who is clean; Haggai 1 :9 X>^ N-in"1^8 'n^S my home which is desolate; see also Deut. 17 ; 15 ; Gen. 17 : 12, _ Instances in which the complement is not expressed are Gen. U : 17 iPl^« ■1B>^? D'S^lpn the kings that were vdth him; Ex. 29 : 32 ^£)3 "IK'X Do|in - ; V y: IT i- t ; n'?N42 •n'^'nii D^ia-Vaa nn^a iTina pxi mS' d*33 V ■• T I" • • T T • TT : I • -: - I " ; t^t t - t i , . . _ ^ . . _. f IT T I vv/ - ¥ ■■ I* • -: ■ T : - 46 : ^ty'sj nmn ♦Tna ^ii-'^i&nN '"^^^ j^iSpi •^I'lna "ni'^n 'nrN47 jnyi ij'ni "niJE' i^n^sy "nia*3 !i:naB' I v\y - V •• IT r i' T : T • • • *■ : - IV : I - •-. V I V - V : v j - •.. v • - i I r : - " See 83, 1. ' Note the difference between this sentence and the preced- ing (2 Kings 22 : 13, and the parallel passage in 2 Chr. 34 : 21). « • Thus {lit. 226 THE RELATIVE. like this). . .' See 215, 8, also 63, Obs., and 103, 4. " Gen. 23 : 9. « See, 43, Obs. 2. Gen. 9 : 3, and 1 Kings 8 : 40. / Nutn. 17:5. s? Isa. 59 : 21. » See 125, 4, a. > Supply the relative in these sentences, and, where necessary, in others following. * See 213, VI. 2. ' See 137, Note 1. ™ Job 3 : 3. " See 73, 4. » See 213, VI. 1. ^ See page 219, foot-note 2. « Ps. 9 : 16. " Isa. 51 : 18. ' See 217, Obs. 2. ' Isa. 42 : 1. « See 207, 2. Ps. 90 : 15. •• Isa. 51 : 1. Write in Hebrew 1. The God whom we serve will judge the people who do not keep Lis commandments. 2. Jehovah whom our fathers oheyed, will cer- tainly bless their cliildren who fear his name. 3. The deeds which thou hast done are like the words which thou hast spoken. 4. The God who [is] in the heavens seeth all the things that [are] upon the earth. 2. Let each woman who is a widow dwell with her children' who are alive in the land. 6. Take the silver that is on the table, and give [it] to my servants who are in the field, in return for the work that they have done. 7. These are my laws [which] I com- manded, and behold the deeds [which] ye have done ! 8. Despise not men [whom] ye do not know, strangers [whom] ye have n6t seen. 9. Who is the king [that] will save you, and where is the arm [that] will deliver you? 10. Teach us the way [in which] we shall walk, and lead us to the place [in which] we shall dwelL The Relative. c. The Eelative with General Antecedent understood. 225. 1. Sometimes l?'8 includes a general antecedent, and may accordingly signify he (or him) who (or whom), those who (or whom), that which, &c. Thus, Dn^ "IH^ IK'S riN't this is what (i. e. that which) he spake to them, Gen. 49 : 28 ; '>JJi''^0 "IB'X Dn^K") ye have seen what I have done, Ex. 19 : 4 ; •1B'1?9 05? '^^ii'' "lE'X that which he shall command you, ye shall do. Gen. 41 :'55; nrpy Vi)'\i IB'^ nniPl nXT tUs is the law 0/ [\ara} in whom is the plague of leprosy. Lev. 14:32. Cf. the similar use of qui &c. in Latin, and of who in the condensed style of our own writers ; ' Who steals my purse steals trash.' THE EELATIVE. 227 05s. 1. The simple "ig'g, as appears from the examples given, may indicate the general antecedent in the accusative case as well as in Jhe nominative, al- though that meaning is more properly marked by 1E't|"n^ (see 2, below). Ohs. 2. When this comprehensive Ityx is itself suppressed, botli antecedent and relative must of course be supplied : the context deternaines where this is necessary. Thus Num. 2? : 8 njil*. Dl?} nS ClVtS Hb-I h^ nSO N^ apS n» how shall I curse [those whom] God Ivath not cursed, or how shall I be wroth against [those with whom] Jehovah is not wroth ? In such condensed language, a construct word may seem to stand strangely alone, as Ps. 65 : 5 "103)5 *!!'E'{J blessed [is he, or, are they whom] thou dost choose; see also 10--12 in Exercisa 2. When a preposition or similar particle immediately precedes the relative, tliis indefinite antecedent — and not the relative — must be regarded as the proper object of the prefix.'- Accordingly, VJ*}?! |n NVp^ ■lg'^? ION nD||^J? Ruth 2 ; 2, means let me glean after [him] in whose eyes I shall find favour. Similarly lE'N? does not mean to wlwm, but to him who (or whom), to that which, to those who, &o., as in Isa. 49 : 9 ; 2:8; 1 Sam. 30 : 27—31 ; and we must in like manner ren- der •\m5, 1f'fc!t?, 1g'^"n^,2 -ifm, IK'if *?» (Ex. 32 : 34). 3. But "^W may also be omitted from the combination described in the preceding remarks ; the inseparable preposition then coalesces ■(vith another particle following, especially a negative ; and it becomes necessary to supply both an appropriate antecedent and its relative at the proper intervening point. Hence N?? may signify in (or with, or for) [that which is] not, &c,, Isa. 55 ;2 ; 2 Chr. 30 : 18 ; Jer. 2:11; N77 may mean to {for, or by) [him who does] not, &c., Isa. 65 : 1. In like manner, IK'S? may be omitted after a separate prepos- ition, as *!in8< in Jer. 2:8; see very condensed constructions in Job 26 : 2, 3. J^ote 1. In later Hebrew especially, "Ig'X is shortened into B' and prefixed to another word, (a) This fragment regularly keeps its proper vowel, while Dagesh (19) is placed in ordinary consonants succeeding it, as in N?g' Eceles. 7 : 14 ; (J) sometimes -^ is the vowel-point, as in *J?Pi?K' Jud. 3 : 7. (c) Before the aspirates, the common form is g" alone, as *3Kg' in Cant. 1:6; but (d) it is once ^, in Jud. 6 : 17 niJNB'. We also (e) find the form f in Eccl. 3 : 18 Tliis short form constantly occurs in Canticles ; in Ecclesiastes, it is very fre- quently employed.; in Judges, the later Psalms, and other works, its use is but occasional. 1 Exceptions are exceedingly rare : Gen. 31 : 32 "Ig'X DV with whomsoever; Isa. 47 : 12 "lli'tjill with which [or, wherein]. 2 This combination is sometimes best rendered by ' how,' as in Deut. 9:7; Joshua 2: 10; Gen. 30:29 ^»j?731? "I^S m Jjl?;n; flFlN thou thyself knowest Ihow I have served thee. But the same meaning may also be conveyed even by the simple relative, as Gen. 6 : 15 this is how thou shalt make it. So also, "IB'JJJ may mean and how, as In 2 Kings 14 : 15 (both forms in v. 28). 228 THE RELATIVE. Note 2. In poetry, HJ (more rarely -It, or it) is occasionally used for the more common relative ; as JplQJ HJ Dii?D"7^ to the place which {2^1, 2) thoit limt founded, Ps. 104:8; i3*P* nri?i5 f\Y^r\ the mountain which his right hand purchased, Ps. 78 : 54. See also Ex. 15 : 13. Exercise 66. orin pull down, de- \\n substance, wealth |>S3 break, scatter 1*ni? price stroy '^VfP' satisfaction >1D| work, recompense flB'T net V'^y labour; riches TIB* lay waste, destroy 7?il> boy, child \i2\p hide IV ■• : V -: V ' IV - | \ v -: t - : f? '^rij rhm ^h '^m 4 : mn* n'?^' ^b^k n'?« 3 I IT • ^- T T : V- T V -: IT - - T V -: v •• Mv : V -; T " '■ - : iv v: iv v -; v ; • t - tn^^v mn* *nnx'' na'N n^is . y^^g^x *piyT nS •^nsB'12 - I- VT : /- v; IV V -: •• IT : V • : '*- t - ; •nnra nK^yn-iB'x na Trynix le : njj'k ♦'?y tPiri-itrx JT : - T V -; ,- v -; •■ I -: • IT V V- t I ■• • V -: nn) Dnh ^JK *n^i3 -ityx nan 17 •. ^^Sn nak n^j'x nx "^ "H'-syy-DN ^lE^N "ly '?i5Tyx N718 ta^na *jn *nyiDi-ia'fr« ■ ■ T • V -: » - I : Tv: ,v ,- _, • -; . . v- ^ ^ „ !ijyy nsyx nx nyaa' nriN nan 19 : ^ »riia'^ n^N hn 21 :'n*iS7 wnnn n^yN 'n^« Ni-intao ;^>^m ':ht2 J IV T : • :y- - ; • v -; •• r t ; i - •■ : - : nfyri ^m nj 22 • mn^-nx ris^j'^n-^K'K 'nx nsa'fi-'i'N' • -: V,-:- r -J T 1- T V -: Iviv- '.m^n nnx Pjn'i o^p in^a-Vy 'imh ^m e|pv25 .-[*i^x tori'ina *msn xS nB'Na27 tT-xa'x ie^nS '»n'7px26 !in» "lE'K 0^3*129 t^aniN nB^xa !|jrix •ib'x ci^s'nss I * ■ IT.* J" t I I I*" _ V ": •• T T ■ " ; - ; THE EELATIVE. 229 ■ ■ . V •• ■• : P •• T : V IT : • v -; •• | v v 137 ciM ib-px la^Ni Q^.)|V !iiV NXsrb'^inss ijjrix ^Sn • ^iPOl 11- ^'D^ «^'?^^ ^^r**^^^ ^W ^^^^ ^^'^^. i^^i^ , , ' • • . '11""''' ' "' ' '■' '' ' = = ■ ^■'^ ib^ npsri-nK iiSpx cnsxa «na'i36 .napn n'?'? mv! T . P T ,..;__,. ,T ^. ,. _. . IT- iib'y^B' tD^B'yten-Sa-riN ^n^K'i39 • Dn^ab'S tints iijsw nW -: - V . -. - - , ., ■ . T IV •• • : I vw /r T : v V I T V - : V ■• : - T : - v r - v it - ■^y 1I^S'?^y-n^{ ^yisji Tnx»2j> ^ib^« ; siiS j:i':>toiiB' "sSiitoJi CV- T V ( ■• • : ■• V •* : - IT : : - T v ( •• ; V " • : - T V - : • I- T ; • I V ^V V VT V • " -. V - V : - : • : - -: a- : ~ ^t -; it v •• - t r v *niv* iiray 45 : nrys 3py* WtJ* ^^m 44 • ^)^^{ n*3-W IT ; - t : ; • \ : it V V : i- - : • t • : I IV T : V I f T : - : | it •• • : \ : i- - ■■ - v •■ : ^n3nN''nT52 na jtij^b; ht ti*x-nn Dip n^ip ^my ^nbTsi • : V" T V w ■ 1 T : y- T V I ■ - V ) V T J- 1 T I ; it -; : !■ : : V « Deut. 14 : 12. » See 195, II. c, and 180. « See 217. <* See 24, 7, Obs. 1. ' « Isa. 52 : 15. / See 225, Ohs. 2. «' Exodus 4 : 13. » See 117, 4. * See 159. * See p. 210, foot-note 2. « See p. 227, foot-note 2. »> Jer. 50:20. ^ Isaiah 65 : 12. « See 155, A. i" See 104, Ofo. « Ex. 5: 11. I- Isa. 55 : 1, 2. « See 167, iV^oie. « Job 26 : 2, 3. « See 66, 05s. 6, and 207, 1. 2 Chr. 30 : 18. » See 225, 3. " Vocative. Ps. 137 : 8, 9. « See 213, VII. 2. y 2 Kings 6 : 11. 'Cant. 3:4. iPs. 74:2. 2 Job 19: 19. 230 CIRCUMSTANTIAL CLAUSES. IFriie in Hebrew 1. Tliis is [slift] who spoke. 2. These are [they] who rebelled. 3. This is [ho] whose daughter is dead. 4. This is [that] which I spalv-e. 5. We have received what we did not ask. 6. Jehovah will hear [those] wlio cry unto him, and hearken to [those] who seek his face. 7. Take not from [that] which I have written, neither add to [that] which I liave spoken. 8. We know how thou hast laboured. 9. Let us dwell with [those] whom we know, and trust in [those] whom we love. 10. Pity [those] who are in distress, and aid [those] who are oppressed. 11. the happiness of [liim who] keepeth the commandments of Jehovah ! 12. the happiness of [those who] de- light in the hiw of God ! 13. These are the deeds of [those who] do not know Jeliovah. 14. These are the ways of [one whom] God has forsaken. -15. Wliy dost thou believe in [that which is] not truth? 16. Thou liait given to [him who] laboured not, and hast trusted in [him who] understood not. ClKCUMSTAyTIAL CLAUSES.^ 226. A ' Circumstantial Clause' is a subordinate proposition — frequently very brief — in a compound sentence, added with the view of furtlier elucidating some point connected with one of the mem- bers forming the leading proposition. Mainly from the deficiency of specific and appropriate conjunctions — especially words signifying while, whilst, whereas, although, inasmuch as, &c. — various methods have been adopted in Hebrew for the purpose of indicating the par- ticular relation of the circumstantial clause to the principal propos- ition. 1. Only the simple copulative 1 (cf 2, below) may be used to in- troduce the secondary clause ; but even this sign is often omitted, especially in very brief clauses, or when the clause precedes the main proposition. Thus, Gen. 24 : 45 aip?B'-^r 3^1 HNV* HMT H^H behold, Rebekah came out, and her pitcher was (or, tvith her pit:her) zipon Iw shoulder ; Gen. 19 : 1 1 On this subject, see also Driver on the Hebrew Tenses, Appendix I. CIRCUMSTANTIAL CLAUSES. 231 ti^p-^Vm ng'"' tih) 3^r? n^hl? n^ax^an i^f ■1i<3;i and the two angels came to Sodom in the evening, while Lot' was sitting in the gate of Sodom; 1 Sam. 17:23 njlJJ D;33n B'<>S n^n) Dar "ignp N-in wMUhewasspeaUng iviththem, hehold the champion came up; Ps. 50 : 22 ^'-VO \%) ei"ll3X I shall tear in pieces, without any one delivering ; Isa. 34:10 J'S ^'DO)? "in? I'lT? i^? "'31' y»'om generation to generation it shall be desolate, no one passing through it; 2 Samuel 13 : 30 njlJ-bs n^3 nrpB'ni Tli^'ja n^n 'n;i amiii cdOTe to pass that while they were in the way, the report came to David. Other illustrations occur in Gen. 12 : 4, ' Abram being seventy-five years old... ; ' v. 6, the Canaanite being then in the land ; ' v. 8, ' Bethel being on the west and Ai on the east.' See further a large number of brief descriptive clauses in 1 Sam. 3 : 2, 3. 2. In these accefssory propositions, {a) the subject regularly comes first (cf. 55):^ this arrangement obviously renders the use of ' Waw Conversive ' impossible (158, 162). (b) The nominative, even when it has already been mentioned in the main proposition, is either itself expressly repeated in the subordinate clause, or its personal pronoun is employed instead ; in neither case, however, does this arrangement give any special emphasis to the repeated term. Thus, Gen. 44 : 34 »)?N -13^ 'S IWni ''^^i!■^^J n^{?K 'q''K how can I go up to my father, when the lad is not (or, the lad not being) with me? 1 Kings 8 : 14 nny h^-\p\ 'Pn?-'??! b^if\ '?nir'?3 nx '^^an ■^■35;! and the king blessed the whole congregation of Israel as (or, while) they stood ; Jud. 13 : 9 1*S FiBi^K oijp-i r\ifs. njB'r N'n) nfxn'^S "lii? Q^n'^'sn 'jis^d saji n)^l> and the angel of God came again to the woman, while she was sitting in the field, Manoah her husband not being with her. Note 1. It is sometimes necessary to repeat the same word at the beginning of several successive clauses, in each of which it forms the subject, as 'David' in 2 Sam. 6 : 14, 15 ('...dancing before the Lord...'}. Note 2. Examples of circumstantial clauses in which some other member than the subject stands first are found in Josh. 2 : 15, Isa. 6 ; 6, &c. 3. In these ' descriptive clauses,' which usually indicate something contemporaneoits with what is stated in the leading proposition, the verb, if any be required, is mostly in the participial form. See the illustrations already given, also 2 Sam. 17 : 2 VP^ N-IH) vhv K)2K J shall come upon him, while he is weary, Obs. A descriptive clause is sometimes but the outcome of an effort to ex- press, by circumlocution, what might be more concisely indicated by means of a 1 Though the fact that the subject stands at the head of its own proposition generally indicates either that the latter is a circumstantial clause, or that the nominative is to receive special emphasis, the unusual arrangement may also be merely due to a de.sire for variety. Job 1 : 16, 17 ; 2 Sam. 12:1; 2 Kings 14 : 9. 232 CTRCUMSTANTIAL CLAUSES. simple adjective, if it existed (83, 1), or by a prepositional phrase j as in Psalm 72 : 12 i'? II'V }»N1 liV) fvas ^""il he shall deliver the poor, and the dis- tressed, and the helpless (but more literally, him to whom there is no helper) ; Ps. 104:25 ^^pp \%\ B'DT DB' thej-e are creeping things without nvmber, (or innumerable) ; Cant. 6 : 8 ^Spp t'S niD^H countless maidens. 4. In another leading class of circumstantial clauses, there is fre- quently assigned a ground or reason for what is stated in the leading proposition, or the latter is otherwise modified. In the accessory- clause, the verb, if any be required, is usually in the perfect, but may be in another form. Thus, Ps. 95 : 10 'apT •11>'7;|-N^ n»n) nn 35!? 'rh nv they are a people erring in heart, in tluzt {seeing that) they do not know my ways ; Jer. 11 : 10 ai3u'? Dnos D*n'^s '.■^dk -is^i? neni niTns! i;io?'^ -lasi? they refus- ed to hear my words, by their going {in that they went) after other gods, to serve them; 2 Sam. 7 : 1 1*?f«-'?3p 3*3Eip '"h-mn nin^l 11^33 'q^PD SB^; the Idng sat in his house, after that Jehovah had given (or, Jehovah having given) him rest from all his enemies round about; Jud. 4:1 PN'lB'* ';!3 -IDO*!! np n-insi n;(n; ';!*r3 l?nn n\m}> and the children, of Israel again did evil in the eyes of Jehovah, Ehud having died {after Ehud was dead) ; Ex. 33 : 12 See above,. Note 2. Zech. 2:5. ' See 217. ^ See 213, 4. « ' while. . .' / See 213, I. 2. ff See 221, Obs. » See 208, 5. 'In Hebrew, 'heart' is used more comprehensively than in English, and em- braces the region of thought or understanding ; Gen. 17:17; 24 : 45, &c. This expression (Hosea 7 ; 11) thus signifies ' without understanding ;' cf. Jer. 5 : 21 ; Prov. 10 : 13 ; 17 : 16, &c. * ' when (since, seeing that)...' ' See p. 63, foot- note 2. ""though...' » See 169, 1. » 'Just as she...' 1 Kings 14 : 17. i> See 161. s Cf. Exer. 44, note/ '' See 125, 1, also 195, 4, and 196, Note 1. ' See 125, 2, OJs. 2 Kings 2: 11, 12. 'See 79, 3. "866 71,2. "See 208, 1. " See 98. Write in Hebrew 1. In the beginning of that year, our old king died, after having reigned twenty-five years, and his eldest daughter ruled in his stead, being thirty-two years of age when she began to reign. 2. Let us smite them while they are eating and drinking, and we shall find in their camp countless vessels of gold and silver. 3. Behold, there appeared unto her, in a dream, an angel with a crown in his hand, while she was sleeping under an oak. 4 In the evening there came to the city three men with their garments rent, and their shoes worn out. 5. "We did not send them, although they have spoken in our name. 6. Why dost thou command me to go, without having told me what I shall speak ? 7. We have come to you, without knowing what we are to do. 8. How shall I speak to them, seeing that I am a stranger ? 9. Why should not I forgive my brother, seeing that the Lord in his mercy hath forgiven me ? PARADIGMS OP VERBS, NOUNS, NUMERALS, PREPOSITIONS. II Pabadigm I. Qal (163, 164) ' (166) Niphal Perf. Sing. 3. m. ■ bop/ 1=^3* -)bp* btjpj* 3./. ^)m* n"::ir ™t?p* in^tip;* 2. m. ^W. T : - T n:ap* pbapD* 2./. ^r^I? : Pins ^P?r r^f^p? ]. c. "mas • : - T ^riiBp Tnbt:]?? Plur. 3. c. : IT ^:t:p ^bt?p? 2. in. DFibcip* ■ Dnii3* '3Pi?'!?P BP}^^P? 2./. '\^^i 1^-5? IM^I? l^^^R? 1. c. !i5b^p ^:t2p ^3b^P? Jjirpf . 5'»a^. 3. m. bbpf "i^?":* 1^1?: ^t?i$r 3./. bbpn na^n '^1?!^ 2.m, bbpn „ nasn ^t?pn 2./. '^PPP}* M '''?^!?ri ^'^P.^ 1, c. !^^1?^ ^ - ; V ^^i?« Phn-. 3.m. ^^PI?: g : : • ^-'9]$'! 3./. ~?^^PPJ* 5 ns'inpn ^?r^i?P! 2.m. ^bt:pr} ? ^^nsn t'^Ti 2./. njbtSpn nj-iiin n;:bpn r : - 't • 1. c. ^'^'i^rfS ' 'i??? ^m Jussive (120,6.) Cohort. (120,0.) nbtipH* T ; : V nbtipx* Imp. Sing. 2. in. ^^1?*^ 153* ^^150* 2./. ^bt:p* Z " ; ' •'btppii* Plur. 2.m. ^^pp .-g SIIM iibppn 2./. n5bt:p*.° 03133* T : - : njb^pn* Ia-f. bt:p|s bit:pl| 0153,123,135 f^5^P* ^^;?n* Absolute Ii33 T 1^ bbp5,bb|3n Part ad. b::p\s b^t:p/| ■'=3 Pi? pass. ^^1??* Begvlam Verb: 164, 165. ni Piel (168) Pual . Hithpael (173) ' EipMl (171) SopZ/fl? ' btof?, btap* %v* ^^Pt^tl* b'topn* bt:pn,bt:pn* rttap* nbtpp* nbtepr^n* nb^topM* hbiDpn* rib%* nb^p* F)b%nr!* Pib^pn* ^5^1?D* rifel? Fibtsp i^^^p^n i^btipri i^btopn ^nbtDf? "vbhi ^libfepnn '^btopn ■^nb^pn uSt^p '^ sibtaprin ^^Dpn iibtipfn DFlb^p fiPi^^P onbtsptifi DPibtJtn cnbi^pin is^^^l? is^l^i? 1P}kpii inbtopn 1^^^)?6 ilSb^p ^5b^p iiib^pinri ^Db^pn iiib^pn btopf btapf bcspfi-;* b^Ppr* bttp;*, btip;* btipp btspri btsprin b'tipn '"btopn ^^pl^ btspn ^t?P^f} b^Qpn ^^1?P) ^btapn •^bap'ri 'b^pi^P "b^ppn 'btipn bt2pii btapji ^i^pf;>« b^topx "^m sibtap-; tm^ iibtapin^ sib'^aj?::: ^^^i?: HD^apn* nsbapn* njb^pinh* ^?^tjpn* nibapn ^it?prn sibiaj^n ^btsptin. fib''t5pn iibt?pn ™b^ppi nsb^pn nsb^prn nibtopn s^jbtopn "^^P? ''^^? 'btapw • .■I- • • bt?pf ^Wp? nbtaps** nbt)pri« nVtjp'i^* bt2p* baprn* nb ^tjpn, bttpn ^btap* 'btspinn ' ''b'^tiptj 'ibttp wanting. ibtflpt^n sib^ppn wanting njbfe* nsb^ptin* fi?^tipn btop* wanting btapnri* b'tipn* not found bt2p,btap* brop btapnri btipn* ^53 'btOp'J b^tap! bttpti, bttp^a IV Fabadigm II. — The Begtjlah Verb SiNQULAB Affixes. 1 com. 2 masc. 2 fern. 6 masc. 3 fern: P... H^K S. 3. m. ^^^^^^ ^^^^ ^^^^^^ ^^^^^^ tTib^tsi^n 178, 1. 5^^I? ^^^I? . t^ri i^tai? nbtap jftiBj". Qal, 8. 3. »i. 179, 3./. ^?^^)? n^^I? ^^^I? '\||} nbtjip ^?t:^t:l? tjt^^^i. tit.^tj^ ^'J^g ^^^^ PZwn 3. c. ^3^5tolp ?j!ib^lP ^^bt2I? ^!^^^toIp 'nii!5t:p 2. m. ^5'iFibp]5 — ■ —' ilfflrnbtsip fflfnblBp 1. c. _ ;:j^3bttj: ti^i^tip iinsiabt:)? n^3S^j? 178, 2. 41) ^|} *^e *n, «5p, ^- S-^;/'^- -S^B - - «?«B '^g} 178 3. ^5^^i?: ^)^r. t^T. ^i^^pp: SSB \vnth Nun demon-\ ^,hfeyAl-^ ».ti..b,b ..wis t:*:-" J stratwe,lBO. \ ^??^1?' ^^^1?^ — '^'tO^^ iH^tip'- PiM>". 3.m. ^i^top: ;:jiibttp^ ^^btpp: sinStip: n^'Sap^ wiTB Affixes; 176 — 180. Pi UEAL Affixes. 1 com. 2 masc. 2 /em. 3 masc. 3 fern. wb^tijjri cisyai^n ■|SVttpn Db^t:i5n lVPi?n JiS^iap tl^'^^P •^ Dbtsp fe ^5^^1? tobt3l5 V>^^ t^^^l? te tisn^a]? — — - r t': ii^^^p tiinb^js — Cin!:tip t: -'; i^r^l? iii^in^ttl? DTlbtlp Ti^r^I? n^ribto): Dlbtip I^Plbtip ■j^nbcp «^t:i5 t=^^l? te sfibtfl? — — t=^^)? fe i^^^l?": B^^^)?': 19^^!?^ Dbtip: to: tfiiibtip: ds^^^ip: i^*!^^!?": ^^^^i?! ti^pi?' VI Fabadjgjm III ■. — Vebb ' P£ Aspirate': 182. Qa. I Niphal Hipliil Hophal Feef. S. 3. m. 3./. may RI- n^ayn ^••.•:iv nn^ayn T • v: iv nayn* nnayn* T : T IT 2. m. mhy nnayD nnayn T ; ~v: IV nnayn T : -t: IT 2./. may nnayj nnayn nnayn ; : -t: it 1. c. PZitn 3. c. iitcy "^l^y: inayi iin^ayn "nnayn • : -t: it iinayn 2. HI. Drnay* onnayD Dnnayn Dnnayn 2./. 1. c. : - T ^snayD : -vnv •imayn iiinayn : -v: IV innayn 1 V : -T! IT ■wayn ; -Ti IT /jlfPi'. ;S. 3. «l. 3./. -; r pinri nayn '^ n^ay; n^ayn nay'; nayn 2. HJ. la^n PltlFi nayn n^ayn nayn 2./. • : - r 'Pt^P!* ■^nayn ■'n^jypi "nayn* 1. c. nays* P-^C!^ nayx n^ays nay» i'Zttr. 3. Ml. inay^* *ipt1,^.* sinay iin^&y^ iinay" 3./. 2. «i. Siayn ^pTnn nsnayn ^n'ayn •^5ia?n iin'^xsy'ri ninayn . T : -t: IT ^nayn 2.y. 1, c. Juss. njiayn nSiayp ' nays nsnbyn nay*- nsnayn T : -T: IT nays -t:it Cohort. ^im fiT^?? Lip. S. 2.m. nay* PT^* nayn nayn 2./. Fl. 2. m. 2./. •'las iiiay "pin ^"i^ayri ninayn T ; - T •■ ^n'^ayn nsnayfi T ; ■• -I 1- wanting Inf. lay nayn Tayn absol. liay T niayj 1'I9?^C! nayn "t: it Fast. ad. pass. nay (i26,&)pTn n^iay T nays TV.-IV n^aya • -: 1- naya tt: it Pabadigm IY.— Vebb "Ayin Aspirate': 183. VII Qal Niphal Piel Pual Hithpael Pebf. 8. 3. m. 3./. T -: IT nsi'a 2.m. T : - T ntiniBS Mia psna ns^arin 2./. nanto PitiniflD Pi^a ns-ia nDiarn 1. c. TimiB "Rtsniaa ^r^ina ^nsna "npnann Plur. 3. c. iit:m2j* iit:nia5* ^^15 ^sia ^s^ann 2.m. cjronuj DFitiniBa ora^a DFii'ia DPib'iainn 2./. 1. c. 1 - T ■jntirras -(pis^arn ^ii^am : - T -. • /jirpj". fi'. 3. m. 3./. 2.m. 2./. tiriulri Tj-iariFi ''S'la^n 1. c. PZttn 3.m. iis'iar^^ 3./. ratoniBn nitantsri nis^ar^ rai^bn nis^arin 2.OT. ^timjjn iitin^n sii^iFi !i5ihn iiS'iann 2./. riDCirnan nstihtin nib^nn niinbm nsinatin 1. c. tsniBD nt:nias ti^a? ^1^.^? Jifpj. withAff, ■' T ; ■ V -: 1- -! Imp. 8. 2. m. 2./. PZ. 2.m. tint?* iitsriijj ^5ia • ; IT wanting "S^iann ^siann 2./. natiniB T : - ; n!ti>11Blr! T ; - T • T : - T nss^arn T ; - T : • Inf. absol. tiin^ T tjniBn tiinffl] : ■ wanting v:^^^ Part. act. t:niB nn'i5?,'q':3'i3 Ti'^ana 1 •■ T : • t:nB3 vni Paradigm V. — Verb 'Lamed Qal Niphal Pi el Pual Pebf. S.S.m. nbiB nbT233 nbifl* nbifl 3./. » )l 1DT23 nnbiES nnbTzj nhbffi 2.m. FinbTB nn!3ffi5 Phbffi nn^a 2./. nnbiE* nnbisi* nnbiij* nnbTB* 1. c. "nnbir "TinbTDi ^nn^sTD "nnlsTB Pliir. 3. c. ^nbti iinbiDa ^nbffi' ^nbti 2. m. Dnnbia Dnnbiijs DnnbTD QnnbTa 2./. WM 1 V : - : • l^'^^i? Ifiri^T? 1. c. : - T : - ; ■ ^snbffl Impf. S. 3. in. nbizj'* nbia-^* nbffi''* nbifi^ 3./. nbiijpi hbttin nbirn nbian 2. ni. nbiijn hb^n nbtijn nbujn 2./. ^ribTiin "nb^n ''nbffln •'nbdn 1. c. nbti« nbujs nbiiji^ hbiDs Plur. 3. c. ^nbiB" sinb^'i sinbTis'' ^nbir^ 3./. ninbirn tisnbiBFi n^nbujn nirtbirn 2.m. iinbTiin iinbisn 5inbii5n iinbttjn 2./. nin^izjp ninbtan nsribmri n^ri^ffln 1. c. nb^i nb©? nbiB3 nbiD3 Juss. Pavse-form ^^1?: ''M^ T -.. ! Imp. S.2.m. nbizi* nbT!3n* vSt 2./. "nb^ ^Hb^n ^nbd Plur. 2.m. sinbi^ sHibffln sihbti wanting 2./. nsn^ffl t^'irt'tir} renbifl IsF. ahsol. Part. act. pass. ribffl* rfdt nbisn rfbujD rib'TB'* nbisia* rib'jjD nbiDij Aspirate : 184. VL Verb 'Fe 'Aleph' : 185, 186. IX Hithpael Hiphil Hophal Qa? Siphil n^pTBri* rp'^tn* rtwti 5555$ ^'^^\1 nnVPT^n nrfi'^n tlnb'^Ti nbsK nb^i^ nnfei^n rri^T^n rrfitn Firi'Intdrj* ntibi^n* nnbiiin* TiniriT^n ''nnbfflri (As in the Verbs 'Pe iifibni^^n iin^^T^n iiribiin Aspirate'; see Para- Drn^niiti Drinbiidri DnnSTidn digm III.) "jnnbnT^n irinbijin liiinb^n ^snini^n ; - ; ■ : ~ : T n^niB^ ri'^bia::* nb^^:; bDN^ bii^^* b^Sii^ b^SK^ n^nisn Ji^bian nbi^n bsxn, bSNn ■ ■ -Jl- n^sn^n li'^bii^F! nbt^n bsiin "n^ntdn 'H'^^P! "nbD^n ^bpK^n nbn^K ti'^bt^s bsi^, bsk* b^iii^,b^ibjN! iirfepiTir iin^isis! iinbiB^ *ib5K^ nsrilnirn ninbien nsnbian njbii^n ^n^t} iltT-bl^n ^r\)m iibsiin njriiniin renbdp niribi^n n3b5>5n - - : ■ 'iibirj - :t "bi«3 j^lJii^r n^nirn nb^n* bbx bsi^n ■^hbnuin 'n'^^n "bSH ^pi^^n tirt^biiin wanting iibix ninlnirin nsnbTjin X : - » - T : n^riTDn in^bicn* Vsx "^'^m i^^T^n* >l^^n biiij r!f.F]T?a iR'^braa nbffitt b«x ii'^^Ja X Paradigm VII. Vebb 'Pe Tod,' pbopebly'PeWaw\- 188. Qa ;Z Niphal Hiphil Hophal Pebf. S. 3. m. n'ij'' ^l"^ naii* rujin* a^in* 3./. n^iais 2.W. nn^ia 2./. niffiis FiMin j^np^n I. c. PZzir. 3. c. (both rcg ;ular) 2. Ml. DnsiiiD nnniBin Dnni^^in 2./. IPlTBiS -jniffiin -jpii^^n 1. c. ii5n^ji3 : - ^iaS^^in Jj/py. 5". 3. m. ^^f ■on^^* ^^t* a'^ti^ STcr* 3./. ^T??P1 ■iZJ-lTl n'^r^n a'^ffiin , siij^n 2.m. i^P] Tijn^ri mr^n a-^flin nujiin 2./. ^^T^n "laTri ^^^,5^ "n-'Sipi "a^Bin 1. c. !^^« 12JTS "T • I'-TiJiK miiii!!^ - PZhj". 3.m. : r* *i^T!^ *l=iW ifi-^fflii illfflil-i 3./. T ; ~ ■• nii^jjn ns^ujin nia^j^n 2. Ml. : r- !itiTn ilnia^^p iii^in ^ntiiin 2./ nsnmn T : - '• T : - nSlailFl 1. c. ^T???. T2jn''5 =^t;?5? n^ffiiD ' ITBifl Juss. ii^i^* hiPF. ivith Waiv Conv. ^1^^* ujn^S^ • - Imp. S. 2.m. n3iD,nffi ;2jn,T2Jn,ti^^ •*T • niain* 2./. Plur. 2.m. wanting 2./. T : - : T ; — T • n:aujin T : •■ Inf. ^?^ : a'^fflin aiij^n dbsol. T T aiain Pabt. act. ^W ^T n^m?;: pass. T Ti;in^^ ITIJiD ny:!i'!j YIU.Vebb'PeTod: 189. IX.V. 'FeYod' like'Fe Nm': 203. XI XII Fasadigm X. — Verbs '"Ayin Waw" Qal Qal Pebf. Sing. 3. m. Dp* na* ira* '\¥ K ^,21* 3./. ni3^* nna* naa* T T ■' n-'%* 2.m. nap* nn|* T : n?l^ T " 2./. nap na : : ws niD^n ]. c. ''nap "na ^T\m ^nii ^ni^a Plur. 3. c. ^ap iina ^m T ili^l 2. 1?2. anap cna drnaa V : T dnsa v: - • 2./. ■jnap "jna iniijs V^'^ li:i'i3"':a 1. c. iiiap iisna ^DT^i ^2| ^3ira Jirpj'. /S'tn^. 3. in. q^p:* TiJia;;* tt: 3./. D^pn yji^n T^n 2. Ml. D^pn lalnn r^n 2./. ''aiipn ''Tjjian h T^pi 1. c. D^p^ Tijins r^^ PZwn 3. ?jj. top; iiTEin;. il5^3; 3./. HD^a^pn* riDTiJan T ; " ^rr^^ ■ 2. m. "iia^pn iiai^n i irnn • T 2./. nra^ipn T ,; n5"3-'sn 1. c. ' n^P5 TiiinD r^? JvSSIVE dp 1^" Impf. ivitli Waiv Conv. ^'Q'^lt tSp^l w Imp. Sing. 2. in. Dilp* TzJia r^. 2./. ^a^p* "ttii h^h^ Plur. 2. Ml. VJ^P siiaii ^ri 2./. njai?* T I — Jwj". n^ip* ffiia n Absolute dip* ffiiia li-i Part. act. dp* na isis "1^ pass. d^p* l^n AND "'Ayin Yod\- 190, 191. XIII Niphal Hiphil Hophal Filel Pulal Dips* Q'pf]* npiin* Baip* naip* naipj* wo^pri* n^pin* na^ip naaip niaiips* i^ia^pn* napiin* P53^T naaip nia^ipi ni^j^pK napiin naaip naaip "^riia^ip? "nixa'^pq "riap^n "nsaaip TJalip ^ti^pj ii7j-'pri ^53p^n iiaaip iiaaip dr)iaiip3 nr^ia^pn nnapiin nnaaip nnaaip iniisipi li^i'^^W. inapiin l^a^aip ■]naaip iiiia^pi siiia^pri ^Dapiin iiiaaip ii5aaip Qipf q^p:* npr* t^'Jip": naip'; dipn n^pn npiin n53ipi^i naipn Qipn n^pn- npiin naipn naiprj ^ttipn* xa-ipFi* ^apiin ^aaipn ^aaippj nip!* n^ps •npii« Q^ip^. naipsi iiaip: ^^^p: ^7jp^^ 5iaaip^' iiaaip^' ns'^pn ns^apn nsap^Fi nsaaipn raaa'ipn iiiriipn ^a'-pn Wp^Fl iiaaipn "^aaipri ■ inj'opn n?.^&n njap^n nsa^ipn inja^ipFi 'nip? ' np^3 ' ^v^pi ' naipp nipn* i=i?n* naip ''Mipn *''2^^>r! ■•a^jip iiaiprj si^^^n wanting il705iip wanting - nj^pn nstipn n;a^ip nipn n^pn np^n naip nipn ^^m D^pa naip7j nipD np^a naipa XIV Paradigm XI. — Verb Qal Niplial Piel Ferp. Sing. 3. in. 3./. 2. m. 2./. 1. c. Phir. 3. c. 2. 9W. 2./. 1. c. lupF. Sing. 3. r». 3./. 2. m. 2./. 1. c. P?Mr. 3. )w. 3./. 2. m. 2./. 1. c. Jussive Impf. with Affix Imp. Sing. 2.m. 2./. Plur. 2.m. 2./ T : ■ !i5«ia tissb^j iA^i-. absolute Part, active passive SS13 T nxba Hba ^;S!2a5 T : ■ NS53'; \s2'aFi nsNlbri* T V T ■ T V — 'Lamed 'Aleph: 192. XV Pual Hithpael Hijphil Hophal saa ^satin «^:aan r : '• T : \. nssat^n T ' i ' T •• \ rferirj* n«|an* msatin tiDiSiiri n«isan ^tyinkn ^n^l^^t^n ^t^xl^n ^^''^arj ^li^^an Dinti« ^8^03 vowel-addit; '^1?^ T ; • Sing, absolute k. 1. m. (lamentation) (altar) (sanctifier) „ construct n£D7j nsta '0'!!pa 1, with conson. addition V : - : ■ ^a^iia Q!?^1p5? Forms {sing, or plur.) withj ^WQ ninata ■Di^pa vowel-additions { rnhiata Ds^ffi^'pa Tor cognate Feminines, see pages XXV, XXVIQ. XXIV Pasadigm XVII: Second I. Regular Forms. S. ahsol. „ constr. „ suffixed form jPL absol. \ „ with light suff. {„ constr. „ rvHh heavy suff. S. absol. „ constr. „ suffixed form (PI. absol. V „ rvith light suff. {„ constr. (king) (vow) (thrashipg-floor) (morning) DDi'ii, inn? nis'na rnbia ni3ia Dninbia XL 'Third Aspirate' Forms. III. Middle Aspirates. a. e. (rook) (rumour) (sacrifice) Di»bo D'^nar ■ T ; ■ T : ■lybp ?iinaT f. (way) inis TT! ''ninix lybD , „ with heavy suff. US^lSbo •• I ' IT oninat oninimx on?, i?S (bread) (lad) ■itirib, iis;i T T : oni-is's h. IV. 'First-aspirate' Forms. Sg. absol. , const. i. k. 1. l5?B non, ia? Q'ln, Din (deed) (kindness) (servant) (thing devoted) „ suffixed form ^b^S, ibSB 1 „ with light suff. ^^^9^ {„ constr. ""bSB „ we'^A Afiffyj/ suff. D^ibyB Ton, 13? !?lioin, 113? QilOn, Di13J> lion, iiiay ''ion. liny onn, Qin Qittin ■ T -; T T -i onixiin ttjin (month) ttsin itjin • T T! T T t; ''TBin Dni»in Declension (Segolates): 132—135. XXV i'Mfl/ Number. 1st Class. 2nd Class. 3rd Class. Dual absol. D-'nb'n • - T J ^^m ai3l|? D";313 CllJtl'? (folding doors) (horns) (knees) (loins) „ constr. ''1'?'^ WJ5 IS'ia „ rvHh suffixes ^til mr>^ ^^r?- ^'in^ T 1 T On irregular Segolate nouns (masculine) see 210 — 213. Feminine Nouns. 1st Class. 2nd Class.' S. absol. T : - f^yi a-in nbttte niay (queen) (maiden) (sword) (garment) (anger) „ constr. nsbtt tr^i^? a-in nbttto nia» - : V „ with light suft. ''fil^tt *'i^'l?!5 lain inb^ate ■ J ~ T J ■ dniay „ „• heavy „ Q?^?^'? QsJi'^?? d3a-|n D?iribttiri PL ahsol. niDbti niain nibwte T -: T : ni-iay „ constr. niDbtt niiy? niain nibate'; 3»,niia» „ with suffixes f '^iniDbtt I'^rii-is? dniain Dtibate dninay T J - „ {light or heavy) Isn'^riiDb^ d5'inini>5 DS'^riiairi Q3''rt'ate dn'^nina? 3rd Class. 1st Class. 2nd Class. 3rd Class. S. ahsol. *^ ri?ai» niaa rons (desolation) (mother) (hearing) (mistress) (garment) „ constr. - 1 T nib'ii ir\yhti rriaa (rati3) „ with light suff. •ina^n iPilbii i- JiFiyais ■'Fiiaa „ „ heavy „ D?^5in n^nnbii m. absol. niain ninbii niyaiB niias nma t: '. „ constr. ^'^^yi tiy'iii'^ „ with suffixes ( I't^'i^ll ''^'^riilbii „ {light or heavy)\Drpt^:^:i^rt dD'^ninbii dn'-riiyttiij dri'inhjix miyttti iiiias? (nlsina) iln'iyiQtJ (letters) drtPS XXYI Paradigm XVIII: Third I. Monosyllabic II. Dissyllables, rvit 'A prelone Noun. unchangeable. Sing, alsol. Tn a. obis' C. nat: e. "i&ix (Wood) (age) (temple) (sanctuary) ( executions: [■) (wheel) „ constr. Q'^ dbijy bD-^n mpia mu isis „ light suff. iti'n ittbiy 'iba'^n 11Dffi'^p3)3 ■ T " is&is „ hvavy suff. °?''t'^. DDiabiy Dsbain QDTB'np'a DDnao Plur. alsol. Q->'a'i d-iabw n'^bs'^r; o^iC'^p'a ninau dvsix „ constr. ''^1 iubi5> -ibrn ''TBIp^ ''isa "i3Bi!< „ light suff. TiOT "■'abiy 1 .. T ?iiic'nj;'a iina:: vs&ix „ Aeayt/ sm/'". Bn"''?1 DS'irbiS' Qn''b3in asiiB'npj'a oniinst: Bri"'3Bi« III. Words with pretone (— ) changeable. a. b. c. a. e. f. Sing, alsol. bina r^?r Dhx ti^ab T n^biB T i^iiDs (great) (memorial) (red) (clothed) (sent) (done) „ constr. bina liiar ttiab mbiB iitos; „ light suff. Dbi^a tfSilDT IBIS ic^ab riq^bia T -: „ heavy suff. Dsb'ia DsiB^ab DDrilbiB Plur. dbsol. D-^bina Qi?h=T ■ \ '■ Diffi^ab nimbffi cito? „ constr. "^'^^ ''?^?T '''^^^. ■itciab imbtt in^to? „ light suff. ■Tibha T i'^?^=7 - \ -: iiffiiib imbtt „ Aea^i/ SM^. cn^bina fi?"^?""!?! cn^B^S! nn'^ffiinb DDirobiB Dmcl^ension, Masculines-. 138, 139. XXVII ni. IV. Pretone (— ) changeable.. 5o?A vowels ( — ) changeable. e- h. i. a. h. c. Sinff. absol. Tpri - ' r ■'?? 12'^ Dsn baa (godly) (anointed) (distressed) (word) (wise) (camel) „ conslr. Ton niuJB ''?? 12n Dm - -J b'aa „ light suff. ^T^T}. • : i^??> D-lSn ittDH i^ttS „ heavy svff. i=?T'?n B?>l''T?'a 1=21?^ D?''2?n Plur. absol. • • -: Q'^niffiH fi'^l??! D'^ia'l Q''';?" C^tt^ „ constr. "n-^iBtt ''!:?i? '''D^'n ''5?3ll ''^'3? „ light suff". T • -: in-^TB'Sp 1''*?? T T ! ?I''|^5 „ A«OT?/ sw/f. Dni'-iipn atj''n''iB'!; nni*:? D?''"!31 Dsitisn Dri"i>)3a Words miih both vowels (— «« winiii 1313^5 I'nb'iix "fJPi'^^ „ heavy suff". nsnbi? Dsniii °5i^i? Dsr^^Ds Qsnib^ja PI. absol nibiy riiDT^ nis? nib;;x niDbaa „ constr. nibis niSTc niS3> mib^i^ ni^baa „ with suff". Dn"'r}bis T -: t])nib^i< rrb^aa f. g- h. i. k. S. absol. T •• nbn5 T ■• : T •■ : "I?^^ nain (abomination) (corpse) (cattle) (righteousness) (wise) „ constr. nn?in i^bn? nana tipis nain „ light suff. ^r^S^'iPi inbns T ; ■ ^3Piana " : V : Tl?ii? inain „ heavy suff. Dsiinsin \ 35P>an^ ' D5t?P12? Qsriain PI. absol. niayin t^ibi? tiiatia .nip-iij niain T -: „ constr. ninsin nibni : • niatji mipii niasn „ with suff. T ": iis'^nbn? rmaq:^ iii^np-ji? : - Dual absol. • - T : „ constr. ''nsi? „ light suff. ~ T ; „ Aeflvy suff. nn^riaTa Numerals: 145—151. XXIX With the Masculine. With the Feminine. Absol. Constr. ^6so/. Constr. 1 inx ri'^!* nnx 2 fi?N "■liT? d:N xpl^ 3 V I Tflbia T ffibi^ 4 T T : - nya-is 5>a-lN ya-iii 5 ni|ar! laan •■ T i»^f!! 6 ntsd tlT?^" TB^B ffiTB 7 T : • nsnifl yi^ 8 T J nD'aiij — ; nsaifl npati 9 ny^rj yiijn ycri 10 mto V v-: Masc. V V "{ .{ 13 T T T : 20 d""ito 40 D^ya^x • T ! ~ 60 nr^t 80 D'^ibTD 30 D^llS^TZJ 50 Q'^ffian 70 CSaiD 90 Q^yttFi 100 ilSja /em., construct fiNS; p?Mr. tlii55a hundreds. 200 D'inxa c^waz (for o^ma). 300 ini«a iBbTa 1000 tibx 2000 D''SbX dual. 400 niKa ya"iK etc. 3000 D-^BbiS! niflbifi 4000 D'-Bbx nsinii etc. 10,000 niaai jj?. nias'i; also ia"i, i^i'an, ;>?. nian, nixai. 20,000 D'^nia'i, or mlaVPTS 30,000 W^ai. fflbld etc. XXX Particles wits suffixes, 102—107. a in, ) -wiVA^ etc. b to, for ,etc. 3,tfs,//A:e,etc. "b:* ?o, « 2.m. %p. 5F3 ^>,^?>,E ..^b ?!ia3 *l^?s 2./-. 5T? 51^ r.5«p-^":?« 3.911. ia ib iiniib| T •• 3./. rta rtb ■r T Pl.l.c. fisi ^=5 T T ''5''?X 2.OT. D?3 D?^ B=|. D?i523 0?"'^ 2./. m nDsb ■r ■-• T — 3.OT. Q05' ^32 I. t3nb,poet. itt'S nn|, cnibs, onbif, 3./-. 1f^3 10^ nx wiV/j (103) 05 w/^A ir />-o»?, etc. 1? M??/0 5. I.e. ir:)5i:(104,0&«.) '''ay, i-iay 1372'a, poet.is'a ■''!?» P •■''7?? 2.m. firs, p.^PS tliE?, p. ifsy ^BH, p.llB'a ^'7? 2./- ^S tHJ? ^^"a — 3.m. inx ia? ISM poet, wja T T 3. A jTlPlij! ■TOS ni-jy Pl.l.c. ws T ■ isB'a — 2.OT.d5PSi H?^? 0|U ^^"P, 3.m. sns O™?' dB5> D^'? The ordinary forms of the accusatival sign n«, "Mi! are ifis; ?lt;i!S (p. -rns), 5fns; ins, nns; isns; ti2Tf^\ oniK, Dins, Qnini!, ■jrins. 105. The common forms of in , nsn hehold! are i;3n (p. "^sn) ; ^i?'? (p- ,^in). ^in; "i^n; i3?n; ^^ (p- ^j?'"!) ; sasn; Qjn. ioe. The negative ^ik, ]iK becomes ''min; ^l^S, ifr*?; '^T^.', f^??*'*?! DD31S; DJiS. The affirmative te;i, -id;i becomes ^r;©;^; is©;'; DSIS;;, DDlB"'. The chief forms of the temporal particle liy slill, y^et, are t'liy, '^'hys, ^y$\ mH\v, irjiy; isiw; o'liy. The interrogative ''S, n;;!* where? becomes ns^S p.; i'^s; a^S. SET UP AND BTERtOXTCPED BY W. DttUGULlN, LEirzIO. VOCABULARY. VOCABULARY. HEBREW AND ENGLISH. Parentheses enclosing the Qal of a verb indicate that this form is rarely used ("151J); hrackets show that it does not occur [ns'']. The class to which doubtful forms of segolates belong is indicated by 1 or 2, enclosed within parentheses after the word, as a'nn (1), 113 (2). as father (144). lasj he perished, failed (186) : Pi., Hi. destroy. IDS perish- ing; destruction, "jiias de- struction. nax to be willing (186). Otti* stall, stable. a'^as green ear of corn; first Jewish month. liiaii! poor. Sfbtt'^a!* Abimelek. bas to mourn= Hithpael bax adj. mourning, bak n. mourning. bas verily, indeed. ■jax (1) c. stone. las wing. niax Abram. DtTias Abraham, T : - T T 1 - Qibtias Absalom. D5!« pool, pond, marsh. ':5Si to gather (harvest), collect. rriax (l) /. letter, epistle (67). 15} mist, vapour. -lilX lord, master (103, Obs. a; 143, 2, d). D'lS c. man, mankind (L. homo) : Adam. Dh« red, ruddy (212, Note 3). Dns? Edom. laht? Edomite. tra'iii ground, land, soil (XXVIII, k). *in|!5h!* Adonijah. arts he loved, loves (186). nans n. love ; inf. to love (123, 1, &). nns ah! alas! bns tent (137, Ohs.). bns to move a tent. Vocabulary.— Hebrew and English. ■jiinss Aaron. aii? bottle; conjuring spirit. "jlit fire-brand. nis n. desire. b^ix fool, nbjx (1) /. folly. ib'iX if not, unless; perhaps. thMH nevertheless, however. ])k iniquity (211). -lis c. light. nix sign, pi. ninis. TS then, at that time. ■JTS /. ear. [iTX] ffi. give ear, hear, listen to. rrirx native. nx brother (144). ni{ ah! alas! axnx Ahab. -ins one (XXIX). ninsj sister. Tnx to seize (186). ins another: /". tTinj*. 1f]^, ''"ins? prep, after, behind (100); cow/, after, after that (219). ')D-'''ins afterwards. pint? latter, last, rii'inx latter end. ni3lhi< a^fy.back, backwards, (nnx) to delay, tarry; Pi. retard, defer; tarry. ■"i*. S^!!« where? (xxx). a^Sf to be an enemy, a;;^ enemy. Ttjt destruction. tfS , na^s how ? how ! ]-k nothing; lis there is not, none (106). nS''!« ephah. ©iX man, husband (144). •fX only, but, quite. 11TDS cruel, fierce. bsx eat, devour (186); Pi. con- sume. b;s, nbsx food. 1DX surely, certainly. bx^God. -bx not (121, a). 'bi/tprep. to, unto, against (101). nbx oath, curse (XXVlli, c). ■jibx, lijx oak. rt^^^., Pl- O'^n'^X God; gods (143, 2, d; and 103, Obs. a). 5|^bx friend; guide, leader. in*bx Elijah. b^bx n. vanity, worthlessness; idol. adj. vain, empty. yffiibx Elisha. Dbx dumb (XXIII, h). njtibx widow (xxviii). QTnisttbx widowhood (143, 2. a). 5|bx (1) thousand ; family (XXlV). (qbx) Pi. to teach. CX mother, siiff: ifix (212). nx if, whether (220). nax handmaid, female slave '(144). niex cubit (XXVIII). 'ilttX faithful, trusty (XXV). nj^ttx faithfulness (xxvin). Vocabulary.— Hebrew and English. (bttX) to languish, droop = Pulal. •jas to support: Hi. believe, trust: Ni. be faithful, trusty ("VI) . ]ttx truth ; verily, Amen ! DSteS verily, truly, indeed. yasj to be strong; Pi. streng- then (VI). 15aiJ to say, think; bid, com- mand (186). "'lb!* Amorite. nh whither? T T ©iSS man (as frail, mortal). i5!«, ''33K I (90). P|5S to be angry ; Hithpael show one's self angry (VI). 5|t?i4 to gather, collect; take away (186). IDS to bind, fasten; imprison (VI). i^pN prisoner. !qs also, even; actually. 13 f|K much more, much less (219). 5]!* anger, sw/f.ifeS (012, Note 2). D';aK the nose (two nostrils): face, countenance. nsij to bake, cook (186). liSN ephod, priest's outer gar- ment. esx end, cessation; nothing. -isk ashes (xxiv). vHSj'A Ephraim. bsk prep, near, at the side of ■■(101). . a']S8 to lie in wait, i'lk Hers in wait, ambush. »3-|S{ four (XXIX). lins ark, chest (xxvi). T-jk (1) cedar (XXIV). i'i», n:;'ix lion (210). •T'ns V. to be long; Hi. prolong; be long (172, 3). Sfis adj. long, slow (139, II, OU. 1). Sf-lS length (XXIV). D'lS Syria: the Syrians, ■^"ik (1) c. earth, land, country; pi. nis-is (135, Ohs. 3). TlS he cursed (205, 3, 2, a). m c. fire, suff. iiBS (212). niB« woman ; wife (144). nWS Assyria, btpk tamarisk tree (XXIV). DtOStobe guilty (VI). dlSS guilty. DUSK guilt; trespass-offering (XXVI). ITBSt co«y. that, because, &c. (219) ; rel. who, which, that, what, &c. [lick] happiness, ow/y Mseia tread, trample (XII). "lia pit, cistern; sepulchre; pi. niiia. tiia to be ashamed; perf. iljia; imperf. oia;; (XII). nra to despise (XYI). na to spoil, plunder (205, 3, 2). 'Tina young man. Di'iria youth (143, 2, c). ina to try, prove (VII). Tna to choose, desire (Vii). lipia chosen, elect, naa to trust, confide (Vlli). na| confidence, security (XXIY). •iinDa confidence (XXYi). It?! (2) womb (XXIV). D'ltja conj. before that, before. ia pray! I entreat! I^a understand = M., Hithpatel (XII). !i5''a «. understanding. I^a jjrep. between (101, Ois.). nia house (144). t\'-%l2 adv. in- side, within (215, 4). bijk-ni3 Bethel (Gen. 28: 17, 19). naa to weep (197). "liaa first-born, eldest, niba birthright, nba worn out (p. 40, foot note 1). pba Balak. iFiba not. iraa high place (for idolatrous worship). ■ja son (144). nsa to build (XVI). li^i^Sa Benjamin. -\*iaya because of (108). n^aiJrep.behind, after; through, between; for, in behalf of; over (101, 1). b»a lord, master; Baal (143, 2, d). nb?a mistress (XXY). lya to burn, burn up, consume, destroy = Pi. (vii). YooABVLAEY.— Hebrew and English- 133 to gather (gi-apes), ypa to cleave, divide (VIll). p)?a to empty. [1)53] Pi. to search for, seek. "ipa herd, large cattle, oxen. -ipia morning (xxiv). [tjpa] Pi. seek, ask for. fTlB|5a n. request. ia corn. S"ia to create. t T 113 hail. 1^3 spotted, pi. D'^llla (212, iVo^e 3). bna iron. ni3 to flee. Inxi13 fat cattle. ni13 a holt, har. ;jia to kneel; bless; Pi. bless, (also, but rarely) curse (Yll). nsia n. blessing. Syia (2) /. knee (XXV). nsiS pool, pond. p'i3 Barak. lte3 flesh. T T ■jibs Bashan. m»a shame (xxiv). ns daughter (144). bsima Bethuel. nbina virgin. nisa majesty, pride. bsa to redeem; avenge. rtaa to be high, proud ; ffi. exalt. (194, 2). ."qas adj.high, proud. jTiaK height (XXIV). biail boundary, territory. lisa mighty man, hero, warrior. niiaa strength; mighty deed. »iaa cup, bovyl; pL Di— 7 and ni— (xxvii). nyaa hill; Gibeah (xxv). 15a to grow strong, prevail. ia| (1) a man. mi?? (2) mistress (xxv). 15 coriander seed; Gad. 111iltroop,band(ofsoldiers,&c.). nilia cutting, incision. 11a a kid (210). bia to become great, be great; Pi. nourish, train; Hi. mag- nify; inii»?b biian to do great things (200, a), biia great, large, tall, eldest (xxvi). 3>ia to cut down, break = Pi. 11a he built a wall. 1ia a wall (XXVII, V). ia , ia «. back. lia nation. Sia to expire, die (vill). -\!ia a whelp (211, Bern. 1). 11a to sojourn (Xil). biia lot, portion; pi. Jii. X-ia Sia a valley (132, Obs. 2). bia to exult, rejoice (XII). ba a heap (of stones: 213). Vocabulary. — Hebrew and Engliss. baba, b|ban (72, l) Gilgal (see Josh. 5 : 9). nba to reveal (XVI). nba fountain, spring; bowl. bba to roll (XX). ISbS Gilead. Da also, even; sb 03 neither, nor; 13 Da even though. biMa work, recompense, b^a to do good (or evil) to; wean (an infant). bloa a camel (212, Note 3). ia a garden (suff". 13a: 212). Wa to steal. lya to rebuke, reprove (vil). ]Ba (1) vine (XXlV). "la, ia stranger, sojourner, ■j-ia threshing-floor ;pl ni (XXIV). ©na to drive out, expel == Pi. '(VII). na Gath (209, Bern. 3). na'l slander, calumny. pal to cleave to. (la'n) Pi. to speak (169, 2); de- stroy; Ni. to converse. ia'?i word; thing, matter (XXVII, IV). tJa'^ honey. a'l a fish ; coll. ns'n (cf. 66, Obs. 6). ]ia'l Dagon. bS'i to display a banner. ■jM corn (XXVII). li'n love; a beloved friend. 'Tl'l David. • T li'l a generation (pi. usually ni). iri'!I thrusting, overthrow (210). b'l poor, weak; pi. D'l^'n (66, O&s. 2). pb'n to burn, flame; Hi. inflame. nb^ (1) door, folding-door; pi. Hi (XXV). an blood (139, Obs. 2; 143, 3). ntt'n to be like; Pi. liken, com- pare; think, purpose (XVI). niWn likeness. D'53'^ to be silent, dumb, still (205, 3, 2). n^OT tears (63, 06s.). ptiTn Damascus. m*^ n. knowledge: inf. to know. Ip'n to thrust through, pierce. I^y: to tread ; Hi. make to walk, lead. *j"i^ (1) c. way, road. •dy^ to seek, search after. )tn (2) ashes (of a sacrifice: XXIV). bah (1) vanity (xxiv). Tin honour, ornament (XXVII). "tin majesty, splendour. lin woe! alas! hoi lin substance, wealth. VOCABVLAEY. — HEBREW AND ENGLISH. yfflin Hoshea, Hosea. n^n to be, become (198). bBin palace (xxvi). •jbn he went away, departed, walked. From a cognate root comes imperf.t^^^, imperat. -fb, nsb, inf. const. tisS, with suff. "ipiab. Hi. Sfibin to carry away; lead, conduct. Hithpa. Sf^riinri to go up and down, walk, (bbtn) Pi. to praise ; glory in. Dibn hither, ■jilfln multitude (XXVI). yet) Haman. in, nan behold! lo! here is! (106, 129, XXX). nsn«T»ini Joshua. tsSTBiiTi^ Jehoshaphat. a»i'' Joab. TBXii Joash, oil day (144). Q^i'' by day (215, 5). nsii a dov.e; Jonah. SiDii Joseph. ■jTSii counsellor (XXIII). D'lii Joram. bxs'it'^ Jezreel. inS T'W^ Tljn:: fl^y. together, [bn^] Pi. to hope, expect; ZR. wait, expect (X). nQ'3 to be good (only used, in Qal, in imperf. a'Ci';); Hi. to make good, do good (200). I^^^ wine (211). [n?''] Hi. to convict, convince ; chastise, correct ; M. reason, dispute together (167, 3). bb^ to be able, inf. const. nbD'] (188, Ohs. 2), imperf. used is HopTial bV\'^ (X). lb^ to bear, bring forth, imperf. nb?, inf const. nn5 (188); Ni. be born; //«. beget; Pi. assist in child-bearing. ib;i (1, 2), /". !T|jb;i child, — boy, girl (XXIV, XXV). 'Tibj born; a son (XXVII). [bb';] Hi. bib-in to howl (189). d; pi. v%^ sea; west. \yi?i\ Hi-li^lS^'n to go to the right (189). p^a'; c. right hand (XX vn). p5^ to suck, imperf. pjii ; Hi. to suckle (189). id;; to found, lay a foundation = Pi. (X). C|D^ to add; imperf. used is Hi. Sl'^pi'', S|Di'' (171, Ohs. 2), jqo^l (48, 2). >S'ee J9. 157. (1D|') Pe. to chastise, correct ; Ni. be admonished, corrected (x). 1?'i to appoint (a time or place) ; Ni. to meet (at an appointed time or place. X). [b?;] Hi. bwn to prpfit, be useful (X). t[Ti to be fatigued, imperf. qyir l^y^i to advise, decree, imperf. I^yii.; M. consult (x). apy;; Jacob. -1?^ (1) wood, forest (XXiv). ns'; beautiful (139, iv). is;; beauty (210). SSI to go out, go forth, imperf. 12 To OABULABY.— Hebrew and Englisb. SS;;, imperat. «s, inf. const. n«2 (for n!«2), nxsb (103, 4); Hi. Xijiin to bring out. [as";] i\^?'. a^: to stand; Hi. a^an to place, set; Hilhpa. place one's self, stand (203). [»;;] //t. aiun to place, set; leave (203). ^ryp^ fresh oil. pmi. Isaac. ys'' to spread out (a cloth &c.) ; Hi. Sisjn (203). p2i to pour out (203, V). 121 to form, make; part, nai"" a potter (203, &). 'is^ form; thought (XXIV). ns^ to burn, set on fire; Hi. rT'Sn (203, a). "tj3^ to set on fire, impf. 1)?;;, 1j?i\ I')?'' to awake, only used in im- perf. fi?'!'! (p. 181, foot note). Ipi to be dear, precious, imperf. npii., 1j3V "1)5^ «. n33 thus. T T 133 a talent; round cake; sur- rounding country (143, 4). l53 all, every (49, 1 ; 213, 1.). sbs to shut up, restrain (XIV). ni.sb3 two heterogeneous things. ab3 (1) a dog (XXIV). 3b3 Caleb. (lbs to be finished, complete; Pi. to finish, complete (xvi). "lbs a vessel, instrument, wea- pon; j?/. ti^b:s (144). [nb3] ///. to reproach, put to shame. nisbs reproach, shame. to thus, so (poetic word). 13 adj. honest, upright; adv. so (p. 125, Vocabulary). ]3-b? therefore (219). ]»53 Canaan. 13^53 Canaanite. q33 a wing (140, a). i?tt a roll (book, scroll) : XXVIII. ■jStt a shield, suff". isStt. nssa a plague, pestilence; slaughter. "laitt wilderness (xxvi). intt to measure (205, 3, 2). rrni? measure, dimension. $Wtt why? wherefore? 'j'j'7'a Midian. nS'i'lp a province. n» what? why? how! (87). [Pllntt] Hithpalpelto linger, delay. (inKi)B". to hasten (200). vr^ryq adv. quickly (215, 2). nxiM Moab. ■'asia Moabite ^66). Vflfa to shake, totter (Xll). bltt to circumcise (xil). tH^ya (1) birth, origin; native land; family (xxv). D'l'a blemish, stain, spot. "iDItt instruction; chastisement (XXVI). lyiu an appointed time or place, assembly (XXIII). X'litt fear, dread. ipnB"!iM a Morasthite, — inhabi- tant of Moresheth. TB^ia I. to give way, move, de- part (XII). ©TO II. to feel (by touching) : xil. Utiitt a seat, dwelling-place (XXVI), pi ni. rwa to die (XII); Hi. to kill; Ho. to be put to death ; Pilel tTfoi to kill, slay, nia death (211). nSTB c. an altar (XXIII). miTtt door-post. rriTia East, sun-rising (XXVI). nria to wipe out, destroy (XVI). Mna dancing (XXVI). T^niQ price. nbn'n disease (139, iv). nintt a camp (139, IV). notitt refuge (139, iv). Ijjri'a depth (XXVI). "iffia to-morrow. n'nriB'a on the T T T TS IT • morrow (215, 4). naTBTO const, {and dbs.) MlBlna (135, Ols. 1 ; XXVIII). riBtt a staff (139, IV). r\'&:i f. a bed (xxvm). nntStt custody, prison (XXVIII). itt who? (87,1). naia Micah. t!^h water (68, Obs. 2; 144). n):3"ia (2) /. a nurse (189; XXV). "iii!J''a plain, level country. 16 Vocabulary.— Hebrew and English. nstt stroke, plague, wound (XXVIII). nbBS'B Machpelah. -iStt to sell. biiBDtt a stumbling-block. Sba V. to be full of; Pi. fill, fill up (193). xba «4/'- full (111, Obs.; 126, &). sba fulness, what fills. tfsb^a messenger; angel (XXVI). tlDNbia work (prescribed), business, const. JiStiJu (135, Obs. 1). n>a /. a word, pi. W— , 'ji-t- '(141). nsibia kingdom, dominion. trarjb'a war, battle, const, tixrnb'a (135, O&s. 1; xxvm). (abto) P?. = Hi. deliver, rescue ; M. escape. ■pibr interpreter (138). •fbtt to rule, be king, begin to reign (109, Obs. b); Hi. ap- point as king. *fba (1) king. nsbtt queen, msbla kingdom, reign, royalty. riDbatt king- dom (135, Obs. 1 ; XXVIII). nsbtt Milcah. niniPba snuffers, tongs (140). yn manna. )'aprep. out of, from, because of; some of {Exercisen, Note a; XXX). nniS^ a rest (XXVlll). nrou a gift, present. J)3Tfl to withhold, restrain. iXyi'a candlestick, lamp -stand (XXVIII). niB3'a Manasseh. D^ tribute, servile work (21?). (DD'a) Ni. to melt away (XX).- 'IfcpM lamentation, mourning (XXIII). -iBp^ number (xxvi). ba5>5a a circular rampart formed of waggons and baggage (XXVI). ti?tt a little ; iewpl. Dit3?tt ; I3?ip3 nearly, almost, scarcely. b'l^tt upper garment, robe. b^tt to be faithless. byBM «rfy. above (215, 4). nbSM «s. 2. [brii] Pi. to lead ; protect, guard. nnj a river, i??. D'' . , mi (140, d). in|n the Euphrates. (115 to rest; Hi. rii?ln, imperf. ni?; &c., 6m^ «/so (203, Note) nijn, niai., nil^;, imperat. nan, partic. niJ'a, to set down, place, leave. n*i5 to slumber (XII), D^5 to flee (XII). vrfa fearful, terrible, dreadful. Iit; a Nazirite ; unpruned vine (XXVII). IT? a diadem, crown (xxiv). bri5 to inherit (201, Ohs. 2). nbn? possession, inheritance (XXV). bri3 (1) a mountain - torrent, stream; a river-bed, valley (XXIV). [DDi] M. oro to repent ; take ven- geance; Pi. ori? to comfort; Hithpa. to take vengeance. tin? a serpent (xxvil). niBrT? brass (135, 2). nn; to descend (201, Ohs. 2). Iniaj to stretch out, incline, turn aside, imperf. na^, apoc. 13;^, tD^I , jjar^. pass. 1*113? stretched out; Hi. nan, imperf. riBi apoc. tj;^, t:«'], imperat. B!!. VoOABULABY.— Hebrew and English. 19 yes to plant, imperf. J>ei (202, Ohs. 1). 1125 to keep (201, Ols. 2). ffiOi to desert, forsake (XVIII). 115 a lamp (used figuratively of progeny). 1335 honourable, glorious. [nss] Hi. nsiri to smite, imperf. i^T!> apoc. -f^, ■fi''], imperat. nSM to be smitten. [n?S] /R. Tisn to recognise; Hiihpa. to be recognised; to feign, simulate (XVIII). 135, , 1133 (25, 2) strange, foreign; a stranger. •JD3 to anoint; pour out a liba- tion = Pi. ![B5, Hi. ifisn (XVIII). SjOS (2) libation, drink-offer- ing. (pOi) to ascend (see Exerc. 53, Note g). byj he bolted (a door) : see 201, Ols. 2, &. byS (1) sandal, shoe, pi. di-7-, mi — ; on Dual, see 140, &. ■jU^j Naaman. niW5 youth (143, 2, c). I?? (1) a boy, lad; servant (xxiv). !Tn»S damsel (XXV), bs5 to fall (109, Ols. 2), mjjer/: bsi ; Hi. bifen to cause to fall, throw down, cast (XVIII). y&3 to break, dash in pieces; scatter = T>i. ©S3 (I) c. soul, life; self (135, Ohs. 3). aS3: see as"; (203, «). [bSS] /fi. bijtn to deliver, snatch (XVIII). is; to watch, keep, imperf. isf. (XVIII). m? : see ns^ (203, a). "ipj innocent (XXVII), pi. Di'»p3. Dj33 to revenge, take vengeance ; Ni. avenge self (XVIII), djjS (XXVII), fTaj?3 (XXVIII) ven- geance, revenge. 1)33 to bore, pierce; Pu. to be dug out (XVIII). tjps to lay snares for; Ni, to be caught (XVIII), (!!««3) Hi. ■mr) to deceive (Xix, XV). rWi to lend, borrow; m»3 a ere- ditor (XVI, XVIII), bffiS to pull off, slip off (109, OU. 2) : XVIII. irittT»3 breath, spirit (XXVIII), qi?'! (2) twilight (XXIV), pl»3 to kiss; to draw a bow; imperf. pte"! and pis'! (xvm). i(te3 to lift up, bear, carry; par- don; imperf. i^te'^, imperat.'&IS, inf. const. nsilJ, nsffib, &c. Ni. «te3 to be exalted (xvill, XV). Bb 20 To CABULAHY.— Hebrew and English. [ate:] Hi. to reach to, overtake (XIX). ^ns to be poured out, imperf. irr)"; (xvm). Ifn to give, make, appoint, de- liver, place (109, Ol)s. 2), im- perf. ';r)':, imperat. IR, "IIJ, nsn, inf. const, nn, suff. ■'nn (202, O&s. 3). tem to root out, expel (109, Ohs. 2; xvm). ■^ri; to break down, destroy (XVIII). plnj to tear away (xvili). n^p /. a measure, pi. D''i{p, du. 35p to turn one's self round, surround; Ni. to surround, gather round; be removed, transferred; ///. to cause to turn, cause to go round; re- move, transfer ; Poel to sur- round, go round (XX). ^1^0 around (101,2; 215,4). ^30 a thicket (132, 06s. 4). bao a burden (132, Ois. 4). 15?: to shut ; Pi. deliver up = Hi. Tho Sodom. nio assembly; counsel. D^D horse. naio a whirlwind. n^D to turn aside; Hi. I'lcn to set aside, put away (191, 8, Ols.). [mo] Hi. mipn, in>1S Pharaoh. fis to break down, break forth on; scatter, spread abroad. te'lB to spread out. liTCB to put off, strip (one's self); Hi. to strip (another). S10B to transgress. SVh (2) trans- gression (XXVI). fiB a morsel, piece, suff. "ipB (212). ntiS to be open-minded, simple, fooiish (XIV). iriB folly, sim- plicity (210). nriB to open, nns (2) opening, entrance, door (XXIV). IJiB to interpret. ISS flock (of sheep or goats), small cattle (143, 1, a). sas host, army, const, xas, pi- 132 splendour, beauty (210). lax to lay up, store up. p'lS to be just, righteous; Hi., Pi. to justify, pronounce righteous; Hithpa. to justify one's self (173, O&s.). p-ii (2), njs'iS righteousness (XXIV, (XXVIII). pi'ns righteous. in';);12 Zedekiah. D'^nn^! noon (143, e). [nis] Pi. nja to command (197). Dia a fast. nx« «?2bi (l) side, rib, pi. mostly tlXSh'l (XXIV). ^ISl V. to be thirsty. b?H2 thirsty, desert land (HI, Ohs.). T?? (2) a pair, yoke (XXIV). nm to sjjrout, bud. nm (2) a sprout, bud (XXIV). im (1) wool (XXIV). T?2 small, young (XXVII). 'jya Zoan, e. e. Tanis, in lower Egypt, ■pin to cry out (for help). HpSS, a cry (XXVIII). ■jiBS north. S'niBS frog, frogs. "1:2 adj., f. rrnia small, narrow, confined. IS, IS n. an adver- sary; distress. rTiS trouble, distress. Vocabulary.— Hebbew and Euglisb. 25 ni*11S Zeruiah. t I'lS balsam, balm (210). ?il'12i a leper, nsns leprosy (XXV). 511^ to purge, refine, purify. TnS to confine, persecute, be an adversary; to be in dis- tress (205, 3, 2, d). ins an enemy. V?^ to gather = Pi. ; Ni. to as- semble, be gathered. 15)? to bury. STliajs burial; se- pulchre, li^ (2) sepulchre, pL Di-^ and ni (XXIV). Tlj; to bow the head (205, 3, 2, c). nil? to kindle, be kindled, burn. [D'7^] H. to precede, anticipate, prevent. d'l|, D'l^ n. front; East; prep, before; O'l^B of old (215, 4). •jinnj? Kidron. min^ blackness, darkness. tSl'^ to be holy, sacred; Pi., Hi. to sanctify; to declare holy; Hithpa. to sanctify one's self. ©in)7 holy. 'O'lp holiness; sanctuary, holy place (133, 2). yaia' tj'i)? Kadesh-Barnea. [bfip] ^«. to assemble, convoke ; Ni. to assemble selves. !:!rj|3 congregation, assembly, mul- titude(xxvii). rthj: preacher, Ecclesiastes {page 95). (Tjjs to wait, expect = Pi. (XVI). bip voice, thunder, sound, pi. mi—. Dip to arise, stand ; Hi. to raise (Xll). niiaip height, stature. (Tap standing corn {see also 191,' 2). yip thorn, thorns. [yip] Hi. to awake (xii). |0p, 'j'Dp little, young, ;)?.t:i3Qp, /. nj^p (212, Note 3). yip harvest, summer (211). bbp to be diminished, despised, swift (205, 3, 2, &); iVi.tobe light, easy; to be despised; Pi. to curse; Hi. to lighten; to despise; Hithpalpel, to shake to and fro (XX). bp light, swift; a fleet horse (212). I rrap standing corn {see also 191, 2), [KDp] Pi. to be jealous, zealous (XIV). niSip zeal, jealousy, ' envy. nsp to purchase, buy (XVI). nip purchaser, owner, yp end, swyf. lap (212). nsp end, extremity ; whole, sum (XXVII ; 139, IV). aa^ (2) form, shape (xxiv). 26 YUOABULARY. — HEBREW AND EnGLISS. 5|SJ? to he angry (109, Obs. b); Hi. to provoke, qaj? (2) anger (XXIV). laj: to be short; IS]? to cut short, cut down, reap (111, 2). ii:2]p harvest (xxvil). S"!)? I. to call; proclaim; to read (xiv). S'^]5 II. to happen; to meet; inf. const, with prep. nX"!)?!? (123, 1, b), with suffixes ''riS'njjb, D2lnX'ip3b (96). a")]3 to draw near, approach, be near; Hi. bring, offer = Pi. ; Ni. draw near (167, Obs. *)• ^^^. (2) middle, midst; 'isii'ipa among us (108). ailj; near (XXVI). ^a*!)? an offer- ing (25, A, 1). a"!]; war, battle. STl^ to happen, befall (XVI). ln^"ip a city. X\^_ (1) horn (140, Obs. 2). y"!): to rend, tear. TBj? straw, chaff. (aiB];) ^2. to attend, give heed to. }^1B)5 to be hard, difficult; Hi. to harden ; to make difficult (200, a), n©!?, f ntop^ (66) hard, harsh, hardened; strong, heavy, sad, severe (XXVII, 139, IV). nW^ to bind; conspire; Hithpa. conspire. 11B^(1) conspiracy. (iBiaj?) Poel, to gather. nfj? (1) c. bow, pi. ni (XXIV). nsi to see; M. to be seen, ap- pear, seem; Hi. to cause to see, show (197). t^^ part. seeing; a seer. DS1 a wild bull. tBiSI head; first, beginning, chief (144). 'jiiBS'i adj. former, first. tT'TBi^'n n. a beginning. IS'i to increase, multiply (XX)^ an, fern, nsi (212), much, many, great; master, chief; adv. very (215, 2 and 3). an abundance, multitude (212). naan , ian a myriad, ten thous- and (XXIX). nan to be numerous, increase T T ' (197); Hi. to multiply, in- crease, do frequently (200). yan, yaS a quarter, fourth part (152,0Z)s.). i?ia'lfourth(152). njjan Rebekah. Tan to tremble, be angry at; Hi. cause to tremble, provoke. (^5"? to go about slandering, tread) ; Pi. spy out, explore. ban (1) foot (64, h; 140, a). S>an to terrify; tremble, san w. a moment; adv. instantly (215, 1). ©an to rage. Vocabulary. — Hebrew and Enqlisb. 27 V\'D to pursue (109, Ols. b). TtTi spirit, wind, breath,^/.niffi1. nil to be high; Hi. raise, lift up, exalt; Pilel exalt (Xll). [?1l] Hi. to shout, make a noise. yi-l to run (XII). nn lean, poor (139, IV). If-l prince, king (XXIII). ann wide, broad (XXVII), anS breadth (XXIV). nan"! liberty (XXVIII). nnn millstone (68). bni Kachel; a ewe. (Dm) Pi. to pity, compassionate (VII). Qmn «<^'. compassion- ate. nri=l (1) womb (XXIV; 136, b). yrh to wash (the body). pm to be distant, far off; ffi. to remove (see also 200, b; 125, 5). pirri distant. 311 and ail i'. to contend; dis- pute; plead a cause forensic- ally; perf. a"!, naS a«. to throw, shoot. T T ' DttT to tread down, trample. (T153I carelessness; deceit. ©■an reptile, reptiles. 15'n to shout, cry aloud = JP?., Hi. (205, 3, 2). ns'l a cry (of joy or sorrow). 5"! «<(;■. evil, bad, fern. nS"! (66, 06s. 6). yn n. evil. S"! a friend, neighbour (12, 2). a?"i V. to be hungry. a?'n adj. hungry (XXVII). a^l n. hun- ger, famine (XXVII). ■'t\'T) '"• *° ^^^^ (^ flock), pasture (XVI). n?h a shepherd (p. 40, foot-note 1). n»1 n. evil, wickedness. 'jSS'i to be green (175, 2). 'jjy'n acf;". green. yyi to make a noise; be evil, sad ; Hi. do evil, act wickedly (205, 3, 2). ©51 to tremble, be shaken; crash. wS noise, earth- quake (XXIV). NS'i to heal = m. (XIV). «&■-! a physician. nsi to sink, decline, fall down T T ' ' Hi. to let down, desist ; let off, let go; imperf. and imperat. 28 Vocabulary.— Hebrew AND English. apoc. ^'■V), v|nn (197, Obs. 1). nan adj. weak, feeble (139, iv).' y} partic. running, a runner. t^Ty to be pleased with, de- lighted (XVI). 'jisn good pleasure (xxvi). nsn to kill, murder (VHI). p"! only. np'n to dance, leap. SJ?"! to beat flat, spread out. yip'n firmament. tn poor. S'lB'i to be wicked, act wickedly; Hi. to pronounce guilty, con- demn (VIII). y©"! guilty, wick- ed. S>T»n (2), nyisn unright- eousness (XXIV, XXV). MBT (2) a net. yate, J>ate to be full, filled with, satisfied with (vill). nsaic fulness, satisfaction (xxv). IXitO a field {poetic form, i jiD), i)/. nilte (139, IV). nte a sheep, goat (143, 1, d). DCiB to hate, persecute. ItjiB adversary (72, 1). a'^te, nai© hoary hair, old age. T\tftO meditation. Dite, QiilS to put, set, place, make ; imp erf. W^^ (XII). telte, teito to rejoice, be glad (Xll). (b^te) //i. to be prudent, wise; attend to, understand (125, 5). baiB (2) intelligence. ISte n. reward (XXVIII). nttbiri outer garment (XXV). bsToiri left (side), north. biKlsiBn Hi. to turn to the left (175, 5). frate to rejoice; Pi. to gladden (VIII). ntnili gladness, re- joicing (XXV), nbttte outer garment (XXV). Site to hate = Pi. (Xiv). Wte he-goat (XXVII). 'iiyia Seir. 1»te, myte hair (xxvil, XXV). nni^fe barley (143, 3). nsto lip, language (XXVIII). pte sackcloth, suff. ipte (212). lis prince, commander, nite princess; Sarah. I'l'iiB remnant (escaped from a general destruction). tl'nte to burn; make bricks. ns'lte burning (XXVIII). jitei? joy. bisto Saul. biSTB Sheol (the unseen world), the grave. bsia to ask (vn). nbsw a peti- tion, request (XXVlil). Vocabulary. — Hebrew and English. 29 (into) Hi. to leave remaining; M. to remain, be left ("Vll). "iXia, rii"lNia remnant, rest, xa© Sheba. T : SiaiB a week; pl.'D''-^, ni (xxvi). Win© an oath. aa© a tribe; staff, rod (xxiv), (yati) M. to swear; /^2. cause to swear (VllI). yn© seven (xxix). i^^iaui seventh (152). laiB to break; to buy corn; Pi. break, smash in pieces. "intC (2) destruction, terror (XXIV). na® sabbath; rest. ^10 teat, breast, du. Qi.l©. TlTB to oppress, destroy, lay waste (XX). I'qiB Almighty. mytO iniquity; falsehood; vanity. aw to return, go back ; Hi. bring back, restore (see construc- tions on p. 1G3), uit) a whip. ■i^aw Shunammite. -iSiffi a trumpet, pi. ni (XXVi). piW leg (140). pTO street. liilj ox, oxen. ^nfe w. a bribe, gift (XXIV). (nno) to lie down; Hilhpalel nwriffin (173, 3) to worship. Bn© to slay (Vll;. (iniS) n. to seek, — a poetic word. "in© black (XXVI). [niniB] ffi. to destroy, act wick- edly; Ho. to be corrupt (Vll). nil© pit; grave. 11©, nni© song. 33© to lie down, lie; Hi. to lay down, prostrate. n?© to forget (VIH). bb© to be bereaved (111, 2); Pi. to bereave. [d?©] ///. to rise early, go early (to a place): 125, 5; 200, c. D5© shoulder (suff". ipS©); She- chem. ■J3© to dwell; Pi. to place, set. 15© inhabitant, neighbour (XXVIl). na© to be drunk. 13© strong drink (XXVll). ab© snow (XXIV). bib© n. jjeace, health; adj. safe (XXVI). Dlb© peaceable (XXVI). nb© to send, put forth, let go (109, Obs. b) = Pi. (vm). n'b© Shiloah. inb© a table, pi. ni (xxvi). [ijb©] /?«'. to cast, throw. bb© to spoil, despoil (205, 3, 2). bb© spoil, booty (XXVll). nb© to be safe, finished; Pi. to 30 YocABVLARY.— Hebrew and English. finish, complete ; perform ; recompense, repay. nb'biB Solomon. S|bTB to draw out, draw off. ffiblB three (XXIX). iiaibo third (152). T&ibi» third; a captain. DIB a name, pi. ni (XXIII). DW there: thither. riBllJ thither T ' T T (209, c). Dffip thence. ['Jttffi] Hi. to destroy; ISi. to be destroyed. nSffi desolation; astonishment. bsj^ais Samuel. ntsiaUJ release, remission. D";^© heaven, heavens(68,0&s.2). Qttllj to be astonished; be de- solate, laid waste (205, 3, 2, d); Ni. to be desolate, de- stroyed. n^ttlB desolation (XXVIII). TS30 «TB to look, regard. [l?l?] -^*- to lean, recline. 1?© c. gate (XXIV). Diyw© delight (143, 2, «). nrjS© handmaid (XXV). ■BE© to judge (109, 01)s. b); Ni. to contend, litigate. *fS© to pour out; -fB© partic. shedding. bs© to be low ; Hi. to be humble, to cast down (200, c). Ip© to watch. [iijj©] iTJ. cause to drink, give to drink. ::)5© to be quiet, at rest. bj;© to weigh, weigh out. bj?© (2) a shekel (xxiv). 1j5TS5 (2) falsehood, untruth (XXIV). ©•}'© a root (133, 2; 175, 1). [Pi"!©] H. to minister, attend serve (VII). VocABULABY.— Hebrew and Enolisb. 31 tllO, six (XXIX). Its© sixth (152). iflBia Sheshak, i. e. Babylon. nnw to drink (197, 06s. 2; cf. ni50). nJSFi fig; fig-tree; pi. Qi-^ (67, Ols. 1). isn form, shape (137, Ols.). nan ark, chest. flXian produce, profit. ban the world (as inhabited). 13PI straw. inn emptiness (136, c, O&s.). n^tni^ hymn, psalm; theme of praise, pi. Di-;- (66, 06s. 1). ■f^lfj cons^. *jin middle, midst (211). nnain, nriDin (l) reproof, re- buke, correction. nayin abomination (XXVlll). iIfi turtle-dove. iTlin law. n^nPl beginning. nsriFi prayer, supplication. D^MSriP! (and ni — ) supplica- tions. JirtP) prep, under, instead of, in return for (103, 3); conj. be- cause (219). nnna adv. be- neath, below (108; 214,4). ttjilin new wine, must. Tbbf\ dark purple (XXV). on adj. upright (morally), oh (212), nsn integrity, inno- cence. MSIttFi appearance, form. TittFi continually. O'lrn adj. perfect (xxvil), •fan to take hold of, support. DtiPl to complete, finish; be complete, finished, consum- ed ; Ni. to be consumed (XX). iTai5Pl slumber. nsisri a wave-offering. n^Pi to err; part. n?h erring (p. 40, foot note 1): XVI. iTiSSDl?, const, {and also abs.) rinsBI? glory, splendour (135, 06s. 1). n>sn prayer. tesn to lay hold of, take, seize ; handle, wield. tTipJFi expectation. yjjri to smite, strike; blow (with a trumpet). ntt'^Sn deep sleep. TlSliri a shout, tumult, trum- pet-blast. nj>i|lBFl salvation. Stoh nine (XXIX). is^lBFi ninth. VOCABULARY, ENGLISH AND HEBREW. Able, to be bb^ (123, 1; p. 155). Abomination nasin (XXVIII). Above: see 108 and 215, 4. Abundance ah (212). According to 3 (103). Account (on) of b?, 'j»'ab. Act n. b?B. Add, to £|D';, imperf. Si'^pi'' (i. e. Hiphil)./ Adultery DESIST (143, 2) : to com- mit adultery fiS5, v|X3. Adversary "is: to be an adver- sary TIS. Advise, to '^'S\ Afflict, oppress ')»'rib; afflicted 155? , 155?; affliction, distress i?y (210). Afraid S'T^, Tin; to be afraid K-ii, in&, mnn. After, prep, ins, i"!)!!?: (101, 2) : after that cow/. (219). Afterwards 'J?"'^"]ni?. Again liy: see also pp. 157, 163. Age, advanced life tK^^ (143, 2) Ah! ns, nns?. Aid: see help. Alas ! lin. Alive in. All bb (49, 1). Almighty I'liB. Alone, only nab (108), I'la (208- 7). Also Da, qj?, V Altar tp^rc (XXffl). Ambush a^s, anX53. Amen l^s. And "1 (69). Angel ^Kb'a. Anger nun, B»f (1), qs^ (2), Tiin, iqx (212, Note, 2). Angry, to be j:|2)?, D?3, qSif, WT; to show one's self angry Anoint, to maia, IfOj: anointed one niffltt. Another nns. Vocabulary.— English and Hebrew. 33 Answer, to TOS {ace. of person). Anticipate, to D'np. Anything nsisa. Appearance nsitt, rtj^ikfi («. e. image, form). Appoint (to an office) ini; appoint (a time or place) ^?^, (X). Approach, to a'np, [©a;] XVIII. Arise, to" Dip (xil). Ark (of Noah, or Moses) naPi; Ark (of the covenant) "fmn. Arm ?2. ?i"iT mostly fern. ; jj/. Di — and ni — . Army myi, const, xas, pi. nixas. Around: see 101, 2; 108; 215, 4. Arrow fO (212). As 3 (102), IWS?. Ascend, to nby. Ashamed, to be tj^ia. Ashes IBk. Ask, to bxo, i»;5a. Asleep lia; (xxvii). Ass ^ian; wild ass xil; young ass l^y. Assemble, to: see convoke. Assembly I'Si'a, nn?, bnp, lib. Assyria l^iffiSt. Astonished, to be a»» (205,3,2). Atone for, to "l£3 (169, 2). Attend (?. e. give heed), to aiffipn ; attend («. e. wait on) Avenge, to bsa; avenge self, Ni. of on? or 0/" Dp5 (XIX), Awake, to f p^ (189),li?r!, f ipn. Babylon baa. Back n. 13, 13; a(?y. lins; back- ward tT'Sinx. Bad y-i, /"m. rvsn. Balance ^'^iivfa (140, &). Balak pba. Balm, balsam I'lS (210). Band, troop l>na. Bar, bolt n. ni'iS. Barley tTlbW (143, 3). Basin, bowl qo; suff. ij5p.(212). Basket SJU (1), bp (212). Battle flttnba (135, Ohs. 1). Be, become n;iri (196, 7\^oife; 198). Bear, to (carry) sto (see Foc«- iulary I.); (bring forth) "ib^ (188, III, b). Beast trana (xxviii),,n*r!. Beautiful T\t1 (xxvil); beauty ■'B':, "^aar (2io). Because 13 (see afco 219) ; be- cause of b? (101, 2), niaya, bbaa (108). Become^ to : see 196, Note. Bed SIM (XXVIII). te'i? (1) XXIV. Befall, to rrip (XVI). Before, pre^?. ''SSb, 'll.J, D'lp (90 ff., 108) ; conj. D-lUa (117, 7); adv. Qi3Sb (215, 4). 34 VoGABULAMY.— English and Hebrew. Begin, to bnn (p. 186); begin- ning n. ni«s"i, rtnn. Behind, prep, ins, I'ins (101); ■r Behold, to nxn (XVI; 197, and 0&S.2); behold! see! ^T;,, nan (XXX; 129), nsi,. Believe, to: see Mn: (1) (XXIV). Breadth ann (XXIV). Break, to iai», ysj (xvni); to break down f '16 , 'pns (XVIII). Breast, teat 1©. Breath nM«5 (xxvill), n^i (12, 2). Bribe n. injzj (XXIV). Brick nsab (67, O&s. 1); to make bricks ^ab (109, Ohs. c). Bridle an^ (2) XXIV. Bring, to ail.jsn , a"!]? (vn) ; to Vooabulaby.—JSnolisb and Hebrew. 35 bring in »iain; to bring near TBian (XIX); to bring out S'lSin; to bring down Ti'i'in (X); to bring up nbyn. Broad am (XXVII), Broken, to be: see break Brother nsf (144). Build, to nsa (XVI). Bull IB, bj? (XXIV); wildbullntt'l. Burden bao (132, Obs. 4), stett. Burial nniajs. Burn Si-ite, 1?a (VTl), ms (203, «) ; burn (of anger) mn (227). Burning, n. nsnte (XXVIII). Burnt-offering nbi:? (XXVIII) Bury, to IS)?. Bush njD. Business, work nssbia (const. nass'a, 135, 06s. i). But ifs, obis, y, (after a nega- tive) ns 1?, "'3 (seei>. 72). Buy, to n;)? (XVI); buyer n'p (93,3).'' Cake (round) 133 (143, 4) ; (un- leavened) nstt (xxvin); -iffib. Calamity t'^X. ■ Caldron lip. Calf bi? m. (XXIV) ; nba» /. (XXV). Call, to sen)? (XIV). Camp, n, nSTO (p. 40, foot-note 1;81,&;'93, 3). Can (to be able), bbj (lU, 3). Canaan 1533; Canaanite ''i!?33. Canal (of the Nile) lit"'. Candlestick, lamp-stand iTibtt. Capture, to "lab. Carcase njB (2) XXIV, nbas (XXVIII). Carry, to stoi (see Vocabulary!). Carve, to bcfi, pjjn (xx). Cast (throw), to if^^ion, nyi, nnin (XVI ; X) ; to cast down, throw down b^sn (XVIII). Cast off, to TOT. Catch: see capture. Cattlenjja (XXVII), nwna (xxvin), n5j?'0 (81, b; 93, 3): see aiso fat cattle. Cave mStt (XXVIII), -lin. Cease, to b'irt (Vl; 182, Obs. 2). Chaff TBI?. Chaldeans d'l'nto. Change, to 5fBn (182, Obs. 2), (istB (XVI); change of gar- ments ri&ibri. Charge n. tin^tia (1) xxv. Chariot nas'itt (135, Obs. 1), a3n(2)-"" Chastise, to iBi, n'^aifi (x; VIII). Chastisement nriaiW (xxviil). Cheek-bone inb (210). Cherub a^13. Chest, ark Tins (xxvi). Child ibj (1, 2)' XXV, bbiy (XXVI) bbi:? (xxiii). Cc 36 Vocabulary. — Enoliss and Hebrew. Childless il.'^'i?. Choose, to ina; chosen one, elect nina. Circumcise, to hvti (Xll). Cistern li3, pi. ni (67, Ohs.l). City T'? (144), iT^lp (poetie). Clay l^aH (XXV). Clean ««//. ^lini: 3 (xvi), d>t», DttS (XX); to be completed, finished nVs, QttPl. T T ' - T Conceal, to "ino. ' - T Concerning, bv (101, 2). Condemn, to ^''tpin (Vili). Conduct (lead),: to ^ibin (x). Confidence naa (XXV), ']inB3 (XXVI). Confine, to IS? (VI). Confounded, to be nrin (205, 3, 2). Congregation br\p^ (xxvll), rTiS (XXVIII). Constantly, continually TttPi. Constrain, to pitnn (vi). Consult together, to l^SiD (X). Consume, to bssi , 1?a (Vll). Contain, to bsbs {from bl3: 175, 4). Contempt Tia. Contend together, to t36T»3 (167, 3). Contend at law, to a^l. (XU). Content, to be jjisin (X). Continually: see constantly. Controversy a"!"!. Converse, to 15*1? (167, 3). Convince, convict niain (VlIl ; X). Convoke, to bifT^pfn; to be con- voked Isrnp.S. Cook, to nB« (186); cook n. HEis, natj. Vocabulary.— Engliss and Hebrew. 37 Copy (of a book) nstftt (81, 6; 93, 3). Coriander seed ia. Corn "iW (XXVIi), ia; standing corn nap. Corner nsB (xxvili). Correct (chastise), to 1S^. Counsel, to f»; (X): Counsel n. natinia (135, 06s. i), nio, nsy (xxvm). Count, to ISD. ' - T Countryy-\8« (l)XXV; 135, Obs.3. Court n. isn (xxvil). Covenant n. IT'lja. Cover, to nB3 (XVI), tj^b. Cow (Tia (xxviii). Create, to S'la (xiv). Cross over, to lay (vi). Crown, diadem n'n'Qy (135, Obs. 1), It? (XXV). Cruel, fierce ''IJpS. Cry n. njjST, nj5»S, nj^K!, US'] (XXVIU) ; to cry pyj, p?s (vil), S^ij (XIV). Cubit nm (XXVIII; 68). Cup Di3, ?''a? (XXVII). Curse n. nbij (XXVIII) ; to curse TiS (205, 3, 2), b>p, ifia (VII). Curtain nyili. Custody n^M (XXVIII), ti-\hia)2 (1) XXV. Cut, to ti'iri, tTll; to cut down (reap) isj?; to cut down (destroy) yia. Cymbals D'jnbar (140, &). Damsel rrnW (xxv). Dance, to Tp'n, 131.? (175, 4), Wn (205, 3, 2) J dancing n. T Darkness Iftah :(XXV), milp; tMck darkness bsiS?. Dash in pieces, to yB3 (XVill). Daughter m (144). David ll.'T. Day dii (144); by id'ay utii (215, 5). Dead mxj; dead body, corpse ■na| (2) XXV, nba5 (xxvm). Deaf «in (XXIII; 26, 3). Dear adj. 1^'; (XXVII); to be dear 1):'; (188, in. a). Death ni^ (211); to put to death lniBr!-(xii). Deceit maltt, n'^tn. Deceive, to 153, Stsn (XIX). Decline (sink), to nsi (XVI). Decree, to ys;i (188, HI. a), pjjin (175,1). Deed ntoyia (p. 40, foot note 1 ; 81, &; 93, 3), b^f Deep adj.: pitt?. Deep (sea) DinPl. /S'ee «?so 200, a. Delay, to {Tittn^nin jirH* (vi, vii). 38 Vocabulary.— English and Hebrew. Delight «. fan (XXV), "itth (2), CyOJlB (143, 2, a); to de- light (take pleasure) ftn (VI), r^^^ (xvi). Deliver (rescue), to Pi. or Hi. of ubtt or tabs; -p^n, b^an (xix). Deliver up, to T^apn. Depart, to -fbn (sec Vocab. I). Derision a?5 (XXIV). Desert, to ©OS (XIX), ajy (vi): Desert n. lana (XXVI), nan?. Desire, to Ittn (182, O&s. 2), fna, fsrii Desire «. !T,s. Desist, to b'ln (182, 06*. 2), riDin (XVII). Desolate, to be S'nn (vi), DttlD (205, 3, 2). Desolation n^'atJ (XXVIII), MB©, nain (xxv). Despise, to e^tt, fW (vii), m (XII), nja, b|;n (xxi); to be despised bpj (xx). Destroy, to na», T'tecn, PiintJn, a''iriri, Din, T'n© (XX). Destruction Tiijr, naio (2), lliax. Determine (decree), to ')'?^, (purpose, plan) ai»n. Devoted thing D^n (XXIV). Devour, to bst} (186). Dew bt? (212). Die, to rm (XII), yia. Dimension ri'^tt. Disease ibn (210), nbritt; dis- eased, sick nbh (p. 40, foot- note 1 ; 81, &). Dispute n. a^n; to dispute to- gether nsiD (X). Distant pirrn ; to be distant pnn. Distress n. (Tia, bljy, i5» (210); to be in distress Tns (205, 3, 2). Divide, to T'lsn, b^nari. Do (work), to nto, b?B; to do good (or evil) to baa. Dog ab| (1) ; dog-fly any. Door nb^ (140, b); doorway nriB (XXIV) ; door-post PlrtTc. Double 0']5s3 (140). Dove n;'ii ; turtle-dove Tin. Draw (pull), to -fiB^a; to draw near ail?, TiJM (XVIIl) ; to draw off, draw out 5)^©, ybn. Dreadful NniD. Dream n. Dibn; to dream Qbn. Dried up, to be ann (Vl). Drink, to nntj; to cause to drink njJTBln; strong drink Drive out, to tsna = Pe.; to drive away tpj (XVIII). Droop, to bttS = Pu?ff?. Drunk, to be latj. Dry, to be ©a; ; dry land n©ax Dumb abst (XXIII) ; to be dumb, silent DOT (205, 3, 2). Dust n. isy (cf. 170, Obs. 2). VOCABVLARY. — ENGLISH AND HEBREW. 39 Dwell, to a©'!, lr«; dwelling Dying Pia. Ear ITii (64, &; 140, «). Earth pk(l). Earthquake ©y^ (XXIV), East wi^, rriitt. Eat, to i>Di{ (185). Egypt D'^.nS'O. Egyptian '''iS'a. Eight nsbflj (XXIX); eighth ''3''1Q«. Elder, eldest ijjT (XXVll), biia, (first born) "rtba. Empty, a) ; to do evil 5>'l!l. Exalt, to O'lin, rt'»3jn. Except nbir (lOO). Excite (stir up), to ^D3C(p.l35). Expect (wait), to nij? ; expecta- ■ tion fTipn. Expel, to tJW (XVlll), ©■n| = />/. Expire, to Sia. : Explore, to bai.. Exult (rejoice), to b''3. Eye liy (64,6; 211). Face D''56 (143, 2, a). Fade (fail), to baj, imperf. bs'i (xvm). , Faint arf/. !:|:;» (XXVII). Faithful, trusty ittss; faithful- . ness nsilas ; to befaithlessbifa. Fall, to bM (xviii). Falsehood nijig (2), ajS, Slti. Family C|bk (1), nnBffla (135, Obs. 1). Famine a5>1. T T Far off adj. pinn ; to be far off pn"! : see also 215, 4. Far be itl nbibn (196, c). Fast n. DiS. Fasten, to nps ; to fasten a door b?5 (201, Obs. 2). 40 T ocabulamy.—JSngliss and Hebrew. Fat n. abn (2), yav (1); fat adj. ■jttTB; fat cattle nx'^'ia, Xilti. Father ax (144); father-in-law on (144). Fatigued, to be ti^'i (xxvii). Favour n. noh (1), 'jn (212). Fear n. n^^], Tnfe, liati; to fear, be afraid s'31, ins; fearful S'llS.- Feast, a religious festival jn (212); to celebrate a religious festival Mrt (205,; 3, 2). Feeble n&'n (139, IV; 66). Feel (by touching), to ©^^(Xll). Feign, to 13?riln. Field STlte (139, 4). Fig, fig-tree njXPl pL 'O^—r- Fight, to onb? (167, 3), Fill up, to siti (XIV). Find, to StSSa (XIV). Finish (complete), to OWP; nbs;, to be finished nbw, nbs, DHFi (205, 3, 2), Fire n. iB!* (212) c; to set on fire ns'; (203, «); firebrand IIS. Firmament yif:"i. First limi.; first-born Tba. Fish n. sn, co//. nw. T ' T T Five ©an (XXIX); fifth iti'^'an. Flame, to pb'^. Flask iffi. Flee, to rria, 'Tji, 0*0 (xii). Flesh lica (XXVII). Flint oi5:bn. Flock w. IsiSJ, Tl? (XXIV). Flour nbS. Folly nb^s (1), "'na (210). Food bD», nbDK (43, O&s. 2), 0^5 (1). Fool, foolish bas, bil8, b'«Si. Foot ba-) (1): see 64, b.; 140, a. For, because, conj. 13; for, prep. b, (in behalf of) lya, (instead of) nrtn, (in return for) 3- Foreign ilM. Foreskin nb"!* (XXV). Forest 1?^ W")". Forget, to n?TB. Forgive, to nbo, «te; (see Foca- hulary I), nSS. Form «. 1:2^, isnn, ni^ittft; to form, shape is''. Former flrf;'.: see first. Formerly D-iSBb (215, 4). Forsake, to aty, tim (XVIII). Fortress IStt, nistt. Found (lay a foundation), to - T Fountain, spring ^-y, nba, ^s^^. Four yaiS (XXIX), fourth ■>5-'iai. Fowler 'i»|;1\ Fowls co«. Sjiy. Frail bin (XXVI). Free ifflen. Freewill offering naii-(xxviii). Friend ans, q^bs, lil, yi. Vocabulary.— Enqliss AND Hebrew. 41 Frog ?'nl&s. From iti; from the presence of W'q, nstt (108, c). Front on^ ; in front D':i|'a, DiSBI? (p. 205, footnote 1). Fruit i>it3 (210); to be fruitful n-nB (XVI). Full «n (VI). Give, to ins (202, Ots. 3). Glad, to be nttte, fefite, te''te(XIl); gladness nnttte (XXV). Glory n. TOS (xxvii), in"}&Bri (1 ), n1^^5;togloryinbl^^l; glorious Go (depart), to *ybn (see Voca- lulary I); to go down T\'2 (188, III., 6) ; to go up, .ascend nby (195, Ohs. 3); to go out, go forth SSi'j {see Vocal). I); to go in, enter sia {see Vocah. I). Goat T», (he-goat) Tyte (XXVll). God iss, rtibs i?/. D'lrtbs (143, 2, te (XXVIi); hoary hair Half isn (210). Haud i;i (140, 06s. 2), tp^ (212). Handle (wield), to teDB. Handmaid STCS (144), nns© (XXV). Happen, to S-nji, rrig (199, 1. 2), n;n (198). Happiness; see 137, Note 1. Harlot njiT. Harvest (of fruit) f^^; grain harvest nis)? (XXVll). Haste, to TSn , -intt (Vll ; 200,c,d). Hate, to Site (xiv), onto. Head osn (144). Heal, to 8&n (XIV); health DibiB (XXVI). Heap (of stones) ba (212). ■ Hear (hearken), to 5>ttT», 'ji'fxn (VI). Heart aab (XXVll), ab (212), both with pi. m'. Heaven D'l^lB (68, O&s. 2). Heavy adj.^ to be heavy, v. laa (111, 06s.). Hebrew iia». Heed, to give a'^ttj^fi; to take heed to one's self '\'ai'i. Heifer nnB, nbay (XXV). Height (stature) rtaJi (XXIV), nttip, (a high place) Dina, Help'ra. IW (XXIV), rTiTS (XXV); to help Ity. Herd -nj^a. Here nfe, nta (215, 8); here is (behold) nsn (XXX). Hero liaa. Hew, to bos, asn. Hide, to "inD, ina (VII), ^gq, nNb. High on, naa (XXVII); to be high Din (XII), riaa (194, 2) : high place (for idolatrous worship) nioa, (elevated spot) nrin; Most High (God) ]'iiby. Hill nyaa (xxv). Hither D'bn, nsfl. Hold, to p'^Tnn; to take hold Hole nin. Holy i»in]3 (XXVI); to be holy tjlj?; holiness iBnp; holy place, sanctuary ti^JJM, TB"])? (133, 2). Honest ']3. ; Honey tJaS; Honour w. niaa (XXVI), inn; to honour naa; honoured, ho- nourable, glorious naa?. Hook, ring m. Hope, expectation nipFi. Vocabulary.— English and Hebrew. 43 Horn i"!^ (1): see 140, Obs. 2, Horse DID. Host, army SDS (const, sas; pi. niS32, 67, Obs. 1). Hot, to be Dttri (205, 3, 2). House nV? (144)< How? tyix, n3i» (see also p. 227, footnote 2), how! Htt (87,2); how long? iti'a-i?, n;s«-i?. Howl, to b'^b'^n (189). Hundred nstt (XXIX). ; Hunger a:?7 (XXVII); hungry adj., to be hungry v. a»n (111, 06s.). Hurry, to inip (VII). Husband ttjis (144). Idol: S(?e image. If C«, lb (220), 13 ; if not sb DS, ibilb (220,; &), "ibiiSC. Image, idol bOB (/>^i always n-'bips), bibs. Imprison, to IDS. Incense fishb. Incision n^l'ia. T t Incite, to: n''Cn (203, i\^o/e). Incline, to riM (see FocaS. I). Increase (become numerous), to ain (XX). Indignation D?t (XXIV). Inhabit, to 3W; (188, III. b); inhabitant 3«\ I?© (XXVIl). Inherit, to bnj (201, -06s. 2); inheritance nbrij (xxv). Iniquity S-ffiB (XXIV), yffln, bVy, li? (XXVI), ^5fe (211), si«.' Innocent ip5 (XXVll), Instant, moment WT (215, 1). Instead of nnn (101, 3). Instruct, to Tab, nnin (X, XV.); instruction IDIti, 11)35. Instrument ibs (144). Integrity nh (212), rTEft. Intelligence b?6 (xxiv). Intercede, to b^fefin. Interpret, to ins; interpreter irife; pbiQ (138). Intestines w^f^a (143, 2). Iron bna. Jawbone inb (210). Jealousy ns?)?. Jew, Jewish i'lin\ Judge n.'atW (XXIII); to judge qe;^, b|s; judgment uBiC'a (XXVI), D?Q (XXIV). Just pi'ns, nto;: (XXVII); to be just, righteous pTs; to just- ify pivjfn, p^?. Keep, to Tac, 1X5, ipj (xviii). Eid i-ia (210). Kill, to j"\n, mi, tr^Kn, ntria (XII,. XIII). 44 Vocabulary.— Engliss and Hebrew. Kind (species) n. nrififflu (135, Obs. 1), BtettM. Kindle, to niJin (203, a). King -fba (XXIV); to make king Sfibttn ; kingdom nsiblQ, MIDblQ (32, 2), nsbM (135, Obs. 1). Kneading-trough ri'lS©53 (1) XXIV. Knee ;r'i| (140, a xxv); to kneel know, to »n; (188,111.6); know- ledge n??i (xxiv) ; nj55. Labour «. bay: (xxvii), jij"!; to labour lay. - T Lamb tens, /««. ntei3 «K«, If^^yva, ite; to lead Leaf (of a plant) n^S (139, IV). Lean, poor nn (139, iv). Lean on, to )ym (167, 2). Learn, to Tab. Leave (forsake), to aty, ©t:; (xvin); to leave remaining 'I'^sten, T^riin (x). Left (side) bSTaJB; left (remain- ing) ini: (X), istes. Leg pite. Length ?f-)S (XXIV). Leper yiiK, ynira ; leprosy nyns (XXV). Lest -]E (117, 7). Let down, to nfi'iri (XVI). Letter, epistle rCjlvt (XXV). Levite i^jlb. Liar ap (XXIII). Libation, drink offering -fpi (2) (XXIV); to make a libation tfOJ (XVIII). Lick (lap with the tongue), to ppb "(205, 3, 2). Lie, falsehood -ipo (2), aT3i.KW. Lie down, to aailJ. Life n'l^n (143, 2,,c), ©83 (135, Obs. 3). Lift up (raise), to cnn (xu). Light n. ^im. Light, swift bp (212); to be light, swift bbp.(XX; 205, 3, 2); to lighten, make light bpn (XX). Like, to be iTJS'n; to liken, com- pare bitean, STEn; likeness mm. Vocabulary.— EX9LISH and Hebrew. 45 Linen '13. Linger: see delaj\ Lion i-nK (210), n::ix; young lion TSS). Lip nBto.(i40; xxvm). Listen yiao (viii), yiim. Little n. and adj. 'D?'a, pi dia?B; fta)?, td;^ (212, i\'o/e 3), 'T'ys (xxvji).. Live, to injrj (198) ; living adj. in, pi. Q''*;n {see Exercise 16, Note h). Lol in, nsn (106, xxx). Loins 131?™ (140). Long- at?/', ij^s (139, Obs.. 1); to belong, ^j'lS, ^i-^sn (172, 3); how long? n:K-n?, •'tirri?. Look, to. tjiari (xvjii), rry©. Lord I'i'i!* (143, 2, d; page 63, footnote 2), b?3 (143, 2, ^). Lot b'nia (xxvj), pbh .(xxiv). Love n. nan«., ^ii; talove an« (186). Lying, deceitful atb (xxui).. Magnify, to b^S. Maid; maiden nttby^xxv.); maid- sfirvant nr« (144), nnsw (XXV). Majesty niKa, nin. Make, to b:>s, nfey; to make (= form) '\iy, to make (a covenant) tT\'2 ; to make (= appoint) in: (202, Obs.d); Maker, making ni»:? (93, 3). Male IDt (xxvil). Man d'lij (L. homo, a general term including male and fe- male, mankind ; man in con- trast with other beings) ; tl'^s. (144; an individual; man in contrast with woman); ffiiss (man as frail, perishing); 133 (mighty man); "i»3, "mz a young man. Manna 1^3. Many IT (212). Marriage, to give in inn. Master n.: see lord. Matter, thing ^n^ (xxvil). Measure, to ina (20&, 3, 2): n. measure (of extent) n^, (of capacity) nso. Meditation nn''te. Meek My (XXVII). Meet, to »1)? ; to meet by ap- -poiintment l^ij (X). Melt away, to M. of ODTa or p!?B (XX). Memorial linsT (xxvi). Mention, to niSTn. Mercy icb (1) xxiv, nsntn. Messenger ^fsbti, T^aia (xix). Middle, midstaip (2), sfin (211). Mighty one 1135. 4(5 Vocabulary.— English and Hebrew. Minister (serve), to nnio (VII); minister, attendant mUJa. Mist, vapour *is. Mistress rTiSa (XXV). Mocker, scofifer yb. Moment yih (215, 1). Money ^ci (1), XXlV. Month «nn (XXIV). Monument, pillar 'jTJi. Morning i;:a (xxiv). Morrow intt, rr^ritt (215, 4). Morsel, piece ns (212). Moses m»13. Mother US, pi. rrics. Mountain in (71, II. 3, and Note; 212). Mourn, to bas = Hithpa., 1BD; mourning n. bax (xxiv), IBp^ (XXIII). Mouth ne (144), ^n (212, Kote2). Move (give way), to trm (xil). Much an (212); much more, much less 13 5|S (219). Multiply (increase), to 251 (XX); multitude pan (XXVI); ah (212). Murder, to nsi. ' - T Name n. Dl», pi. ni (XXIII). Narrow, «(fy. is. Nation lia. Native niT« ; native land tHSro (XXV). Nature, kind nBTBa (xxvi). Nazirite "iitt. Near a (XXIV), -iS^iS «^2rf7>/. (143,2, h). Negligence n^ttl. Neighbour ?-), }'sa (XXVII). Neither conj. tibl, sb 05 (219). Net Din (XXIV), iniDi (2), ns. Nevertheless Dbis. New ©in (XXVII). Night b:5 (212), nb-;? (209, c). Nile ii5\ Nine S^on (XXIX); ninth i»''»Pl. No, not 8b, b« (121), ■j-'« (106; XXX); that ... not {i. e. lest) -]B; not yet Diia (117, 7); no one, nothing {see 213, VI). Noise tjyi;i to make a loud noise 1B»1, (205, 3, 2). North liss (XXVI). Now npi? (209, c. 4), ny|n (215/4). Number n. IBDtt (XXVI); to number ISO. Numerous ai (.212); to be num- erous, increase aai, nai. Nurse n. t\'^i'^'q (135, 2; 171, Ois. 5). {vocative-. 73, 1). that...! (203, Rem). Vocabulary.— English AND Hebrew. 47 Oak ift^, nbs, yb^. Oath n»^a», nbs (xxviii). Obey, to yaw. Occupy, to TB"!^ (188). Odour ni"!. Offer (sacrifice), to ai'nj:n, Mbsn (195, Obs. 3). Offering ^3lj5 (25, A, 1); whole burnt - offering nbiy; wave- offering riBISPi; bloody offer- ing naf; non-bloody offering nnStt ; trespass-offering dt»« (XXVII). Oil, ointment )'W0 (1); fresh oil nns'i. Old lUT (XXVn); to be old 1|3T (HI, O&s.); old age D''5pT (143, 2, c), naite (hoary old age) ; oldest, first-born "ilba, )|?T (xxvii), biii.. Olive, olive-tree iT'.f (211). Omer llgS?. On, upon b? (101, 2). One in^ (XXIX). Open, to nriB; opening (en- trance) nnl (2) XXIV. Opposite adv. Ilsa; prcp.nfiyb (108). Oppress, to pT»y, 'j^nb, Tlti; oppression Dian (XXVII). Ordain (appoint) , to pjjn ; ordinance pH (212), rijS'n. Ornament n. Tin. ' ' Other, another nn«, /T». Perhaps ''biN. Perish, to ia« (186). Persecute, to 5|11, IIS. Pervert, to Ej^p. Pestilence 13%, nBatt. Petition n. nbsiB. 43 VoCABULABY.—UNaLISH AND HEBREW. Pierce, to '\^X Pillar niB?, II^S, nastt (XXVIII). Pine away, to: Ni. of 'p'^'Q (XX). Pious Tipn (XXVII). Pit 'ixa, ^% ma (XXIV). Pity n. Di^m ; to pity dnn (VII), ■jSn (205,3,2), b^r(182,(5&s.2). Place n. Dipr, ;?/. ni (XXVi); place appointed l^ia; to place, set )'3t, S'^^ri, Jisn (203, «), r.ijn (203, iV'om (xviii). Play on a stringed instrument, to ]?;?• Plead a cause, to a^l, a^n (Xll). Pleasure I'an (2), TUW (XXV), T^Bn , 'jiS'1 ; to be pleased with nan (XVI). Plough, to Tjj-in. Pluck (tear), to 5|"i'b; to pluck out (hair) "oyq. Plunder (spoil), to TTS, bblD (205, 3, 2). Polluted, unclean Sttti (XXVII); to become polluted iittia (111, Ohs.); to pollute one's self, Ni. = Hithpa. Pool tiD^a , D5X. Poor bn (212), liias, TBT Portion: see part. Possess (take possession), to IB'IJ (188); possession, in- heritance nbm (XXV). Pot, caldron lip. Potter isi (xxm). Pour out (shed), to IfSiB, nnir, pr, (203, &). Praise n. rtfifi; to praise b^n, n'lin (X, XVI). Pray, to b^tefin.; pray! inter J. anT (121, 06«.) ; prayer ir^sn nsnpi. Precede, to: see anticipate. Precious, to be nj;;i (188, III, a). Prepared, to be pbj (Xlii). Preserve, to: see keep. Pretend, to 13?tiri: see also 174, 2. Prevail, to bb"!, ^35. ' T ' - T Prevent, to: see anticipate. Prey n. 5j-iB (1). Price TiriM. Pride nixa, 'j'int (XXVI). Priest in's (XXIII). Prince 'ir, Tiaj (XXVII), ai'ij, ■jn (xxm) ; princess nnte. Prison tT^M, »b3 (1); prisoner Tipii (XXVII). Produce, profit n. r\lX^'2V\. Profane adj.'!\\r[, bbn (xxvil); to profane b>ri. Profit (be useful), to b^^in (x). Property, wealth tb^d-i. Vocabulary.— English and Hebuew. 49 Praphet rim (xxyii); to pro- phesy m. )!iS:—Hithpa.(X\r). Prosper, to nbs (184). Proud naa (XXVII); to be proud, high jTiaa (194, 2). Prove (test, try), to |na. Province nsiTa. Provoke, to Di»Dn, v^-^py), rann. Prudent, to be bitten. Psalm n>nn (67, O&s.l). Pull off, to bifs (xvill); to pull down, destroy Cirj. Punish, to 1^6. Purchase w. nSjJ'B; to purchase ns^ (XVI). Pure, dean linB (XXYI), ijT (212); to be pure Ifia; to purify intl (VII); to purify one's self, — see 173, 3. Purge, to tilS. Purpte nbari. Purpose «. natin'a (xxviii, e)\ to purpose 3i»ri, r\'m (XVI). Pursue, to t]'!']. Put off (clothes), to QT&b; to put on (clothes) tjab. Quarter, fourth part yan , yan. Queen nsb'a (xxv). Quick, quickly Ifitt, rTinw, B^ttS: see also 200. - I ■ Quiet, to be taj:©. Rage, to m"). Raise, to D'^n, D^in (xni). Rampart (of waggons, baggage) ba»a (xxvi). Reach (overtake), to Jifen (xill). Read, to X-i]: (Xiv). Read'y (prepared), to be fs: (XII). Rebel, to nn'a = ^i. (XVI). Rebuke: see rcpi-oof, reprove. Receive, to npb (202, Obs. 2). Recline, to 'pT: (167, 2). Recognise, to 'T'sn (XVlil) ; to be recognised ISSfiH- Recompense «., biaa; to recom- pense baa , DbiB. Red dlS (212, 7\^o^e 3). Redeem, to bsa, STiS (XVI). Refine, to V^it. Refuge noHB (81, l; 93, 3), tsbptt. Refuse, to ixtt (Vli). Reign n. msba (32, 2); to reign, begin' to reign lybtt. Reject, to ret, D!!!;'a, fi{3. Rejoice, to ITcia, WW, teii» (xn), Release «. riM©. Remain (be left), to 1«t»3, iniD (X) ; remainder, remnant, rest nilsw, IS©, niliB. Remember, to ist; remembrance li-iST (XXVI). Remission: see release. D 50 Vocabulary.— English and Hebrew. Remove (transfer), to 3cn (xix); to be removed acj (xx). Rend (tear), to 5"i|3. Repay, to: see recompense. Repeat, to n5« (XVI). Repent, to on? (xix). Reply, to nw (197, Obs. 1). Reproach n. n£"in (XXV), ni3b3; to reproach Dibsn. Reproof nniin (xxv), nn?in; to reprove "lya, TOin (X). Reptile, reptiles tel3> Request n. mBJsa, MbSTB; to re- quest b»«, tj^a. Rescue, to O^r = Z^?., 0^6 = ffi., b-ian (XIX). Rest (be quiet), to ts);©, nis (XII); place of rest nniSH. Rest, remains: sbs (XXVII). Rich iioy (XXVII); to be rich 1l»y; Hithpa. pretend to be rich (174, 2); riches i«y, ?■'?';, bin (211). Ride, to 331. Riddle, enigma riTi^. Right (hand) lia;; (XXVII); to go to the right littTl (189). Right (straight, proper), iiB^; to be right ITB; (189). Righteous p"''ns; to be right- eous p'lS ; righteousness p'li (XXIV), n;5'is (xxviii). Ring (for the finger) n?at3 (XXV); ring for the nostrils of fierce animals X\n, su/f. ''nil- Rise, to Dip (XII); to rise early D'^sion. River in; (XXVII); river Nile I'S";. Road, way ^1^ (XXI V). Rob, to na, bbo (XX; 205, 3, 2). Robe (outer garment) b'':?tt. Rod: see staff. Rock -lis, 5>bD (XXIV), Roll (book)nb3itt; to rollbba(xx). Root TSnte (133, -2); to take root, root one's self, see 175, 1 ; to root out ttJi; (XVlll). Rope nay, ban (xxiv). Round adj. VOS; round, prep. aiaD(seel01, 2): round about, adv. aiaStt (215,4). Ruin n. nain (xxv). Vocabulary.— English and Hebrew. 51 Rule, to btiia, ifsiz; ruler bvo (xxiii), ai'13 (XXVII). Run, to l^iil (XII). Sabbath na©. T - Sackcloth pte (212). Sacrifice n. naf (XXIV); to sacri- fice nat Saddle, to oan (VI). Safe adj. t3ibl» (xxvi); to be safe Db«. Sailor bah (XXIII). Sake of, for the b? (101, 2), ■jytib (108). Salvation »tC^ (xxiv), n»*ilCi, Sanctify, to tJ'lp, tji'ijsri; sanct- uary OTpB, tJ'7p (133, 2). Sand bin. Sandal b?3 (140, b). Satisfied, to beyate; satisfaction nyate (p. is, footnote: XXV). Save, to SitJin (X, vill); Saviour y'^tt'iM. Say, to -IHS (186). Scales (balance) D':3|»'a (140, b). Scatter, to p&ri; to be scatter- ed yts (xii). Scoffer yb. Sea d; ; pi. D'''a\ Search, to icnn, ipn, tJ^a. Season: see time. Seat atiia, _p?. ni (67, 06s. 1; XXVI). Second iJiB, nSTBia. Security fTDa. See nsjn (XVI); seeing (i. e. not blind) n;pjB (xxill); seer nth, n!*n (p. 40, footnote 1). Seed S-iJ (1), 134, 1. Seek, to en'i, ujjja, i]?a, -inti (VII). Seize, to tesrj, Tm (186) Seem (appear), to nKlz (XVI). Sell, to 13H. ' - T Send, to ThtO. Separate, to b'l'ian, T^nsn. Sepulchre lap (1), H'^'iap. Serpent lanj (xxvii). Servant -i?: , lay (xxiv), ni«a (attendant, minister); to serve lay (VI) ; service iTiay. Set (place), to Dii», QiiC (XII), aian , i'^sn (203, a). Seven »ar (XXlX) ; seventh lyiao. Severe nas, niBp (XXVll). Shadow n. bs (212). Shake (be shaken), to "iSD, TBSI, •Blia (XII). Shame n. niBa (XXIV), Mlaba. Shape «. aap (2), isn (XXIV; 137, O&s.); to shape '^s^ Sharp nn, /em. (Tin (212). Shed (pour out), to -yBTB; /?«r^ shedding lySDilJ (127). Dd 52 VoGABVLAHY.— English and Hebrew. Sheep, — a flock ]5?a; single sheep nte (143, d). Shekel b^-a (2). Shepherd MSh (p. 40, footnote 1; 81, &; 93, 3). Shield n. l^tt, su/f. \fa'a. Shoe: see sandal. Shoot (throw), to r\rr\ (XVI), !^1^ !Tnin (xvi, x). Short, to be IS)? (116, Ols. c). Shoulder DD«, C|n| (139, O&s. 1 ; 64, I). Shout n. riil nSI'in; to shout •jsn (205, 3, 2), yinn (xiii). Show (cause to see), to n!«in, nsin (XVII); to show kind- ness to D» npn nto. Shut, to IJD ; to shut up, restrain isy, Sb3 (XIV). Sick nbh (p. 40, footnote 1 ; 81, &) ; to be sick nbn (xvi, vi). Sickle ttjann. Side »bs (co«s<. ybi), nsi": (140, xxviii); at the side of bsk (101, 1); on the other side, or on this side lay (sec a/.vo 108). Sign n. nis c, pi. nink. Silent, to be DOT (205, 3, 2), ffiiinn (VI). Silver flDS (1). Simple-minded, to be nins (xvi) ; simplicity ins (210). Sin n. xtpn (132, Obs. 2) ; nston /., pi. nisan; sinner Stan; to sin KCiri (VI, XIV). Sing, to -110 (XII). Sink, to yau. Sister ninx. Sit down, to y&^ (188). Six OO (XXIX); sixth iffl©. Skin liy. Slain bVn (xxvii). Slander n. nS'^. Slaughter n. nsa, nsaa. Slay, to i-in, m'l, tine; to slay a sacrifice nat. Sleep «. n:© (XXVIII: see also Exerc. 26, Note /); deep sleep iiOTin; to sleep, fail asleep '|B'J (188, III, a); sleep- ing liC'i (126, 6). Slip off, to biCS (XVlII); to cause to slip fi^D. Slow ?rix (XXVII; 139, OT)s. 1). Slumber n. fiMn; to slumber 0^3 (XII). Small -iij>:| , Tci]3 , it:]5 (/"m. nstijj; 212, Note 3), 12. Smash, to la©. Smite, to Wi (202, Ols. 1), ^55 (XVIll), yj;r\, n2!-| (see M«an (XIX). Ten •wy (XXX) ; tenth i-jite? ; to give a tenth, tithe IW (170, 06s. 2), — more rarely ito (109, 06s. c). Tender, to be ^D"! (205, 3, 2). Tent bns (137, 06<-.) ; to move or pitch a tent bSl!* (109, 06s. c). Terrible s-iil; to terrify SiT, terrified yny, bn23, nm (205, 3, 2) ; terror nnn. Testimony rCjV (XXVIll). That dem. pron. S^n , 8''n (84, 3); that conj. 13 (219, Note); that rel. itii* (222 ff.); in order that 'j^f'ab &c. (117, 7 ; 219). Then (at that time) Ti} (117, VocABVLABY.— English and Hebrew. 55 Ohs.); then (in that case, — after a condition) 1 or TX (221). Thence nffir. There (in that place) DT^; there is to;; ; there is not )'^if. ; there- fore 'js-b?, 13b, Thicket ^ao (132, Ois. 4). Thing nan (XXVII); anything nrakB; nothing (see 213, YI. 2). Think, to 3«n, nril. (XVI). Thirsty adj., or v. to be thirsty mm (111, Obs.; xiv). Thither HBC. T T Thorn, thorns fip. Thought n. naWTO (135, O&s. 1), 1:25 (XXIV). Thousand t|b& (1) xxix. Three tjbtj (xxix); third iffiib©; divide into three wbtt (170, O&s. 2): thrice (see 154, 6). Thresh corn by treading, to TB!i'n (Xll) ; threshing-floor inh" (XXIV; 67, Obs. 1). Threshold 5ip, SM;f. ^60 (212). Throne SS3 (XXIII). Through (by means of) T3 (lit. by the hand of). Throw, to ifbcn, nnin (x, xvi); to throw down, cast down b'.sn (XVIII). Thrust through, to njs'^ ; to thrust out nnj = ffi. ni^n (xvm). Thus nis, nD3. Till (cultivate), to lay. Till, until prep, and conj. *T? (101, 2; 219). Time ny (212); time repeated DSS (154, 6); appointed time Timid, afraid Tin (XXVII). Tired (wearied), to be sa'^^, i:)!;^ (188, III, a). Tithe, to: see under ten. To -bs (101, 2), b (102 ff.). Together in^ (215, 1), l^n^, ln»3 (215, 4). Toil (lab our) n.asy, bB»(XXVll); to toil yj; (188, III. a). Tongs: see snuffers. Tongue licb c, pi. ni (xxvil). Tossed, to be lyo. Totter, to WIQ (xii). Touch, to ya; (202, o&s. i). Towards "bx (101, 2): see also 209, c. Tower b'n^tt (143, 4). Transfer, to: see under aao «« Vocabulary I. Transgress, to yOB; trans- gression y«s (2) XXIV. Tread, trample with the foot if-i'i, &m, D^a, w (XII). Tree l^y. Tremble, to iy\, yan, tiyn, bna?, py, bin (xii). 56 VOCASXTLABY. — ENGLISH AND HEBREW. Trespass-offering dm (XXVII). Tribe 1311? (XXIV). Tribute DB (212). Troop nilf Trouble n. tTllt, btt? (XXVU), i?» (210); to be in trouble 'TIS (205, 3, 2). Truly DDttS, bss, I'BS. Trumpet -iBiT»,;j?.ni (67, ObsA), Trust, to nua, ymr^ (vi), norj (VI, XVI); trusty )mi. Truth nrx (212, i\'o?e 2). Try (test), to ^na. Tumult nyiin. Tunic nans ««(i^ nsris (xxv). Turn (change), to JfSn (VI); to turn aside IID (191, 8, 06s.), nM (see Vocabulary I) ; to turn one's self njB (XVI), 330 (XX). Turtle-dove lin. Twilight qiBi (2). Two oritO (XXIX); twenty d^lfey (149, a) ; twice (see 154, &). Uncircumcised bny (xxvil). Unclean adj., and v. to be un- clean sau (111, Obs.). Under ;)rep. nnn (101, 3; see 108, O&s). Understand, to I^S (XH), bisten; understanding «. ns^S. Ungodly »«■!, S|5n (XXVll). Unleavened cake 'r\^•n (XXVIII). Unless: see 220. Upper li-ib?. Upright (morally) Itji^, 13, dlj. Upwards nisa (209, c). Usury (interest) tT'S'lF!. Valley bn? (XXIV), pay, s>;a (35, Obs.), s^a. Vainly, in vain dstl (215, 4); vanity ban (XXIV); something vain SIIB (35, 06s.). Vengeance d]:i (xxvii), naijs (XXVIII); to take vengeance dn? (XIX), d;?? (xiv). Verily: see truly. Very, adv. nktt. Vessel lbs (144). Village isn (XXV)!). Vine IBS (1); unpruned vine TiTJ; vineyard d":! (1) XXIV. Virgin nbin3. Vision nxia, nina (81, b; 93, 3), rm(xxvi).' Visit, to Tj;!. Voice bip, i?/. tTi (67, 06s. 1). Vow n. T73 (XXIV) ; to vow ins (xvill): see 114, 06s. 2. Wait (expect), to ni]; (XVI). Walk, to Sfbn, ^rbnrn (c/". Fr. se promener). VOOABULABY. — ENGLISH AND HeBBEW. bl Wall (of a city) nti'in; wall (of a vineyard; or a dividing wall) n'^a; to make a wall "Tia. Want (lack), to ion (182, Ohs. 2). War n. n'anb'a (135, Ohs. 1 ; XXVlll); warrior liaa {see also soldier). Warm, to be Dten (205, 3, 2). Wash (the body), to ■pm; to wash (clothes) 033 (169, 2). Waste, desolate adj. 3")n; to lay waste Tio (x^); to be laid waste a'ln, DUB (205, 3, 2). Watch (be sleepless), to 'tjjtB; to watch (keep, guard) IB©, -is; (XVIII). Water n''a (68, Obs. 2; 144)., Way tfi^j (1) c, niS (XXIV) fs poeUc, Weak bn (212), n^n (13a, IV). Wealth ©13-1, 'iin,.b':n. Weapon 1^3 (144). Weary, to be ys'i (188, III. a); to weary (cans.) ?''5in (X, VIII). Week yii©, jt?;. ni. Weigh, to b;?«; weight bUTBtt. Well n. isa fern, pi. M". West lin», Di; westward na^ (209, c); on the west D^tt (p. 205, footnote 1). What? na (88); what («. «. that which &c.), — see 205. Wheat rsm (143, 3). When? ina; when 13 (117, 5), -itixs, 3 (124). Where? i^, tl^S (XXX); where- fore? {see why?). Whip n. Bio. Whirhvind lyb, rr^yo, nsw. White 'jab (xxvil) ; to be white 'i'^Sbn (172, 3). Whither? njk (209, c). Who? itt (87); who, which {rel.) ^m (223). Whole bs, ns]3 (139, IV). Whoredom Di:W (143, 2. a). Why? yi'^a, niab, ni£5 (p. 72, footnote 1), rra (87, 2), na-b?. Wicked ytjl; wickedness nS"i, 5>©T (XXIV), rmn, (xxv) ; to act wickedly yen , 5>nn (XXI). Widow nSttbi? (XXVIII); widow- hood D'^ri^S'abs (143, 2, a); widow of a brother nas"] (XXV). Wield-: see handle. Wife r\m (144). Wild beast n*n. Wilderness IS'ltt (XXVI). Willing adj. 31't; to be willing n3s (186), b>in (X), 200, c. Wind nil c, pi. nimi ; see «?so whirlwiml. 58 VodABVLAEY. — ENGLISH AND HEBREW. Wine Y^^ (211); new wine, must Wing E153 (140, a), nns (XXIV). Wipe out, to t^rj)2 (XVI). Wise DDn (XXVII); wisdom nttpn (p. 15, footnote; XXV); to be wise DDn (VI). With D? (104), r» (XXX) ; within, inside IT^SC (p. 205, footnote 1); without, outside pnia. Withhold, to yju. Witness n. TJ. Woe I lin. AVoman niEK (144). Womb i^a (2), urn (i) xxiv. Wonderful sbs; ; to act wonder- fully,— see 200, a. Wood (timber) fS; wood (a forest) -\y^ (XXIV) ; thick wood ©•in. Wool itti (1) XXIV. Word -il'n (XXVII), n>tt (« poetic term), pi. u'i'a, ii^r (67, Obs. 1 ; 141, Obs.). Work ntoyia, byg (137, Obs.), nbSB; appointed work, busi- ness nssbtt (co«s<. riDSbtt, 135, Obs. 1); to work W. Worn out nba (139, IV; p. 40, footnote 1). World (as inhabited) bsn. Worship, to n'^nncn (173, 3; XVII). Wound 71. nsio; to wound b>n. Wrath nian (XXVIII), D?f (XXIV), JTia? (XXV), r,t? (212, Note 2). Wretched W (XXVll). "Vfrite, to nriS. Year njTC (XXVIII; 143, 4; Exer- cise 26, Note /). Yet (still), ny (106). Yoke (of bondage) Vn (212); yoke (a pair) -flsk (2) XXIV. Young ws (xxvil), p]3, la;; (;?/. D''3U|? ; 212, Note 3); young man -|?3 (xxiv), i!ina. Youth (period of life) Di"in3, niina, Diny?, D^'aibs (143, 2, 6)." Zeal ns2p; to be zealous sap (XIV)!'